Edition

5.0
Date: April 2009

UltraCart Support Group

UltraCart Merchant ULTRACART SUPPORT GROUP

Reference
UltraCart: Merchant Manual
Reference Manual

Copyright © 1998-2009 BPS Info Solutions, Inc.

support@ultracart.com
ii
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to UltraCart................................................................................................. 1
What this Book Covers ................................................................................................... 1
Conventions in this Book................................................................................................ 1
Navigating to a Specific Page ..................................................................................... 1
Obtaining Support........................................................................................................... 1
2. Signup with UltraCart ..................................................................................................... 2
Requirements .................................................................................................................. 2
Web Browser .............................................................................................................. 2
Adobe Acrobat ............................................................................................................ 2
Starting the Signup Process ............................................................................................ 3
Setup Wizard............................................................................................................... 3
Setup Confirmation..................................................................................................... 4
Logging in For the First Time......................................................................................... 6
Navigating the UltraCart System .................................................................................... 8
Support Menu.............................................................................................................. 8
Open Support Case ..................................................................................................... 9
Suggested Solutions (support case) .................................................................... 9
Support Portal ....................................................................................................... 10
Online Manual ...................................................................................................... 10
Order Manual ........................................................................................................ 11
Contact Us............................................................................................................. 11
Live Chat............................................................................................................... 11
Main Menu................................................................................................................ 12
UltraCart Dashboard ................................................................................................. 12
Widgets ................................................................................................................. 12
Add a Dashboard Widget.................................................................................. 13
Relocate a Dashboard Widget........................................................................... 13
Remove a Dashboard Widget ........................................................................... 13
Quick Jump link................................................................................................ 14
Find an Order Preferences Icon ........................................................................ 14
UltraCart News ..................................................................................................... 15
Preferences............................................................................................................ 15
3. UltraCart Configuration ................................................................................................ 16
General (Configuration)................................................................................................ 18
Merchant Profile ....................................................................................................... 18
Regional Settings ...................................................................................................... 19
Service Plan .............................................................................................................. 19
Basic Account ....................................................................................................... 19
Billing Credit Card................................................................................................ 19
Billing Activity ..................................................................................................... 20
Other Options........................................................................................................ 20
Close Account................................................................................................... 21
Reopen Account................................................................................................ 21
Users ......................................................................................................................... 21
Suggested Merchant User Configuration.............................................................. 21
i
 User Configuration screen .................................................................................... 23
Contact Information .......................................................................................... 24
New Password................................................................................................... 24
New FTP Password........................................................................................... 25
UltraSecure One Time Password Token:.......................................................... 26
Permissions and Email Notifications ................................................................ 27
Edit an Existing User ............................................................................................ 28
Checkout ....................................................................................................................... 29
Abandon Interval ...................................................................................................... 29
Advertising Sources .................................................................................................. 29
Tracking Mechanism ............................................................................................ 30
Selectable Sources ................................................................................................ 30
Adding a New Source ........................................................................................... 30
Editing Selectable Sources.................................................................................... 32
Assigning Aliases.................................................................................................. 32
Advertising Sources Report .................................................................................. 33
Allowed Countries .................................................................................................... 34
buySAFE................................................................................................................... 35
Sign up at buySAFE.............................................................................................. 35
Configuring buySAFE at UltraCart ...................................................................... 36
Adding the buySAFE Seal to your Website ......................................................... 36
Checkout Terms ........................................................................................................ 36
Contact Information .................................................................................................. 37
Customer Profiles...................................................................................................... 38
Activate Customer Profiles ................................................................................... 38
Wholesale Signup ................................................................................................. 39
Wholesale Related Links for Web Site................................................................. 39
Wholesale Signup Link..................................................................................... 40
Wholesale Login Link....................................................................................... 41
Wholesale Logout Link..................................................................................... 41
Customer Service ...................................................................................................... 41
Digital Delivery ........................................................................................................ 42
Download Attempts .............................................................................................. 42
Link Expiration ..................................................................................................... 42
PayPal Fast Checkout ........................................................................................... 42
Accept all payment methods................................................................................. 42
Fraud Prevention....................................................................................................... 42
Free Promotional Item .............................................................................................. 43
Gift Giving ................................................................................................................ 44
Allow gift giving................................................................................................... 44
Gift Charge (Base Fee) ......................................................................................... 44
Gift Charge (Per Item Fee) ................................................................................... 45
Wrapping Paper ........................................................................................................ 45
Adding a Wrapping Paper..................................................................................... 45
Setting the Cost ..................................................................................................... 46
Changing a Wrapping Paper ................................................................................. 47
Deleting a Wrapping Paper............................................................................... 47
Checkout Process .................................................................................................. 47

ii
 Packing Slips (gift giving) .................................................................................... 48
Minimum Amount .................................................................................................... 49
Multi Currency.......................................................................................................... 49
Order ID Scheme ...................................................................................................... 50
Payments ................................................................................................................... 52
Methods (tab) ........................................................................................................ 53
PayPal ............................................................................................................... 53
COD .................................................................................................................. 54
Credit Cards ...................................................................................................... 55
Google Checkout .............................................................................................. 56
Paper Checks - Money Orders - Electronic Checks.......................................... 59
Purchase Orders ................................................................................................ 60
Saf-T-Pay .......................................................................................................... 61
Wire Transfer .................................................................................................... 61
Transaction Gateways (tab) .................................................................................. 62
Purpose of Transaction Gateways..................................................................... 62
Supported Gateways ......................................................................................... 63
Reasons to Signup with a Gateway................................................................... 63
Limitations of Support ...................................................................................... 63
Unsupported Gateways ..................................................................................... 63
Transaction Gateway Authorization Model.......................................................... 64
UltraCart Test Gateway ........................................................................................ 65
Options (tab) ......................................................................................................... 66
Charge During Checkout .................................................................................. 66
Charge During Checkout - NO ......................................................................... 67
Accounts Receivable Transaction Review........................................................ 67
Charge During Checkout - YES ....................................................................... 68
Restrictions (tab)................................................................................................... 69
Tests (tab).............................................................................................................. 70
Create Payment Test ......................................................................................... 71
Filters (tab)............................................................................................................ 72
Edit or Delete a Filter........................................................................................ 73
Rotating Transaction Gateway.............................................................................. 73
Related Items ............................................................................................................ 74
Return Policy ............................................................................................................ 74
Sales Tax................................................................................................................... 75
Tax Rates .............................................................................................................. 76
Set-up ................................................................................................................ 76
Country ............................................................................................................. 76
State................................................................................................................... 78
County............................................................................................................... 79
City and Postal Codes ....................................................................................... 80
Tools ..................................................................................................................... 80
Import Sales Tax Clearinghouse feed file......................................................... 81
Search Tool ............................................................................................................... 84
Search Configuration ............................................................................................ 84
Search Result Template ........................................................................................ 85
Shipping .................................................................................................................... 86

iii
 Distribution Centers Tab........................................................................................... 86
Distribution Center................................................................................................ 87
Shipment Cut-off Times ....................................................................................... 88
Transmission Mechanism ..................................................................................... 88
Transmission Schedule ......................................................................................... 90
FTP Account ......................................................................................................... 91
Preferences for Shipments to Specific Locations ................................................. 91
Order Status Codes ............................................................................................... 92
Checkout Options Tab .............................................................................................. 93
Methods Tab ............................................................................................................. 97
Adding Shipping Methods .................................................................................... 97
Shipping Methods (Configuration) ....................................................................... 98
Delete Shipping Method ....................................................................................... 98
Configure Shipping Details................................................................................... 99
Cost Tab ............................................................................................................ 99
Restrictions (tab)............................................................................................. 100
Insurance Tab.................................................................................................. 102
Estimated Delivery Tab .................................................................................. 103
Handling Charge Tab...................................................................................... 104
Packages Tab .................................................................................................. 106
Other Tab ........................................................................................................ 107
Default Shipping Method.................................................................................... 109
Packages Tab .......................................................................................................... 109
New Package....................................................................................................... 110
Delete Package.................................................................................................... 112
Edit Package........................................................................................................ 112
Shipper Specific Options ........................................................................................ 112
Destination Restrictions .......................................................................................... 114
Ship Date - Delivery Date....................................................................................... 116
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 116
Estimated Delivery.......................................................................................... 116
Checkout Options............................................................................................ 117
Shipment Cut-off Times ................................................................................. 117
Order Process .................................................................................................. 118
Shipping Department Views ........................................................................... 120
Single Page Checkout ............................................................................................. 121
Shopping Cart Look & Feel Configuration ................................................................ 122
Checkout Text......................................................................................................... 122
Dynamic Pricing ..................................................................................................... 123
Real Time Preview and Show Background ........................................................ 126
Screen Branding...................................................................................................... 128
Screen Branding Themes ........................................................................................ 129
Theme Editor ...................................................................................................... 130
Theme Tab .......................................................................................................... 130
Graphics Library Tab.......................................................................................... 130
View Button .................................................................................................... 132
Link Button ..................................................................................................... 132
Download Image............................................................................................. 133

iv
 Delete Button .................................................................................................. 133
Screens Tab......................................................................................................... 133
Editing Brandable Screens.................................................................................. 135
Which Editor? ..................................................................................................... 135
How Branding Works ......................................................................................... 135
Rules for Html Pages .......................................................................................... 136
Techniques for Branding Design ........................................................................ 136
Applying Branding to other screens ................................................................... 137
Save and Preview............................................................................................ 137
Adding Additional Themes..................................................................................... 137
Setting the Default Theme .................................................................................. 137
Deleting a Theme................................................................................................ 138
Using Secondary Screen Branding Theme ......................................................... 138
Passive Branding..................................................................................................... 138
Back Office ................................................................................................................. 139
Amazon Turk .......................................................................................................... 139
aMember Integration............................................................................................... 140
About aMember .................................................................................................. 140
Setting up aMember............................................................................................ 140
Assigning aMember items to UltraCart items .................................................... 141
Auto Order Processing............................................................................................ 142
General................................................................................................................ 142
Notifications........................................................................................................ 142
Retry Settings...................................................................................................... 143
Payment Settings................................................................................................. 143
Email Addresses...................................................................................................... 144
Exporting Orders..................................................................................................... 145
Export Mapping .................................................................................................. 145
Naming the Mapping .......................................................................................... 146
Export File Formats ............................................................................................ 147
Biz Tracker™.................................................................................................. 147
XML DTD or XML W3C Schema? ............................................................... 147
Alternative Mime Type....................................................................................... 147
Default Export Settings....................................................................................... 147
Spreadsheet Column Configuration (mapping) .................................................. 148
Save and/or Preview ........................................................................................... 150
Integration Programming Techniques................................................................. 150
Export (from) Locations ................................................................................. 150
Accounts Receivable / Shipping Department ................................................. 151
Order Management ......................................................................................... 151
Froogle Integration.................................................................................................. 152
Automatic Data Feed to Froogle......................................................................... 152
What does Froogle support cost?........................................................................ 153
Internet Explorer ..................................................................................................... 154
Old Order Handling ................................................................................................ 155
Order Retention....................................................................................................... 155
Printable Documents............................................................................................... 156
Address Labels.................................................................................................... 156

v
 Custom Label Format ......................................................................................... 156
Packing Slips....................................................................................................... 157
QuickBooks Terms and Lists.................................................................................. 158
Payment Terms ................................................................................................... 159
Sales Reps ........................................................................................................... 160
QuickBooks™ Classes........................................................................................ 160
Receipt .................................................................................................................... 161
Receipt Tags........................................................................................................ 161
Tag Definitions ............................................................................................... 162
Text ..................................................................................................................... 163
Save & Preview................................................................................................... 163
Report Delivery....................................................................................................... 164
Salesforce.com ........................................................................................................ 165
Introduction & Prerequisites ........................................................................... 165
Retrieving your Security Token...................................................................... 165
Configuring UltraCart..................................................................................... 166
Mapping UltraCart fields to Salesforce.com fields......................................... 168
Configuring Salesforce.com Outbound Messages.......................................... 170
Configuring Salesforce.com Workflow Rules................................................ 172
Salesforce.com Data Management.................................................................. 175
Helpful Hints................................................................................................... 178
Shipment Notification............................................................................................. 180
UltraBooks .............................................................................................................. 181
XML Postback ........................................................................................................ 181
XML Post Back Script ........................................................................................ 182
Configure the Post Back functionality................................................................ 182
XML Schema ...................................................................................................... 183
Channel Partners ......................................................................................................... 183
Ignite Media Solutions............................................................................................ 183
Amazon Seller Central............................................................................................ 184
Buy.com .................................................................................................................. 185
OverStock.com........................................................................................................ 186
SkyMall................................................................................................................... 187
SmartBargains......................................................................................................... 188
Other Configuration .................................................................................................... 189
Dayspring Web Hosting.......................................................................................... 189
Reference Manual Purchase.................................................................................... 189
UltraSecure OTP Tokens ........................................................................................ 190
Cost ..................................................................................................................... 190
Recommended Usage.......................................................................................... 190
Ordering .............................................................................................................. 190
Custom SSL ............................................................................................................ 191
4. Order Management ..................................................................................................... 194
Departments ................................................................................................................ 195
Accounts Receivable................................................................................................... 195
Viewing Order Details ............................................................................................ 195
Processing Orders ................................................................................................... 195
Refresh Button .................................................................................................... 196

vi
 Authorize Orders – Non Gateway Merchants..................................................... 196
Authorize Orders – Gateway Merchants............................................................. 196
Batch Authorize Review Screen ......................................................................... 197
Export Orders.......................................................................................................... 198
Print Orders............................................................................................................. 199
Print Drafts.............................................................................................................. 199
Print Packing Slip ................................................................................................... 200
Reject ...................................................................................................................... 200
Change View........................................................................................................... 200
Ship Date View ................................................................................................... 200
Order Editing (accounts receivable) ....................................................................... 201
Order Section ...................................................................................................... 201
Edit Customer, Edit Items and Copy Order Buttons....................................... 201
Print PDF Button............................................................................................. 201
Print HTML .................................................................................................... 201
Print Draft (eCheck only)................................................................................ 201
Credit Card Order – Gateway Merchant............................................................. 201
Check Order ........................................................................................................ 202
PayPal Order ....................................................................................................... 203
Auto Orders............................................................................................................. 204
Auto Order Search .............................................................................................. 205
Cancel Auto Orders............................................................................................. 206
Edit Auto Orders ................................................................................................. 206
Settings............................................................................................................ 207
Credit Card Information.................................................................................. 207
Items................................................................................................................ 207
Order History .................................................................................................. 208
Pre-Orders ............................................................................................................... 209
Refresh Button .................................................................................................... 209
Print Orders Button ............................................................................................. 209
Releasable indicator ........................................................................................ 209
Release Button .................................................................................................... 209
Individual Pre-Order Screen ................................................................................... 209
Shipping Department .................................................................................................. 211
Self Serviced Distribution Center ............................................................................... 211
Order Editing (shipping) ......................................................................................... 212
Order Section .......................................................................................................... 213
Edit Customer Button ............................................................................................. 213
Billing Tab .......................................................................................................... 213
Shipping Tab....................................................................................................... 214
Gift Tab............................................................................................................... 215
Tax Tab ............................................................................................................... 216
Other Tab ............................................................................................................ 216
Edit Items Button .................................................................................................... 217
Item Editor Screen (Layout) ............................................................................... 218
Modifying an Item .............................................................................................. 218
Adding a New Item............................................................................................. 218
Item ID Search .................................................................................................... 218

vii
 Copy Order.......................................................................................................... 219
Print Packing Slip ............................................................................................... 220
Print HTML ........................................................................................................ 220
Shipment Section .................................................................................................... 221
Merchants Comments ............................................................................................. 221
Shipping Department Tool Bar............................................................................... 221
Customizing the Tool Bar................................................................................... 222
Refresh Button .................................................................................................... 222
Change View Button........................................................................................... 223
Ship Date View ............................................................................................... 223
Change Status Button.......................................................................................... 223
Mark Shipped...................................................................................................... 224
Print Address Labels ........................................................................................... 225
Print Packing Slips.............................................................................................. 225
Print Pick List ..................................................................................................... 226
Export Orders...................................................................................................... 226
Export UPS WorldShip....................................................................................... 226
Import UPS WorldShip....................................................................................... 226
Export Endicia Dazzle ........................................................................................ 226
Exporting UltraCart Orders............................................................................. 227
Importing to Dazzle ........................................................................................ 228
Import Endicia Dazzle ........................................................................................ 230
Export MOM....................................................................................................... 230
Fulfillment Provider view ........................................................................................... 231
Shipping Status Columns........................................................................................ 231
Queued for Transmission.................................................................................... 231
Pending Immediate Transmission....................................................................... 231
Unacknowledged Shipments............................................................................... 231
Recently Acknowledged Shipments. .................................................................. 231
Distribution Center buttons..................................................................................... 232
Refresh ................................................................................................................ 232
Remove from Queue ........................................................................................... 232
Retransmit ........................................................................................................... 232
Log ...................................................................................................................... 232
Send Queued ....................................................................................................... 232
Mark Shipped...................................................................................................... 232
Tools ........................................................................................................................... 233
Back End Order Entry (BEOE)............................................................................... 233
Introduction......................................................................................................... 233
Installation and Setup.......................................................................................... 233
Installation....................................................................................................... 233
Setup ............................................................................................................... 234
Launching BEOE ................................................................................................ 234
Backfill QuickBooks™ Codes................................................................................ 236
Customer Profile Management ............................................................................... 237
Searching for a Customer Profile........................................................................ 237
Adding a New Customer Profile......................................................................... 237
Edit or Delete Customer Profile.......................................................................... 239

viii
 Export Orders.......................................................................................................... 240
Export Mapping ...................................................................................................... 241
Order Location ........................................................................................................ 241
Date ......................................................................................................................... 241
Date Range.............................................................................................................. 241
Review Orders ........................................................................................................ 242
Entering Search Criteria...................................................................................... 242
Viewing Orders................................................................................................... 243
5. PayPal ......................................................................................................................... 245
Integration with PayPal............................................................................................... 245
PayPal Account Types ............................................................................................ 245
Sign up for PayPal (new PayPal customer) ............................................................ 246
Upgrade (existing PayPal Personal Account holders) ........................................ 247
PayPal Business Solutions ...................................................................................... 247
PayPal Website Payments Standard.................................................................... 248
Express Checkout................................................................................................ 248
PayPal Website Payments Pro (USA only) ........................................................ 249
Setting up your Payment Solution ...................................................................... 250
API Access.......................................................................................................... 251
Configuring PayPal as a Payment method.............................................................. 255
PayPal Business Email........................................................................................ 255
QuickBooks™ Codes.......................................................................................... 255
Hold Order in Accounts Receivable ................................................................... 255
PayPal Integration Method ................................................................................. 256
PayPal Express Checkout ................................................................................... 256
Pay Pal Website Payments Pro (Express Checkout and Direct Payments) ........ 257
Website Payments Standard (Instant Payment Notification (IPN)).................... 258
Specifying the IPN Notification URL................................................................. 258
PayPal Customer Telephone Number..................................................................... 260
Dangling PayPal Orders.......................................................................................... 260
Merchants Operating Multiple UltraCart Accounts................................................ 261
6. Item Management ....................................................................................................... 262
Introduction................................................................................................................. 262
Item Configuration...................................................................................................... 262
Digital Library ........................................................................................................ 262
Items........................................................................................................................ 263
Folders................................................................................................................. 263
New Folder...................................................................................................... 264
Access a Folder ............................................................................................... 264
Create Sub Folders.......................................................................................... 264
Editing Folders................................................................................................ 265
Deleting Folders.............................................................................................. 265
Moving Folders............................................................................................... 266
Items List ............................................................................................................ 267
New Item......................................................................................................... 268
Item Listing..................................................................................................... 268
Moving Items .................................................................................................. 269
Deleting Items................................................................................................. 270

ix
 Copying Items................................................................................................. 270
Item Search ..................................................................................................... 271
Quick Jump ..................................................................................................... 272
Add Store Wide Option .................................................................................. 273
Editing Items................................................................................................... 273
Item Links and forms ...................................................................................... 273
Buy Link ......................................................................................................... 274
Elements of a Buy Link .................................................................................. 274
Buy Link HTML snippet ................................................................................ 275
Buy Form ........................................................................................................ 275
Embedding a Dynamic Price Link.................................................................. 276
Inventory History Link ................................................................................... 277
Merchants Using Frames ................................................................................ 278
Add Store Wide Option ...................................................................................... 278
Item Editor .............................................................................................................. 280
Item Tab .............................................................................................................. 280
Item ID ............................................................................................................ 280
Description...................................................................................................... 280
Extended Description...................................................................................... 281
Manufacturer Name ........................................................................................ 281
Manufacturer SKU.......................................................................................... 281
Internal Memo................................................................................................. 281
URL to View Product ..................................................................................... 281
Image URL...................................................................................................... 281
Barcode ........................................................................................................... 281
UNSPSC ......................................................................................................... 281
Cost ................................................................................................................. 281
Weight............................................................................................................. 282
Dimensions (L x W x H)................................................................................. 282
Minimum Quantity.......................................................................................... 282
Maximum Quantity......................................................................................... 282
Multiple of Quantity ....................................................................................... 282
MSRP.............................................................................................................. 282
MAP................................................................................................................ 282
Taxable............................................................................................................ 282
Inactive............................................................................................................ 282
Gift Certificate ................................................................................................ 283
Special Product Type ...................................................................................... 283
Mix and Match Group..................................................................................... 283
QuickBooks™ Code ....................................................................................... 283
COGS.............................................................................................................. 283
No Realtime Charge........................................................................................ 283
Multimedia Tab................................................................................................... 283
Tools – Multimedia Gallery Script Generator ................................................ 284
Upload Multimedia ......................................................................................... 284
Import Multimedia .......................................................................................... 285
Multimedia Upload Failure............................................................................. 285
View Multimedia File ..................................................................................... 285

x
 Edit Multimedia File ....................................................................................... 286
Delete Multimedia File ................................................................................... 286
Options Tab......................................................................................................... 286
Add Option...................................................................................................... 287
Description (fill-in) ......................................................................................... 288
Checkout Settings (check box) ....................................................................... 288
Type (radio button) ......................................................................................... 289
Drop Down Value List.................................................................................... 290
Radio Button Value List ................................................................................. 292
Associating Digital Content............................................................................ 293
Options Listing................................................................................................ 294
Remove Item Option....................................................................................... 295
Edit Item Option ............................................................................................. 295
Digital Delivery Tab ........................................................................................... 296
Discounts/Pricing Tiers Tab ............................................................................... 296
Discounts......................................................................................................... 296
Pricing Tiers.................................................................................................... 296
Volume Limits ................................................................................................ 297
Related Items Tab ............................................................................................... 298
Froogle Tab......................................................................................................... 298
Auto Order Tab ................................................................................................... 301
Customer Selectable Auto Order .................................................................... 302
Automatic Auto Order .................................................................................... 304
Auto Order Confirmation Email ..................................................................... 308
Converting a regular Order to Auto Order...................................................... 309
Shipping Tab....................................................................................................... 310
Shipping Options ............................................................................................ 310
Customs Information ...................................................................................... 311
Inventory Control and Distribution................................................................. 311
Shipping Method Specific Options................................................................. 314
Shipping Destination Markups ....................................................................... 314
Shipping Destination Restrictions................................................................... 315
Ship on Day of Week Restrictions.................................................................. 317
Package Requirements .................................................................................... 317
Catalog Tab......................................................................................................... 318
Attributes......................................................................................................... 318
Variations........................................................................................................ 318
Exploded Diagrams......................................................................................... 322
Other tab (Item Editor)........................................................................................ 332
Payment Method Restrictions ......................................................................... 332
Reporting......................................................................................................... 333
Tax Exemptions .............................................................................................. 333
Terms .............................................................................................................. 334
Item Kitting......................................................................................................... 335
New Kit........................................................................................................... 335
Kit Components (tab)...................................................................................... 336
Kit Shipping (tab) ........................................................................................... 337
Mix and Match Groups (discounts) ........................................................................ 338

xi
 Creating a Mix and Match Group ....................................................................... 338
Mix & Match Optional Rules (2)........................................................................ 339
Edit a Mix and Match Group .............................................................................. 340
Applying Mix and Match Group to Store Items ................................................. 340
Mix and Match Groups for Pricing Tier Members ............................................. 341
Discounts at Checkout ........................................................................................ 342
Perishable Classes................................................................................................... 343
Configuring Perishable Classes .......................................................................... 343
Pricing Tiers............................................................................................................ 345
Pricing Tier Fields............................................................................................... 346
Delete Pricing Tier.............................................................................................. 348
Pricing Tier Editor .............................................................................................. 348
Store Wide Item Options ........................................................................................ 348
Creating............................................................................................................... 348
Associating With Items....................................................................................... 350
Deleting............................................................................................................... 351
Upsell After................................................................................................................. 352
What type of items should I Upsell?....................................................................... 353
Priority Processing .............................................................................................. 353
How does the Upsell system work? ........................................................................ 353
Upsell After Configuration ..................................................................................... 353
Upsell Offer ............................................................................................................ 354
Upsell Offer Graphic Link .................................................................................. 356
Preview an Upsell Offer...................................................................................... 356
Edit an Upsell Offer ............................................................................................ 356
Delete an Upsell Offer ........................................................................................ 356
Upsell Paths ............................................................................................................ 356
Traffic Percentage............................................................................................... 356
Steps.................................................................................................................... 357
New Path............................................................................................................. 357
Tools ........................................................................................................................... 359
Amazon Seller Central Import ................................................................................ 359
Amazon Seller Central Manual Upload.................................................................. 360
Barcode Generator .................................................................................................. 360
Batch Item Export ................................................................................................... 362
Selecting Export Data ......................................................................................... 363
Exporting Child Folders...................................................................................... 363
Selecting Export Format ..................................................................................... 363
Batch Item Import ................................................................................................... 364
Field Order (mapping) ........................................................................................ 364
Creating your import file .................................................................................... 364
Importing your file.............................................................................................. 364
Step 1: File Import .......................................................................................... 364
Step 2: Map Fields .......................................................................................... 366
Import Field Order .......................................................................................... 366
Special Category Fields .................................................................................. 367
Standard Fields................................................................................................ 367
Step 3: Import Source Name (Optional) ......................................................... 369

xii
 Step 4: Options................................................................................................ 369
Batch Item Updates................................................................................................. 372
Searching for items to update ............................................................................. 372
Search Results..................................................................................................... 373
Selecting Update Fields ...................................................................................... 374
Completing the Update ....................................................................................... 375
Inventory Adjustment ............................................................................................. 375
Inventory Transfer .................................................................................................. 376
Setting the Transfer Quantity.............................................................................. 377
Edit an existing Inventory Transfer .................................................................... 379
Inventory Shipped............................................................................................... 379
View/Edit a Transfer........................................................................................... 380
Shipment Arrived................................................................................................ 380
Delete an existing Inventory Transfer................................................................. 382
Item Cleanup Utility ............................................................................................... 382
Defining the view (items) ................................................................................... 382
Item Cleanup Utility Editor ................................................................................ 384
Price Update Tool ................................................................................................... 385
7. Digital Delivery .......................................................................................................... 386
Introduction................................................................................................................. 386
Digital Library ............................................................................................................ 386
Upload files............................................................................................................. 387
Upload a new file collection ................................................................................... 387
Digital Library List ................................................................................................. 388
Download............................................................................................................ 388
Edit Button .......................................................................................................... 389
Replace File .................................................................................................... 389
Change Description......................................................................................... 389
Delete Link.......................................................................................................... 390
PDF Properties Button ........................................................................................ 390
Item Association (to digital content)........................................................................... 391
Files......................................................................................................................... 391
Activation Codes..................................................................................................... 392
Digital Purchases ........................................................................................................ 393
Types of Digital Content............................................................................................. 393
8. UPS WorldShip Integration ........................................................................................ 394
Introduction................................................................................................................. 394
Preparing to Export from UltraCart ............................................................................ 394
Configuring an Import Map ........................................................................................ 394
Importing an UltraCart Shipping Export File ............................................................. 402
Configuring an Export Map ........................................................................................ 405
Importing a UPS WorldShip Export File.................................................................... 410
9. Marketing.................................................................................................................... 413
Introduction................................................................................................................. 413
Marketing.................................................................................................................... 414
Coupons .................................................................................................................. 414
Creating new coupons......................................................................................... 415
Editing an existing coupon.................................................................................. 418

xiii
 Copy an existing coupon..................................................................................... 418
One Time Codes ................................................................................................. 418
Usage Report....................................................................................................... 418
Deleting an existing coupon................................................................................ 419
Email Lists .............................................................................................................. 420
Rules Based List ................................................................................................. 420
Rules Descriptions .......................................................................................... 420
Manual Entry List ............................................................................................... 421
Imported Email List ............................................................................................ 421
Creating a New Email List...................................................................................... 421
Create Rules Based List ...................................................................................... 422
Item Based Rule.............................................................................................. 424
Temporal Based Rule...................................................................................... 424
Order Amount Based Rule.............................................................................. 425
Geographic Based Rule................................................................................... 425
Mileage Based Rule ........................................................................................ 426
Pricing Tier Based Rule .................................................................................. 426
Marketing Email Based Rule .......................................................................... 427
Creating Additional Rules................................................................................... 427
Edit a Rule........................................................................................................... 428
Delete a Rule....................................................................................................... 428
Create Manual Entry List........................................................................................ 428
Create an Imported E-mail list................................................................................ 431
Managing Email List............................................................................................... 434
Delete Email List ................................................................................................ 434
Edit Email List .................................................................................................... 434
Edit Imported Email List ................................................................................ 435
Edit Manual Email List................................................................................... 435
Edit Rule Based List ....................................................................................... 435
View/Export Email List ...................................................................................... 435
Signup Wizard .................................................................................................... 437
Opt Out E-Mail Address ..................................................................................... 438
Campaigns............................................................................................................... 440
Creating a new campaign.................................................................................... 441
Campaign Report ................................................................................................ 447
Deleting a campaign ........................................................................................... 448
Gift Certificates....................................................................................................... 449
Creating a store item Gift Certificate.................................................................. 449
Gift Certificate Value Options ........................................................................ 450
Creating an on demand Gift Certificate .............................................................. 450
Certificate Amount.......................................................................................... 450
Quantity........................................................................................................... 451
Certificate Expiration...................................................................................... 451
Gift Certificates Code ......................................................................................... 451
Managing Gift Certificates ................................................................................. 452
Certificate Deletion......................................................................................... 452
Certificate Editing........................................................................................... 452
Certificate Ledger ........................................................................................... 453

xiv
 Certificate Ledger Entry ................................................................................. 453
Return Email ........................................................................................................... 453
Return Email Address ......................................................................................... 454
Return Email Coupon ......................................................................................... 455
Return Email Message ........................................................................................ 455
Exit Pop................................................................................................................... 457
3rd Party Marketing .................................................................................................... 460
API Integrations ...................................................................................................... 460
External Auto Responders (AWeber) ..................................................................... 462
Configuring UltraCart for AWeber..................................................................... 462
Configuration at AWeber.................................................................................... 463
10. Auctions .................................................................................................................... 465
Introduction................................................................................................................. 465
Payment Wizard.......................................................................................................... 465
11. Catalog ...................................................................................................................... 469
Introduction................................................................................................................. 469
Create New Catalog Host........................................................................................ 469
Editing a Host Name........................................................................................... 470
Deleting a Host Name......................................................................................... 470
Host Name Selection........................................................................................... 471
Catalog Administration........................................................................................... 471
Manage Catalog Templates..................................................................................... 471
Template Name................................................................................................... 472
Template Contents .............................................................................................. 472
Edit Template...................................................................................................... 473
Delete Template .................................................................................................. 473
Manage Catalog Groups ......................................................................................... 473
Catalog (Root) Group ......................................................................................... 474
Group Title.......................................................................................................... 475
Group Description............................................................................................... 475
Group Template .................................................................................................. 475
Item Template ..................................................................................................... 475
Catalog Attributes ............................................................................................... 475
New Attribute...................................................................................................... 476
Catalog (child) Group ............................................................................................. 478
Group Title (child) .............................................................................................. 478
URL Code ........................................................................................................... 479
Image URL.......................................................................................................... 479
Group Description............................................................................................... 479
Parent Group ....................................................................................................... 479
Group Template .................................................................................................. 479
Item Template ..................................................................................................... 479
Attribute Tab....................................................................................................... 479
Item Assignment ..................................................................................................... 480
Catalog Groups pane........................................................................................... 481
Item Folders pane................................................................................................ 481
Items Assigned to Catalog Group ....................................................................... 482
Items in Folder pane............................................................................................ 482

xv
 Assignment steps ................................................................................................ 482
Removing Items from a Catalog Group.............................................................. 483
Show Unassigned Items...................................................................................... 483
Download Logs....................................................................................................... 484
Log file Analyzers............................................................................................... 485
12. Customer Support Chat............................................................................................. 486
Introduction................................................................................................................. 486
Configuring Support Chat........................................................................................... 486
Account Activation ................................................................................................. 486
Support Queues....................................................................................................... 487
Queue Look & Feel................................................................................................. 488
AutoMessages ......................................................................................................... 490
Users ....................................................................................................................... 491
User Permissions................................................................................................. 492
View Transcripts................................................................................................. 493
Surveys.................................................................................................................... 493
View Reports ...................................................................................................... 496
AutoSurvey Settings ........................................................................................... 496
Using the Chat Administration Console ..................................................................... 497
Launching the Chat Administration Console.......................................................... 497
Logging into the Agent Console ............................................................................. 499
Navigating the Agent Console ................................................................................ 499
Current Status...................................................................................................... 500
Notification Sounds ............................................................................................ 501
Overview Section.................................................................................................... 501
All Customers Tab .............................................................................................. 501
Enqueued Customers Tab ................................................................................... 502
Queues Tab ......................................................................................................... 502
Details Section ........................................................................................................ 503
13. UltraBooks ................................................................................................................ 504
Introduction................................................................................................................. 504
Background ............................................................................................................. 504
What type of data will UltraBooks import?............................................................ 504
Importance of things matching up .......................................................................... 504
Downloading and Installing the Required Software............................................... 505
Getting Started with UltraBooks................................................................................. 505
Configuration Mode................................................................................................ 506
Accounting Codes................................................................................................... 507
Payment Methods................................................................................................ 508
Deposit to Account ......................................................................................... 508
Surcharge QuickBooks™ Code ...................................................................... 509
Sales Tax............................................................................................................. 510
Configuring Tax Codes in UltraCart............................................................... 510
Setting up Sales Tax in QuickBooks™ .......................................................... 510
Turn on Sales Tax ........................................................................................... 511
Sales Tax Codes.............................................................................................. 511
To add a sales tax code ................................................................................... 511
Sales tax items, rates, and tax agencies........................................................... 511

xvi
 Selling to Non-taxed customers ...................................................................... 512
Shipping Methods ............................................................................................... 513
QuickBooks™ Item for Shipping ................................................................... 513
Coupons .............................................................................................................. 514
Going Live with UltraBooks........................................................................... 515
UltraCart Item ID’s versus QuickBooks™ Item Names ........................................ 516
A note about how UltraCart stores data.............................................................. 517
Using sequential order IDs...................................................................................... 517
Running UltraBooks ............................................................................................... 517
Settings................................................................................................................ 518
Import Orders...................................................................................................... 520
Order State (status) ............................................................................................. 521
Importing Historical Data ....................................................................................... 521
Manually Entry into QuickBooks™ ....................................................................... 521
Disable UltraBooks Integration .............................................................................. 523
Summary ..................................................................................................................... 523
14. Affiliate Management ............................................................................................... 524
Introduction..................................................................................................................... 524
Terms & Conditions........................................................................................................ 524
Open or Closed Program................................................................................................. 526
Affiliate Management ..................................................................................................... 526
Overview..................................................................................................................... 526
Approve Pending Affiliates .................................................................................... 527
Approve Invisible Link ........................................................................................... 527
Settings........................................................................................................................ 529
Program Name ........................................................................................................ 529
Program Description ............................................................................................... 529
Agreement............................................................................................................... 530
Welcome Letter....................................................................................................... 530
Number of Downline Tiers ..................................................................................... 530
Affiliate Cookie Lifetime (Days)............................................................................ 530
Allow Google AdWords Tracking.......................................................................... 530
Allow Yahoo Search Tracking................................................................................ 530
Pay Commissions on Auto Orders.......................................................................... 531
Creatives ..................................................................................................................... 532
New Creative .......................................................................................................... 532
Edit Creative ........................................................................................................... 534
Delete Creative........................................................................................................ 534
Sorting Creatives..................................................................................................... 534
Commissions............................................................................................................... 535
Global Commissions............................................................................................... 535
Individual Item Commissions ................................................................................. 536
Add Individual Item Commission....................................................................... 536
Edit Individual Item Commission....................................................................... 537
Delete Individual Item Commission ................................................................... 537
Links ........................................................................................................................... 538
Signup Link......................................................................................................... 538
Affiliate Signup-Form......................................................................................... 538

xvii
 Login Link .......................................................................................................... 540
Invisible Link ...................................................................................................... 540
Priority Code Script ............................................................................................ 541
Affiliates ..................................................................................................................... 542
New Affiliate .......................................................................................................... 542
Check Payable to................................................................................................. 543
SSN / Tax ID....................................................................................................... 543
Affiliate Commission Adjustment ...................................................................... 543
Website Name..................................................................................................... 543
Website URL ...................................................................................................... 543
Marketing Strategy.............................................................................................. 543
Marketing Channels ............................................................................................ 543
Manage Existing Affiliates ..................................................................................... 544
View Reports ...................................................................................................... 544
Affiliate Report Configuration........................................................................ 545
Manual Ledger Entry .......................................................................................... 545
Edit Affiliate ....................................................................................................... 546
Login as Affiliate ................................................................................................ 547
Reports at a Glance ......................................................................................... 548
Commissions................................................................................................... 548
Affiliate Tools................................................................................................. 549
Affiliate Recruiting Link................................................................................. 553
Simple Link..................................................................................................... 553
Disable Affiliate.................................................................................................. 553
Affiliate Types ............................................................................................................ 555
New Affiliate Type ................................................................................................. 555
Edit Affiliate Type .............................................................................................. 556
Delete Affiliate Type .......................................................................................... 556
Reports ........................................................................................................................ 557
View All Affiliates.................................................................................................. 557
Individual Affiliate Dashboard ........................................................................... 557
View Click Summary.............................................................................................. 558
View Sales Summary.............................................................................................. 559
Process Payments.................................................................................................... 559
Export all affiliate information in CSV format....................................................... 561
INDEX ............................................................................................................................ 562

xviii
INTRODUCTION TO ULTRACART
Chapter

1. Introduction to UltraCart
1
What this Book Covers

The primary focus of this book is to teach merchants how to configure UltraCart as their
online shopping cart solution. Each chapter of this manual covers a component of the
UltraCart system such as accounts receivable or shipping. While this manual may not
cover every single question that a merchant may have, it attempts to cover the entire
system in detail.

Conventions in this Book

Throughout the manual, several conventions are used. Below is an explanation of each
convention so that the meaning will be understandable when encountered.

Navigating to a Specific Page

If the directions require navigating to a specific area of the system using the web browser,
then a box with the name of each link to click, followed by an arrow will appear. An
example of a navigation instruction from the main menu, to the configuration menu, and
then to the main settings page would look like:

Main Menu  Configuration Menu  Main Settings

Obtaining Support

UltraCart support attempts to help merchants in any way possible with the setup and
basic configuration of their online store. There are several methods support can be
obtained.

Telephone 1-209-383-9870 Monday-Friday 8:30AM-5PM PST

Email support@ultracart.com 24/7/365
On-line Chat Support Portal When available.

i
SIGNUP WITH ULTRACART
Chapter

2. Signup with UltraCart 2

Requirements

The requirements for merchants to use the UltraCart system are very low. UltraCart uses
technologies that are available on a wide variety of hardware and operating systems. The
software requirements listed below should be available on Microsoft Windows
95/98/ME/NT 4/2000/XP, Apple MacOS 9 and MacOS X, Redhat Linux, SuSE Linux,
FreeBSD, Solaris, and numerous other operating systems.

Web Browser

UltraCart is compatible with all of the major web browsers, so customers are not
restricted to using a specific browser in order to place orders. Some of the reports that
are available to the merchant through the “back office” administration sections of
UltraCart are in the Adobe Acrobat format. This requires an additional plug-in to be
downloaded and installed in order to view them.

Our current suggestion for an excellent web browser is Mozilla Firefox. Firefox is a free
piece of software developed by Time Warner and the open source community offering a
browser that is compliant on the widest variety of operating systems. Mozilla Firefox is
available for free download at:

http://www.mozilla.com/en-US/

Other browsers will work with UltraCart including Netscape, Microsoft Internet Explorer
and Opera. At this time, it is recommended that Microsoft Internet Explorer not be used
because it's handling of the Adobe Acrobat plug-in can be problematic for dynamically
generated content such as packing slips, invoices, etc. The Mozilla and Netscape
browser's handles acrobat documents flawlessly.

Adobe Acrobat

UltraCart produces a variety of content in the format of Adobe PDF. If Adobe Acrobat
3.x or higher is not currently installed on your computer, the latest version can be
downloaded free from Adobe. At the time of this writing, the latest version for Windows
is 9.0 and is available at:

http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html?promoid=BUIGO

2
Starting the Signup Process

The signup process is very easy to initiate. The first step is to point a web browser to
http://www.ultracart.com and click on the "30 Day Free Trial" button (shown below).

Figure 1 - Starting the Signup Process

If you've navigated around in some of the other UltraCart screens (Online Shopping Cart,
Payment Processing, Pro Services, etc.) you'll find the 30 Day Free Trial button there
also.

When you click on the 30 Day Free Trial button, you will be taken to the Setup Wizard
screen where you can begin the signup process.

Setup Wizard

The Setup Wizard screen collects the basic information to configure your first user
account. It will also ask you to complete a few other sections that are considered the
minimum to help get your store up and running. It only takes a few minutes to complete
the following:

3
Figure 2 - Setup Wizard screen

Setup Confirmation

Once you have completed the Setup Wizard, a confirmation email will be sent to you
(Administrator account). We recommend that you print out the confirmation page, write
your administrator user name, login and password on it, and store it in a secure location.

4
Your confirmation screen will indicate that a successful setup has occurred. It will also
display the View Cart Link and your Buy Link for your item(s) which you can embed on
your website for your customers to view their shopping cart.

Figure 3 - Setup confirmation page

If you entered store items during the setup wizard process, each item's "Buy Now"
HTML snippets (links) will also be displayed. These links will also be included in your
Confirmation Email as a “text file” attachment. The links displayed must be “embedded”
into your website. You can either “copy & paste” from the confirmation screen or “copy
& paste” from the email attachment at later time. It is recommended however, that you
accomplish this task very soon.

From this point click on the “Main Menu” button (left). This will take you to UltraCart’s
home page. If you do this now, you will already be logged in.

5
Logging in For the First Time

The following is our home page which is probably where you began your first session
with UltraCart (http://www.ultracart.com). There is a wealth of information about
UltraCart's features here so feel free to explore the many tabs and links.

Figure 4 – UltraCart Home Page

6
To log in to your account, click on the "Merchant Log In" link found in the upper right
corner of the screen.

The login fields will appear as shown below. Enter your login information and click the
"Login" button.

Figure 5 - Merchant Log-in window

To login, enter your merchant ID, login, and password chosen during the signup process
and click the “Login” button (or press the “enter” key).

7
Navigating the UltraCart System
After successfully logging in to UltraCart, you are taken to the Home screen. This screen
consists of basically 4 sections: Support Menu, Main Menu, Dashboard and News.

Figure 6 - UltraCart Dashboard and Main Menu

Support Menu

The Support Menu is located just above the UltraCart Main

Menu. The Support Menu will be visible from any screen
that displays the main menu.

Clicking on the green plus

sign or the word "Support"
will expand a full view of
the following support links: Open Support Case, Support
Portal, Online Manual, Order Manual, Contact Us and Live
Chat.

Click on any link to use that support feature. To close the Support Menu, click on the red
minus sign or the word "support".

8
Open Support Case
A support case is basically an email that you send to UltraCart's support team. You will
use the New Case form to enter your Issue Summary (short description) and Detailed
Description of your issue. You will receive a copy of your Support Case which will be
assigned a case number. Keep the case number handy for future reference.

Figure 7 - Support Case Form

Suggested Solutions (support case)

As you enter (type) your Issue Summary (subject) for your new support case, a window
will appear showing Suggested (related) Solutions. It is best to use as few words as
possible to pinpoint your issue. This will enhance the chance of getting a resolution on
the spot.

Figure 8 - Support Case Suggested Solutions

9
If you see a solution that possibly answers your question, click on the title (link) to be
taken to the full view of the solution in a separate window. You will be asked if the
solution helped you answer your question. If you answer No, you will be taken to
Solutions Search Home where you can browse and search the entire database of
solutions. If you still cannot find an answer, return to the Create New Case screen and
enter your detailed description. When finished, enter your detailed description and click
the Create Case button. You will then be presented with a confirmation screen displaying
your Case number.

Support Portal
This link will take you to the Support Portal where you can view the following:
 Home – view solutions and your open support cases (if any),
 Find Solution – search the database for a solution for your question/problem,
 Log a Case - open a new case
 View Cases - view open cases
 Logout – this will close the portal and take you to the UltraCart home page.

Figure 9 - Support Portal screen

Online Manual
This link will take your to our web page showing the link to download our PDF version
of the Users Reference Manual.

10
Order Manual
This link will take you to our web page to allow you to place an order for our printed
version of the Users Reference Manual.

Contact Us
This link will take you to a screen showing important phone numbers to contact us.

Live Chat
When this button appears on your screen, trained support personnel will be available for
Live Chat.

Click the "Click Here for LIVE Chat" button and enter your Full Name and Email. Click
the "Submit" button. An operator will be with you shortly.

Figure 10 - Live Support window

11
Main Menu
The UltraCart main menu contains twelve sections: Home, Configuration, Affiliate
Management, Auctions, Catalog, Integration Center, Item Management, Marketing,
Mechanical Turk, Operator Chat, Order Management, Reporting, Your Preferences and
Logout. You will find this navigation menu on the left side of almost every UltraCart
screen. Merchants use these shortcuts to easily navigate around the system. They are all
covered in detail later in this manual.

UltraCart Dashboard

The UltraCart Dashboard is visible only from the Home page. You can easily get to the
Dashboard by clicking on the “Home” link from any main menu in UltraCart's back
office.

Figure 11 – Dashboard with Widgets

Widgets
Some Widgets provide a quick overview of important information about your online store
while others are links handy utilities. Users can configure their dashboard to show or not
show any of the selectable widgets. The following widgets are available:

Widget Function
Shows Pending affiliate(s) needing
Affiliate Management
approval.
Number of orders pending by shipping
Shipping Department Summary
method.
A button to run the Back End Order Entry
Order Entry
program.
A search tool for locating specific orders.
Find an Order

12
 Count and Dollar Amount of Sales for
Sales Summary
Today, Month to Date, and Year to Date.
Total count of orders pending in Accounts
Accounts Receivable:
Receivable Department.

Widget Icons
You may see up to 3 clickable icons on the widget title bar depending on the widget type.

Preferences - displays additional preference settings (where applicable)

Refresh – updates information displayed in this Widget
Close - removes this Widget from dashboard (can be added back later).

Add a Dashboard Widget

When an UltraCart account is first created or when
a new user is added to an existing account, there
will be no widgets configured on the dashboard.
To add a widget, first select it from the drop-down
menu located in the right hand corner of the
dashboard screen and then click the "add" button.
The widget will appear in the next available space
on your dashboard. Note: some browsers do not require you to click the "add" button for
the widget to appear. Once you've added an item to the dashboard, its title will be
"ghosted" (disabled) in the list.

Relocate a Dashboard Widget

You can move and rearrange widgets on the dashboard. Simply place the mouse pointer
over the title of a widget. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the widget to
the new location. Release the mouse button. Existing widgets will automatically relocate
(generally move down) when you drag a widget over it. These actions are temporary
until you release the mouse button.

Remove a Dashboard Widget

To remove a widget from your dashboard, simply click on the corresponding X (to the
right) of the widget title. Its title will become "un-ghosted" in the Wizard Menu so you
can add it back to the dashboard later.

Altering these settings only effect the dashboard of the current user (the one logged in).
This allows each user the ability to personalize their dashboard.

13
Quick Jump link
Some of the widgets will have a Quick Jump link at the bottom of the data list. Click the
quick jump link to be taken to the applicable section of UltraCart. For example: if you
click the "Quick Jump" link under the Accounts Receivable widget, you'll be taken to the
Accounts Receivable Section of Order Management.

Find an Order Preferences Icon

The Find an Order widget uses the Preferences Icon to display additional search
criteria that you can have displayed as the default. When the preferences icon is clicked,
the following choices will be displayed:

Select which search fields you want to be shown under your Find an Order widget. Click
the Save button when finished. Reverse the process to remove them.

In our scenario above, we've selected Order ID, First Name, Last Name, and Email.
After clicking the "Save" button, our Find an Order Widget for this USER will now
appear as follows:

14
To perform a search, simply enter (type) your search criteria into any of the fields and
click the "Search" button. UltraCart will then take you to the "Review Orders" screen
and display any and all orders that match your criteria.

UltraCart News
The bottom section of the dashboard is where UltraCart will occasionally post news items
about new features, updates, etc. Each article will have a short, abbreviated statement.
Click on the blue, "More info" link to view the entire article.

Figure 12 - UltraCart News

Preferences
This is one of the last items in the Main Menu.
Here, you can manage your contact information,
change your password and/or change your
Email Notifications settings. Clicking on the
Preferences link in the Main Menu will take you
to the following screen for editing.

After you've made your changes, click the

"Save" button at the bottom of the screen.

Note: you can also edit these settings at:

At an individual users screen (see page 23).

15
CONFIGURATION
Chapter

3. UltraCart Configuration 3
UltraCart configuration covers all of the settings related to your online store. From this
menu, you can configure your company information, configure your checkout settings,
customize the look & feel of your cart, and set up the UltraCart back office system for
your business. You can visit the Configuration section by navigating to the following
screen.

Main Menu  Configuration

Figure 13 - Configuration screen

The configuration screen consists of six sections. They are covered in detail later in this
chapter. The following is a brief description of each.

1. General – Use this section to configure your basic merchant profile, view billing
& invoice information regarding your account, and manage users and
permissions.

16
2. Checkout – Use this section to configure the checkout experience of your online
store. You can configure advertising sources, shipping methods & tax rates,
return policy, accepted payment methods, customer profiles, single page checkout
and much more.

3. Look & Feel – Use this section to customize the appearance of your shopping
cart. You can custom brand (screen branding) almost all screens throughout the
checkout process, upload images on the UltraCart server for use on secure
screens, and configure dynamic pricing images.

4. Back Office – Use this section to customize and manage the back office
operations of UltraCart. You can set customer notification options, export orders,
configure QuickBooks™® integration, manage fulfillment providers, edit receipt
and shipping notification emails and much more.

5. Channel Partners – Here you can configure order processing from popular
market places and sales channels like Amazon Seller Central.

6. Other – Miscellaneous enhancement opportunities like, Custom SSL, UltraSecure

OTP Tokens, Reference Manual Purchase and Web Hosting.

17
General (Configuration)
The general configuration section consists of 4 parts: Merchant Profile, Regional
Settings, Service Plan and Users.

Merchant Profile

The merchant profile screen allows you to specify your Company Name, Store URL
(Internet address), Postal Code, State, and Country. This information is used throughout
UltraCart, so please be sure that it is correct and kept up-to-date.

Figure 14 - Merchant Profile

When you have entered the correct information, click the "Save" button to save your
changes & return to the main Configuration menu.

18
Regional Settings
This screen allows the user to set their personal preference for weight measurements
(pounds or kilograms) and distance measurements (inches or centimeters).

Use the “drop-down” menu to choose your setting in each category. Click the “Save”
button to return to the configuration menu.

Service Plan
The Service Plan screen allows you to view payment information regarding your
UltraCart account. This section consists of 4 parts: Basic Account, Billing Credit Card,
Billing Activity and Other Options.

Basic Account
Your account type is determined by the number and type of items in your store, as well as
your trial period status.

Billing Credit Card

Enter your billing information. This is the information associated with the credit card on
which UltraCart will charge your monthly fees. A credit card is required to activate
certain premium features of UltraCart, and to continue your service beyond the free,
30-day trial.

19
Billing Activity
UltraCart bills your account every thirty days. You are never charged in advance for
service. Your basic account and premium services (if any) billing will be shown on this
screen.

The Billing Activity section gives you a detailed report regarding the credits and debits
against your UltraCart account. You can use this screen to view what costs are associated
with your account.

Other Options
Presently, the only option at the Other Options level is to Close or Reopen your account.

20
Close Account
To close the account, place a check in the box to the left of the "Close Account" prompt.
Then click the "Save" button.

The screen will then show which user initiated the closing action and when (date).
UltraCart will initiate a final billing (charge) to the credit card on file.

Reopen Account
To Reopen an Account, click the check box to the left of the prompt "Reopen Account".
Then click the "Save" button.

Users
UltraCart uses an industry standard security mechanism of user authentication and
authorization. Authentication is the verification of the identity of a person. UltraCart
uses a Merchant ID (identification), Login, and Password for each user that accesses the
system. Authorization refers to the different actions (permissions) that each user can
perform. This section covers creating additional users and their permissions.

Suggested Merchant User Configuration

Merchants should create an individual user account for every single person that is
accessing UltraCart, giving only the necessary permissions to each user. Most users do
not need access to the configuration or reporting sections of the system. The only
individual given permission to create additional users should be the system
administration user (the user that has all the permissions and was created during the
initial signup). Creating a user to handle customer service so that an individual’s name
does not appear on correspondence with customers is a good idea.

Figure 15 - Users Screen

21
To add a new user, click on the "New User" button. To delete an existing user, click on
the check box to the left of the user Login name and click the "Delete" button. Caution!
There is no "warning" dialog box. You cannot UNDO this action.

22
User Configuration screen

There are six sections to be completed for each additional user: Contact Information,
New Password, New FTP Password, UltraSecure One Time Password Token,
Permissions and Email Notifications.

Figure 16 - User Configuration screen

23
Contact Information
The contact information applies to this individual user only. It is very important that you
configure each user with correct names and emails for obvious reasons. When a user
contacts support via phone, email or chat regarding account information, our support
personnel will use the information entered here to help make accurate identification.

Login
In the login field, enter the user's first initial and last name. If there are very few
users, then first names only are acceptable. This will be the login name that the
user will use to access their account.
Name
Next, enter the full name of the person.
Email
In the Email field, enter the email address used to contact this user with
notifications.
Phone
Finally, enter the phone number used to contact the user.

New Password
This section allows you to set a secure password for the new user or change the password
for an existing user.

A secure password should contain both letters and numbers and not contain an
English word or easily guessable value. The password has to be reentered into the
confirm password field a second time (since the password is not visible the first time
it’s typed). A good technique for creating a safe password is to think of a memorable,
but not easily guessable phrase, then use the first letter of each word plus an
additional digit or two inserted somewhere within the password, so that the final
password is not something that would be contained in the dictionary.

24
New FTP Password

UltraCart has implemented a new virtual File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server that will
allow you to transfer (download/upload) files.

How does FTP work?

FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. It is the standard Internet protocol for transferring
files from one computer to another. FTP requires two computers, one running an FTP
server, the other running an FTP client (software). The exchange is initiated by the client
who logs in under an accepted user name and password. Once this occurs, a session is
opened and stays open until closed by either the client or the server, or until it times out.
While the session is open, the client may execute numerous FTP commands on the
server. These include commands to change directories, list files, get files and put files.

FTP Password for UltraCart User

In order to access the FTP server you must first establish a FTP password under Main
Menu  Configuration  Users. If you do not have access to modify YOUR user
profile, please contact your UltraCart account administrator. Each user of your UltraCart
account can establish their individual FTP password.

Example configuration
Let's pretend that we were on an account where our merchant ID was "DEMO", login
was "Michael", and FTP Password was "cheer4broncosN08". Then our FTP information
would look like:

Server: secure.ultracart.com
Username: TEST/Michael
Password: cheer4broncosN08

Accessing UltraCart's FTP server

You can utilize most any FTP software (FileZilla, SmartFTP, Robo-FTP, to name a few)
to transfer files. Set up a site in your FTP software as follows:

Host (FTP Server): secure.ultracart.com

Username: merchant id/login
Password: FTP Password

The following is a screen shot from FileZilla setting up the sample configuration from
above as a "new site" (FTP).

25
Accessible Files in UltraCart
* Catalog Arbitrary File System
* Catalog Group Multimedia
* Catalog Logs
* Digital Delivery
* Item Multimedia
* Screen Branding Graphics Library

UltraSecure One Time Password Token:

UltraSecure adds the requirement of a hardware token to your UltraCart account. This
type of security, called two-factor authentication, is a first in the e-commerce industry.

Merchants that purchase UltraSecure will receive a unique OTP Serial Number along
with the hardware unit. Upon receipt, that number is to be entered in the box provided
for that particular user. Click the "here" link in the paragraph to learn more about the
One Time Password Token.
.

26
Permissions and Email Notifications

Place a check in the box to the left of the permissions you want to grant to this user.
Grant each user the minimum number of permissions that they need to perform their job
tasks.

In the same manner, select the email notifications that each user should receive. Users
can receive email notifications when an order is placed, payment needs processing, an
order needs to be shipped, statistics are available (reports), and many more. Click "Save"
when finished.

Figure 17 – Permissions and Email Notifications

Some Permissions and/or Email Notifications involve Premium Features. If you have not
activated those premium features they will not be listed as options for permissions on
your screen.

27
Edit an Existing User

To edit an existing user, click on the user's name (hyperlink) at the User Screen. Any of
the information initially set up can be changed at this screen.

When the edit screen displays, notice the password field is completely blank. For
security purposes, UltraCart never redisplays a user's password. To change the user's
password enter a new password and repeat the new password in the confirmation field. If
you do not wish to change a user’s password, you may leave this field blank.

Make any changes necessary to this user's account. Click the "Save" button at the bottom
of the screen when finished.

28
Checkout
This section allows you to configure the checkout process. It consists of the following:
Abandon Interval, Advertising Sources, Allowed Countries, Customer Profiles, Contact
Information, Customer Service, Gift Giving, Digital Delivery, Fraud Prevention, Free
Promotional Item, Gift Giving, Minimum Amount, Multi-Currency, Order ID Scheme,
Payments, Return Policy, Related Items, Sales Tax, Search, Shipping and Single Page
Checkout.

Abandon Interval
Sometimes customers will leave the cart intentionally or by accident and return later.
This feature allows merchants to set the length of time that the shopping cart will “hold”
an item or items if and when a customer abandons the cart.

This can be an important setting for those that have Track Inventory turned on at the item
level. Once an item or items are “allocated to shopping carts”, those items are subtracted
from the total available inventory. Too high of setting here could cause your inventory to
drop to zero even though you have physical inventory on hand subsequently causing
“item out of stock” error for the customer.

To set the Abandon Interval, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Checkout [section]  Abandon Interval

Select the time you want the item(s) retained in the cart via the drop down menu. The
default is 1 hour. Click the “Save” button when finished.

Advertising Sources
Advertising sources allow you to customize your cart so you can track how your
customers found your store. Tracking advertising sources is the best way to learn where
your advertising dollar is having the most impact.

29
Tracking Mechanism
Select one of the three tracking methods (you can change your selection at any time)
from the 3 radio button choices:

1) Do not track advertising sources

(if this is selected you would do
nothing further with this section)

2) Allow customers to enter their

source in a field (provides an empty
“fill-in” box and you would do
nothing further with this section)

3) Allow customers to select a

source from a list (which you can
continually customize after initial
set-up)
Figure 18 - Advertising Sources Screen

You can also set the tracking mechanism as "optional". This means that although your
tracking mechanism will appear during checkout, the customer can leave the field blank.
To make it optional, place a check in the box to the left of "Optional for the customer
during checkout". Click the "Save" button when finished.

Selectable Sources
The Selectable Source List is defined by you, the merchant. It is used only if you
selected “allow customers to select a source from a list". Your customer will have the
option to “pick” from your list or select “other” to enter a source that doesn’t appear on
your list. These “other” entries are called “Aliases” and will show up on the Unassigned
Aliases window (explained later).

Adding a New Source

If you choose to offer your customers the Selectable Source List you will need to create
the list. To create a new Source, click the “New Source” button on the Advertising
Sources Screen. The following screen will appear.

30
Figure 19 - Selectable Sources Configuration Screen

Enter the advertising source in the “Source” field shown at the top. Then click on the
“Submit” button. You will be returned to the Advertising Sources screen and your
newly created Advertising Source will appear in the list of Selectable Sources. Repeat
this step for each additional Advertising Source.

Figure 20 - Advertising Sources Screen

31
Editing Selectable Sources

Click on the “Edit” button to the right of the source you wish to change. You will be
returned to the Selectable Sources Configuration Screen with the name of the Source
showing in the Source Field. At this point you can click on the Source Field and edit as
desired. Click on the “Submit” button when finished and you will be returned to the
Advertising Sources Screen.

Assigning Aliases

Occasionally your customers may select the “other” field when entering an Advertising
Source during checkout. We want you to be able to track this data as well. We call this
function “Alias Mapping”.

Those “other” entries will be listed on the Selectable Sources Configuration Screen in the
Unassigned Aliases window for all of your advertising sources. Only Assigned Aliases
will be mapped so you must move the ones important to you into the Assigned Aliases
window. Simply click on the item desired (in the Unassigned Aliases window) and click
on the [right] green arrow ( ) between the two windows. To move any item from the
Assigned Aliases window to the Unassigned Aliases window simply click on the item in
the Assigned Aliases window and click on the [left] green arrow ( ) between the two
windows. When finished with all your moves, click on the "Submit" button.

In the following example, Kit Planes, Sport Planes and Flying are being assigned as
Aliases to the Advertising Source of "Magazine".

Figure 21 - Assigning Aliases screen

If you have additional screen branding themes, each one will be listed so you can manage
Selectable Sources lists for each.

32
Advertising Sources Report

Once you begin receiving orders, you'll undoubtedly want to see the statistics on the
advertising sources your customers have provided you. This is done by running an
Advertising Sources report. To run the report, navigate to: Main Menu  Reporting. At
the screen that appears, click on the "Advertising Sources" link. The following screen
will be displayed.

The only thing needed now is to define your date range for your report. Enter the Start
and End dates in the appropriate boxes. Then click on the "Submit" button. Your results
will be downloaded to your computer in a MS Excel format. Most systems will present a
window (sample below) offering you a choice to "open" the file using a specific program
(Excel for example) or to "save" the file to your system. If your system does not
recognize the file type, it may then only offer a "save" option.

33
Allowed Countries

Some merchants choose to only serve a set number of countries like the United States,
Canada, and Mexico because international shipping is either too complex for their
volume or too expensive for the products sold.

Figure 22 - Allowed Countries (partial list)

The Allowed Countries screen displays a list of countries, each with a checkbox to the
left of the country name. If you wish to allow customers from a specific country to
placed orders in your online store, check the box next to that country. Only the selected
countries in the list will appear in the country selection presented to customers during
checkout. You can quickly select & unselect all of the countries shown using the buttons
on top of the list.

Click the “Save” button when finished.

34
buySAFE
buySAFE offers a unique solution to one of the biggest challenges that online shoppers
face – knowing who to trust. To learn more about buySAFE, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  buySAFE

At this screen you can view several pages of buySAFE information. It's a good idea to
read each of their 3 pages by clicking on the top navigation links.

Sign up at buySAFE
Once you've decided to sign up, click the "apply now" link at the top of the buySAFE
screen. You'll then see the following popup notice.

Click the "OK" button to be taken to the buySAFE Bonded Seller application screen.
Make certain that, during the signup process at buySAFE, you enter "UltraCart" into the
promotional code. The following shows page 1 (bottom half) of their application

Figure 23 - buySAFE promotional code field

35
Configuring buySAFE at UltraCart
Once you have successfully signed up at buySAFE, they will send your credentials to an
UltraCart representative who will in turn configure your UltraCart account.

When you return to the configuration screen, you will see your credentials. There should
be no need for you to configure or edit any of this information.

Figure 24 - buySAFE configuration

Adding the buySAFE Seal to your Website

buySAFE will provide you with a small snippet of HTML code that allows you to display
the buySAFE Seal wherever you'd like on your site (they recommend the top-right corner
of your pages for maximum conversion impact). Once you have completed the
application, you will receive an e-mail from buySAFE with a user guide that has full
instructions for how to maximize your use of buySAFE.

Checkout Terms
This section provides a method for merchants to specify and display "terms and
conditions of the sale". It also displays a checkbox for the customer to indicate they
agree. When this feature is utilized, the terms will appear on the Review screen of the
regular checkout. It will also appear for the single page checkout users. To configure
your checkout terms, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Checkout Terms

36
Figure 25 - Checkout Terms screen

At the Checkout Terms screen, simply enter your terms in the box provide. If you enter
HTML rather than regular text, check the box below you terms. Click the "Save" button
when finished.

Contact Information

Merchants can configure the amount of information that customers are required to
provide during the checkout process. If there is a problem processing the payment or
shipping the order, the merchant can contact the customer using the information
provided.

Figure 26 - Contact Information screen

37
Typically, merchants require a daytime phone number and email address from customers
so they can resolve issues quickly.

 Although some merchants only require email, UltraCart does not recommend this
as users often provide an erroneous email address by accident, leaving no way to
contact them.

Collecting emails also provides a source of marketing information for newsletters or sales
advertisements. Customers can opt-out of providing their email for these purposes
though.

Click on the check box(s) desired. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Customer Profiles

This section allows merchants to activate Customer Profiles and create their Wholesale
Signup Agreement text. It also provides Wholesale Related Links that you can place on
your website if you chose to wholesale your products.

Activate Customer Profiles

If your customers make periodic purchases from your online store, you can enable
customer profiles to help speed up the checkout process. Customer Profiles allow your
customers to optionally enter a password, and store their information on the UltraCart
servers. When they make their next purchase, they can allow UltraCart to automatically
pre-populate the checkout form by using their e-mail address and the password they
specified.

To enable Customer Profiles, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Customer Profiles

Figure 27 - Customer Profile screen

38
There are 3 options for customer profiles; Enable Customer Profiles, Require Customer
Profile and Allow Customer Profiles to Store Credit Card(s). Check the box to the left of
the choices desired. You can later edit these profiles in the Order Management > Tools >
Customer Profile Management section. For further information about Customer Profiles
see Chapter 4, Order Management Section, page 237.

Wholesale Signup
This section provides a text box whereby merchants can enter their Wholesale Agreement
that will be presented to prospective wholesale customers during signup. Navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Customer Profiles

Figure 28 – Wholesale Signup

Simply enter your text in the text box provided. To require your prospective Wholesale
Customer to enter their SSN or Tax ID, click the checkbox to the left of the "Collect
SSN/Tax ID" prompt. Click the "Save" button when finished

Wholesale Related Links for Web Site

UltraCart's Wholesale system provides three pre-built wholesale screens that merchants
can send their customers to via the links provided here. The 3 screens are: wholesale
signup, wholesale login and wholesale logout. To access these links navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Customer Profiles

39
Figure 29 - Wholesale Related Links screen

Wholesale Signup Link

This link would typically be placed on your website wherever you showcase your
wholesale program. It would have some verbiage to encourage the prospective customer
to "Click Here to Signup". The following is an example of UltraCart's Wholesale Signup
screen (application) with minimal screen branding:

40
Wholesale Login Link
On a different screen or possibly on the very same wholesale screen, merchants will place
their Login link. This allows existing Wholesale Customer to login and be taken to the
merchant's wholesale screen that displays all the Wholesale items, prices for Wholesale
Orders.

Wholesale Logout Link

The Logout Link could also be placed on the merchant's Wholesale page. This link will
take the customer to the URL specified in the Store URL field at Configuration >
Merchant Profile.

Customer Service

This is how your customers will contact you. The information entered during your initial
signup will appear here by default. If you prefer to use a different contact name, email or
phone number, enter them on this screen. Click on the “Save” button when finished. If
you have more than one Screen Branding Theme, separate Customer Service sections
will appear on this screen to which you can configure.

41
Figure 30 - Customer Service

Digital Delivery
Some merchants sell digital content that requires downloading. At times customers
experience difficulty (loss of signal, power, etc) when downloading. To insure they are
able to obtain their content, UltraCart allows a digital delivery customer a maximum of 5
download attempts over a 3 day period. This section allows merchants to change this
setting.

Figure 31 - Digital Delivery download settings

Download Attempts
Enter the number of download attempts you wish to allow in the box to the right of
“Download Attempts”.

Link Expiration
This allows you to determine how long the Link to the download will last. Enter the Link
Expiration (in hours) in the box provided.

PayPal Fast Checkout

If you check this box and if you have PayPal Website Solutions Standard as your only
payment method, then the only information the customer will need to enter during
checkout is their email address. No other billing information (name, address, etc.,) will
be gathered.

Accept all payment methods

If you plan to accept all payment methods that you have configured, click this box.

Click on the “Continue” button when finished.

Fraud Prevention

Credit card fraud is fast growing problem for online merchants. As a merchant, you are
liable for every processed credit card transactions even if they are fraudulent. Fraud can
hurt your business in the following ways: lost revenue, wasted productivity, and penalties
42
such as charge backs and higher interchange rates.

Our industry-leading Fraud Prevention System (FPS) automatically flags potentially

fraudulent transactions so you can verify the legitimacy of the order. This will
dramatically reduce fraudulent orders, and thus the costs associated with fraud. The
service is cost effective and can easily be turned on with the click of a button.

UltraCart FPS performs automated checks to reduce the chances of fraud. UltraCart FPS
will score each credit card order between 0.0 (lowest risk) and 10.0 (highest risk). You
can set a threshold for orders that you think may be fraudulent for review. If an order
crosses your threshold, the credit is not charged. Instead, the order is simply captured into
your Accounts Receivable; color coded to indicate possible fraud, and is there for your
review. You can see the exact details of why the order may fraudulent and make an
informed decision about processing the order.

Best of all, you can fine tune UltraCart FPS to match the exact needs of your business.
Maintain the level of automation that you desire without increasing your risk! And,
UltraCart Fraud Prevention Service is Free! No per transaction fees!

To activate the Fraud Prevention Service for your account, click on the radio button to the
left of the "Yes" prompt. Then enter your Fraud threshold (lowest = 0.0 and highest =
10.0). Click the "Save" button when finished.

Free Promotional Item

The free promotional item feature allows you to give a customer a free item when they
purchase a certain size (dollar amount) order. This feature makes it simple to run
promotions without have to deal with a customer coupon.

43
Figure 32 - Free Promo Item

Simply specify the minimum subtotal and the item ID that they receive free at that price
point. Please note that the customer receives only one free item. Click the “Save” button
when finished.

Gift Giving
The gift giving feature allows customers to enter a Gift Message during checkout. This
action signifies that the purchase is a Gift and predetermined handling fees will be added
to the total cost.

During configuration, merchants designate to enable gift giving, set a base fee gift charge
and/or a per item gift charge and establish a maximum gift message length.

Figure 33 - Gift Settings configuration screen

Allow gift giving

Once this feature is enabled, a Gift Message text box will appear on the Shipping
(checkout) screen along with the fees that you configure (see screen shot below). Check
the box to the right of the "enable gift giving" prompt to enable gift giving.

Gift Charge (Base Fee)

Most merchants will assess a dollar or two for handling the special gift messages.
Merchants may choose to provide gift services at no charge and build the cost into their
shipping and handling if the majority of orders are gifts. Enter the amount in the box
provided.

44
Gift Charge (Per Item Fee)
Some merchants may want to charge a per item fee. Enter the amount in the box
provided. If both the base fee and per item fee are configured, UltraCart will combine the
two and show the total as one handling charge during checkout.

Note: QuickBooks code will only appear for those merchants that are using UltraBooks
to download their orders to QuickBooks.

Figure 34 - Gift Message box on shipping screen

Wrapping Paper
UltraCart allows merchants to configure a set of wrapping papers that customers can
choose during the checkout process. Merchants can offer gift giving with or without
wrapping services. Merchants upload thumbnail pictures of their wrapping paper to
UltraCart which will be displayed during checkout. Fees, base and per item, can also be
configured for each wrapping paper.

Adding a Wrapping Paper

In order to add a wrapping paper, you must first scan a portion of the actual wrapping
paper using a color scanner. Scan the image as a GIF or JPEG file and make it
appropriately 70 pixels wide by 70 pixels tall. Adjust the resolution of the scanner so that
70x70 represents enough of the wrapping paper to give customers a feel for what it looks
like. Once the scanning of the wrapping paper is complete, save it to a location on your
computer’s hard drive. It’s important to remember the file location as you will need it
later in this process.

45
Add the wrapper paper to your account by clicking on the “New” button next to the
wrapping paper section header. This will take you to the wrapping paper configuration
screen.

Figure 35 - Wrapping Paper Configuration

Locate the “thumbnail picture” (file) of the wrapping paper you scanned earlier. You can
use the browse button to help locate the image on your system. Next enter the title of the
wrapping paper in the “Title” field. This title will appear with the image when it is
displayed on your cart. An example might be “balloons” or “baby”, etc.

Setting the Cost

Similar to the Gift costs, wrapping paper can be configured for base fee and per item fee.
Again, these will be combined for a total that will appear for each wrapping paper.

Note: QuickBooks code will only appear for those merchants that are using UltraBooks
to download their orders to QuickBooks.

Click on the “Save” button when finished. Your configuration will appear under the
Wrapping Papers section with a thumbnail of your paper.

46
Changing a Wrapping Paper
Click the Edit button to the right of the wallpaper image to make changes. The edit
screen will appear. Make changes as necessary and click on the “Save” button.

Deleting a Wrapping Paper

To delete a wrapping paper, check the “Delete” button next to the edit button.

Figure 36 - Deleting a Wrapping Paper

Checkout Process
Allowing customers to give gifts and/or choose wrapping will add the Gift and Wrapping
Paper section to the shipping screen during the checkout process. In addition to entering
their shipping information, customers have the opportunity to enter a gift (text) message
that will appear on the packing slip for the recipient to read, and select a wrapping paper
(if configured) if desired. A typical gift screen during the checkout would look like the
following sample.

If and when a customer indicates the order is a gift, then the checkbox to specify "use my
shipping address as my billing address" will not appear. Typically, people that order gifts
will have them drop shipped to the recipients address so both billing and shipping screens
will eventually be shown during checkout.

47
Figure 37 - Checkout Shipping/Gift screen

Packing Slips (gift giving)

Since UltraCart has the ability to print packing slips, it takes into account that gift orders
should not contain pricing information on the gift packing slip. UltraCart will print two
separate packing slips (one that can be mailed back to the purchaser and one that is
included with the gift). Part of the gift charge specified earlier can cover the additional
postage required to mail the purchaser a packing slip when the order ships (if the
merchant wishes to provide this notification).

Figure 38 - Gift Packing Slip

48
Minimum Amount

UltraCart can enforce a minimum order subtotal or item count requirements. This feature
is useful for merchants that sell lots of very inexpensive products. By setting a minimum
order subtotal or item count requirement a merchant can ensure that the profit margin on
the order will be enough to cover transaction fees, etc.

A merchant can enter a minimum for either one or both. For example, you can enter a
minimum item count of 10 with a minimum subtotal amount of $10.00. Click the
“Save” button when finished.

Figure 39 - Minimum Order

Multi Currency
This feature is new and extremely Alpha. We do not recommend merchants change
from USD setting at this time. Your payment gateway must support the base
currency if it is not USD.

You are responsible for performing complete end to end testing of your e-Commerce
store to make sure everything works properly with a non-USD base currency before
going live! Some features inside UltraCart may still display a dollar sign even after you
change your base currency to a Non-USD setting.

Figure 40 - Multi-Currency screen

49
Order ID Scheme

UltraCart supports two types of order ID schemes: sequential and date-based. If you
would like to have a sequential order ID scheme then select numeric, enter a starting
number, and select the width of the ID (UltraCart will place leading zeroes in front of the
number). Alternatively you can select an order ID scheme based upon the date and time
the order is placed.

The date/time format is the UltraCart default and looks like the following:

DEMO-YYYYMMDDHHMM-RRRRRR

Where DEMO is the Merchant ID, YYYY is the year, MM is the month, DD is the day,
HH is the hour, MM is the minute, and RRRRR is a random unique identifier.

The alternate format, numerically increasing, uses your designated starting number that is
incremented by one for each successful order.

 UltraCart recommends selecting a significantly high starting number and a width

of at least ten digits. Selecting a low starting number might give customers the
indication that the online store has not been around for a long time or does not
have a large volume of business.

 Merchants should never reset the starting number lower than an existing order ID
or a collision will occur.

An example numeric order ID with a staring number of one thousand and a width of ten
would be:

DEMO-0000001000

50
Figure 41 - Order ID Scheme
Select which scheme you desire by click the radio button to the left. If Numeric is
selected, also enter the Next ID to begin your numbering and also indicate the width (at
least 10 is recommended.

51
Payments
The payments section is one of the most important in the UltraCart administration
system. This is where you configure how your customers pay for their purchases. The
Payments screen consists of 7 tabs: Methods, Transaction Gateways, Options,
Restrictions, Tests, Filters and Rotating Transaction Gateways.

Main Menu  Configuration  Payments [link]

Figure 42 - Payment Methods (tab) screen

52
Methods (tab)
Under the Methods tab you will indicate which Payment Method(s) you want to accept.
Once you check the box to select a method, additional fields will appear for completion.

The following are the possible payment methods: Pay Pal, COD orders, Credit Cards,
Google Checkout, Paper Checks/Money Orders/Electronic Checks, Purchase Orders, Saf-
T-Pay and Wire Transfer. A “Save” button is provided at the bottom of the screen.
Clicking this button will save the information you have entered and return you to the
Configuration Menu.

Many merchants will see text box fields labeled QuickBooks™ codes during
configuration. These will only appear for those merchants that have enabled UltraBooks.
For more information about UltraBooks, see page 504.

PayPal

You must have set up an account with PayPal in order to configure it as a payment
method. We recommend you obtain a thorough understanding of PayPal and its
integration with UltraCart by reading the PayPal Chapter (page 245) before attempting
to configure this payment method.

To accept PayPal as a Payment Method, click the checkbox to the right of the "Accept
PayPal" field. More fields will be revealed.

Figure 43 - PayPal Configuration

Field #1: PayPal business email: enter the email address that corresponds to your
PayPal business account.

Field #2: Hold order in accounts receivable: Check this box if you want to have your
PayPal orders held for your final approval prior to shipment.

Field #3: Integration method: Click the single method that you desire.

53
  PayPal Express Checkout and PayPal Website Payments Pro:
When either of these are selected, 4 additional fields will be displayed. The
information for these fields is provided by PayPal when you obtain your API
Credentials (API Signature). See page 251 for more on API Access.

API User Name: Enter the User Name supplied by PayPal

API Password: Enter the API Password supplied by PayPal
API Signature: Enter the API Signature supplied by PayPal
Environment: Select "live"

 PayPal Web Payments Standard:

Simply click on the radio button to the left. No additional fields are required.
Note: you must have Instant Payment Notification set to "YES" in your PayPal
account (Profile).

Figure 44 - PayPal API Signature

COD (cash on delivery)

To accept COD (cash on delivery) as a Payment Method, click the checkbox to the right
of the "Accept COD" Field. Four more fields will be revealed.

Figure 45 - COD Configuration

Field #1: Approved customers only: Check this box if you want to accept COD
orders for your “pre-approved customers only”.

You must enable customer profiles for this functionality. If you

haven’t already done so, navigate to:

54
 Main Menu  Configuration  Customer Profiles and check the
box for “Enable Customer Profiles”.

You also must configure each customer’s profile at:

Main Menu  Order Management  Customer Profile Management

Field #2: Surcharge Transaction Fee: This is a merchant’s opportunity to pass along
the cost of C.O.D. fees to the customer. Enter the amount in dollars and
cents.

Field #3: Surcharge Transaction Percentage: This percentage is in addition to the

surcharge transaction fee. Enter the percentage in decimal.

Credit Cards

To accept Credit Cards as a Payment Method, click the checkbox to the right of the
"Accept Credit Cards" Field. Basically 3 more fields will be revealed.

UltraCart currently supports the four major types of credit cards: Visa, MasterCard,
American Express, and Discover. For each supported card, check the checkbox to the
right of the card name. Only check those that your merchant supports.

Figure 46 - Credit Card Configuration

Field #1: Charge appears on statement as: Enter the name of the company that will
appear on the customer’s credit card statement. To alleviate confusion to
the customer, the billed by name will be printed on their receipt. This will

55
 help customers associate the charge on their credit card with the online store
if the company name and DBA are different. This also helps prevent them
from initiating a charge back.

Field #2: Collect Card Verification Value number: When this box is checked, the
customer MUST enter the Card Verification Value (CVV2) number that
appears on the back of their credit card. Note: Discover Card calls it the
“Cardmember ID”. This is performed only momentarily for real-time
charge during checkout. This data is NOT retained in the database!

This is highly recommended as it provides an additional check that lessens

the chance of an individual placing an order by obtaining the card number
alone. However, if you have set your "charge during checkout"
configuration to "NO", and have this field checked, then you will have to
contact the customer to re-obtain the CVV2 when you finally processes the
order.

Field #3: Credit Cards Supported: Place a check mark in the box to the right of the
card type that your company will support.

For each card that you select, you also may want to add a surcharge transaction fee
and/or surcharge transaction percentage. Certain markets deal with such small profit
margins that they must pass the costs of accepting credit cards on to the customer
usually based upon the credit card type (although rare). For instance, Visa,
MasterCard, and Discover can be significantly cheaper to process than American
Express. A surcharge will appear on the order if a merchant enters a transaction fee
and/or transaction percentage (below). UltraCart calculates the surcharge so that the
net payment after paying the credit card transaction fee and percentage is exactly
what the customer would pay with cash. Some merchant processing agreements
prohibit the charging of a surcharge to accept certain forms of payment or offering
"cash discounts.” Please consult individual merchant processing agreements for
issues related to charging customers surcharge fees.
Enter the Surcharge transaction fee in dollars and cents (example: .30).
Enter the Surcharge transaction percentage as a percent (example: 2.25).

Google Checkout

Google Checkout is a fast, convenient checkout process that complements your

existing process. Customers who use Google Checkout can buy from you quickly and
securely, using a single username and password – and you can use Google Checkout
to process their orders and charge their credit or debit cards. For more information
about Google Checkout go to: http://checkout.google.com/buyer/tour.html.

56
 If you haven't already, you'll need to sign up for Google Checkout at
https://checkout.google.com/. Once approved, you will be given a Google Checkout
Merchant ID and Merchant Key.

To accept Google Checkout as a Payment Method, click the checkbox to the right of
the "Accept Google Checkout" Field. Several more fields will be revealed for
completion.

Figure 47 - Google Checkout Configuration

Field #1: Google Checkout Merchant ID: Enter the Merchant ID assigned by Google
during Google Checkout signup.

Field #2: Google Checkout Merchant Key: Enter the Google Checkout Merchant Key

Note: both of the above can be obtained by signing in to your Google account and
navigate to: Settings [tab]  Integration (left menu bar)

Field #3: Test Against Google Checkout Sand Box: Check this box only while you
are testing your Google Checkout. Remove the check in this box when you
are ready to go live with this payment option.

Field #4: Auto Charge: Automatically authorize and charge the buyer's credit card.

Field #5: Require eligible for Seller Protection: See Google support for info on Seller
Protection at:
http://checkout.google.com/support/sell/bin/answer.py?answer=134432&top
ic=8666

57
 Field #6: Require AVS Full or Partial Match: This setting will require Address
Verification Full or Partial Match. See Google support for info on AVS at:
http://checkout.google.com/support/sell/bin/answer.py?hl=en&answer=1344
31

Field #7: Require CVN Match: This setting will check for CVN (also none as CVV2)
match during credit card processing.

QuickBooks Codes fields (2): If you have configured QuickBooks in your UltraCart
account, then you'll need to enter your QuickBooks codes in these two fields.

Google Callback API URL: The URL listed here must be configured at Google. Log-
in to your Google account and navigate to the Settings tab and click on "Integration"
on the left menu bar.

Paste the URL in the "API callback URL:" field. Also click the radio button to
the left of XML.

Once you have completed all the required UltraCart fields, click the "Save" button at the
bottom of the screen.

58
Paper Checks - Money Orders - Electronic Checks

Electronic forms of payment are typically preferred by merchants over checks because
the funds become available to the merchant quicker, and the credit card company
assumes more of the risk related to fraud. Paper checks, Electronic checks and Money
Orders are still a common form of payment by corporations or for large orders by
customers that do not have a credit card.

Accept paper checks: Check this box if you want to allow your customers to pay via
paper check. Your order will be held in Accounts Receivable (AR) until you approve
(checked cleared) or reject the order.

Accept money order: Check this box if you want to allow you customers to pay via
money order. This will be very much like the paper check process; holding the order
in AR for your approval.

Accept electronic checks: Check this box if you want to allow your customers to pay
via electronic check. You no longer need to have an eCheck gateway to process check
orders electronically. See the section on Printing Check Drafts in the Accounts
Receivable section for details on how to use this feature.

Field #1: Payable to: If the checks or money orders need to be made payable to a
company name that differs from the one selling the items, it should be
entered here.

Field #2: Company: Enter the Company selling the product here.

Field #3: Address line 1: Specify the location where customers mail the checks or
money orders. Some large merchants use a cash management and lockbox
59
 service provided by their corporate bank and will specify a post office box
where the mailings should go.

Field #4: Address line 2: This field is to be used when the address is two lines in
length (P.O. Box, etc.).

Field #5 - 8: Enter the City, State/province, Zip/postal code, and Country.

The following is an example of what will appear at the bottom of an order that is held in
Accounts Receivable for approval.

Figure 48 - Check Order held in AR

Purchase Orders

Accept purchase orders: Check this box if you want to allow your customers to pay
via purchase order. This section will then expand to reveal 1 additional field.

60
 Field #1: Approved customers only: Check this box to restrict purchase orders for
approved customers only. Most merchants that approve purchase orders will make
them available for “approved customers only”.
Note: You must also enable customer profiles for this functionality. If you haven’t
already done so, go to:
Configuration  Shopping Cart Checkout Configuration  Customer Profiles

and check the box for “Enable Customer Profiles”.

Saf-T-Pay

SAF-T-PAY is a secure payment system that allows non-credit card users

and overseas shoppers to make online purchases directly through their
local bank. To learn more about and register with this integrated feature go to:
http://www.saftpay.com.
Accept Saf-T-Pay: Check this box if you want to configure Saf-T-Pay. This section
will then expand to reveal 3 additional fields. Enter your Merchant ID, User ID and
Password that were assigned to you when you registered with Saf-T-Pay.

Figure 49 - Saf-T-Pay Configuration

Wire Transfer

Accept wire transfer: Check this box if you want to allow your customers to pay via
wire transfer. The section will then expand to reveal 5 additional fields.

Wire transfers apply to U.S. based merchants ONLY! Your bank information will be
printed on the Customer’s receipt after checkout. The customer will then have to
work directly with their banking institute to perform the Wire Transfer using the
information you provide on this section.

61
Figure 50 - Wire Transfer Configuration

Field #1: Surcharge transaction fee: This is a merchant’s opportunity to pass along
the cost of Wire Transfer fees to the customer. Enter the amount in dollars and cents.

Field #2: Surcharge transaction percentage: This percentage is in addition to the

surcharge transaction fee. Enter the percentage in decimal. Example “1.5”.

Field #3: Bank Address: A text box is provided for you to enter the entire Bank
Address. Press the “Enter” key at the end of each line.

Field #4 & 5: Account Number & Routing Number: Most businesses have more
than one bank account. In the boxes provided, enter the Routing Number and
Account Number for the appropriate account you want the wire transfer made to.

Transaction Gateways (tab)

There are two parts to this section. First is Transaction Gateways where you select your
gateway provider(s). You will then be shown fields for that gateway’s particular
information requirements. Second is Transaction Gateway Authorization Model where
you select one of three supported models.

Purpose of Transaction Gateways

Transaction gateways provide Internet based interfaces into the major credit card
processing networks like FDC, NDC, Nova, and many more. Transaction gateways are
analogous to a retail merchant’s point-of-sale terminal.

62
Supported Gateways

Currently UltraCart supports over 70 transaction gateways. The transaction gateway a

merchant selects is dependent on the ones that their merchant credit card processing bank
will support. Contact the bank account representative to determine available options,
pricing information, and setup information. After establishing an account with one of the
transaction gateways, complete UltraCart’s gateway configuration.

UltraCart is pleased to be an Authorize.Net Certified

Shopping Cart provider. This certification insures that
UltraCart has passed all the technical requirements for
security and reliability set forth by Authorize.Net.
Merchants can trust the reliability of UltraCart and Authorize.Net

Reasons to Signup with a Gateway

Even if a merchant has a retail point of sale terminal already, they should still consider
signing up with a transaction gateway. UltraCart’s support for transaction gateways
keeps merchants from having to reenter order information to process the order. This
reduces the time to process orders and removes errors from typing. UltraCart also has the
ability to process orders in batch in a parallel fashion. This results in authorizing
hundreds of orders in a matter of seconds. The Accounts Receivable chapter will cover
processing orders with the transaction gateway in more detail.

Limitations of Support

UltraCart has some limitations with regards to transaction gateway integration. UltraCart
only supports charging the customer’s credit card. The transaction gateway’s web site
provides the remaining functionality such as issuing credits, transaction inquiry, etc.

Unsupported Gateways

There are literally hundreds of different transaction gateways available. UltraCart

supports some of the most popular transaction gateways on the market today. If a
merchant credit card processing bank does not offer one of UltraCart’s supported
transaction gateways, please contact support@ultracart.com. Typically, a short amount
of time is required to add support for additional gateways.

63
Figure 51 - Payment Transaction Gateways

To enter your gateway information, click on the checkbox next to the name of your
gateway provider. You will then be shown fields for that gateway’s particular
information requirements. If you have multiple gateway providers, repeat this process for
each provider, being sure to correctly specify which gateway handles which payment
types. (The Figure above shows a sample with one gateway selected which illustrates the
additional fields that appear).

Transaction Gateway Authorization Model

UltraCart supports 3 different authorization models: Auth and capture, Auth then capture,
and Auth only. Different gateway providers support different transaction models so be
sure to read the details provided for each authorization model. You can select the
authorization model UltraCart will use for your account at the bottom of the Transaction
Gateways screen. When completed, click on the “Save” button. You will be returned
Configuration Menu.

64
Figure 52 - Payment Transaction Authorization Model

UltraCart Test Gateway

Only certain gateways allow for a "test" mode, which means you can only use a valid
credit card, and real funds are processed. UltraCart has created a new test transaction
gateway, selectable from the Transaction Gateways tab on the Payments Configuration
screen. This gateway behaves like a real gateway, allowing you to completely test the
system's functionality.

To use the gateway, simply select it from the Transaction Gateways screen, and enter
your Merchant ID. Select the payment types you want the gateway to handle, and press
“Save”.

Figure 53 - UltraCart's Test Gateway

65
Now, when you place a test purchase, you can use any valid credit card number, and
UltraCart will automatically approve the transaction and assign a random authorization
ticket number. If you do not want to use a real credit card number, you can use this test
Visa card number instead: 4444-3333-2222-1111.

To simulate a credit card decline, you must use this Visa card number:
4128-8888-8888-8804.

To simulate an e-check decline, use this account number: 9999999.

Important! Turn off the UltraCart Test Gateway before you go live with your store.

Options (tab)

The third tab on the Payments screen allows you to set general properties that UltraCart
uses to manage the customer purchase experience. Presently, there is only one item in
this section.
Charge During Checkout

The charge during checkout setting allows you to specify whether or not UltraCart will
attempt to charge the customer’s card before the transaction is completed. There are pros
and cons for each method, so please review carefully the information provided before
making a decision. By default, UltraCart does not charge during checkout.

Figure 54 - Options tab

66
Charge During Checkout - NO
To have the credit card processed in the Accounts Receivable Section check the “No”
button. This action will bring up a second part (Transaction Review), requiring another
Yes/No response from you.

Figure 55 - Options Tab-Charge During Checkout – “NO”

Accounts Receivable Transaction Review

The Accounts Receivable Transaction Review allows you to specify what actions
UltraCart will take when an order is completed. You should customize this section to
match your business rule requirements. This section is also a Yes or No selection.

Yes Button
When a transaction is successful the results are shown to you. You must then decide
whether to accept the authorized transaction and allow the order to progress to the
shipping department. If you reject the order based upon the results returned for a
credit card transaction (such as a bad AVS check) then you will have to refund the
credit card using your transaction gateway's website.

No Button
To move a successful order immediately to the shipping department, check the “No”
button. You do not have the opportunity to review the transaction results and
potentially stop an order from progressing to the shipping department. Choose this
option if your transaction gateway supports AVS and CVV2 verification. For
instance Authorize.Net can automatically decline an order if the AVS does not meet a
certain criteria. The gateway is performing the review process automatically based
upon the way it is configured.

Once you’ve made your selection, click on the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen.

67
Charge During Checkout - YES
To charge the credit card in real-time during the checkout process, check the “Yes”
button. Then click on the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen. You will return to
the Configuration Menu.

Note: If the credit card fails during checkout, an error message is displayed to
the user and they have an opportunity to enter a new credit card number. If
the credit card transaction gateway returns an approval code, then the order is
placed and immediately moved to the shipping department.

Figure 56 - Charge During Checkout - Yes

68
Restrictions (tab)

Here you can place restrictions on a any particular payment method. Only the payment
methods you support will be listed under the Payment Method column.

Figure 57 - Payment Restrictions (tab)

Click on the “Edit” button to the right of the payment method you desire to apply
restrictions. You will be taken to the Restrictions Editing Screen.

Figure 58 - Restrictions editing screen

69
Here you can select one of three options for each destination listed. Although you are
dealing with payment methods, many merchants want to limit the countries (and even
P.O. boxes) they accept payments for.

This section can appear confusing at first glance but will become more clear after you
edit and place restrictions on a few of your payment methods.

Any and all restrictions will appear in the Payment Restrictions window after you “save”
your edits (shown below).

Figure 59 - Configured Payment Restrictions

Tests (tab)
It a good practice for new merchants to perform a real transaction or two to test their
payment gateway. It's well worth the trouble (reversing charges) to insure that all the
payment functionality is working the way it's suppose to.

However, there occasionally is need to test functionality of configurations other than the
payment gateway, especially when your store is already "live". Rather than disabling the
payment gateway or running actual purchases, merchants can configure payment
information that will always be considered test data and will automatically approve. This
is very useful in a live scenario where you need to place a test order on your store with
your own credit card, but don't want to deal with the hassle of voiding the charge, etc.

Figure 60 - Payments Tests (tab)

70
Create Payment Test
Click on the "new" button to create test information. The following screen will appear.

Figure 61 - Tests Configuration screen

You can create Test information for either a credit card or electronic check. Click on the
radio button to the left of the one desired. Enter the credit card or electronic check
information in the appropriate fields. Click the Save button when finished. The newly
created Test information will be listed as shown below.

Figure 62 - Payment Test Information

Repeat the steps above to create additional test information as needed.

Click the "edit" button to make changes to an existing Test entry. Click the "delete"
button to remove one.

71
Filters (tab)
This is used by merchants where fraudulent or bogus orders are suspected. You can
configure the system to check for certain data contained in an order and, if a match is
found, send the order to accounts receivable for further screening by you. The customer
will receive a completed order receipt but the transaction will not be processed for
payment until you "approve" it in accounts receivable. The fields that you can have
UltraCart scan are: IP Address Mask, Credit Card Number, and Address Street or Postal
Code.

Figure 63 - Payment Filters (tab)

To create a Filter, click on the "new" button. Complete the fields in the screen that
appears. Click on the "Save" button when finished.

Figure 64 - Filter Configuration screen

IP Address Mask: Enter the IP address of the customer that you suspect is placing the
fraudulent or bogus orders. To obtain the IP addresses for previous
orders, run the Order IP Report from the Reporting Menu.

72
Credit Card Number: Enter the Credit Card Number you obtain from the suspect order.

Address Street: Enter the Address you obtain from the suspect order.

Address Postal Code: Enter the Zip/postal code you obtain from the suspect order.

Auto Note: Enter a text note that you want to appear along with the order.
You can use this as a reminder of particular information about
previous orders from this customer.

Edit or Delete a Filter

Once you've created your filter, it will appear on the filter screen.

To make changes, click the “edit” button. You will be taken back to the original screen
whereby you can make and save your changes.

Click the "delete" button to remove a filter. Caution! You will not receive warning
dialog. Clicking the delete button is not undoable.

Rotating Transaction Gateway

Rotating transaction gateways allow a merchant to spread credit card transactions across
multiple gateways. This feature is Highly ALPHA and intended only for merchants with
substantial transaction volume. Merchants should thoroughly test their configuration
before going live with this feature.

Figure 65 - Rotating Transaction Gateway screen

73
Related Items
UltraCart can automatically suggest items during the checkout process that tend to be
purchased based upon the customer's shopping cart contents. Turning on this feature can
increase your sales over time by exposing customers to additional items during the
checkout process. Please note that changes to these settings take up to 24 hours to take
effect.

Figure 66 - Related Items configuration screen

UltraCart can automatically calculate item relationships using your order history. To
enable this functionality, click on the Yes radio button on the related items screen, and
specify how many relations you would like UltraCart to calculate for each item in your
store (maximum of 10). Click the "Save" button when finished.

Return Policy
A return policy is an important document that outlines the conditions and policies under
which merchandise is returnable. It is very important to specify the terms and conditions
for accepting a return, the process for initiating a return, and the fees associated with
returning a product. Having a detailed and well-defined return policy is an important
component of good customer service for an online store.

The return policy appears on the payment information screen during checkout, on the
customers receipt, and on the packing slip inserted into the shipping container.

Figure 67 - Return Policy

74
Sales Tax
This section of UltraCart allows you to configure the following 3 items: Tax Rates
(Country, State, County, City, & Postal Code), Taxable Address (Billing or Shipping),
and Tools (Sales Tax Clearinghouse Feed File).

Figure 68 - Tax Rate Configuration

75
Tax Rates

UltraCart allows you to configure the appropriate tax rates for your geographic location.
When an order is placed, the tax rate is calculated as the sum of all tax rates matched by
the tax location. For example, if you specify a county tax rate of 1%, a city tax rate of
1%, and a state tax rate of 5%, then a customer in that city will be charged a tax rate of
7%.

Note: all store items are set as taxable upon creation. You can change that setting (per
item) in the Item Editor.

In order to allow you maximum flexibility, UltraCart utilizes a hierarchical tax structure
system. You can specify tax rates at any level of the hierarchy.

Each level (screen) displays two parts; upper and lower. The upper portion displays the
information you are editing. The lower portion of the screen displays the next level in the
hierarchy. For example, if you are at the Country level, the top half of the screen will
display the country that you selected to “edit” from the previous screen (Tax Rate
Configuration) and the lower half displays a listing of the States (if any).

Set-up
Although you can configure a tax rate for a Country, State, County, City and Postal Code
all in succession, the following explains the setup in a one-at-a-time fashion (saving data
as you go) to allow the first-time user an opportunity to become familiar with each of the
steps.

Country
The first field to configure in the Tax Rate configuration screen is the Country. The
message “There are no countries configured…” will be displayed until you add your first
Country. Once you click the “New Country” button the following screen will appear.

76
Figure 69 - Country Tax Rate Configuration

In the Country Field (drop down list) select the country desired. In the next field, enter
the Tax Rate you wish to set for this Country. Click the “Save” button. You will now
return to the tax configuration screen. The following (partial Tax Rates screen) shows a
sample entry of United States and .25% Tax Rate.

Figure 70 - Tax Rate Configuration (partial screen)

To add another Country, click on the “New Country” button and repeat the steps above.
Each Country you add will be listed on this screen once you “Save”. To delete a
Country, click on the “Delete” button. To change the Tax Rate percentage for a
particular Country, click on the “Edit” button to the right of the Country desired.

77
State
To add a State you must be at the Country Tax Rate screen. Click on the “Edit” button to
the right of the Country desired. You will return to the Country Tax Rate configuration
screen. Your Country information will be listed in the upper half of this screen.. The
message “There are no counties configured…” will be displayed until you add your first
State.

Figure 71 - Country Tax Rate Configuration

Adding a State

Click on the “New State” button. The State Tax Rate screen will appear (below/left).
The upper portion of this screen shows the Country that you previously entered along
with new fields to enter your State information.

Figure 72 - State Tax Rate Configuration

78
Select the new state from the drop-down menu and enter the tax rate for that state. Check
the box to indicate that you desire to tax the shipping and handling. If you need to
observe a state tax holiday, enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format in the spaces
provided. Click on the “Add More” button to get more text boxes for additional dates.
Click the "Save" button when finished. You will be returned to the Country Tax Rate
screen (see image above/right) where you can see your configurations (holiday dates are
not shown).

To add another State, click on the “New State” button and repeat the steps above. To
delete a State, click on the “Delete” button. To change the Tax Rate percentage for a
particular State, click on the “Edit” button to the right of the State desired.

County

To add a County you must be at the Country Tax Rate screen. Click on the “Edit” button
to the right of the state desired. The State Tax Rate configuration screen will appear.
Your State information will be listed in the upper half of this screen. The message
“There are no counties configured…” will be displayed in the lower portion of the screen
until you add your first State.

Figure 73 - State Tax Rate

Adding a County

Click on the “New County” button. The County Tax Rate screen will appear. Enter
(type) the County name. Enter the Tax Rate. Click on the “Save” button.

You will be returned to the County Tax Rate screen (see image above/right) and your
County Tax Rate information will be displayed in the lower half of the screen.

79
To add another County, click on the “New County” button and repeat the steps above.
To delete a County, click on the “Delete” button. To change the Tax Rate percentage for
a particular County, click on the “Edit” button to the right of the County desired.

City and Postal Codes

Continue this same process, drilling down to configure your Cities and your Postal
Codes.

Taxable Address

You can select which address from which tax rates should be calculated. This varies by
jurisdiction, so you will need to verify with your local officials the correct settings.

At the Tax Rates Configuration Screen, click on the radio button to the left of either
“Billing” or “Shipping”.

Figure 74 - Tax Rate Configuration

When you have completed your setting, click the “Save” button to continue.

Tools
These tools make dealing with tax rate information easier by importing Tax Information
for certain localities.

80
Import Sales Tax Clearinghouse feed file

The Sales Tax Clearinghouse (STC) offers raw sales tax data by ZIP code with either
quarterly or monthly updates for a fee (www.thestc.com). The data format is a simple,
fixed-length text file containing ZIP code, state, county, city names, and state, county,
city sales and use tax rates. After subscribing, you will receive periodic instructions on
how to download the data file. After downloading the data file, you can configure
UltraCart to automatically import it into your Tax Rate section thus eliminating the
manual entry method.

Note: the STC file must reside on your system in order to enable this feature.

Using this tool, you can import the STC feed file quickly and easily into your UltraCart
store. This is a simple two-step process.

1. File Import field: Either type in the path to your STC feed file or click on the
“Browse” button and navigate to where the file is located on your computer.
2. States field: Manually enter (type) the two-letter abbreviations for all the states
that you would like to import. Each state must be placed on its own line (press
the “enter” key at the end of each abbreviation). Enter “ALL” to import the all
states.

Click the “Continue” button when finished.

Figure 75 - Tax Rate Configuration

81
Import Ohio Tax Finder Data
This wizard will automatically retrieve the latest County Rate Table by Zip for the state
of Ohio and import it automatically into your UltraCart account.

Figure 76 - Import Ohio Tax Rates screen

Click the "Start" button to begin the download and import. This will begin the import
automatically.

Click on the "Start" button to begin. The following screen will appear show import
progress.

Figure 77 - Tax Data Import progress screen

When the import routing has finished, the following confirmation screen will appear.

Figure 78 - Import confirmation screen

82
Import California Sales and Use Tax Data
This wizard will automatically retrieve the latest California Sales and Use Tax data and
import it automatically into your UltraCart account.

Figure 79 - California Sales & Use Tax import

Click the "Start" button when ready to begin. The importing process will begin
automatically with no further intervention necessary. The following screen will appear
showing import progress.

Figure 80 - Tax Data import progress

Once the import routine has completed, the following confirmation screen will appear.

Figure 81 - California tax import confirmation

83
Search Tool
Many merchants, especially those with large numbers of items, place a search page on
their web site to give their customers a way of searching their Items database within
UltraCart. The URL to display the UltraCart Search screen is:
http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-bin/UCSearch?merchantID=DEMO (replace DEMO with
your Merchant ID).

Search Configuration
Merchants can edit the Result Template and also correct common search errors at the
Search Configuration screen. Navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Search

The Search configuration screen is divided into three sections; Result Template, Phrase
Standardization and Phrase Links.

Figure 82 - Search Results screen

84
Search Result Template
The coding for the result template is displayed in this section and is editable. This allows
merchants to customize the way the search results are displayed. We caution merchants
to NOT make changes to this section unless you, or your web designer, are at the expert
level.

Even if you are an accomplished programmer and do indeed plan to make changes, we
strongly advise that you make a copy of the default coding so you can Paste it back in if
the need arises. Click the Save button at the bottom of the screen when finished with your
edits.

Phrase Standardization
Merchants that are utilizing the Search feature can print a report that will show the
phrases that customers have entered into the search criteria fields.

To run the report, navigate to: Main Menu  Reporting  User Searches

By browsing these reports, merchants can correct common search errors (typos, etc) that
yield little or no results. Enter the common search error in the left column and enter the
search word or phrase that you feel should have been entered to get the best results.
Whenever a customer enters a search word that you have listed, UltraCart will substitute
your replacement word when conducting the actual search.

Phrase Links
The section is very much like the Phrase Standardization.

85
Shipping

UltraCart supports an almost limitless combination of shipping methods, and can

calculate shipping costs for USPS, UPS, FedEx, DHL, PeriShip, Watkins LTL, Australia
Post (AU Post) and Canada Post (CA Post) in real time.

The shipping configuration screen contains 6 tabs: Distribution Centers, Checkout

Options, Methods, Packages, Shipper Specific Options and Destination Restrictions.

Distribution Centers Tab

The Distribution Centers Tab allows you to specify the details regarding the location
from which your shipments originate. When you first signed up for UltraCart and
completed the Sign-Up Wizard, you were asked for minimum details regarding your
shipping origination point such as; Zip/Postal Code, State/Province, and Country. The
information you entered then, will be listed in your Distribution Centers section.

Many merchants choose to outsource their pick, pack, and ship operation to a third-party
called a fulfillment provider. UltraCart allows you to automatically transmit your orders
to your fulfillment provider using a variety of mechanisms.

Figure 83 – Distribution Centers Tab

86
To further configure your distribution center, click on the “Edit” button to the right of
your listed distribution center. A screen will appear allowing you to configure details for
your Distribution Center, Shipment Cut-off Times, Transmission Mechanism,
Transmission Schedules and Preference for Shipments to Specific Locations.

Distribution Center
UltraCart is integrated with many Distribution Centers and can electronically transmit
shipment orders directly to them. This of course not only expedites but simplifies your
shipping. If you utilize a third-party fulfillment provider, you should place their
information here. The Distribution Center screen is broken into section in this manual.

Figure 84 - Distribution Center Information

Code
The code field is used to distinguish between one distribution center and another when
merchants use more than one. UltraCart automatically assigns “DFLT” to the first center
listed. You may change this to a code that fits your needs.

Name
It’s probably a good idea to use the name of the Fulfillment Center if you are using one.
If you handle your own shipping, then use a name that is to your liking.

87
Postal Code, State and Country
Enter the Zip/Postal Code, the State/Province, and the Country if not already filled in.

Latitude and Longitude

This is used by our system for distance calculations. Leave this field blank for U.S.
based distribution centers. Our system will automatically configure it for you. For
outside U.S. obtain this information from your distribution center and enter it in the
appropriate fields.

Shipment Cut-off Times

Enter the time of day that the orders must be received in order to ship. Shipment Cut-of
Times will be used to calculate the day the order will ship. Some shippers will provide a
number of days in transit which will be used to tell the customer the estimated date of
delivery. Enter all times in 24 hour, EST format.

Figure 85 - Shipment Cut-off Times Screen

Transmission Mechanism
Many merchants choose to outsource their pick, pack, and ship operation to a third-party.
These are generally called a fulfillment provider. UltraCart allows you to automatically
transmit your orders to your fulfillment provider using a variety of mechanisms.

To enable fulfillment provider support, you need to select a single transmission

mechanism, as well as define a transmission schedule. Once you’ve selected your
fulfillment provider, you will need to configure the transmission mechanism here. Click
on the radio button to the left of the provider’s name. Select “None” if you are not using
a fulfillment provider.

88
Figure 86 - Transmission Mechanism Screen

There are two additional columns for each mechanism; Integration Type and Supported
Shipping Methods.

The Integration Type column will display either 1W (one-way) or 2W (two-way). This
indicates the fulfillment centers communications capabilities. The 1W indicates that
shipping information (orders) will be sent to the fulfillment center but UltraCart will not
receive acknowledgement. Most of these will send acknowledgements (shipping
information) directly to the merchant and/or Customer. The 2W indicates they will send
acknowledgement and shipping info back to UltraCart for updating of the Order record.

The Supported Shipping Methods column has a "view" link. Clicking this link will bring
up a new screen showing the Supported Shipping Methods for that particular fulfillment
center (if available).

89
Once you’ve selected your Transmission Mechanism, the field will expand requiring
additional fields to be completed. Information for these fields will be supplied by your
fulfillment center.

At the bottom of the transmission mechanism list is a check box. Clicking the box will
tell UltraCart to send orders to the shipping department pending action from me. In
doing so, you will have to manually input the tracking information received from your
fulfillment company and mark the order as shipped before the customer will receive a
notification of shipment from UltraCart. This option only applies if you are using a
transport marked as [1W].

Transmission Schedule
Transmission Schedules will only appear for Merchants that have a fulfillment center
configured. Most fulfillment centers desire transmissions of orders at certain periods
rather than randomly. If you do not configure a transmission schedule, UltraCart will
submit each order to your fulfillment provider immediately after the transaction is
complete. Press the “New Schedule” button to configure a transmission schedule.

On the transmission schedule screen, you need to specify a time of day to transmit, as
well as define which days of the week you would like to transmit your orders. For
example, if your fulfillment provider is only open weekdays, you should transmit your
orders only on Sunday – Thursday. Ask your fulfillment provider for instructions on how
to configure this section.

Figure 87 - Configuring a transmission schedule

90
You can configure additional transmission schedules by pressing the “New Schedule”
button. Transmission schedules are not exclusive so each schedule is always active. To
edit or delete a transmission schedule, use the appropriate buttons next to the schedule on
the main fulfillment provider page.

FTP Account
UltraCart provides a virtual FTP account that can be used to exchange files with your
fulfillment house. This FTP server supports both explicit SSL on the control port as well
as SSL encryption on the data port. To enable your FTP account all you need to do after
setting it up with your Distribution Center is to configure the password.

Preferences for Shipments to Specific Locations

By default each distribution center can ship to anywhere around the globe. UltraCart will
select the distribution center that is the shortest distance away from the customer as long
as there is available inventory there. There may be circumstances where you have a
distribution center that can only serve a particular set of places. For instance you may
have a Canadian distribution center that is only meant to handle Canadian orders. Using
preferences you can enforces these types of restrictions.

If you have no preferences defined, you will be greeted with the typical "no preferences
are defined" notice. Click the "new" button to create a shipment preference. The
following screen will appear.

91
 Preference field: Country Field: State field: PostalCode
Select one of the Select the Country from Enter the State or Enter the Postal
three choices from the drop down menu. States desired in Code into the
the drop-down the text box. text box
menu:

Once you have completed your configuration for Location Preference, click the "Save"
button. You will be returned to the Distribution Center screen where you preferences
will be shown.

Figure 88 - Preferences for Shipments screen

To create another preference, click the "new" button and repeat the process. To delete a
preference, click on the "Delete" button. To change a preference, click the Edit button.

Order Status Codes

Order status codes provide a convenient way for organizing and displaying the status of
orders in your shipping department using a series of color codes. UltraCart has five
different statuses by default: back ordered, picking, packing, packed, and released for
shipment. Five empty slots have been provided to allow for custom codes to be defined.
If you require more than five custom codes, save this page and edit the distribution center
again.

92
Figure 89 - Order Status Codes screen

In the above example, we have configured a new Order Status Code. The description and
designated color code (html) will now appear on our Shipping Department screen (non-
distribution center only) as seen on the next page.

Figure 90 - Shipping Department screen

Checkout Options Tab

The checkout options tab allows you to specify what shipping options you want to enable
during the checkout process. To activate one of the features (each are explained below)
place a check mark to the left of your choices.

93
Figure 91 - Checkout Options Tab

Allow customer to select ship date

Turn this feature on to allow customers to enter a Ship Date during checkout.
Allow customer to select delivery date
Turn this feature on to allow customers to enter a Delivery Date during checkout.
The system will determine if the shipping method they choose can deliver the
order by their specified date. If not, a message is displayed notifying them of
such.
Default Shipping to Residential Address
A field is presented to the customer during checkout to allow them to specify if
the shipping address is a Residence or a Business. Turn this feature ON so the
default setting will automatically be for Residential Address. Customers can still
change it to Business during checkout if applicable.
Force Shipping to Residential Address
Some merchants do not want to ship to Business addresses. Turning this feature
on will remove the option to select Business Addresses.
Loose P.O. Box restriction check (default is strict)

94
 A strict restriction check looks to see if this field begins with the letter "P" and
contains the word "box". If you check this box, this field cannot contain the word
"box".
Hide Estimates on View Cart
Customers are shown shipping estimates for the shipping methods you've
configured. Turn this feature ON to prevent the shipping estimations from
appearing in the cart during checkout.
Display Estimates by Carrier and then Cost
Check this box to have the shipping estimates grouped by carrier name and then
by Cost.
Send no shipping methods email
Check this box to have an email notification sent to the merchant when "no
shipping methods" are available for the order. The email will contain the Item
Id(s), Qty and shipping address of the order. This information is supplied so the
merchant can trouble shoot their shipping configuration to help correct the
problem.
Hide Special Instructions
During checkout, a text box is provided to allow the customer to type in Special
Instructions. Turn this feature ON to prevent the Special Instructions text box
from appearing during checkout.
Disable U.S.P.S. Address Standardization
When this field is unchecked, the system will check for a valid address format
structure of; City, State, and Zip combination. Check this box to avoid this
restriction.
Hold Split Shipments in Accounts Receivable
Some merchants have intentionally designated shipments for some items to be
handled by multiple distribution centers (split shipment). Ship estimates take this
into consideration. If an order inappropriately indicates split shipment when the
item(s) are not configured as such, then that order will be held in Accounts
Receivable. This gives the merchant an opportunity to make distribution center
and shipping cost adjustments on the order prior to payment processing.

Maximum Address Line Length

This feature allows merchants to set the maximum number of characters allowed in
the Shipping Address Field. The default is 32 characters.

Insurance Percentage if COGS not specified

One of the fields in the Item Editor is the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS). If this field is
left blank, then the number (percent) enter in this box will apply.

Geo-Location
Geo-Location is a premium service that allows UltraCart to better estimate
shipping costs by utilizing a third-party database of internet address to physical
location mappings. Once you activate this function UltraCart will automatically
calculate the estimated service cost. Your Checkout Options screen will show the
actual cost based upon your cart count for the preceding month. Since UltraCart
uses a third party company to locate your customers, this feature is a premium

95
 service that costs $0.0008 (8/100th of a penny) per cart that is tracked. Based
upon your cart count last month, this service will cost an additional $0.01 per
month (estimate only).

To decide whether to turn this service on or not, consider how many sales are lost
due to poor estimates compared to actual shipping costs to the customer's
destination. Help reduce the shock factor of shipping today and close more sales!

96
Methods Tab

The shipping methods tab allows you to specify the shipping methods you employ.
There are basically 3 steps in this process.
1) Select the shippers you prefer and their methods,
2) Configure specific details such as Cost, Destination Restrictions, Insurance, etc.
3) Set a single shipping method as default.

You will see the remark “No shipping methods have been configured….” if you DID
NOT select shipping methods during the initial “set up” process.

Figure 92 - Shipping Methods screen

Adding Shipping Methods

You can add shipping methods by clicking on the “New Method” button. This will take
you to the Add Shipping Method screen where you will select one of three options.

Figure 93 - Add Shipping Method screen

97
1. All Shipping methods for ………...
A few (very few) merchants utilize many or all of the methods offered by a particular
shipper. The quickest way is to select the name of the shipper from field #1 and press
“Continue”. You will be returned to the Shipping Methods screen and all shippers’
methods will be listed. You can always remove some of these later. You will need to
“edit” to configure certain settings for each shipping method. This will be explained
later.

2. A single built-in shipping method ………...

Most merchants prefer to add methods one at a time. Select the appropriate method
from field #2 (second drop-down list) and press “Continue”. You will be taken to
that individual shipping methods editing screen where you will configure certain
settings for each shipping method. This will be explained below.

3. A custom shipping method named ………...

You can also create a custom shipping method by entering (typing) a descriptive
name into field #3 text box. This option is typically used when you are providing
delivery by means other than normal carriers. Hence, the “Real-time calculation by
carrier” will not be an option when you configure this shipping method. Once you’ve
entered the name of the custom shipping method, click “Continue”. You will be
taken to editing screen where you will configure certain settings (explained below).

Shipping Methods (Configuration)

After you’ve selected your shipping method(s) you will return to the Shipping Methods
screen. All of your selected shipping methods will be listed.

Delete Shipping Method

Merchants should be extremely careful about deleting a shipping method. Especially if
they have completed the configuration (edit) process. To delete a shipping method
simply click on the “Delete” button to the right of the method. Caution! There is no

98
warning dialog. Clicking the delete button immediately deletes the entire shipping
method. There is no “undo”.

Configure Shipping Details

Click on the “Edit” button to the right of a shipping method to configure specific details.
The Shipping Method configuration screen will appear with 7 configurable options
(tabs): Cost, Restrictions, Insurance, Estimated Delivery, Handling Charge, Packages and
Other.

Cost Tab
The Cost tab allows you to set the shipping calculation method for this shipper.
You can select one of the five methods.

Figure 94 - Shipping Method Cost tab

Real-Time Calculation is based upon the shipping distance. UltraCart has the ability to
calculate the cost by using a real-time connection to the shippers system. For instance,
UltraCart's USPS integration allows accurate cost calculations between the shipping
origination and destination addresses.

Order Weight field will expand giving you the

opportunity to enter more specific information. Here
you will enter the Minimum Order Weight (select LB
or KG), and enter the Shipping Charge for each. The
screen provides for 5 initial entries but can be increased
by 5 each time you click on the “Add More” button.
You cannot add lines until you have completed the
previous 5. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

99
 Order Subtotal is another expanded field. Here you simply
enter the subtotal amount of the order and the shipping charge
at that subtotal level. Again, you have five rows but can add 5
additional (at a time) by clicking on the “Add More” button.
Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Order Percentage is much like the Order Subtotal option

except that you will enter the percentage amount of the
subtotal that you want the shipping cost to be.

Store Item option is limited to stores with 50 store items or

less. Once you click on the button to the left, this field will
display your store items alphabetically. Simply enter the
Shipping Charge for each specific item. Click on the
“Save” button when finished.

Some merchants choose a very simplistic shipping configuration using custom methods
such as "Domestic" and "International" and assess average fees for both. Based upon the
preferred shipper, merchants should select several of the built-in options.
Restrictions (tab)
There are 5 configurable restrictions under this tab; Destination Restrictions, Payment
Method Restrictions, Pricing Tier Restrictions (if configured), Weight Restrictions and
Ship on Day of Week Restrictions.

Destination Restrictions
The Destination Restrictions tab allows you to
specify to which locations and location types
the specified shipping method services. For
each of the options, you can select Invalid
For, Valid For, and Valid Only For. Many
merchants use these methods to allow for
USPS only when shipping to APO/FPO
addresses. You can select any combination of

100
values, but UltraCart will ignore any invalid selection choices. Click on the “Save”
button when finished.

Payment Method Restrictions

This section allows you to specify the payment method restrictions that you desire to
have placed on this shipping method. Similar to the Destination Restrictions, you can
select Invalid For, Valid For, and Valid Only For options.

Figure 95 - Payment Method Restrictions

Pricing Tier Restrictions

Again, similar to the previous restriction settings, merchants that have configured Pricing
Tiers they can restrict said pricing tiers per shipping method

Figure 96 - Pricing Tier Restrictions screen

Weight Restrictions
Some shippers have Weight Restrictions for some shipping methods. Therefore, this
option will allow a merchant to have a shipping method available only when certain
weight criteria are met. By setting weight restrictions, UltraCart will not recommend
those not meeting the criteria that you configure base on the total weight of the items in
the cart. Keep in mind that this setting is for a particular shipping method.

Figure 97 - Weight Restrictions screen

101
There are three fields to be completed for both the Total Shipment and the Individual
Package. Select the applicable Quality Operator (less than, more than, etc.) from the first
drop down list. Then enter the applicable amount. Lastly, select LB, OZ, or KG. in the
last drop-down list.

Ship on Day of Week Restrictions

This section offers the ability to restrict shipping to occur on a certain day of the week.
Click on the check box to the right of the day of the week that you DO NOT want
shipping to occur.

Figure 98 - Ship on Day of Week Restrictions

Insurance Tab
Click on the Insurance Tab to configure the way UltraCart calculates insurance costs.
The settings vary depending on the shipping carrier or method. Here we describe the
three most common:
o Real-time calculation by [method] (appears only if the shipper offers it)
o Based upon the order subtotal
o None

Figure 99 - Insurance Tab

102
Real-Time Calculation
An additional (optional) field will appear that allows you to set a minimum package
value. Calculation will not occur until the package value is over this amount.

Based upon the order subtotal

This option allows you to enter the Insurance Cost (dollar amount), Increment (per dollar
amount) and minimum quantity (dollar amount).

None
Click the radio button to the left of the “None” option to have no insurance costs
calculated.

Click the "Save" button after making your selection.

Estimated Delivery Tab

You can provide your customer with an estimation of the delivery date. There are five
different ways to specify the information; Real-Time, specified number of days, range of
days, number of weeks, or range of weeks.

Figure 100 - Estimated Delivery Tab

103
Simply click the radio button to the left of your choice and enter the information in the
boxes provided. Select the radio button to the left of “None” if no Estimated Delivery
time is desired.

Click on the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen when finished. Click the “Return
to shipping methods” link if you've decided to make no changes.

Handling Charge Tab

There are various charges that merchants encounter when shipping some products. For
example, some countries require special shipping documents or other handling
considerations that increase shipping costs. UltraCart provides the ability to add
additional shipping (handling) charges and discounts per shipping method.

While at the specific Shipping Method screen, click on the "Handling Charge" tab.

There you will find 3 sections; Markup, Discount, and Handle Charge. Each one is
discussed below.

Markup
In the top portion of this screen you can establish Markup fees to be passed on to the
customer. Enter a Flat Fee or Percentage for mark up. You can also indicate a rate for
First Item, Each Additional Item, Residential Delivery, Hazardous Materials Fee (Per
Package or Per Entire Shipment) and/or an additional fee (amount) for Minimum Order
(amount).

Make your entries in the appropriate fields and click the "Save" button at the bottom of
the screen.

104
Discount
Merchants can provide a percentage discount for Commercial and/or Residential.
Additionally, you can offer a percentage Discount based on minimum weight also for
Commercial and/or Residential delivery. Enter your percentages in the appropriate fields.

You can offer Percentage discount by Weight. Enter you minimum weight in the field
provided. Then select LB, OZ or KG from the drop-down list. Then enter the
Commercial or Residential percentage discount in the fields to the right. Click the
"Save" button at the bottom of the screen.

Handling Charge
This section displays all of the countries from which you allow orders (see page 34).

Enter the dollar amount you want to charge in the field for each Country.

State Handling Charge

Additionally, you can establish individual State handling charges for each Country. Click
on the “Edit” button to the right of the country to bring up the following screen.

105
Enter the handling charge associated with each state/province. For the United States, use
the two letter abbreviation. For APO/FPO destinations, use the two letter abbreviations
show on this screen. 10 blank fields are initially provided. Click the “Add More” button
if additional fields are needed. Click the “Save” button when finished.

Packages Tab
This section allows you to select packages (if previously defined) for a particular
shipping method. If you haven’t previously defined packages, you will see the familiar
“No packaged are defined…” message. Defining packages is covered later in this chapter.

Figure 101 - Packages screen

Configured packages will be listed on the left of this screen. Click in the check box for
each package desired. You can also set a Maximum Package Length (optional) for a
particular country. Again, those countries previously established at Configuration 

106
Allowed Countries will be listed here. This is usually only necessary for large packages
to international countries via USPS. Enter the Maximum Length and the set either inches
(IN) or centimeters (CM) from the drop-down list.

Click the "Save" button when finished.

Other Tab
This section contains seven items; Maximum Package Count, Maximum Weight,
Comment, Display Name, QuickBooks™ Code (if activated), Qualifies for free shipping
(with optional weight) and Free Shipping based upon order subtotal.

Figure 102 - Other Shipping Configuration Tab

Maximum Package Count

This field allows you to limit the number of packages per shipment via this Shipping
Method. Let’s say you didn’t want to ship via DHL if it’s more than two boxes. You
would set the maximum package count to “2”.

Maximum Weight
This is primarily used when you are not using the real-time shipment calculations since
the real-time method will determine the appropriate methods based on the weight of the
item(s) being purchased.

107
Enter the maximum weight in the box provided and specify either LB or KB in the drop
down menu to the right of the field.

Comment
Use the comment field to add a descriptive comment to the right of the Shipping method
name, for clarity to the customers, if needed.

Display Name
Here you can customize how the shipping method appears. Whatever you enter in this
field will replace the standard name. Merchants should use some caution here to avoid
confusion for the customer.

QuickBooks™ Code
Enter the code for UltraBooks/QuickBooks™ migration. This option will only be
available if UltraBooks is configured. See Chapter 13 for information on UltraBooks.

Qualifies for free Shipping

Check this box if you want to offer free shipping for this Shipping Method.

Optionally, you can restrict the free shipping based upon the weight of the shipment in
either of the following ways (using the drop down list):
 Less than (<)
 Less than or equal to (<=)
 Equal to (=)
 Greater than or equal to (>=)
 Greater than (>)

Once you have selected the symbol of choice, enter the weight amount in the box
provided. Also select LB or KG from the drop down list to the right.

Free Shipping if order subtotal

You can also specify Free Shipping based upon the order subtotal. Enter the dollar
amount in the box to the right of this field. This will allow Free Shipping for this
Shipping Method (when selected by the customer) when the order subtotal is equal to or
greater than the amount entered here.

Free Shipping if item count

Allow 3rd Party Billing

Presently active for Merchants that use Interact Fulfillment company ONLY.

Signature Required if Subtotal

Filter other methods when this one is available

108
No real-time charge

Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Default Shipping Method

Once you have configured all of your shipping methods, you need to set one of them as a
default. The one that you indicate here will be “selected” as default at checkout.

Figure 103 - Default Shipping Method Selection

At the Methods Tab, click on the “Make Default” button to the right of the shipping
method that you desire to be the default. The word “Yes” will then appear under the
Default column. Click the “Save” button when finished. You will be returned to the
Configuration Menu.

Packages Tab

UltraCart allows you to configure the packages that are available for shipping items to
customers. Packages are used to determine the packing solution that will be used to
deliver an order and calculate the total shipping charge.

109
Please note that you do not have to configure packages for shipping estimations. If
packages are not defined then UltraCart will use a more simplistic shipping estimation
based solely on the weight of the items being shipped. Configuring packages allows you
to take advantage of special rates for specific package types and simplifies multi-package
shipments.

The following shows the Packages Tab screen. You will see the message “No packages
have been configured…” until you have done so.

Figure 104 - Packages screen

New Package
To configure packages, click on the “New Package” button. The following screen will
appear.

110
Figure 105 - Package configuration screen
New Package

When configuring a new package you will define the following: Name (for your recall),
Outside and Inside dimensions, Fill Capacity in percentage, Weight, Maximum Packed
Weight, Cost and Special Type (selected from drop-down menu).

You will also define which shipping methods you want to allow use of this package by
checking the box to left of the shipping methods listed (that you have previously
defined). Click the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen when completed.

Once your packages are configured they will be listed on your Packages Screen.

111
Delete Package
To permanently remove a package from the system, click on the “Delete” button.
Caution! There will be NO warning dialog and this action is “undoable”.

Edit Package
Click on the “Edit” button to return to the configuration screen and make any changes
desired.

Shipper Specific Options

This screen is designated for those merchants to configure their special accounts with
FedEx, FedEx Freight, UPS, Endicia Dazzle, Watkins and/or PeriShip. Once you’ve
received our account number and all required information from the carrier, enter the
information on this screen. Click the “Save” button at the bottom when finished.

When configuring FedEx, you will need to have UltraCart obtain a Meter Number for
you. Simply enter your Account Number and then click the “Obtain Meter Number”
button. Once the Meter Number is auto-filled, complete the remaining fields.

112
Figure 106 - Shipper Specific Options Tab

113
Destination Restrictions

UltraCart allows merchants to restrict (prohibit) shipping to an entire state, certain cities
within a state, and/or certain Postal Codes within a City. If you want to prohibit shipping
to an entire country, then you should remove that country from the approved list at the
“Allowed Countries” configuration screen (see page 34).

On the Destination Restrictions screen, the message “No destination restrictions are
configured….” will appear until at least 1 has been added. Click on the “New” button to
configure destination restrictions.

Figure 107 - Destination Restrictions Tab

To create a new restriction, click on the “New” button. The following screen will appear.

Figure 108 - Destination Restrictions configuration screen

You can set up Destination Restrictions at the State level to block the entire State, at the
City level to block a City, or at the Postal Code level to block a single Postal Code within
the City. If you enter a Postal Code you need to check the “Block orders in this
city/postal code”. For example, if you entered “United States, California, Salinas, 93901

114
and clicked the “Block orders in this city/postal code” radio button, then only 93901
Postal Code would be blocked.

You must create and save each restriction one-at-a-time. Be certain to enter valid
information as UltraCart does not confirm your data.

Hint: There may be situations where you want to allow delivers to one postal code and
block all others. Rather than entering separate restrictions for all the postal codes to
block (which could be numerous in large cities), you can enter the single postal code
desired and click on “Block orders in cities/postal codes other than this one”.

The Validity field only needs to be checked if and when a city/postal code is specified.
Click the “Save” button when finished.

Once you have configured and “saved” a restriction, it will appear in the list on the main
Destination Restrictions screen.

Figure 109 - Destination Restrictions (configured)

Two buttons will be visible to the right of each restriction listed. Click on the “Delete”
button to remove the restriction. Caution! No warning dialog will appear. The Delete
action is undoable!

To make changes, click on the “Edit” button, enter your changes and click “Save”.

115
Ship Date - Delivery Date

A new feature has been added that allows merchants to offer their customers the ability to
enter their desired "ship date" or "delivery date" during the checkout process.

If you've configured a carrier (shipping method) that provides real-time estimated

delivery, such as FedEx, then this feature can provide a valuable service to your
customer. It allows them to determine which method will be the cheapest option for them
to receive the product on a certain day. It's also great for merchants that support gift
giving. Make sure your gift arrives for a birthday, etc.

Configuration

There are three (3) sections in UltraCart that need to be configured in order to insure the
Ship / Delivery Date feature will properly function. They are Estimated Delivery (page
103), Checkout Options (page 93) and Shipment Cut-Off times (page 86), all of which
are configurable at Main Menu  Configuration  Shipping.
Estimated Delivery
You must select an Estimated Delivery for each of the shipping methods you want the
Ship/Delivery Date feature for.

Main Menu  Configuration  Shipping  Methods [tab]  Edit  Estimated Delivery

At the Estimate Delivery screen, you need to identify an estimation of the delivery date.

Figure 110 – Shipping Estimated Delivery screen

116
Click on the radio button for your choice and fill in the blanks on that line. Click the
"Save" button when finished.

Checkout Options
The next step is to turn on the checkout options for ship date and/or delivery date.

Main Menu  Configuration  Shipping  Checkout Options [tab]

Figure 111 - Shipping Checkout Options screen

Click on the radio button for either Allow customer to select ship date or Allow customer
to select delivery date. It's most likely you will not want to offer both. The most
common and most useful to customers would be the delivery date. Click the "Save"
button at the bottom of the screen when finished.

Shipment Cut-off Times

The shipment cut-off times establish the time of day that the order MUST be received in
order to be shipped. This gives the shipper the ability to estimate delivery dates.

Main Menu  Configuration  Shipping  Distribution Center [tab]

At this screen you'll simply enter the time for each day of the week.

117
Enter the time in 24 hour format (as shown above). Click the "Save" button when
finished.

Order Process

When the Delivery Date has been configured the shipping page will allow the customer
to select their desired Deliver Date. UltraCart will then calculate shipping cost and
present the lowest cost shipping method that can deliver on that date. The following is
how the Shipping Address screen appears.

The customer enters their Shipping Information and Delivery Date. UltraCart will quickly
calculate shipping dates and cost and present them on the Shipping and Payment
preference screen. If the customer leaves the Delivery Date blank, then UltraCart will
show all the configured shipping methods and when the order will arrive.

118
Remember, the lowest shipping cost that meets the delivery date will be displayed. The
receipt will be displayed once the customer continues and finalizes the order. The ship
date and the delivery date are also displayed on the receipt.

Remember, the lowest shipping cost that meets the delivery date will be displayed.

Figure 112 - Receipt with Ship & Delivery Dates

119
Shipping Department Views

Since the ship date is critical, merchants can now view their orders "by ship date" in two
different methods within the Shipping Department.

Main Menu  Order Management  Shipping

The first method is by changing the view of all the pending orders
 Select "by ship date" in the drop-down list and then click the "Change View"
button above that field to apply the new setting.
The second method is to filter the orders list by “ship date”.
 Enter the date desired in the text box in the upper right corner and click the “View
Orders” button. Only the orders to be ship on that date will appear in the list.

The "by ship date" view is also configurable in the Accounts Receivable department.

Figure 113 – Accounts Receivable (by ship date) view

The second method is by viewing only orders scheduled for shipping on a certain date.
To do so, locate the "Ship Date:" in the upper right corner of the shipping department.

120
Single Page Checkout
The single page checkout places most of the checkout information on a single, scrolling
page (screen). This eliminates customers having to click on a next or continue button to
navigate through the checkout process, page-by-page. This condensed checkout process
may or may not be suitable for some merchants. The single page checkout of UltraCart is
not meant to have the same exact features as the regular checkout.

Features that are supported on the single page checkout:

 Regular items
 Items w/options
 All shipping methods
 All discounting schemes
 Coupons
 Credit Cards / PayPal Express
Checkout / Google Checkout
 Auto orders items (only those that
are upsells). Auto order items
where the customer can select their
frequency or not.
 Advertising Sources
 Upsell After

Features that are specifically not

supported:

 Related Items
 Gift giving
 Special instructions on the
shipment
 Check / E-Check / Money Order /
Purchase Order / Wire Transfer
 Customer profile logins during
checkout
 Customer profile address books
 Any other feature not specifically listed in the supported list above.

If you are comfortable with the limitations of the single page checkout, you can enable it
for your store. Log in to your account and navigate to:
Main Menu  Configuration  Shopping Cart Checkout Configuration  Single Page Checkout [link].

Click on the checkbox to the right of the "Enable Single Page Checkout" field. Then
click on the "Save" button.

121
Shopping Cart Look & Feel Configuration

In this section you can configure four (4) elements of your cart: Checkout Text, Dynamic
Pricing, Passive Branding, and Screen Branding Themes.

Figure 114 - Shopping Cart Look & Feel

Checkout Text
UltraCart checkout is available in different languages. This feature allows merchants to
further tune the checkout by adjusting the text used within the entire checkout process
(screens). Navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Look & Feel  Checkout Text

Figure 115 - Checkout Text screen

To edit some of the wording (text) that appears on checkout screens, click on the "edit"
but to the right of the language you have configured for your checkout. The following
screen will appear (we've used English for our examples):

122
Figure 116 - Checkout Text Editor screen

Locate the Standard Message you want to modify and enter "your message" in the
column to the right. Continue making desired changes and click the "save" button at the
bottom of the screen when finished. Hint! Most browsers have a "find" (Ctrl+F) feature
that allows you to search a page (a letter at a time) for content. This will be extremely
helpful as this screen is very lengthy.

Given that changes on this text editor screen will make changes that all your customers
will see, it's recommended that administrators use caution in granting Permissions to this
page.

Dynamic Pricing
Dynamic pricing is the process of embedding images for the prices of each individual
item into web pages. UltraCart generates the images based upon the current price of the
item. By leveraging dynamic pricing throughout a merchant's website the price of an
item can be changed and the website immediately reflects the change without the need to
edit and upload a new html page. Merchants that have a very large inventory or one
whose prices change frequently should seriously consider using dynamic pricing.

There are 4 steps to configure dynamic pricing: Select a Font Style, Set the Font Size,
Set the Font Color and Font Smoothing. Whenever you make a change to any setting
during these steps, the real-time preview at the bottom of the screen will update to reflect
the current settings. You can use this to accurately match your existing web site design.

Step 1 - Select a Font Style for your price images.

123
 UltraCart provides a wide variety of fonts to match just about any web design.
To choose a font, click on the radio button to the left of the sample price and
press the "Continue" button.

Figure 117 - Selecting a font style

Step 2 - Set the Font Size.

This screen provides examples, in the style you selected, of font sizes. Make
your choice using the drop down menu.

124
Figure 118 - Selecting a font size

Step 3 - Set The Font Colors.

This section allows you to set your fonts foreground and background colors.
Click on the Pallet Icon to the right of the coding to bring up a color pallet.
Once the pallet appears, click on the color of choice. Repeat the process for
choosing the background color.

Figure 119 - Selecting a font color

125
Step 4 - Enabling Font Smoothing Preference
Font smoothing smoothes the edges of the font by blending them in with the
background color. If you enable this option, be sure to set the background color
to the same as your website's background. If your website uses a background
image, select a background color (step 3) that is similar to the average color of
the background image.

A mouse click on the box to the left of “enable font smoothing” will place a
check mark into the box and enable Font Smoothing. To disable, mouse click
again to remove the check mark.

Figure 120 - Font Smoothing Preference

To implement your Dynamic Pricing, see Embedding Dynamic Pricing on page 276.

Real Time Preview and Show Background

A Real-Time Preview is provided at the bottom of the screen to provide an immediate

view of your choices. Whenever you make a change to any setting during these steps, the
real-time preview will update to reflect the current settings. You can use this to
accurately match your existing web site design.

The "show background button" displays the color you selected in Step 3 to give you an
idea of how your font & color will appear on your web page. Click in the check box to
enable the show background feature. Click again to disable.

126
When you are satisfied with your choices, press the Save button to commit your changes.
You will then be shown one final preview of your selections. If you need to make any
changes, simply return to Dynamic Pricing screen. Your previous settings will be
automatically configured for you to modify.

Figure 121 - Final Preview Screen

127
Screen Branding

UltraCart allows for a tremendous level of flexibility in customizing the look & feel of
your cart. If you brand your shopping cart pages, a customer will not be able to tell any
difference between pages hosted on your servers and pages hosted by UltraCart.

At first, it may seem a little awkward to have a special graphics management piece to the
UltraCart branding. Intuitively the graphics could reside on the same web server that a
merchants website exists, but the technical details of secure page downloads requires all
content (html page and graphics) to come from a secure web server. If some of the
content on a page does not come from a secure web server, the secured page icon at the
bottom of the web browser will not appear. By using the UltraCart graphics management
system (Screen Branding), you can avoid having to purchase a secure server certificate
for your server, saving as much as $400/yr.

Remember that graphics used within branding pages must come from the UltraCart
Graphics Management system.

The Basics

There are basically only two main steps to accomplish [basic] Screen Branding. One is to
upload your graphic(s) to UltraCart and the other is to insert the Graphic Link (generated
by our system) to the screen layout desired. The following briefly outlines the steps
within UltraCart to place a graphic on a screen. You will find a more detail version later
in this chapter.

Upload your graphic(s) to UltraCart.

1. Determine which graphic(s) you want to upload.
2. Identify where (path) they reside on your system.
3. Navigate to the Screen Branding Themes section of UltraCart.
Main Menu  Configuration  Screen Branding Themes
4. Enter the Theme Editor by clicking on the “Edit” button to the right of the
default theme.
5. Click on the Graphics Tab.
6. Type the location (path) of the graphic in the field provided and click on the
“Upload” button.

Insert the Graphic Link code into the desired Screen Branding window.
7. Obtain the Graphics Link.
a. from the Graphics Library screen click on the “View” button to
visually confirm your graphic appears (click on the browser “back”
button to return).
b. click on the “Link” button to the right of the graphic desired.
c. elect and copy the HTML coding from the top box (Img Tag).
d. return to the Graphics Library.
8. Paste the HTML Img Tag into the desired Brandable Screen.
a. from the Graphics Library Screen, click on the “Screens Tab”.

128
 b. click on the “Edit” button to the right of the desired screen.
c. paste the Graphics Link HTML code (should still be on your
clipboard).

Screen Branding Themes

UltraCart supports multiple themes for the checkout. Most merchants only use a single
theme (the default) for the look of their screens. There are a few merchants however that
will utilize multiple themes for transitions in the look of their website. For instance,
some merchants may create a theme to brand the checkout so that it looks like an
affiliate’s website that is sending traffic to their site.

Figure 122 - Screen Branding Themes

The Screen Branding Themes page will list all your themes. There are four columns
which will show the Code, Description, Default and Options.

We have already created a “default” theme for you. This will likely be the only theme
you create and if so, it will be the only theme listed here and the only one that you will
deal with.

If you do create other themes (discussed later), delete buttons will appear for each one.
Since you cannot delete the default theme, it will never have a “Delete” button. You will
however, be able to switch the default to other themes.

See “Using Secondary Screen Branding Theme” on page 138 to learn how to set your
buy link HTML target for a secondary theme.

129
Theme Editor

To populate your first (default) theme, click on the “Edit” button under the Options
column. This action will take you to the Theme Editor Screen.

Figure 123 - Theme Editor Screen

The Theme Editor has 4 parts: Theme, Graphics Library, Screens and Conversion and
Tracking. In this module you can set or change the Code and Name of your theme,
upload graphics to your Graphics Library, edit html for the header and footer for any of
the brandable pages and configure your conversion and tracking code (snippets) for many
third party tracking systems.

Theme Tab

Here you will assign a Code for your theme. The Code field is limited to 10 characters.
You can change this to your liking or leave as “DFLT”. If you have only one Theme, it
will be the default and UltraCart will use it regardless of its naming.

Second you must give your theme a Description. This naming is solely for your
convenience to help you identify the theme. This will become more evident if you create
multiple themes.

Once you have completed the naming, you can either click on the “save” button (saves
your edits) or click on the “Return to theme list” button (will not save your edits). Either
action returns to the Screen Branding Themes

Graphics Library Tab

130
The graphics library stores all your images, cascading style sheets (CSS), shockwave, and
javascript files that are needed to brand your checkout. It is important to upload
everything needed for your checkout screen branding into the graphics library so the
pages can be served up securely.

There are two sections to this screen; Graphics Files, where you will see your uploaded
graphics listed and Upload Graphics, where you actually navigate within your system to
identify and locate which graphics are to be uploaded to the UltraCart server.

Figure 124 - Graphics Library Tab

On your first trip to this screen you will see the following message: “There are no
graphic files uploaded……” This message will disappear once you upload your first
graphic.

You must first know where your graphics reside on your system (which folder). If you
know the path to the file, you can simply type it into the “filename” field. If not, click the
“Browse” button. A dialog window will appear in your browser. Locate the file on your
computer/system and then click OPEN. The filename (path) will appear in the filename
field and will look something like this:

Click on the “Upload Graphic(s)” button to complete the upload function.

131
Note: To make it more convenient for sites with a lot of images we support the
uploading of a ZIP file. Compress (zip) your files into one “.Zip” file and upload it in the
same manner as explained above. UltraCart will automatically unzip and list them as
separate files in the Graphics Library.

Once you’ve successfully uploaded your graphic, the theme editor screen will change in
appearance. Each and every graphic will appear in a list showing its filename and size
(in KB). In addition, new buttons will be added and labeled View, Link and Delete.

Figure 125 - Graphic Files list

View Button
Clicking on “View” button will provide a screen view of your graphic. This gives you an
opportunity to insure that it is indeed the graphic you wanted. Click on your browsers
“back” button to return to the graphics library screen.

Figure 126 - Browser view of uploaded graphic

Link Button
Clicking on the “Link” button will take you to the Graphic Link screen which gives you a
preview of the actual “Img Tag” and “Img URI” html code. This code can be “copy and
pasted” into any brandable screens header/footer.

132
Figure 127 - Graphic Link screen

Img Tag
The IMG element allows an image file to be inserted within an HTML document. This
lets you include pictures and figures within a document as opposed to having hypertext
links that retrieve and display images in a separate viewing window. SRC gives the URI
of the image document.

Experienced HTML coders can enhance the Img Tag (at the Theme Editor) to manipulate
the graphics alignment, look and other attributes.

Img URI
The Img URI is the unique name used to access a resource (the graphic in this case).
Download Image
If for some reason the merchant needs the graphic back onto their system (lost the file,
etc.), they can download it by clicking the "Download" button for that image. A dialog
box will appear offering to open or save the file to your system.
Delete Button
Clicking the “Delete” button will remove the graphic from our system. It will not
interfere with the graphic at it’s location on your system!

Screens Tab
The screens tab will list all the brandable screens. For your convenience, brandable
pages (screens) are grouped logically based upon the portion of the system they are in.
The groups are: Checkout, Web Features, Account Management and Miscellaneous.

133
Figure 128 - Brandable Screen Tab

134
Editing Brandable Screens
Clicking on the “Edit” button to the right of any screen name will take you to the Screen
Branding Page. This screen provides two boxes to enter your screen branding HTML for
this particular screen. Enter (type or “copy & paste”) the necessary HTML into the space
provided for both the Header and Footer as needed.

Figure 129 - Screen Branding editor

Which Editor?
UltraCart does not require any specific HTML editor in order to develop a branded page.
Most graphical editors such as Macromedia Dreamweaver or Microsoft FrontPage are
good choices. Some merchants with good knowledge of HTML prefer to us a simple text
editor like Microsoft Windows’ Notepad.

How Branding Works

UltraCart allows wrapping the default page layouts, for all the screens that are generated
by UltraCart, with custom header and footer HTML content. With this technique,
merchants can specify content surrounding the fixed contents of the UltraCart generated
pages. This process allows the merchant to place specific HTML elements to each page
above, below, to the left, and to the right of fixed contents for each page.

135
Figure 130 - Branding Header and Footer Areas
(Screen capture courtesy of HobbyZone.com)

Rules for Html Pages

There is only one limitation when developing the branding content. An html page cannot
have a <FORM> tag that spans from the header section to the footer section. If a
designer does this, their <FORM> tags wrap the <FORM> tags in the UltraCart
generated content in an invalid way. This occurs most often when a merchant's branding
has a toolbar across the top containing a navigation drop down box along with some
JavaScript to cause a page to load when a customer selects an entry in the list. If the
branding contains this type of navigation, make sure the </FORM> tag appears in the
header and not the footer.

Techniques for Branding Design

There is a very simple technique for designing a branded page and then splitting it into its
header and footer html snippets. In a graphical html designer, create a table that has one

136
row, one column, and a border of zero. Inside the table's cell, enter the text
"ULTRACART CONTENT HERE.” Then surround the table with any html content.

Once the page has the appropriate look, switch the html editor into its source mode (the
mode that shows the individual html tags). In the source mode view, selecting everything
to the left and above the text "ULTRACART CONTENT HERE" represents the header
html snippet. Selecting everything to the right and below the text "ULTRACART
CONTENT HERE" represents the footer html snippet.

Applying Branding to other screens

We have provided a column to the right that displays a listing of all brandable screens.
This allows you to apply the present branding (of the screen you are working on or
viewing) to any or all other brandable screens. This eliminates the need to edit each
brandable screen with the same HTML code.

Click on the check box to the left of the screen name you wish to apply the branding to. If
you desire the same branding on all screens in the list, simply click on the “Select All”
box at the top of the column.

Save and Preview

Two buttons are provided at the bottom of the screen. Click the “Save” button to save
all your settings. You will return to the Screens page. If you want to preview your work
before returning, click on the “Save and Preview” button. This action will display your
page along with your branding in your browser. Click the “back” button of your
browser to return to the Screen Branding page.

Adding Additional Themes

To add additional themes return to the Screen Branding Themes page. Click on the “New
Theme” button. This action will again take you to the Theme Editor screen. The
process from there will be the same as you did when editing your first (default) theme.
All additional themes created will appear on the Theme Editor screen.

Setting the Default Theme

Once you have created more than one theme, UltraCart wants to know which one of these
you want to use as your default. Simply click on the “Make Default” button to the right
of the theme desired. Notice that the word “Yes” now appears in the Default Column for
this Theme. The “Make Default” and “Delete” buttons now moved to the other Theme.
If a third and subsequent theme is/are created, they too will have the “Make Default” and
“Delete” buttons available.

137
Deleting a Theme
Deleting an existing theme is straight forward. Make certain this is the action desired as
it cannot be reversed. Click on the “Delete” button to the right of the theme desired.

Using Secondary Screen Branding Theme

Some merchants chose to have a particular store item displayed in the cart utilizing a
secondary screen branding theme they have created. This could even be from a totally
different Web Store selling the same items.

To accomplish this, an additional parameter must be appended to the buy link in order to
have the secondary screen branding theme applied during checkout.

Add this parameter to your buy links that are coming from the secondary domain
requiring a different theme (excluding the quote symbols):

"&ThemeCode="

The following example assumes the secondary screen branding theme for merchant
account "DEMO" is called "2NDTHEME" and the store item is "BONE".

Example buy link using non default screen branding: http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-

bin/UCEditor?MERCHANTID=DEMO&ADD=BONE&ThemeCode=2NDTHEME

Passive Branding
UltraCart can automatically place a small “Powered By UltraCart” graphic on the bottom
of your view cart pages. This icon lets your customers know that your store is powered
by UltraCart and gives them confidence that their ordering process will go smoothly. If a
customer wants more information on UltraCart, they can click on the logo and a new
browser window will open with information about UltraCart. The customer shopping
experience will not be interrupted. We would appreciate it if you enable this option.

Figure 131 - Passive Branding Configuration

138
Back Office

The Back Office section allows you to configure the systems that help you manage the
order processing and fulfillment requirements of your online store.

The Back Office consists of 17 sections: Amazon Turk, aMember, Auto Order
Processing, Email Addresses, Exporting Orders, Froogle, Internet Explorer, Old Order
Handling, Order Retention, Printable Documents, QuickBooks Terms and Lists, Receipt,
Report Delivery, Sales Force.com, Shipment Notification, UltraBooks and XML Post
Back.

Amazon Turk

THIS FEATURE IS ALPHA AND CURRENTLY REQUIRES ASSISTANCE FROM

ULTRACART PROFESSIONAL SERVICES TO USE.

Mechanical Turk is a service offered by Amazon that allows you to hire workers for
small projects (i.e., writing copy for your website) without ever having to directly
interface with your workers. You create the Human Intelligence Task (HIT), set the price,
and the work just happens. When the result comes back you simply decide whether you
approve or not.

UltraCart's Mechanical Turk integration allows you to take this concept one step further
without leaving the UltraCart system. You can create jobs on Mechanical Turk directly
from UltraCart, which allows you to do things like having an article written about each
product in your catalog for better search engine optimization. Once you send the job off,
you simply wait. When the resultant work comes back (i.e., articles for each product) -
which typically takes less than a day - you examine and approve them, and the results go
directly into your catalog.

At the configuration screen, you simply enter your Access Key Id and Secret Access Key.
Click the Save button when finished. The actual project is defined at Main Menu 
Mechanical Turk.

139
aMember Integration
UltraCart now provides seamless, one-click integration with the aMember membership
management system.

About aMember
aMember is a flexible membership and subscription management PHP script that allows
you to setup paid-membership areas on your site. It can also be used without any payment
system - you can manage users manually.

Setting up aMember
First, you will need to enable XML-RPC support within the aMember platform. To do
this simply log into your aMember administration console. Click on
Setup/Configuration in the left hand navigation, then click on the Advanced link at the
top. Scroll to the bottom of the page, and you will see a section for XML-RPC
configuration.

Figure 132 - aMember XML-RPC Integration screen

Click to enable the XML-RPC library, and specify a desired user name & password, then
click "Save".

Next, log into UltraCart and navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Back Office [section]  AMember [link]

140
Figure 133 - aMember configuration screen

On this screen, you need to enter the following information:

 XML-RPC URL: This URL is basically the same as your administration login URL,
but with xmlrpc/index.php added to the end. For example, if you log into aMember at
http://www.rnembersite.com/amember/admin, your XML-RPC URL would be
http://www.rnembersite.com/amember/xmftpc/index.php
 User Name: This is the XML-RPC user name you previously configured in aMember
 Password: This is the XML-RPC password you previously configured in aMember
 Payment System Name: This is the payment system that UltraCart will use to record
sales in the aMember system. Typically, this will be “manual” or “free”, depending
on how you have configured your aMember system.

Next, you need to download the UltraCart AMember Management script. Use the link on
the configuration page to download the file. Make sure it is named
ucUserManagement.php. Once downloaded, you will need to upload this file into the
same xmlrpc directory specified earlier.

Click on Save. UltraCart will automatically verify your settings, and download your
aMember product list.

Assigning aMember items to UltraCart items

The next step is to assign your aMember items to corresponding UltraCart items. To do
this simply navigate to the desired item in the item editor:

Main Menu  Item Management  Items  Item ID [link]

Click on the Digital Delivery tab, and scroll to the bottom of the screen.

141
Figure 134 - aMember to UltraCart Item assignment

Select the aMember item you want associated with this UltraCart item from the drop-
down. If you do not want to assign an aMember item, simply select the blank entry from
the dropdown.

Next, specify the membership duration in days for this item. For example, if this item
represents a monthly subscription fee, you would enter a duration of 30 days.

Finally, click on Save.

Now, when a customer purchases this UltraCart item and after payment has been
processed, UltraCart will automatically create the necessary user information in
aMember, as well as apply the subscription payment for the desired duration.

Auto Order Processing

The Auto Order Processing section provides special settings for auto orders. There are 4
sections here; General, Notifications, Retry Settings and Payment Settings.

General
There are only two fields in this section; Propagate Custom Fields and Skip Coupons.

Click on the check box to the right of the field you want activated for your Auto Orders.

Notifications
Some merchants want to suppress emails associated with auto orders. By checking the
boxes on this screen you will suppress the sending of emails related to events on the
recurring orders.
142
Figure 135 - Auto Order Skip Notification settings

Place a check in the box to the right of the type of email you want to suppress. Click the
"Save" button on the bottom of the screen when finished.

Retry Settings
By default UltraCart will attempt to process an order 3 times with a 3 day delay interval
in between attempts. If an auto order fails 3 times it will be cancelled. Merchants can
adjust the number of tries and frequency at this screen. Keep in mind that increasing the
number of tries will have an impact on your credit card processing fees.

Figure 136 - Processing Retries configuration

Enter your desired Number of Retries and number of days for Delay Between Retries in
the text boxes provided. If you want to send failures to Accounts Receivable so you can
follow-up, click the small box to the right. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Payment Settings
Here you can restrict certain credit cards from being used for the recurring auto orders.
What this means is if you have "Restrict Visa" checked (for example), a customer can
indeed process the original Auto Order using their Visa. However, when the recurring
order processes, say a month from now, it will fail processing. Make certain you
understand the ramifications of this feature before using it. If in doubt, contact UltraCart
Support.

143
Click on the check box to the right of the credit card(s) you want restricted. Click the
"Save" button at the bottom when finished.

Email Addresses

UltraCart allows you to have receipts sent through your own email server so they come
from your address instead of from the standard @ultracart.com email addresses. This
feature is optional and should only be configured by merchants that have an email server
capable of sending authenticated SMTP traffic.

Figure 137 - Email Addresses screen

Complete the fields in each section you need configured. Click the "Save" button when
finished.

144
Exporting Orders

The Exporting Orders screen allows you to configure export formats that will be used
when exporting from certain sections of UltraCart. This allows for integration with a
merchant's existing legacy back office accounting and shipping systems.

UltraCart provides a variety of flexible export configuration options to meet the needs of
a wide variety of merchants. Taking the time to setup an export/import between
UltraCart and these systems can reduce the amount of double entry performed by the
merchant and reduce errors.

Export Mapping

UltraCart can export in several formats from three different locations throughout the
system but certain export settings must be defined prior to export.

Main Menu  Configuration Menu  Back Office  Exporting Orders

The first step in exporting is to configure the export method(s) and mapping by selecting
the Exporting Orders link from the configuration menu. If no settings have been
previously defined, you will be greeted with the following screen.

Click the "new" button to define export mappings.

Merchants can create and save several different Export mappings and it's advisable to do
so. Since you can actual execute the exporting orders from various areas (Accounts
Receivable, Shipping Department and Order Management), it might be a good idea to
have different field mappings for each.

145
Figure 138 - Export Order Mapping Screen

Naming the Mapping

In order to recognize and select a mapping format (when actually exporting orders) you'll
need to name it. Type the name in the box to the right of the "Name" prompt.

146
Export File Formats
UltraCart can export information in BizTracker, XML (Extensible Markup Language),
CSV (Comma Separated Values), TXT (tab Delimited Text) or Excel formats. XML has
become the standard information exchange format between different systems. XML is
the preferred format of UltraCart. XML can represent information that does not have a
flat structure. Orders are an excellent example of information that does not conform to a
flat structure because each order can contain numerous items, etc. Due to this fact the
XML format can represent the entire order information while the CSV format can only
contain summary detail (no item detail).
Biz Tracker™
As stated on their web site, BizTracker is a Point Of Sale and Retail Management
software system for Windows 95 / 98 / ME / NT / 2000 / XP. Exporting in this
format will give you the capability of importing into Biz Tracker software.

XML DTD or XML W3C Schema?

UltraCart can export orders in 2 different XML formats: DTD and W3C Schema.
The choice of export format depends mainly on which tools will be used to process
the export. As a general rule, if you are utilizing the export file with Microsoft tools
or Microsoft Access, you should use the W3C schema format. All other languages
should generally utilize the DTD format. Please consult the documentation included
with your processing tool for more information.

Alternative Mime Type

The default mime types for XML and CSV documents are application/xml and text/plain.

While these are the standard mime types associated with the formats, they often lead to
the export information displayed inside the web browser. The information exported by
UltraCart can pass to a custom helper application for processing by specifying a different
mime type.

Type the alternate mime type in the box provided.

Default Export Settings

When performing the actual order export from either Accounts Receivable or Shipping
Departments, UltraCart will not prompt you for a mapping file. It will use whichever
mapping file you set as the default at this field. If you do not set a default mapping, then
UltraCart will export orders from that department in XML format. It's highly
recommended that you create and set a default mapping for both accounts receivable and

147
shipping departments so users know what type of file format the orders will export in.
You can set one file format for both departments.

Click on the check box for the file format desired.

Spreadsheet Column Configuration (mapping)

For merchants that choose to export using the Excel, CSV or TXT format, they must
configure (map) the different pieces of information (fields) that are to be included in the
export file. When you chose one of these export methods, a special section will appear to
allow you to configure the fields.

Figure 139 - CSV Settings

There are two columns in the field mapping screen; Field and Name (optional). A third
column will sometimes appear for custom values (explained later).

148
 Field Name
This column allows you to select the field(s) you want exported and in what order.
Simply select each field in the order desired as you go down the column. If you
populated all boxes and need to add more, click the "add more fields" button in the
title bar.

Add all Fields

You can populate the Field column with all of UltraCart fields by clicking the "add
all fields" button located in the title bar.

Add more Fields

If you have populated all the fields on the screen and need more, click the Add More
Fields button. UltraCart will add 10 additional fields. All fields must be populated
before you can add additional.

Filed Names in first row (checkbox)

This feature, when checked, will place the Field name or optional name (if
configured) in the first row of the exported file. This is very helpful for merchants
that import into an existing data base file and need to match up the fields.

Name (optional)
This field allows you change the Field Name to one of your liking in the output
(exported) file. Type the name for each field you want to change in the text box to
the right.

Custom Value (optional)

The first field listed in the drop-down list for the Field Column is "Custom". You
can add several Custom Value fields anywhere you chose. When selected, the
Name column will shift to the right making room for a new column and text box.
Here you can enter any data that you want to appear at that specific point in every
record. It will not become part of the UltraCart Order record, only the export.

Below is an example where the merchant configured (mapped) the export to insert 2
Custom fields; a Depot Number at the beginning of each record and a "Department
Code" just after the Shipping Date field.

Figure 140 - Export mapping screen

149
Custom Field 1-5
UltraCart facilitates the ability to send arbitrary data (up to five fields) that becomes part
of the order record (does not appear on receipts).

An example of usage might be where a Merchant tracks orders coming from different
web sites by simple adding the custom field that is passed via the buy link. To create the
Custom Field, the merchant adds a statement (html) to all (or particular) buy links. The
statement to add is: "&CustomField1=SiteName ". You replace "SiteName" with an
identifier of your web site that is meaningful to you. In the following example we will
use a Merchant ID of AVKITS and a custom field of "AviationShop".

"https://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-
bin/UCEditor?MERCHANTID=AVKITS&ADD=TSHIRT&CustomField1=AviationShop"

Mapping the Custom Field

At the very bottom of the selectable field listing is Custom Fields 1 thru 5. Simply select
each custom field desired and enter a name (optional) of your liking.

Remove a mapped field

There may be a time you need to remove a field after you have configured and saved the
file. To do so, click the drop-down menu for the field you need to change and select the
"blank" link at the top of the list. Click the "save" button. When you return to this
mapping file (clicking the edit button), you'll see that your field has been removed and all
other fields have been moved up.

Save and/or Preview

When finished with configuration of your export, click the "save" button or the "save and
preview". Preview will display the XML type in a browser window. CSV, TXT or
Excel formats will download a small example of the file.

Integration Programming Techniques

The intention of this section is to point merchants in the appropriate direction to have
integration programming done. Integration programming is necessary to convert
UltraCart's XML and CSV formats into the appropriate format for the legacy system that
will be importing. Merchants should have a software developer create an application in
languages such as Java, VB, Perl, or C/C++ that is capable of reading the XML or CSV
format, transforming the information into the appropriate format, and outputting a file
suitable for import by the legacy system. If merchants are using XML as the export
format then XSLT is an excellent technology to convert from one XML format to the
legacy systems format. After writing an integration program, configure the web browser
to associate the custom mime type with the application. The integration application is a
type of helper application in the browser configuration.

Export (from) Locations

Merchants can export orders from three different locations; Accounts Receivable,
Shipping Department or Order Management. As mentioned earlier, merchants can
configure different export settings for each of the different export locations.

150
Accounts Receivable / Shipping Department
Clicking on the Export Orders button from either Accounts Receivable or the Shipping
Departments will not offer a screen to select the export type. These will default to the
format you set for these departments at Configuration  Export Orders. If you did not
define a format for these departments, then they will be exported in XML format. See
Exporting Orders on page 198.

Figure 141 - Accounts Receivable & Shipping screen headings

Order Management
(Main Menu  Order Management  Tools (section) Export Orders)

Clicking on the Export Orders link from the Order Management screen will prompt the
user to make several decisions about the export. See Exporting Orders on page 198.

Figure 142 – Order Management Export

151
Froogle Integration

Froogle is Google’s new comparative shopping service. Although still in beta, Froogle is
available to the public by a link on Google’s main page.

Figure 143 - Google's new Froogle Link

UltraCart is excited to support Google's search facility which searches for products for
sale across the internet and makes the results available to millions of shoppers.

By focusing entirely on product search, Froogle applies the power of Google's search
technology to a specific task: locating stores that sell the item you want to find and point
you directly to the place where you can make a purchase.

Automatic Data Feed to Froogle

As an online merchant you can directly feed Froogle with accurate information about
each of your products so they will be listed properly. Froogle calls this a "data feed."
Normally you would have to follow the instructions to set up a table containing all your
products and where they can be found on the web, along with where images are stored,
how much they cost and more. Since the UltraCart Team believes that Froogle will
deliver large numbers of visitors to your website, we have automated this process so that
once you have applied and are accepted with Froogle, UltraCart will do the rest of the
work for you.

In order to be eligible for Froogle you must meet the following criteria:

* Your site must be in English

152
 * Your prices must be displayed prominently in US Dollars
* You must be based in the US or you must be prepared to ship to the US
* You must sell products rather than services

What does Froogle support cost?

Froogle support is an UltraCart premium feature that has an additional cost associated
with it. The cost for Froogle support varies by how often your update information is sent
to Froogle.
Monthly Fee Feed Frequency
$1.00 once a month
$3.00 once a week
$10.00 once a day

To apply for Froogle inclusion, select the desired frequency and press the Apply for
Froogle button. UltraCart will then submit your Froogle application.

Figure 144 - Applying for Froogle Screen

When your store is approved, your Froogle configuration screen will change to reflect the
following:

Figure 145 - Froogle Settings

153
You can request UltraCart submit your products to Froogle on varying schedules. If your
product line or pricing changes frequently, you should submit your product feed more
often than merchants who have a relatively static product line.

If you make major changes to your product line, you can request that UltraCart submit
your product feed immediately. We recommend that you submit an immediate feed
whenever you are having any major sales, new product launches, etc.

NOTE: In order for UltraCart to successfully upload your items to Froogle upon approve,
you must fill out the Froogle tab of the Item Editor for all items that you want to have
included in the Froogle feed. You may also use the Extended description field within the
item tab of the Item Editor in order to provide a more complete description if an item.

Internet Explorer

Microsoft's Internet Explorer web browser has issues with PDF files that are generated
dynamically over a secure connection. UltraCart's recommendation is that you use
Mozilla as the browser to access UltraCart's administration because it is 100% standards
compliant. For those unable to utilize Mozilla for UltraCart administration, we provide a
registry patch that you can apply that will allow Internet Explorer to properly hand off the
PDF file to Adobe Acrobat.

 Although this patch is provided for your convenience, you are solely responsible for any results
that occur from loading this registry file in to your Windows and agree to assume all liability
associated with loading this file.

To utilize this patch, simply follow the directions shown on the patch page. You will be
instructed to locate the executable file for your Acrobat reader. The file will not be
uploaded to UltraCart. Instead, your browser will provide the location of your Acrobat
executable to UltraCart, and UltraCart will create a custom registry file for use in
UltraCart administration.

If you need additional information regarding this utility, please contact UltraCart support.

Figure 146 - Internet Explorer Patch

154
Old Order Handling

Customers often place Check Orders and then either forget to mail the payment or change
their mind. In order to prevent the Check Orders from piling up in accounts receivable,
UltraCart can reject mail-in orders after a “user definable” number of days (typically 45
days). If a check order arrives after rejection, it is still possible to retrieve the order and
process it. To configure your rejection period, enter the number of days into the box
provided.

UltraCart can also send customers a reminder after two weeks from order date.
Reminders often cause customers to complete their check orders. Checking the “Remind
customers about old orders” enables this option. Click the “Save” button when finished.

Figure 147 - Old Order Handling

Order Retention

Marketing to your existing customer base can be extremely effective. UltraCart will
retain your order history for one year absolutely FREE. If you would like to retain your
order history beyond the free (one) year, you need to inform UltraCart as such. Please
note that there is a $7 per month charge for each additional year of data actually retained.
You will receive a monthly email notice 30 days prior to an order that is older than your
threshold being deleted. This will provide you an opportunity to adjust your threshold
higher if desired.

Figure 148 - Order Retention screen

155
Select the number of years you want your records retained at UltraCart in the drop-down
menu. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Printable Documents

In this section merchants can configure Address and Shipping Label formats. These
settings will be applied from within the Shipping Department Section when selecting
Print Address Labels or Print Packing Slips. Shipping is covered later in this manual.

Figure 149 - Shipping Department screen

Address Labels
Pre-defined Format
UltraCart has support for a variety of standard Avery address label formats that are
available at most office product supply stores. Simply select the format desired from the
drop-down menu named Predefined Format.

Custom Label Format

If the built-in formats do not meet a merchant's needs they can define the dimensions of
custom label sheets in the section immediate below this field.

All the measurements needed for UltraCart to handle a sheet of address labels must be in
centimeters. There is field at the bottom of the form called “Top of Form Adjustment”.
This is for adjustments needed to offset the physical paper loading characteristics of
printers. To test out the layout of the labels click the preview button.

156
Figure 150 - Address Label Configuration

Packing Slips

Typically, the default margins are perfectly acceptable unless the merchant is printing the
packing slips on business letterhead that has logos that do not fit in the margins.

To configure Custom packing slips click on the “Custom” radio button and specify the
top and bottom margins in the fields provided. Additionally, several other attributes can
be included on the Packing Slip by checking the appropriate check boxes on each item
you want included. The last item in the list, Logo Graphic, provides a drop-down list of
graphics for selection. You can upload graphics at Main Menu  Configuration 
Screen Branding Themes  Edit button  Graphics Library [tab] (See page 129).

157
Figure 151 - Packing Slip Settings

QuickBooks Terms and Lists

This section applies to merchants that will download orders to QuickBooks and that also
utilize UltraCart’s Customer Profiles. It allows merchants to enter QuickBooks codes in
3 different sections: Payment Terms, Sales Reps and QuickBooks Classes (explained
below).

These codes are defined (first) in QuickBooks and then in UltraCart customer profiles.
For more information about QuickBooks Codes, see UltraBooks Chapter 14, on page
504.

By entering those codes on the QuickBooks Terms and Lists screen, they will appear in
drop-down lists to simplify entry (see Customer Profile Management on page 237). The
following shows an example of the fields on the Customer Profile screen in UltraCart.

To set up these codes in UltraCart, navigate to:

158
Main Menu  Configuration  Back Office [section]  QuickBooks Terms and Lists

Figure 152 - QuickBooks Terms & Lists screen

Payment Terms
If you would like to set the payment terms by customer profile you can configure the list
of available terms here. Each should be no longer than 31 characters long. Place each
term on a different line. These should match up identically with the Payment Method list
in your QuickBooks located at Lists  Payment Method list.

159
Sales Reps
These should match up identically with the "Sales List" in your QuickBooks file located
at Lists  Customer & Vendor Profile Lists. Click “New” from the Sales Rep button at
the bottom of the Sales Rep List.

The Sales Rep initial is the code to be used for your UltraCart Customer Profile. Place
each Sales Rep code on a different line. Click the “Save” button at the bottom of the
screen when finished.

QuickBooks™ Classes
Classes Defined by QuickBooks:
In QuickBooks, classes give you a way to classify your transactions. You can use QuickBooks
classes to classify your income and expenses by department, business office or location, separate
properties you own, or any other meaningful breakdown of the business you do. For example, if
you had a restaurant with three locations, you might create an Uptown, a Midtown, and a
Downtown class for tracking income and expenses by location. A farmer might create a class for
each enterprise-for example, "Corn," "Hogs," and "Soybeans." At the end of an accounting period,
you could create separate reports for each restaurant location. Likewise, the farmer could create
separate reports for each farm enterprise. The classes you create appear on your Class list.

You can define your class list in QuickBooks at: Lists  Class List. In the Class list
window select “New” from the Class button at the bottom.

160
If you use QuickBooks Classes, enter them in the text box provided; each on a separate
line. These must match up identically with the class list in your QuickBooks™ file. Each
class should be no longer than 31 characters long. Click the “Save” button at the bottom
of the screen when finished.

Receipt
This section of UltraCart allows you to edit the receipt (email) that is sent to your
customer after they finalize their order. By using special tags you can embed and arrange
important information about the order, the customer, return policy and more. You can
also insert additional text.

Note: this section does not affect the Receipt Screen shown to the customer when the
order is finalized. That screen is edited via screen branding.

To access the Receipt configuration screen navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration Menu  Back Office [section]  Receipt

You will be presented with the following screen.

Figure 153 - Receipt configuration screen

Receipt Tags

The Receipt configuration screen is divided into two sections; 1) a Template Layout for
editing and 2) a list of qualifying Tags. Although there are 17 Tags you can insert into

161
the receipt, the default (unedited) Template contains the OrderID tag in the Subject line
and the following 6 Tags in the Template:
Instructions, Order, Return Policy, Merchant Name, CustomerServiceEmail and
Phone.

Many merchants use the default receipt layout.

Tag Definitions
The 17 special tags that can be used are defined as follows:

TAG Will be replaced with

[Instructions] Inserts instructions applicable to the type of payment

Method used.
[CustomerName] Customers full name
[OrderID] Customers order ID
[CustomField1]1-5 Inserts data from Custom Fields 1-5
[ShippingMethod] Shipping method used on the order
[MerchantName] Merchant name
[CustomerServiceEmail] Customer service email
[Phone] Customer service phone number
[ReturnPolicy] Return policy paragraph
[Order] Inserts the following order information: Order ID,
Shipping and Billing information, Shipping Method, Gift
Message, Coupons used, and Order Summary.
[OrderSummary] Summary of items ordered and charges
[IfPurchased=ItemId] Text between tags displayed of ItemId purchased.
[/IfPurchased]
[IfCoupon=CouponCode] Text between tags displayed if Coupon Code used.
[/IfCoupon]

Notice that the Order ID, Shipping Method, and Order Summary tags are also contained
in the Order tag. Even though, some merchants may still have reason to repeat them
somewhere else in the receipt message.

Although most of the information posted in the Receipt comes from the customer order,
some of the Special Tags come from data fields in your UltraCart configuration. The
following is a list showing their location within UltraCart.

*Return Policy Tag: Main Menu  Configuration  Shopping Cart Checkout

Configuration [section]  Return Policy.

*Customer Service Email & Phone Tags: Main Menu  Configuration  Shopping Cart
Checkout Configuration [section]  Customer Service.

162
Note: For built-in shipping methods like UPS and FedEx, a URL to the shipper’s website
is substituted for the shipping tracking number tag. Merchants should only have the
ShippingTrackingNumber Tag inserted into the receipt if all shipments have tracking
numbers. The shipping chapter covers specifying the tracking numbers for each
shipment.

Text
You can insert any additional text that you want to have displayed on the receipt. Simply
place your cursor in the editing text box and type away.

Save & Preview

Once you are satisfied with your editing, click on the "Save & Preview" button. You will
be presented with a preview of the receipt. You can return to and edit the "Receipt" as
many times as necessary. NOTE: A preview of your Receipt will not appear unless you
have a least one order (actual or test) on file with UltraCart.

Two sample receipts are shown below. We've boxed in various sections of the receipt to
identify the special tags used in this sample. The first sample is the default receipt.

Figure 154 - Receipt preview (default)

163
Figure 155 - Receipt preview (additional tags)

Report Delivery

UltraCart can automatically e-mail you an executive summary of your UltraCart order
traffic. You can choose to have the report e-mailed to you every specified day count (i.e.,
every 5 days, every 10 days, etc.), semi-monthly, or monthly. When you have made your
delivery selection, press “Save” to process your selection.

Figure 156 - Report Delivery

164
Salesforce.com
Introduction & Prerequisites

UltraCart is pleased offer complete two-way integration with the Salesforce.com CRM
platform. Utilizing this integration, you can now incorporate UltraCart actions into your
existing Salesforce.com CRM workflows & processes, as well as communicate events
from Salesforce.com to UltraCart, allowing your organization to harness the e-commerce
power of UltraCart through a familiar Salesforce.com interface.

To begin, you will need the following:

 An active UltraCart account

 Salesforce.com Enterprise or Unlimited (Developer accounts will work for
testing, but are not supported by Salesforce.com for production use)
 The user name, password, and security token for the Salesforce.com user
UltraCart will use to connect to your Salesforce.com instance.

Retrieving your Security Token

To retrieve your security token, you will need to perform the following steps.

 Please note that your security token may be used by other third-party applications,
including the Salesforce.com plug-in for Microsoft Outlook. If you reset your
security token, you will need to update it in each application.

1. Log into your Salesforce.com account.

2. Click on Setup in the top navigation section.
3. On the left, click on My Personal Information.
4. Next, select Reset My Security Token, and press the Reset My Security Token
button. Your security token will then be sent to the e-mail address associated
with that Salesforce.com user account.

165
Once you have retrieved your security token, you are ready to configure Salesforce.com
inside of UltraCart.

Configuring UltraCart

To begin the process of connecting your Salesforce.com instance to your UltraCart

account, simply follow these steps.

1. Log into your UltraCart account.

2. Select Configuration from the left-hand navigation menu.
3. Under the Back Office section, click on the Salesforce.com link.

This will bring up the initial configuration screen, shown below.

166
In the API User Name field, enter the e-mail address associated with the Salesforce.com
account you wish UltraCart to use to communicate to Salesforce.com.

Next, you will need to enter your Salesforce.com password with your security token. For
example, if your password was ‘password01’, and your security token was ‘abc123456’,
you would enter ‘password01abc123456’ into the password field.

In the Maximum API Calls Per Day field, enter the desired maximum API call count
made by UltraCart. Please note that this limit applies only to “optional” activities. Even
if UltraCart has reached the maximum number of API calls, it will continue to make
required API calls when mandatory events occur, such as a customer placing a new order.

UltraCart supports several different Integration Systems with Salesforce.com. You can
enable any combination of systems you would like to utilize. A brief description of each
system is provided in the table below.

Product Synchronization This module instructs UltraCart to

Customer Profile Synchronization
synchronize item information into
Salesforce.com Product objects.
This module instructs UltraCart to
synchronize customer profiles into
Salesforce.com objects. Depending on
your Salesforce.com configuration,
UltraCart will either create an Account & a
Contact for each customer profile, or if you
have enabled Person objects in

167

Create Salesforce.com Opportunities for
Orders
Send New / Changed Items to
Salesforce.com
Apply changes made to Products in
Salesforce.com to UltraCart Items
Salesforce.com, UltraCart will create a
single Person object for each customer
profile. Optionally, you can configure
Salesforce.com to notify UltraCart of
changes to customer information, which
can then be automatically applied to the
corresponding UltraCart customer profile.
This module instructs UltraCart to create
Opportunities for each order placed
through your store. When this module is
enabled, UltraCart will create a fully
populated Opportunity for your orders.
Additionally, UltraCart will create
Accounts, Contacts, or Person objects as
needed for the new Opportunity. If you
have enabled Product Synchronization,
UltraCart will populate the Opportunity
with the individual items purchased.
When enabled, this module will
automatically update Salesforce.com each
time you add or modify an item in
UltraCart. Changes made in UltraCart will
take approximately 5 minutes to be
reflected in Salesforce.com.
When enabled, this module will process
outbound messages from Salesforce.com
related to your items, and automatically
update the UltraCart item to reflect the
changes made in Salesforce.com. For this
functionality to operate properly, you will
need to create the necessary Outbound
Message and Workflow Rule options in
Salesforce.com.

After selecting the desired integration options, click on Save. UltraCart will attempt to
contact Salesforce.com to verify your settings. If there are any errors, UltraCart will
display them. Otherwise, you will be returned to the Configuration menu.

Mapping UltraCart fields to Salesforce.com fields

By default, UltraCart automatically maps standard shared fields to their corresponding

fields in Salesforce.com. In many cases, however, you will want to include information
from UltraCart that is not included in the standard Salesforce.com fields. In these cases,
you will need to map the particular UltraCart field to a target Salesforce.com custom
field.

168
To begin the mapping process, click on Salesforce.com, and select the Field Mapping
tab. This will bring up the field-mapping interface, shown below.

In the left column is a list of various UltraCart objects, such as Order, Customer Profile,
and Item. Next to each UltraCart field, there is a drop-down selection box that will allow
you to choose a Salesforce.com custom field that should be mapped to the specified
UltraCart field.

169
  Please note that because of the way Salesforce.com handles currency and number
conversion, you should only select fields of a similar type. While Salesforce.com
will allow you to map numeric fields to text fields, this is not recommended.

If you have renamed any of your default objects, you will need to tell UltraCart which
objects to use for Products, Price Books, and Price Book Entries. To do this, simply click
on the checkbox labeled Show Advanced Object Mapping Options, and select the
appropriate object for each type.

Configuring Salesforce.com Outbound Messages

Salesforce.com utilizes a pair of features to integrate with external systems such as

UltraCart, Outbound Messages and Workflow Rules. For complete integration with
UltraCart, you will need to configure several Outbound Messages, and then create
Workflow Rules to notify UltraCart when you make changes. This process is fairly
detailed, but only needs to be done once.

1. Login to Salesforce.com, and click on Setup (located at the top of the screen)
2. Click on Create in the App Setup section. Once it has expanded, click on
Workflow & Approvals.

We will now create the Outbound Messages that Salesforce.com will use to communicate
changes to UltraCart.

To begin, click on Outbound Messages. You will then be taken to a screen listing your
existing Outbound Messages (if any). Click on the New Outbound Message button to
begin creating the first Outbound Message.

The first step is to select the object that will be the subject of this message. Let’s begin
with the Product object. Select Product from the drop down, and click on Next.

170
Now we come to the message configuration screen, shown below.

In the Name field, input “UltraCart Product Message.” Next, we need to specify the
Endpoint URL. This URL is the location in UltraCart that is configured to receive
Salesforce.com messages. For Product-related messages, the URL is

https://salesforce-soap.ultracart.com/axis/services/SFPartnerProductNotification

Next, check the box next to “Send Session ID.” This allows UltraCart to verify that a
message received is a valid Salesforce.com message.

171
If you do not see the field “Id” under the Selected Fields header, select the “Id” entry
underneath the Available Fields header, and click on Add.

That’s it! Click the Save button. You will need to repeat the process for the Account and
Contact objects as well. The process is exactly the same as described above, except that
you will choose the appropriate object, and use a different URL for each object, as shown
below.

Account Object https://salesforce-

soap.ultracart.com/axis/services/SFPartnerAccountNotification
Contact Object https://salesforce-
soap.ultracart.com/axis/services/SFPartnerContactNotification

Now that we have created the outbound messages, we need to create several Workflow
Rules to trigger the outbound messages.

Configuring Salesforce.com Workflow Rules

In Salesforce.com, a workflow is a set of tasks to be automatically performed when a

specified event occurs. To allow for proper notification to UltraCart when certain actions
occur, we create several Workflow Rules that utilize the previously configured Outbound
Messages.

1. Login to Salesforce.com, and click on Setup (located at the top of the screen)
2. Click on Create in the App Setup section. Once it has expanded, click on
Workflow & Approvals.

Next, click on Workflow Rules. This will display a list of existing Workflow Rules (if
any are present). Click on the New Rule button to begin creating the necessary rules.

172
As with the Outbound Message configuration, we need to select the object that will be the
subject of this Workflow Rule. For this exercise, we’ll once again use the Product object.
Select it from the drop-down menu, and click on next.

This opens up the rule configuration screen, shown below. Until you select the necessary
options, your screen may look slightly different.

173
In the text field labeled Rule Name, enter “UltraCart Product Notification Workflow.”
Next, choose the Every time a record is created or edited option from the choices
presented in the Evaluation Criteria section.

The first drop-down shown in the Rule Criteria section is labeled “Run this rule if the
following.” Change this drop-down to the formula evaluates to true option. This will
change the screen to look like the picture above. In the large text area below the drop-
down, simply enter the text “1=1” (without the quotation marks), and click the Save &
Next button to continue to the Action selection screen.

174
This screen is used to configure what action or actions should occur when this rule is
triggered. Click on the down triangle next to Add Workflow Action, and select the
option labeled Select Existing Action to bring up the action selection window.

Change the Search drop-down to the Outbound Message option, and you should see the
Outbound Message we created earlier named “UltraCart Product Message”. Click on the
entry, and click the Add button. Then press Save to complete the creation of the
Workflow Rule. After saving the rule, you will be taken to a summary screen. To
activate the newly created rule, click on the Activate button.

Again, you’ll want to repeat this process twice more, once for the Contact object, and
once for the Account object.

That’s it! Your Salesforce.com configuration is complete.

Salesforce.com Data Management

One of the most powerful features of the UltraCart integration system is the ability to
manage products and their prices automatically. If you selected this integration option

175
during setup, then you may want UltraCart to “bootstrap” your Salesforce.com
configuration with your existing item information. To do so, log into your UltraCart
account and go to the Configuration section. Click on Salesforce.com and choose the
Data Management tab. The following screen will appear which will allow you to
manage data synchronization between UltraCart and Salesforce.com.

Retrieve Custom Objects & Fields

In addition to the Push Items option, there is a button that will retrieve all of your custom
objects & custom fields from Salesforce.com. Once you have retrieved your custom
objects and fields, they will be available for mapping using the tools on the Field
Mapping tab.

Push Items to Salesforce.com

When you press the "Push Items" button, UltraCart will attempt to create the necessary
Product and Pricebook entries in Salesforce.com.

 Please note that this is a time-consuming process, and will use quite a large
number of Salesforce.com API calls. You should use this option only when
necessary. As long as you have the “Send New / Changed Items to
Salesforce.com” integration option activated, UltraCart will automatically keep
your items in sync.

Monitoring the Integration Service

UltraCart has developed a powerful, yet easy to use, dashboard that shows you the status
of your Salesforce.com integration. This dashboard gives you the information necessary
to troubleshoot any integration issues, as well as keep a pulse on the activity occurring
between Salesforce.com and UltraCart.

176
To access the dashboard, navigate to the Configuration section, and select the
Salesforce.com link. Once loaded, click on the Status tab to bring up the dashboard.

The dashboard contains a number of helpful items. First, the top section shows the
overall health of your Salesforce.com integration. This section also shows how many
API calls UltraCart has made to Salesforce.com, as well as the last time UltraCart
contacted Salesforce.com.

Below the health check section is the Integration Log. This log shows you the last 10
actions that UltraCart performed relating to the Salesforce.com integration. Items with
the icon are informational in nature. If an item has an icon, this means that the
message shows that something unexpected occurred, but does not prevent the successful
communication between Salesforce.com and UltraCart. These messages typically are
displayed when UltraCart is unable to create or update an object in Salesforce.com. In
each case, the message will include the feedback provided to UltraCart by Salesforce.com
when the operation was attempted. Messages with the icon indicate an issue that is
preventing the successful communication between Salesforce.com and UltraCart. In the
example above, the user name or password was changed in Salesforce.com, but the
change was not made in UltraCart. When an error occurs with the icon present,
UltraCart will discontinue communication with Salesforce.com until the issue is resolved.
If UltraCart is in this state, the health check section will reflect this fact, as demonstrated
in the picture below.

177
If you are unable to determine the reason that the health check is failing, or are unable to
make the necessary corrections to resolve the issue, please contact our professional
services team for assistance.

Helpful Hints
In the same way that UltraCart continues to grow and innovate, so does Salesforce.com.
Because of the dynamic nature of both hosted platforms, this integration guide may not
reflect the current configuration of either Salesforce.com or UltraCart. If you have any
questions about this document, please let us know.

In general, here are a few helpful hints to get the most out of your Salesforce.com
integration.

 Don’t set your API call limit too low. Each Salesforce.com account receives, at a
minimum, 5,000 API calls per day. Additionally, this is a “soft limit” that
Salesforce.com does not currently enforce for Enterprise and Unlimited
Salesforce.com accounts.
 Map as many fields as possible to your Salesforce.com instance. The more
information you have in your Salesforce.com records, the more options you have
in creating tasks and workflows around specific points of data. IMPORTANT: If
you need to map an UltraCart field not listed, simply let us know, and we’ll add it.
There are simply far too many fields to include them all by default, but we are
able to add them quickly as needed.
 Talk to your sales team! The most powerful part of this integration is the real-
time creation of Opportunities upon a successful UltraCart order. If you are
already using UltraCart’s Upsell After feature, then you already understand how
to grow the sale. Create tasks and leads for your salespeople based on the items
purchased, total ticket amount, etc.
178
If you have any other suggestions or comments on how to more effectively utilize the
Salesforce.com integration system, please let us know, and we’ll include them in future
versions of this document.

179
Shipment Notification

UltraCart will automatically notify your customers that shipment has taken place via
email. As the Merchant, you can customize the outgoing email notification (template).
The message template contains a defined set of tags (fields) that will substitute actual
order information into the email.

Merchants should start by copying and pasting the sample message from the top of the
page, and then modify it to include additional information that might be pertinent to the
customer.

Figure 157 - Customer Notification Message Template

The supported tags are:

[CustomerName] Customer name

[OrderID] Order ID
[ShippingMethod] Shipping method
[MerchantName] Merchant name
[CustomerServiceEmail] Customer service email
[Phone] Phone
[ShippingTrackingNumber] Shipping tracking number URL
[ReturnPolicy] Return policy paragraph
[OrderSummary] Summary of order

180
The customer service email tag is the email address of the UltraCart user that has the
customer service attribute selected. You can read more about this in the User
configuration section of this manual.

For built-in shipping methods like UPS and FedEx, a URL to the shipper’s website is
substituted for the shipping tracking number tag. Merchants should only have the
ShippingTrackingNumber tag in the customer notification message if all shipments have
tracking numbers. The shipping chapter covers specifying the tracking numbers for each
shipment.

UltraBooks
Integration between UltraCart and QuickBooks™ works through a downloadable piece of
software called UltraBooks. The software needs to be installed on the same PC as
QuickBooks™. When the program is launched it will prompt you for the same login
information that you use to access UltraCart. UltraBooks then securely downloads all the
new (completed) orders and creates sales receipts in QuickBooks™ for each of the
orders.

UltraBooks configuration and integration is covered in Chapter 14, beginning on page

504.

XML Postback
UltraCart's XML Post Back feature gives merchants the opportunity to have orders
automatically "posted" to their server shortly after the order is placed. Orders will be
transmitted in XML (Extensible Markup Language) format. Once received, they can
have any number of functions automatically performed based on any parameters within
the order.

Merchants might consider utilizing the post back function for the following reasons:
 Automatically receive orders shortly after they are placed.
 For doing any validation or other processing on their server side.
 Receive updated order status automatically (optional).

Requirements
The XML Post Back feature should only be used by advanced merchants with software
development skills or with programmers at their disposal. Presently, UltraCart does not
provide script templates.

There are two requirements to make the XML Post Back possible. A merchant must:

1. have a web server that supports HTTPS (secure sockets), and

2. create (or have created) a script that will;
a. receive the order (one order per post),
b. perform the desired functions, and
c. send a "return success" code 200 to UltraCart.

181
XML Post Back Script
Several languages can and are used for receiving and performing functions with the XML
format. Some examples are; PHP, Pearl, ASP, JSP, Ruby, and Cold Fusion.

The XML message posted back is equivalent to manually exporting 1 order in the XML
W3C Schema format from Order Management  Export Orders. Programmers need to
be aware that the XML is within the HTTP body, not in parameters.

Configure the Post Back functionality

Prior to configuring the Post Back feature insure that you have your script in place on
your server. Once that is completed, log in to your UltraCart account and navigate to:
Main Menu  Configuration  Back Office [section]  XML Post Back [link]. Once
you click on the XML Postback link, the following screen will appear:

Figure 158 - XML Post Back configuration

Most merchants will chose to use one or the other of the two options list here. This
basically tells UltraCart where to post the XML file to and the name of the script itself.

Transmit to URL when order placed

Placing the URL into this field will tell UltraCart to post back any order when and only
when the order is created. UltraCart will continue to post back the order to your server
until it receives a "return success" code (200).

Transmit to URL when stage changes

Placing the URL into this field will tell UltraCart to post back any order when the status
(stage) of an order changes. Typical status changes are: Pre Order (PO), Accounts
Receivable (AR), Shipping Department (SD), Completed (CO), and Rejected (REJ).

Once you've entered the URL into the appropriate field, click on the "Save" button at the
bottom of the screen. Your configuration is completed.

182
XML Schema
The full XML Schema can be viewed at https://secure.ultracart.com/xml/ultracart.xsd.

Channel Partners
Here merchants can configure order processing from popular market places and sales
channels.

Ignite Media Solutions

UltraCart is integrated with a unique automated call center called Ignite Media Solutions.
Ignite Media Solutions can handle your order taking and then send UltraCart a secure
XML file that seamlessly imports your orders. If you're considering outsourcing your call
center operations, consider Ignite Media Solutions.

Once you have signed up with Ignite Media Solutions and obtained the appropriate
credentials you'll need to configure it in UltraCart. To do so, navigate to;

Configuration  Channel Partners [section]  Ignite Media Solutions [link]

There you will be greeted with the Ignite Media Solutions configuration screen.

Figure 159 - Ignite Media Solutions configuration screen

183
Enter your FTP username and FTP Password as assigned by Ignite Media Solutions.

Next, you'll need to specify how UltraCart should map the Ignite Media Solutions
shipping to your UltraCart store. This screen lists the shipping methods you have
configured within UltraCart. UltraCart will perform a shipping method calculation based
upon the methods you select at this screen. UltraCart will calculate which of these
methods is available for each Ignite Media Solutions order that comes through and pick
the one that has the top priority. If not priority is set, then least expensive will have
priority. Your preferred method should have a priority of one, then two, etc.

Click the "Save" button when finished.

Amazon Seller Central

This feature of UltraCart basically provides a mechanism to automatically download your
Amazon Seller Central orders directly into your UltraCart Order database. This can save
hundreds of hours over the long haul especially for those with lots of sales via Amazon.
Please note there is a $30.00/month charge for using this UltraCart Premium Service.

There are three basic steps in configuring this feature:

1) Obtain and provide the login credentials for your Amazon account so UltraCart can
communicate with Amazon. The username and password are the credentials that you
enter at http://sellercentral.amazon.com, the merchant name should match name listed
inside of ASC under the Settings  Account Info, and finally your merchant identifier.
You will need to contact Amazon Technical Support at 866-226-2966 to obtain this
value.

2) Next, you'll need to specify how UltraCart should map the ASC shipping method name
to your UltraCart store. UltraCart will perform a shipping method calculation based upon
the methods you select.

For instance if you select three available shipping methods for standard, UltraCart will
calculate which of these methods is available for each Amazon order that comes through

184
and pick the one that has the top priority and then least expensive one if the priority is not
specified. Your preferred method should have a priority of one, then two, etc.

3) Finally, you will need to log in to your Amazon Seller Central account and schedule a
recurring report. After you log in, click on the reports tab, click on Scheduled Reports,
select the time of day that is one hour before your shipment cut-off for the day, set the
day range to past 1 day, and then click submit. UltraCart will use its direct Amazon
integration to process these order reports. If you do not schedule this report, orders
will not flow into UltraCart.

Buy.com
If you are selling products on Buy.com then UltraCart can automatically process your
orders and return shipping confirmations to Buy.com. Please note there is a $30.00/month
charge for using this premium service.

Once you have set up your account with Buy.com, you can then configure it at UltraCart
on the following screen. Enter your FTP Server, Username and FTP Password in the
fields.

Figure 160 - Buy.com configuration screen

Finally, you'll need to specify how UltraCart should map the Buy.com shipping method
name to your UltraCart store. UltraCart will perform a shipping method calculation based
upon the methods you select below. So for instance if you select three available shipping
methods for standard, UltraCart will calculate which of these methods is available for
each Buy.com order that comes through and pick the one that has the top priority and
then least expensive one if the priority is not specified. Your preferred method should
have a priority of one, then two, etc. Click the "Save" button when finished.

185
OverStock.com

If you are selling products on OverStock.com then UltraCart can automatically process
your orders, return shipping confirmations, and update the inventory counts at OverStock.
Please note there is a $30.00/month charge for using this premium service.

Contact your OverStock.com account manager to obtain all your necessary configuration
settings for your UltraCart account. It will be a good idea to have a printout of this
configuration screen with you when you contact them.

Figure 161 - OverStock.com configuration

186
SkyMall

SkyMall is a multi-channel, direct

marketer offering high-quality,
innovative merchandise from top
direct marketers and
manufacturers through its
SkyMall catalog and web site,
skymall.com. The SkyMall
catalog is seen by approximately
88% of all domestic air passengers
reaching more than 650 million air
travelers annually. SkyMall also
offers turn-key merchandise and
fulfillment solutions for loyalty marketing programs.

The products sold through SkyMall can be automatically processed through UltraCart. If
you have already established a relationship with SkyMall, you can configure the interface
below. (Note the screen is broken
into two parts in this document).
Please note there is a
$30.00/month charge for using
this premium service.

Additionally, you'll need to

specify how UltraCart should
map the SkyMall shipping
method name to your UltraCart
store. UltraCart will perform a
shipping method calculation
based upon the methods you
select below. So for instance if
you select three available
shipping methods for standard,
UltraCart will calculate which of
these methods is available for
each SkyMall order that comes
through and pick the one that has
the top priority and then least
expensive one if the priority is
not specified. Your preferred
method should have a priority of
one, then two, etc.

Figure 162 - SkyMall shipping configuration screen

187
SmartBargains

SmartBargains.com is a division
of Retail Convergence, Inc., a
portfolio of e-commerce
companies based in Boston.

The first step in configuring your

SmartBargains (SBRLL) account
is to provide the vendor ID.
Please note there is a
$30.00/month charge for using
this premium service.

Next, you'll need to specify

how UltraCart should map the
SBRLL shipping method name
to your UltraCart store.
UltraCart will perform a
shipping method calculation
based upon the methods you
select below. So for instance,
if you select two available
shipping methods for standard,
UltraCart will calculate which
of these methods is available
for each Smart Bargains order
that comes through and pick
the one that has the top priority
and then least expensive one if
the priority is not specified.
Your preferred method should
have a priority of one, then
two, etc.

Click the "Save" button when

finished.

Figure 163 - SmartBargins shipping method mapping

188
Other Configuration
This section is reserved to bring you news of other enhancement opportunities.

Dayspring Web Hosting

Welcome to a change in web hosting. Dayspringhosting.com. is a company that wants to
know your name. The have fair prices, fast support, and great features.

Why pay $20 a month for Quality web hosting?

They offer quality web hosting at discounted prices! Their hosting packages are perfect
for small business, non-profit organizations, churches, and personal web sites.

No set up fee, same day setup, and personal customer care.

Reference Manual Purchase

The manual is available in a PDF version but seriously... who wants to read 500+ pages
on a computer screen? So, our manual is published in perfect bound technical manual
style! You can have the ultimate UltraCart reference on your desk at the office or take it
home for browsing during those dull TV shows. Order the printed version and save those
ink or toner cartridges.

The book costs $29.95, which includes shipping. Order 2 or more and pay only $25.00
each. To order the manual log in to your account and navigate to:
Main Menu  Configuration  Other Configuration (bottom of screen). Click on the
Reference Manual Purchase link. At the next screen, enter your Shipping information
and specify the Quantity of books you want to order. Click the "Place My Order" button
to finish.

Figure 164 - Reference Manual purchase screen

189
UltraSecure OTP Tokens

UltraCart maintains top level security of the servers that

host your valuable customer data through such
technologies as firewalls, intrusion detection systems,
and automated vulnerability scanning. Additionally,
UltraCart’s servers are hosted in a secure facility with
24/7/365 live security monitoring, with extremely limited
biometric-scanner based access.

However, we are aware that many of our merchants want a greater ability to protect their
individual accounts with more than just a user name and password. To that end, we’re
proud to introduce our latest service, UltraSecure by UltraCart.

UltraSecure adds the requirement of a hardware token to your UltraCart account. This
type of security is called two-factor authentication.

In addition to your login name & password, you will be required to enter a numeric code
generated by the hardware token. This means that, even if someone manages to steal your
user name & password, they will be unable to log into your account. Likewise, if your
hardware token were to be lost or stolen, it could not be used to log into your UltraCart
account without your user name & password.

By requiring both your user name & password (something you know), and the numeric
code generated by the hardware token (something you have), you are afforded the highest
level of authentication in the entire e-commerce industry!

Cost
The UltraSecure feature is free. All you have to do is purchase the hardware token which
is $60 plus the cost of shipping. One token can be used to secure multiple users within
any number of UltraCart stores. This is convenient for merchants who have multiple
stores.

Recommended Usage
The most secure configuration is to provide a hardware token to each person who will
access your UltraCart account. Another alternative is to provide a hardware token to each
person who has permissions to sensitive information, such as credit card information or
historical customer data. You can provide hardware tokens to as few or as many of your
UltraCart users as you like.

Ordering
To order your UltraSecure Token log in to your account and navigate to: Main Menu 
Configuration  Other Configuration  Purchase UltraSecure OTP Tokens [link]. At
the bottom of that screen, click on the "Yes, order my UltraSecure by UltraCart tokens"
button. The following screen will appear:

190
Figure 165 - UltraSecure Token purchase screen

Select the order Quantity, fill in the necessary information and click the "Continue"
button.

Custom SSL

With the ever-increasing reports of Internet security issues, browser exploits, and
phishing scams, Internet merchants need to reduce any confusion and concern to the
greatest degree possible.

With this in mind, we've developed an exciting new service for our merchants - Custom
SSL, giving you the ability to use your OWN domain name for your secure checkout.
Instead of showing secure.ultracart.com, your checkout can show
secure.yourdomainname.com.

More and more users are switching from Internet Explorer to alternative browsers, such
as Firefox. These next generation browsers draw a lot of attention to secure server
credentials, as shown below. The address bar changes color and shows the lock icon.

The status bar also shows the secure host name next to the lock icon.

191
By using your own certificate, you can continue to use UltraCart, and at the same time
reinforce your own brand. In fact, you can completely configure the secure process so
that UltraCart never even appears!

Thanks to our relationship with InstantSSL, the turnaround time for receiving your
certificate and configuring your store is usually under 48 hours!

To order SSL, log in to your account and navigate to: Main Menu  Configuration 
Other Configuration  Custom SSL Purchase. You can read more about SSL at the
screen that follows. To make your purchase, click on the "Yes, sign me up!" button.
Note: you must have a credit card on file with UltraCart before you can sign up.

The next screen that appears will display the three SSL options: PremiumSSL,
InstantSSL Pro and InstantSSL. Click on the radio button for the SSL of your choice.

192
Then complete the "Configure your Certificate" section. Don't forget to select the
"Certificate Length" (1, 2 or 3 years).

Click the "Complete Transaction" button when finished.

193
ORDER MANAGEMENT
Chapter

4. Order Management 4
One of UltraCart’s most powerful features is its robust back office systems. The apex of
this system is the Order Management section.

Main Menu  Order Management

The order management screen is divided into 2 sections: Departments and Tools. Each
section allows you to manage a particular piece of the back office process.

Figure 166 - Order Management

194
Departments

This section has four elements: Accounts Receivable, Auto Orders, Pre-orders and
Shipping.

Accounts Receivable

The Accounts Receivable section allows you to review and manage orders that have not
completed the payment management process. Basically, it allows you to quickly process
all outstanding orders.

Figure 167 - Accounts Receivable section

In the lower section of the screen you will see columns of pending orders types. All
outstanding orders will be listed underneath each order type heading. At times all order
types may not fit across the screen. When that occurs you will see the message “there are
more payment types below, scroll down to see more”.

Viewing Order Details

You can view the details and process a single order simply by clicking (once) on the
appropriate order id. This subject will be covered in detail later in the Individual Order
Screens section.

Processing Orders

The buttons at the top of the screen allow you to manipulate/process a single order or
even multiple orders. To utilize these buttons, you must first select the orders you wish
to process by clicking the checkbox to the left of each desired order id. Immediately
195
below each heading is a “Select All” checkbox. As it implies, this allows you to select all
orders in that particular column.

Refresh Button

At any given time you can “refresh” the Accounts Receivable screen by clicking on the
“Refresh” button. This will re-draw the screen and add any new orders that may have
been placed since you came to this screen. Since it re-draws the entire contents of the
screen it will also remove any check marks you may have set. Basically it’s a “start-
over” function.

Authorize Orders – Non Gateway Merchants

It is recommended that you print the orders before using the batch authorize screen if you
do not have a gateway. When you press the “Authorize Orders” button at the accounts
receivable screen, you will be taken to the Batch Authorize screen. This screen provides
a list of all pending orders by ID number that you checked at the accounts receivable
screen. You can quickly process each order by entering the Authorization Ticket Number
(from your transaction terminal) in the space provided to the right of the order ID. If an
order was declined, simply uncheck the checkbox to the left of the appropriate order ID.
When you have processed all of the orders, click on the “Authorize” button to save the
entered information. The orders will then be moved to the Shipping department.

Figure 168 - Batch Authorize for non-gateway merchants

Authorize Orders – Gateway Merchants

The authorize orders screen for gateway merchants is quite different. For each order, you
will see a copy of the order receipt, followed by 3 radio buttons. By default, the
“Process” radio button is selected. If you wish to reject a particular order, click on the
“Reject” radio button. If you do not want to process a particular order, check the “Do
Nothing” radio button. You can optionally enter any notes in the provided field.

196
Figure 169 - Batch Authorize for gateway merchants

After you have set the desired options scroll down to reach other orders. Once you have
set the action for all orders, click on the “Process Payments” button to begin processing
your orders.

While the orders are being processed, you will see a progress bar showing you the current
status. When all of the orders are complete, you will be automatically taken to the Batch
Authorize Review screen.

Batch Authorize Review Screen

The review screen will show you all orders, as-well-as their disposition. If the order has
been approved (successful) only the ID number will be shown. If the transaction was
rejected (declined), the entire order form will be displayed. You may choose to manually
override the result by selecting Authorize, reject the order by selecting Reject, or if you
want to attempt to contact the customer and acquire different payment information,
choose Do Nothing.

197
Figure 170 - Batch Authorize Review

If you choose Do Nothing, the order will remain in the accounts receivable screen but
will have a light-red background to remind you that its authorization was unsuccessful.
Once you’ve made your selections, click the “Save” button to return to the accounts
receivable screen.

Export Orders

You can export the selected orders by pressing the “Export” button. This will then export
the orders in the format you specified in the configuration section of the back office
system. A dialog box will appear allowing you to select “save” or “open” the file(s).

198
Print Orders

You can print the selected orders by pressing the “Print Orders” button. This will
dynamically generate a PDF document containing one order per page, which you can
then print for further offline processing.

Print Drafts

UltraCart allows merchants who do not have an e-check gateway to accept e-check orders
through the use of draft check printing.

A draft check is printed using the account, routing, and check number collected from the
customer during the checkout. Simply print the checks on blank check stock (purchasable
from most office supply stores) and deposit the checks at your bank.

Figure 171 - Draft Paper Selection

When you print a draft you will be taken to a screen where you can select the type of
check stock you are using. Make your selection, and press the “Continue” button.
UltraCart will then create a PDF file containing draft checks for the selected orders.

Figure 172 - Sample Draft Check

199
Print Packing Slip

You can print packing slips for the selected orders by pressing the “Print Packing Slip”
button.

Reject

You can select multiple orders to reject at one time. This is especially helpful if someone
submits multiple bogus orders. When you press the reject button, you are asked to
confirm this action to prevent you from accidentally rejecting valid orders.

Change View

There are two different ways to view your orders in AR; by method or by ship date.
You've already seen the "by method" view in previous discussions.

You can switch between views at any time by selecting the view desired from the drop-
down menu on the right side of the screen. Once you've made your selection, click the
"Change View" button.

Ship Date View

The Ship Date View will show orders by order ID. Each order will also show the Bill To
(name), Ship to (name), Ship Date (date) and Order Total (amount). All the actions
explained earlier work the same on this screen as on the by method view.

Figure 173 - By Ship Date view

200
Order Editing (accounts receivable)
You can manage individual orders by clicking on the Order ID. Depending on the order
type, you will be shown one of several screens, each with payment method specific
options. Generally, each screen is divided into 3 sections; Order, Payment, and Merchant
Comments. For space saving reasons, the individual order screenshots in this section of
the manual are truncated. The truncation point is identified with a solid black line.

Order Section
The Order section begins with a row of buttons. All screens have five buttons except for
the Draft Screen which has six.

Edit Customer, Edit Items and Copy Order Buttons

The first three buttons are Edit Customer, Edit Items and Copy Order. Since these
buttons are the same action in all “individual order” screens for both Accounts
Receivable and Shipping, they are covered in detail in the Order Editing/Shipping
Section of this manual (page 212).
Print PDF Button

Click on the "Print PDF" button to send the order to your browser in .pdf format. A
browser window (or tab) will open and display the order. You can then save it as a .pdf
file, send via email or print. Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your system to
accomplish this function.

Print HTML

Click the "Print HTML" button to send the file to your printer. It will also be displayed
in a new browser window. You can view the html from the browser window by selecting
"page source" under the VIEW menu at the top of the screen.
Print Draft (eCheck only)

The Print draft button is the same process as discussed earlier at the Accounts
Receivable section (print drafts) on page 199.

Credit Card Order – Gateway Merchant

201
Figure 174 - Credit Card Order Screen

To process a credit card order, gateway merchants simply press the Process Payment
button. You will then be taken to the result screen to see the result of the transaction.

Check Order

To process an e-check order, you will need to first print the draft by clicking on the Print
Draft button. Take the draft to the bank and deposit it. After the draft has cleared the
bank, return to the order and click the draft cleared button at the bottom of the screen.
This will mark the payment as received and move the order to the shipping department.

If the draft bounced or for some other reason you do not want to process this order, click
the reject order button.

202
Figure 175 - Draft Check Order Screen

 E-Check gateway merchants will see a screen identical to the credit card order
screen in lieu of the draft check screen. Simply proceed using the instructions
provided for the credit card screen instead.

PayPal Order

Please see the PayPal chapter of this manual for additional information on IPN.

If an IPN transaction was successfully completed by the customer, you will see the
results of that transaction on the order screen. Press the Received PayPal button to
complete order processing, or press Reject Order to reject the order.

203
Figure 176 - Redacted PayPal Order Screen

Auto Orders
The Auto Order feature allows a merchant to configure a method in the system to re-
order the item automatically. Auto Orders are usually configured when the Item is first

204
created but can also be added later. The configuration of Auto Orders is covered in
Chapter 5 (Item Management  Auto Order tab).

Auto Order Search

At times a merchant may desire to edit, disable, enable or cancel their customers “auto
order”. Although an email is usually (merchant option) sent to the customers with a
cancellation button (link) they may call upon you, the merchant, to make changes (i.e.,
credit card information update).

To edit an Auto Order setting, you will need to locate the auto order. To use the Auto
Order Search routine navigate to:

Main Menu  Order Management  Auto Orders

You can enter one of 13 different search criteria to locate the customer’s auto order.
Your entry must be an exact match and is case sensitive. If it fails, go back to the Auto
Order Search screen and try a different field (example: use email vise last name).

Figure 177 - Auto Order Search

205
Once you’ve entered your criteria, click on the “Search” button. If a match is found, the
Search (results) screen will then appear with a list of the order(s) that match the criteria.

Figure 178 - Auto Order Search Results

Cancel Auto Orders

To cancel the customers Auto Order, click on the “Cancel” button. Make sure you select
the correct order to cancel as a customer may have more than one.

Edit Auto Orders

Once you’ve located an auto order and it is presented in the search results list, click on
the “edit” button to the right. This will take you to the Auto Order Editor screen.

Figure 179 - Auto Order Editor Screen

This screen is divided into 4 sections; Settings, Credit Card Information, Items and Order
History. Much of this information can be edited.

The original order ID is shown at the top of the screen. The customer will also have this
number and may refer to it when they contact you regarding cancellation or changes.

206
Settings
There are 4 fields here that you can edit as follows.

Enabled
This field will indicate if the Auto
Order is active or inactive. A check
box will be in the box to the right of
the word Enabled when the Auto
Order is Active. To make this auto
order inactive, remove the check mark
from the box.

Cancel After _____ More Orders

This field allows you to have the Auto Order cancelled after a certain number of auto
orders have occurred (as scheduled). Enter the number desired in the text box.

Credit Card Attempt _____

This field indicates the number of times the card processing has failed. This field will
reset to zero if and when the card is successfully processed. Successful results will
usually come from updated card information entered by the merchant.

Next Attempt _____

This field indicates the next date the credit card will be processed after failure. The
default is every 3 days. If the card fails after 3 attempts, the Auto Order will be set to
inactive (the check mark in the Enable Field will automatically be removed).

Credit Card Information

This section will show the credit card
information that the merchant used
during the original purchase of the
Auto Order. It will show the Card
Type, Card Number and Card
Expiration date.

Items
This section will show 8 fields allowing you to alter or establish new settings on the Auto
Order as follows.

Original Item ID is the Item ID you assigned during creation of the item in the item
editor. This field cannot be changed.

207
 Quantity will be the number of items the customer ordered when they placed the
original order.

Frequency Override displays the frequency for how often the order is reoccurring. If
this is an Automatic Auto Order it will show the frequency that the merchant
established. A drop-down list is provided so you can change the frequency if
desired.

Next Shipment shows the next date the recurring order will occur.

Next Item ID shows the Item ID for the next shipment. This could be the same as
the Original Item ID if so configured or it could be a different Item ID in the case of
a "Step Item ID".

Number of Rebills shows the number of auto orders that have already occurred.

No Orders After allows the merchant to indicate a STOP date which will terminate
the auto order program after the date you enter in the text box.

Override Unit Cost allows merchants to change the original unit cost by placing the
new unit cost into the text box.

Override Unit Cost for Next "x" Orders allows merchants to set the number of orders
that the preceding "Override Unit Cost" will be in effect for. Enter the number in the
text box.

Order History
This section shows the history of auto orders as they have recurred. You can click on a
particular Order ID (link) to bring the order into the Order Editor.

Click on the "Save" button at the bottom of the screen to save any changes.

208
Pre-Orders
Items purchased that have been designated as Pre-Orders in the Item Management
(shipping) section will be held in the Pre-Orders section of UltraCart. This allows
merchants the ability to manage these items. Your options will be to Refresh, Print
Orders and Release.

Figure 180 - Pre-Orders Screen

Refresh Button
Clicking the Refresh button will redraw the screen and remove all check marks.

Print Orders Button

Select orders for printing by placing a check in the box to the left of the item ID. Then
click on the “Print Orders” button. The order will be sent to a PDF file which you can
then print.

Releasable indicator
Items will appear with a green background once you remove its “Pre-Order” status in the
Item Management (shipping) section. It will still need to be released before moving on
the Accounts Receivable.

Release Button
Place a check mark in the box of the item(s) you want to release and click on the
“Release” button. Released items will then be moved on to the Accounts Receivable
section. CAUTION. You can use this method to release items that have not been
removed from the pre-order status.

Individual Pre-Order Screen

209
Clicking on any order ID number will take you to the order editor. Very much like other
order editors, it is divided into three sections; Order Section (Edit Customer and Edit
Items buttons are covered later in the Order Editor Section), Pre-Order (release or reject
an order) and Merchant Comments (enter comments for later reference).

Figure 181 - Pre-Order Editor

210
Shipping Department
Once an order’s payment has been processed, it is moved to the Shipping department
(Order Management  Shipping). There are 2 different views of the Shipping
Department depending on your configuration. They are defined as follows:

1. Self Serviced view - for merchants doing their own shipping

2. Fulfillment Provider view - for merchants using a Fulfillment Center (Transmission
Mechanism must be configured).

Some merchants have both types of Distribution Center configured because they have the
bulk of their shipments handled by a Fulfillment Center but also do some of their own
shipping. Some merchants may have several Fulfillment centers in various geographical
locations and therefore will have several Distribution Centers configured. When these
users access the shipping department, a special screen will appear for selection of the
fulfillment center the wish to work with.

Self Serviced Distribution Center

This section is basically for those merchants doing all or a portion of their shipping. It
provides you the ability to keep track of the Pick, Pack and Ship operations, making it as
efficient as possible. The shipping department tool bar (explained later) allows you to
print various labels, import/export orders to UPS WorldShip, Endicia Dazzle, Fedex,
MOM or to a file. You can also edit orders, add shipping information and mark orders as
shipped (completed). The following is a sample of the screen and functions [buttons].

211
Figure 182 - Shipping Department Screen

On the lower portion of the screen, you will see the orders currently awaiting shipment.
You can review and edit single orders by clicking on its ID number from the list of
orders. This gives you the opportunity to review the order in detail and make changes as
necessary. To process several orders, select the ones desired by clicking on the check
box to the left of the order ID number and then utilize the Tool Bar Buttons (explained
later).

Order Editing (shipping)

Clicking on an order ID will take you to the Shipment Screen where you can view and
edit order information. This screen is divided into three sections; Order, Shipment and
Merchant Comments.

Previous / Next navigation buttons

In the top right corner of the order (while viewing from the Shipping Department) you
may see the Previous Order and Next Order buttons. In the example above, only orders
in the Fed Ex Ground column will display those buttons when viewed in the editor
because it has more than one order it.

212
Figure 183 - Shipment screen

Order Section
This section allows you to view the order and has five buttons; Edit Customer, Edit
Items, Copy Order, Print Packing Slip and Print HTML.

Edit Customer Button

Clicking on the Edit Customer Button will take you to The Edit Customer. This screen
has five tabs: Billing, Shipping, Gift, Tax and Other.

Billing Tab
The Customers personal information, the payment date and method, credit card
information and merchant notes can all be edited here. Click the “Save” button when
finished.

213
Figure 184 - Billing Tab

Shipping Tab
At the Shipping Tab you can edit the customers shipping details. The shipping method,
handling, tracking number and shipping date can all be changed if need be. Space is also
provided for special instructions. Once you have completed the editing, Shipping Costs
can be recalculated by clicking on the “Recalculate Shipping Cost” button. Click on the
“Save” button when finished.

214
Figure 185 - Shipping Tab

Gift Tab
At the Gift Tab you can edit the gift charge, wrapping paper title, wrapping paper cost
and gift message. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

215
Figure 186 - Gift Tab

Tax Tab
At the Tax tab you can set/change the County and the Tax Rate. Click the “Save” button
when finished.

Figure 187 - Tax Tab

Other Tab
At the Other tab, you can obtain and/or edit several conditions and states of the order.

Figure 188 - Other Tab

216
Exported to QuickBooks™
A check in the box for this field will indicate that a user has run UltraBooks and the order
has been exported to QuickBooks™. It basically insures that the order will not be
exported again. Removal of the check in the box will cause the order to be re-exported to
QuickBooks™.

Current Location (non-editable)

The Current Location will show the "state" of the order which could 1 of the following:
o Pre-order – merchant set the item as a pre-order until inventory is replenished.
o Accounts Receivable – order is shown in the Accounts Receivable department
awaiting manual processing or handling.
o Shipping Department – order is in the Shipping Department awaiting shipping.
o Completed Order – Order has been shipped. Only orders in this state will be exported
to QuickBooks™.
o Rejected Order – order is invalid. User cancelled at some point in the processes.
This order will not be included for any reports nor will it be exported to
QuickBooks™.

New Location
This field is used to change the present "state" of the order. You can move an order from
its present state to any of the locations listed above. Select the new location from the
drop-down list and then click on the "move" button. This will now become and be shown
as the Current Location.

Custom Fields 1 – 5
If a merchant has passed custom field data for the order via the buy link, it can be viewed
and edited here. For more information on Custom Field 1-5 configuration, see page 150.

Customer IP Address
This will display the IP Address of the system that was used to place this particular order.
This field is not editable.

Screen Branding Theme Code

If a Screen Branding Theme was passed via the buy link for this order, its name will be
displayed here. This field is not editable.

Edit Items Button

Clicking the “Edit Items” button will take you to the Item Editor Screen. This will list all
items of the order. Merchants can modify all item details as well as delete or add
individual items from the order. Note: you may need to deal with additional collections if
items are added or changed after payment is processed.

217
Figure 189 - Item editor screen

Item Editor Screen (Layout)

Each item ordered will be separated by a dividing line. The “Options” section (below the
Description box) is auto-expandable. Once you complete one entry and click on the
“Recalculate” button at the top of the screen, another empty line will be generated for
your next option.

Modifying an Item
Modifying an item is very straightforward. Once you have made your changes, click on
the “Submit” button. Re-calculations will automatically occur. If you want to see the
new figures before submitting, click on the “Recalculate” button.

Adding a New Item

Below the last item listed in this screen is a section for adding an item. Enter the Item
ID and Quantity into the two fields provided and click on the “Add” button to the left.
The newly added item will appear is the list with the others. You can also edit this item as
well.

Item ID Search
Click on the “Search” button (in the Item ID column) when the item ID is unknown.
The Item Search screen will appear in a separate browser window.

218
Figure 190 - Item Search Screen

Here you can enter your search criteria to help find items. Clicking on the “Start Search”
button will begin the search. The Item Search Result screen will appear (in a separate
browser window) showing the items that matched the search criteria. No items will
appear in the list if nothing matched. To search again, click on the browsers “back”
button.

Figure 191 - Item Search Result Screen

Once you are satisfied with your search, you can return to the Item Editor Screen by
closing this browser window. Then, at the Item Editor screen, enter the item ID and
Quantity in the fields provided. Click on the “Add” button. Your newly added item will
now appear as an additional item in the order editor screen.

Click the “Recalculate” button at the top of the screen if you have made changes that
need recalculation. Click the “Submit” button when you are finished editing or adding
items to the order. You will be returned to the Shipment Screen.

Copy Order

219
A customer may place one order for a certain item but yet need to have that same item
sent to other locations (stores). As the merchant you can duplicate the single order into
up to 50 new orders for the same item. These newly created orders will be placed into
Accounts Receivable for payment processing.

Clicking on the “Copy Order” button will take you to the following screen. Here you
simply enter the number of duplications you desire and click on the “copy” button.

Figure 192 - Copy Order screen

After creating the copies, a confirmation screen will appear showing the list of newly
created orders (by order ID) that will appear in Accounts Receivable. Click on the
“return to original order” button.

Print Packing Slip

Clicking on the “Print Packing Slip” button will print to a PDF file that will be
automatically previewed in your browser. From there you can print from the “file” menu.

Print HTML

220
Click on the “Print HTML” button and the order will appear in your browser. To print a
hard copy, select Print from the “File” Menu. Once you’ve printed the page, click the
“back” button in your browser to return to the Shipment Screen.

Shipment Section
Use this section of the screen when the product has shipped or when an order is rejected.
In the box provided, enter the Tracking Number if one exists. You can also click on the
“Skip Customer Notification” box if desired. Click on the “Shipped” button when
completed or, click on the “Reject Order” if applicable.

Figure 193 - Delivery Window

Merchants Comments
Use this section to add your (merchant) comments to the order. Click the “Save
Comments” button when finished.

Figure 194 - Merchant Comments (shipping)

Shipping Department Tool Bar

The top portion of the Shipping Department screen is what we call the Tool Bar. The
following is a list of available function (buttons). Each feature will be discussed later.

Refresh the screen Change the view Change Status Mark as Shipped
Print Address Labels Print Orders Print Packing Slips Print Pick List
Export Orders Export UPS WorldShip Import UPS WorldShip Export MOM
Export Endicia Dazzle Import Endicia Dazzle

221
Figure 195 - Shipping Department Tool Bar

Customizing the Tool Bar

This feature will allow you to have a toolbar that is tailored to
your individual needs. Click on the "italics I" icon located in
the tool bar to reveal the available settings.

When the list appears, select the items

that you want to be visible in your tool
bar by clicking on the checkbox to the
left of the item. Click on the "save
settings" when finished. The
following shows the tool bar after the
user has configured custom settings.

To utilize the buttons in the toolbar, simply click the checkbox to the left of the order(s)
you wish to process and press the appropriate toolbar button. Make certain you have the
appropriate orders selected before you click a tool bar button.

Refresh Button

Click on this button to “redraw” the screen. This will insure you are current with any
possible order changes that may have occurred and it will remove all check marks. It’s
also a simple and quick way to start over with a clean and up-to-date screen.

222
Change View Button

This feature requires two steps. First select the View you desire using the drop-down
menu. Your choices are Combined, Combined by Date, By Method, By Ship Date or By
Status. Once you have selected your choice of views, click on the “Change View” button
to invoke that setting. Your orders will appear in that configuration below the tool bar.
Ship Date View
Viewing records in Ship Date View will list them in columnar format by Ship Date
showing Order ID, Bill To, Ship To, Ship Date and Order total. Orders will be separated
by Ship Date.

A plus/minus icon is positioned in the upper right corner that when clicked, will expand
or collapse that particular dates orders in or out of view. The above, showing a minus (-)
icon, is the expanded view showing all orders that ship on that date.

The following is the collapsed view, hiding all orders for that date. Notice the plus (+)
icon now appears.

Change Status Button

UltraCart allows you to mark each order with its current status in the shipping pipeline.
When you change the status of an order its background color will change. Status colors
are shown in the legend to the right of the screen. Your choices for shipping status are;
Back ordered, Picking, Packing, Packed and Released for shipment.

First click in the check box to left of the orders that you want to change the status of.
Next select the status desired in the “change status” drop-down-menu. Then, click on the
“Change Status” button to invoke the change(s). The orders that you selected should now
have the background color that corresponds with the status that you set.

223
Figure 196 - Shipping Status

Mark Shipped
Once your orders have been packed and shipped, you need to set their status as such. In
the Shipping Department screen, check the orders desired and click on the “Mark
Shipped” button.

Your orders will then be listed in the Batch Ship window. There are 3 considerations to
be determined in this window. First place a check mark to the left of the order you want
to mark as shipped, enter the tracking number (if exists) for each order and third, elect to
Skip Customer Notification or not. Once you have made your selections, click on the
“Mark orders as shipped” button.

Figure 197 - Batch Ship Screen

224
Print Address Labels
UltraCart allows you to print address labels for multiple orders onto a sheet of labels.
The size and layout of the label sheets is configured in the document settings section of
the UltraCart configuration. If there is a partial sheet of labels, set the starting position to
the first available label on the sheet. Labels are printed left to right and then top to
bottom. UltraCart will create a PDF file which will be viewed in your browser.

Figure 198 - Sample Label Sheet Configuration

Print Packing Slips

UltraCart allows you to print packing slips to enable streamlined packing operations. To
print packing slips, simply check the desired orders, and click on the “Print Packing
Slips” button. UltraCart will then create a PDF file containing one packing slip per page.
This file will usually appear in your browser window from which you can print your
packing slips.

Figure 199 - Sample Packing Slip

225
Print Pick List

This routine will print a list of any orders you have selected with a check mark. It will
list the Item ID, Quantity and Description. Place a check mark on the orders desired and
click on the “Print Pick List” button. UltraCart will create a PDF file which will be
viewed in your browser.

Export Orders

The export orders button allows you to export the selected orders in either CSV or XML
format for processing in other applications. Click in the check box to left of the orders
that you want to export. Then click on the “Export Orders” button. The export file will
appear in a browser window. From there you can “save” the file to your system (drive).

Export UPS WorldShip

The export UPS WorldShip button allows you to export the selected orders in a format
suitable for import into UPS WorldShip. For more information regarding UPS WorldShip
integration, please see UPS WorldShip in Chapter 8.

Import UPS WorldShip

UltraCart allows you to import the UPS WorldShip result file to automatically enter
tracking numbers into the corresponding order. You do not need to select any orders to
use this button. Importing UPS WorldShip is also covered in Chapter 8 under “Importing
a UPS WorldShip Export File”.

Export Endicia Dazzle

Endicia Internet Postage is a service of Envelope Management Software that prints

Postage for mail and packages that you ship via the U.S. Postal Service (USPS). Dazzle
is a PC-based program that communicates with Endicia and does the actual printing.
You can also design envelopes and labels with Endicia.

UltraCart provides support for Endicia by generating (exporting) the required XML
import file. The current level of integration supports both domestic and international
shipping methods.

To utilize Endicia Dazzle you will first need to signup for an account at Endicia’s web
site; www.endicia.com. They have a 30-day Free Trial so you can start printing postage
right away!

226
Once you are signed up, you can download and install their Dazzle (postage printing)
software. You will use this software to import your exported XML file from your
UltraCart order history (shipping department).

Before you begin, make sure you have successfully signed up at Endicia and downloaded
and installed their software.

Exporting UltraCart Orders

The first step is to export the desired orders from your shipping department. Navigate to:
Main Menu  Order Management  Shipping (link).

If you have multiple distribution centers they will be listed as links. Click on your “in-
house” distribution center link. Otherwise, you will be taken directly to the Shipping
Department Screen.

Figure 200 - Shipping Department screen

Your orders will be listed below the menus on the shipping department screen. You now
need to indicate which orders you want to export to an Endicia Dazzle file. Place a check
mark to left of the orders desired (click in the box). Keep in mind that Endicia Dazzle
will print postage for USPS orders only. Once you have selected the orders, click on the
“Export Endicia Dazzle” button. Your orders will be exported to an XML file.

227
A dialog box should appear. Make certain the radio button is selected next to “Save to
Disk”. Click on the “OK” button. Some operating systems may differ at this step but
the basic concept is to save the file to your system.

Importing to Dazzle
There may be configuration settings and steps that need to be visited in the Dazzle
software before printing your postage. You may desire to design your own custom label,
for example. You also need to select the label and envelope styles. Reference the Dazzle
Help menu or visit their web site for assistance.

Now that you have your orders exported to an XML file, you’ll need to launch the Dazzle
software. There are two ways to import the data; 1) import from the file menu to import
directly to printing the labels or, 2) import to the Address Book for later printing postage.
Most, we find, use the 1st method, importing directly to print postage. We will cover the
steps for that method here.

From the File menu within Dazzle, select “Print from - External File…” (sub menu).

228
Figure 201 - Dazzle Print From menu option
In the dialog box that appears, navigate to where you “saved” the exported file on your
system.

Figure 202 - Dazzle Select Address List File dialog

The “files of type:” needs to be set as “Text XML Format”. The filename you will be
looking for is “ultracart-import.xml” unless you changed the name during the export
function. Once found, click on the name and then the “Open” button. Dazzle will then
import the file and prepare to print the postage. Prior to printing, make certain you have
selected the envelope and label time in Dazzle. Also be sure to insert your labels in your
printer properly.

Endicia will print the postage on your labels. It will also produce an output XML
229
file into the same XML file that you saved your original Export file to. This file will
contain the tracking information for your postage.

Import Endicia Dazzle

As mentioned above, the tracking information is recorded and sent from Dazzle back to
the same file that was originally exported during the Export to Dazzle routine. You can
import that data back into UltraCart which will be written to the order file.

To import Endicia Dazzle information, navigate to:

Main Menu  Order Management  Shipping (link)

Figure 203 - Shipping Department screen

Click on the “Import Endicia Dazzle” button. A screen will appear to allow you to enter
or find the XML file.

Type in the path or click the "Browse" button to locate the XML output file that Endicia
produced (it should have the same name and should be in the same directory the initial
export file went to).

Once you’ve located the file, click the "Upload" button to import it. This will import the
tracking information, etc. into the appropriate order records that you originally exported.

Export MOM
UltraCart provides support for Dynacomp's Mail Order Management (MOM) software by
generating (exporting) the required import file. For further details about MOM see
http://www.dydacomp.com/mom/index.asp.

230
Fulfillment Provider view
As mentioned earlier, those merchants with a Transmission Mechanism configured will
see a completely different Distribution Center view than those doing their own shipping.
These merchants have someone, usually a 3rd party fulfillment center, handling their pick,
pack and ship operation and therefore do not have the need for the tool bar seen in the
Self Serviced DC view.

Shipping Status Columns

The lower portion of the screen will display 4 columns; Queued for Transmission,
Pending Immediate Transmission, Unacknowledged Shipments and Recently
Acknowledged Shipments.

Queued for Transmission

Orders will appear in this column on first arrival into the shipping department only if you
have Transmission Schedules configured (see page 92). These orders will not be
transmitted to fulfillment until the scheduled time arrives. Once transmitted, the order
will move to the 3rd column.

Pending Immediate Transmission

Orders will appear in this column on first arrival into the shipping department only if you
do not have Transmission Schedules configured. They typically will reside in this
column for only 2 to 5 minutes.

Unacknowledged Shipments
Orders that appear in this column have already been transmitted to the distribution
(fulfillment) center and are awaiting return of confirmation and/or tracking information.
If you have a 1-way transmission mechanism then the order will not appear here but goes
directly to the Recently Acknowledged Shipments column.

Recently Acknowledged Shipments.

Orders that appear in this column have received confirmation and/or tracking
information. They are marked as "completed". You will see approximately one weeks
worth of orders listed here.

231
Distribution Center buttons
The top portion of this view displays either 5 or 6 buttons depending upon your
distribution center. If your distribution center has only 1-way communications with
UltraCart, the "Log" button will not be visible. You will only see 5 buttons. . It's highly
recommend that you select and use a 2-way distribution center so shipping data will be
automatically fed back to UltraCart.

Refresh
Click on this button to “redraw” the screen. This will insure you are current with any
possible order changes that may have occurred and it will remove all check marks. It’s a
simple and quick way to start over with a clean and up-to-date screen.

Remove from Queue

This button is used to remove orders (Queued for Transmission) that you've decided not
to send to the fulfillment center. Click on the checkbox to the left of the orders desired
and then click on the "Remove from Queue" button.

Retransmit
This button is used to retransmit any orders (those checked) listed in the Pending
Immediate Transmission column that you want to retransmit to the fulfillment center.
This may be necessary if you have received an indication that your fulfillment center has
not received the orders.

Log
This button will appear only for those transmission mechanisms (fulfillment centers) that
have 2-way communications integrated with UltraCart. Click this button to view the log
file showing details of transmission between UltraCart and the fulfillment center. This is
very helpful to confirm transmission times.

Send Queued
This feature can be used to immediately transmit orders in the Queued for Transmission
column. You'll be overriding the scheduled transmission times. Select the orders desired
(click the check box to the left of the order) and then click the "Send Queued" button.
There may be some time delay before the orders move to the next column.

Mark Shipped
When orders are successfully sent to the fulfillment center, the Order ID's will move
through the columns automatically and UltraCart will mark them as "completed".
Occasionally you may need to manually mark a order as shipped. Click the Mark
Shipped button to do so.

232
Tools
The second section of Order Management is the Tools section.

Main Menu  Order Management  Tools

Your options here are Back End Order Entry, Backfill QuickBooks™ Codes, Customer
Profile Management, Export Orders, and Review Orders.

Back End Order Entry (BEOE)

The Back End Order Entry (BEOE) system is considered BETA. The following
documentation is limited to installation, setup and launching of the program. Further
documentation is being developed. Contact UltraCart support for details not covered
here.

Introduction

UltraCart's Back End Order Entry (BEOE) system is designed to allow merchants to enter
orders directly into their Back Office System without going through their normal Web
Store purchasing processes. This system gives you the opportunity to take direct orders
for your products by phone, email or call-taker service.

Installation and Setup

There are basically two steps to follow in order to install and run the BEOE. They are:
1) Installation of Java Runtime Environment (if not already installed on your system) and
2) Set permissions in UltraCart for the user(s) to run BEOE.
Installation

In order to run BEOE, you need to have Java Runtime Environment software installed.
This is a free program from Sun Microsystems. If you are certain that you already have
this software install, you can skip this step. If you are uncertain, no harm will come from
re-installing it.

233
Open your Internet Browser and go to http://java.com/en/download/windows_xpi.jsp.
Click on the Download button next to "Windows (XPI)". Follow the steps for download
and installation. Although your system may not prompt you, it is a good idea to re-start
your system after installation.
Setup

Before you can run the BEOE in UltraCart, you need to grant your user(s) permission.

Log in to your UltraCart account. Navigate to: Main Menu  Configuration  Users.
At the Users screen, scroll down to the Permission Section. Place a check mark in the
box to the left of the "Back End Order Entry" field (near the bottom of the screen). Click
the "Save" button when finished. Repeat this process for each user that you want to have
the ability to run the BEOE.

Launching BEOE

The first time you launch BEOE it must be done from within UltraCart. Log in to your
account and navigate to: Main menu  Order Management  Back End Order Entry
[link].

A small window should appear informing you that your system will attempt to OPEN
"beoe.jnlp".

Depending on your system, your window may look different than the one displayed
above. Make certain it is set to "open" and then click the "OK" button.

Depending on your system, you may see a screen indicating that "beoe.jnlp" was
downloaded. If so, simply close that window. Also be aware that at times, some of these

234
little windows will be hidden behind larger windows. You may have to do some toggling
of windows to see them.

The next window of concern should be a "warning" that the software being
considered BETA". Although the software is considered BETA, it has been used
successfully by merchants for several months. Click the "OK" button.

Next a very small window should appear waiting for you login information
(Merchant ID, Login and Password).

Enter the appropriate information and click the "login" button. If you have logged in
using a users login and password that does not have "permissions" set for using BEOE,
you will not be allowed to launch the software. The following window will appear.
Close this window, start over and log-in with a user that has permissions for BEOE.

235
Backfill QuickBooks™ Codes
This utility is for those merchants that use UltraBooks to export orders into their
QuickBooks™ program.

Main Menu  Order Management  Tools  Backfill QuickBooks™ Codes [link]

Using this utility will cause UltraCart to backfill your current QuickBooks™ code
configuration(s) into any existing orders that have not been exported into your
QuickBooks™.

Click the start button to begin the process. Within a short time, the following message
will appear.

Your confirmation email should arrive in a matter of minutes and look similar to the
following:

236
Customer Profile Management

You must have elected to “Enable Customer Profiles” (Main Menu  Configuration 
Customer Profile Link) in order to utilize this functionality. Once you have done this,
each customer will be offered the opportunity to “Create A Customer Profile” at
checkout. They begin by entering their email address along with a password. From that
point, UltraCart will build a file from the information they enter during the checkout
process (i.e., name, address, city, state, phone, etc.).

Customer Profile Management Screen

To manage your Customer Profiles, navigate to: Main Menu  Order Management 
Click on the “Customer Profiles Management”. This screen will list all of your
customers that have elected to complete the Customer Profile during the check out
process and any that you have manually added.

Figure 204 - Customer Profiles Screen

Searching for a Customer Profile

If your list of customer profiles is large, you can use the search feature by entering the
customers name in the space provided and clicking on the “Search” button. This search
feature will attempt to match your criteria within the email address field.

Adding a New Customer Profile

You can also add a customer to this list by clicking on the “New” button at the top of the
screen. A screen will appear with similar fields that the customer sees at checkout. Fill
in the fields as desired for your new customer profile.

237
Figure 205 - New Customer Profile screen

In addition to the Customer’s personal information, there are several fields that you can
customize for a particular customer to alter or change some pricing you have configured
in areas such as: Pricing Tiers, handling charges, free shipping, etc. These field are
explained below.

Unapproved Signup field

This is for your Wholesale signups. Place a check in this box if you haven’t yet approved
or decided not to approve this customer for Wholesale

Allow Selection of Shipping Address Type

Checking this box allows the customer to select whether this is a business or residential
address. Otherwise, it will not appear as a selectable option.

Tax Exempt
Check this box if you want UltraCart to NOT add any tax calculations during the
checkout for this customer.

238
No Real-time Charge
Check this box if you do not want this order to be automatically processed through the
payment gateway. The order will be pending in Accounts Receivable for your approval
for payment processing in.

Allow Purchase Order

Check this box to allow this customer to purchase via purchase order

Auto Approve PO
Check this box to automatically approve this customer for Purchase Orders. If not
checked, you will have to manually approve them in their customer profile signup.

Allow COD
Check this box to automatically approve this customer to purchase via Cash On Delivery.

Auto Approve COD

Check this box to automatically approve this customer for COD purchases. If not
checked, you will have to manually approve them in their customer profile signup.

Exempt from handling Charges

This option will only appear if Handling Charges have been configured in any shipping
method. Check this box if you want to exempt this customer from those handling fees.

No Free Shipping
This option will only appear if Free Shipping has been configured in any shipping
method. Check this box if you want to turn off the Free Shipping feature for this
customer.

No Coupons
If you have coupons configured, checking the box will exempt this customer from using
any coupons.

Minimum Subtotal
If you want to require the customer to purchase a minimum dollar amount to qualify,
enter that amount in the box provided.

Minimum Item Count

If you want to require the customer to purchase a minimum number of items to qualify,
enter that number in the box provided.

Qualifies for Pricing Tier

Here you will indicate (by checking the appropriate box) which Pricing Tier this
customer will be qualified for.

Edit or Delete Customer Profile

239
A button is provided to the right of each customer name to allow you to “Edit” the
customer information. The customer profile screen will appear with all the existing
information in place for you to edit. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Click on the “Delete” button to remove the customer profile. This action is not reversible
so make certain you are clicking on the one you want to remove.

Export Orders
You can export orders from the Order Management section using the Export Orders tool.

Main Menu  Order Management  Tools  Export Orders

Export Mappings must be defined before you can export orders from this are. If you
have not defined any export mappings, you will receive this message.

Click the link "here" to be taken to the Configuration  Exporting Orders section of
UltraCart to define your export mappings.

This routine will perform the actual exporting of the orders based upon the criteria you
define at the Export Orders screen. Note: Export Mapping should be configured prior to
performing the export. To configure mapping navigate to: Main Menu  Configuration
 Export Orders.

Figure 206 - Export Orders screen

240
The following criterion needs to be defined to tell UltraCart which orders you want to
export.

Export Mapping
In the drop-down menu, select which pre-defined mapping you want to use.
Your choices will be Accounts Receivable, General or Shipping Department.

Order Location
In the next drop-down menu, select what location you will be exporting from.
Your choices will be Pre-ordered, Accounts Receivable, Shipping Department,
Completed Orders or Rejected Orders.

Date
In the 3rd drop-down window, you will indicate which specific date you want the search
to be acting upon. Your choices will be Creation Date, Payment Date or Shipping Date.

Date Range
Here you will define the starting (from) date and time to the ending (to) date and time
you want the search confined to. Entering times is optional. The default times are set to
cover the entire 24 hrs of each day.

Click the "Export" button to begin the export. The following dialog window (similar to
the one below) will appear to allow you to open or save your export file. Your action
here will usually depend on how you configured your export mapping. It is suggested
that you save your file onto your system (documents folder perhaps).

241
Review Orders

The Review Orders screen allows you to locate orders in the database using a variety of
criteria.

Main Menu  Order Management  Review Orders

Figure 207 - Review Orders Search Screen

Entering Search Criteria

242
To search your order database, enter search criteria into as many or as few fields as you
wish. To narrow your search we recommend that you enter as much known information
as possible.

Once you have entered your search criteria, press the “Submit” button. The result page
will show the Order ID, as well as basic customer information. To print orders, click in
the checkbox to the left of each desired Order ID and press the “Print Orders” button.

Figure 208 - Review Orders Result

UltraCart will then generate a custom PDF file containing the requested orders. From
there you can print your orders. Click the back button on your browser to return to the
Review Orders Screen.

Viewing Orders

To view an individual order from within the Review Orders screen, click on its Order ID.
A new screen will appear with the order details displayed. At this screen you can, Edit
Customer Information, Edit Items, Copy Order, Print Order and/or Print Packing Slip
(See Order Editing on page 212).

243
Figure 209 - Review (individual) Order Screen

244
PAYPAL
Chapter

5. PayPal 5
Integration with PayPal

PayPal allows any business or consumer with an email address to securely, conveniently,
and cost-effectively send and receive payments online. PayPal originally grew as a
payment method in the auction space on prominent sites like eBay and Yahoo.com, but is
now a common form of payment for online stores. Accepting PayPal at an online store
expands the audience of people that can pay electronically for goods and services.

Some merchants may choose to start out only accepting PayPal payments and then
branch out into credit cards via a payment gateway as their business grows and matures.

PayPal Account Types

There are three (3) different account types; Personal, Premier and Business. Merchants
new to PayPal must sign up for an Account Type. PayPal’s website illustrates the various
features of each account type. Below is a comparison chart that gives you a quick glance
of each.

Figure 210 - Account Comparison

245
Sign up for PayPal (new PayPal customer)
According to PayPal, the signup process only takes a few minutes. As part of the
enrollment process, merchants must attach a bank account to their PayPal account that
will receive the payments. The process of verifying the bank account takes 3-5 business
days. This means a new merchant can possibly be accepting PayPal payments in only
three days!

Go to www.paypal.com and click on the “Sign Up” link at the top of the screen.

At the next screen, select the account you want and click the “Continue” button. PayPal
recommends a Business Account for Business Owners.

Figure 211 - PayPal Choose Account Type screen

Once you've clicked on the "Start Now" button for Business Owners, you'll be shown the
Getting Started screen which gives you a preview of the required signup steps:
1. Sign up for your Business Account:
Provide information about your business
Provide Business Owner Contact Information
Establish your PayPal Account Login

246
 Provide Financial Details (adding a bank account so PayPal can transfer money
from your PayPal account).

2. Verify Information:
Confirm email address
Confirm your bank account

3. Set up your preferred payment solution.

Once completed, you'll be taken to your "My Account Overview". If you haven't
completed some of the necessary steps, they will be shown in a "To do list" on this screen
serving as a reminder of what you need to complete.

Upgrade (existing PayPal Personal Account holders)

To upgrade to a Premier or Business account, follow the steps below. If you would like to
continue to do business under your own name, choose a Premier account. If you would
like to do business under a company or group name, choose a Business account. Business
accounts come with the ability to give multiple users some level of access to the account,
but otherwise offer all the same features as Premier accounts. When you upgrade your
account, you will retain the account history of your Personal account.

Here's How:

1. Log in to your PayPal account.

2. Click the Upgrade Account link in the Enhance Account
box.
3. Click Upgrade Now.
4. Choose a Business or Premier account.
5. Click Continue.
6. If you chose to upgrade to a Business account, fill in your
business information and click Continue.
7. You have now upgraded your account.

PayPal Business Solutions

There are three different PayPal Business Solutions of concern for our shopping cart
environment;

 Express Checkout - Lift sales by adding PayPal to your website.

 Website Payments Standard - Accept credit cards quickly and easily.
 Website Payments Pro - Get a merchant account and gateway all in one.

At UltraCart, these translate to:

247
 Web Payments Standard – Instant Payment Notification (IPN)
Express Checkout Only
Web Payments Pro – Express Checkout and Direct Payments

PayPal Website Payments Standard

Customers shop on your website and pay on PayPal.
This is an easy and quick way to start accepting credit cards online. A simple integration
into UltraCart allows your customers to pay securely and easily. Accept all major credit
cards, debit cards, bank transfers, and PayPal payments hassle-free. You don’t need a
separate merchant account or gateway. Your customers don’t even need a PayPal
account. PayPal Website Payments Standard integrates easily with UltraCart.

Figure 212 - Website Payments Standard Flow

Express Checkout
Increase sales with PayPal Express Checkout

According to PayPal, merchants with the Express Checkout button increase sales by 14%
on average and that PayPal has over 150 million accounts worldwide.

Express Checkout provides a seamless checkout for PayPal account holders via an API-
based integration through UltraCart. Customers select payment method and shipping
address on PayPal, then return to your website.

248
PayPal Website Payments Pro (USA only)
The all-in-one online payment processing solution.

Want to accept credit cards directly on your website and get the fastest checkout available
with PayPal? PayPal Website Payments Pro is the answer. You get the features of an
internet merchant account and payment gateway at a low cost.

This all-in-one solution gives you features comparable to merchant accounts and
gateways – through a single provider, at a lower cost. Customers paying by credit card
stay on your website for the entire transaction; PayPal is invisible (USA only). You don’t
need a separate merchant account and gateway. Control your checkout from start to
finish, and easily integrate PayPal with UltraCart. With PayPal Website Payments PRO,
you will have affordable rates with no hidden fees and accept all major credit cards, debit
cards, and PayPal payments. With credit cards, customers shop and pay on your website
(UltraCart).

Figure 213 - Website Payments Pro Flow

249
Setting up your Payment Solution

The last step (at PayPal) in the process is to select and set up your payment solution. The
following describes the steps for making your choice for PayPal Standard, Express
Checkout or Web Site Payments Pro. The configuration within UltraCart for your
payment solution will be discussed later.

Typically when you've completed the Sign up and Verification steps, "Set up your
payment solution" will be pending and shown on your PayPal Account Overview Screen.

Website Payments Standard

Basically there is nothing more to do at PayPal for Website Payments Standard. You
simply need to configure such at the Payments screen within your UltraCart account. If
you are using PayPal Standard, go to page 258 for configuration instructions.

Website Payments Pro

If you want to sign up for Website Payments Pro (Direct Payments and/or Express
Checkout), log in to your PayPal account (if not already logged in) and click on the
"Merchant Services" tab at the top of the screen.

At the next screen, click on the "Website Payments Pro" link

on the left navigation bar.

At the screen that follows, click on the "Submit application"

link on the right side of the
page.

You will be presented with

250
an Application that is required by PayPal. The majority of the information required will
be filled in for you if you've already signed up for a Business Account. Complete the
remaining fields and click the "Accept and Continue" button.

Once your application is accepted, you will be returned to the "My Account" screen.

You should now see Step 3 with a pending action of "Accept billing agreement". Click
the blue "Go" button to continue the process.

Here you will be presented with the current monthly fee for your PayPal service. If you
agree, click the "Agree" button. You will then be taken to the API Credentials screen.

API Access
(Express Checkout or Website Payments Pro)

API literally means “application program interface”, a set of routines, protocols, and
tools for building software applications. UltraCart is fully integrated with PayPal and in
order for UltraCart to gain access to PayPal functionality, you will need to apply for and
obtain API Credentials (signature) which authorizes us to access your account on your
behalf).

In the Request API credentials window, click on the “Set up PayPal API credentials and
permissions” link.

251
Note: if that window doesn't appear or, if you are just logging in to obtain credentials,
go to "My Account" screen and click on the "Profile" sub-tab and then click on the API
Access link. That will take you to the Setting up PayPal API Credentials and permissions
screen.

In the Set up PayPal API credentials and permissions" window, select "Request API
Credentials".

On the Request API Credentials page, click the radio button next to API Signature and
then click the Agree and Submit button at the bottom.

252
You will then be taken to the "The View or Remove API Signature" screen which
displays your API credentials.

We recommend you "copy and paste" this information to document file and save to your
system. You'll need this information later when you configure PayPal within your
UltraCart account. Click on the "Done" button. You'll then be taken to the following
screen.

253
You can return to this screen at PayPal at anytime to view your Credentials.

254
Configuring PayPal as a Payment method
To configure PayPal as a payment method, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Payments  Methods [tab]

Once at the Payment screen click on the checkbox to the right of "Accept PayPal". The
screen will expand to show the PayPal configuration fields.

PayPal Business Email

Regardless of what Integration Method you chose, you'll need to enter your PayPal
business email in the first field.

QuickBooks™ Codes
If you have enabled UltraBooks and download your orders for import to QuickBooks™,
you'll want to enter your QuickBooks™ code and QuickBooks™ Deposit To Account
code.

Hold Order in Accounts Receivable

Typically when a customer completes payment at PayPal, the order will go directly to
shipping. If you desire to have the opportunity to confirm that payment is made (check
your PayPal account for example), you can hold the transaction in accounts receivable
until you confirm payment and approve its movement to the shipping department. This
option does not apply to those using Direct Payments.

To activate, click the checkbox to the right of the “Hold order in account receivables…”
statement.

255
Below is a sample order that is pending in Accounts Receivable for approval.

Figure 214 - PayPal Order pending in Accounts Receivable

In some rare circumstances, customers may issue PayPal payments that do not match the
email address of the order. When this occurs, the merchant needs to manually authorize
the order via the accounts receivable section of the system.

PayPal Integration Method

Once you have obtained your API Signature, you should have acquired the following
from their site:

 PayPal Business Email

 API User Name
 API Password
 Signature code

PayPal Express Checkout

To configure PayPal Express Checkout, navigate to:
Main Menu  Configuration  Payments  Methods
Click on the Radio Button to the left of PayPal Express Checkout. The screen will then
expand to display four additional fields.

256
Here’s where you use the information you obtained from PayPal.

o Enter the API User Name assigned by PayPal.

o Enter the API Password assigned by PayPal.
o Enter the API Signature.
o Environment: Select “Live” from the drop-down menu.

Scroll down and click on the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen to save your
configuration.

Pay Pal Website Payments Pro (Express Checkout and Direct Payments)
Navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Payments  Methods

Click on the Radio Button to the left of PayPal Website Payments Pro (Express Checkout
and Direct Payments). The screen will then expand to display four additional fields.

Here’s where you use the information you obtained from PayPal.

o Enter the API User Name assigned by PayPal.

o Enter the API Password assigned by PayPal.
o Enter the API Signature.
o Environment: Select “Live” from the drop-down menu.

Scroll down and click on the “Save” button at the bottom of the screen to save your
configuration.

257
If you are unable to complete the steps above or are unsuccessful in configuring your
PayPal Pro Solution, send an email to support@ultracart.com requesting assistance.

Website Payments Standard (Instant Payment Notification (IPN))

Once you’ve successfully signed up for PayPal, there are two basic steps:

1) configure UltraCart for Website Payments Standard

2) configure Instant Payment Notification (IPN) URL at PayPal (discussed later in this
chapter).

To configure UltraCart for your Web Payments Standard Solution navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Payments  Methods

Click on the Radio Button to the left of PayPal Web Payments Standard (Instant Payment
Notification). There are no additional fields to complete. Click on the "Save" button at
the bottom of the screen.

Specifying the IPN Notification URL

Given that E-Check is one of the methods that customers can pay using PayPal, it is
advisable to set up the Instant Payment Notification (IPN) on PayPal’s system.
Merchants that have chosen Website Payments Standard must configure this setting also.

After logging into PayPal, click the Profile (sub) tab. and in the Profile Summary screen,
click the Instant Payment Notification Preferences link.

258
Figure 215 – Profile Summary and IPN Screens

Next, in the preferences page that appears, check the box that turns IPN “ON”. Also
enter http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-bin/UCPayPalNotify into the URL box provided.
Then click on the “Save” button.

Figure 216 - PayPal IPN URL

Your newly configured IPN status will be shown in the IPN status screen. It is very
important to insure that you have entered the correct URL. You can click the "Edit"
button to make changes.

259
Figure 217 - IPN Status Screen (updated)

PayPal Customer Telephone Number

Some merchants prefer to conduct customer support via telephone rather than email.
However, if you do not have the following option turned "on" in your PayPal Profile
settings, the customer's phone number will not be collected.

To configure this setting:

Login to your PayPal account.
Click on the Profile tab.
Click on the Website Payment Preferences link (under Selling Preferences column)
Scroll to the "Contact Telephone Number" section (bottom of the screen)
You will see 3 options;
On (Optional Field)
On (Required Field)
Off (PayPal recommends this option)
Note: Selecting On (Required Field) could have a negative effect on buyer conversion.
Click the "Save" button after you have made your selection.

Dangling PayPal Orders

Merchants that are using Website Payments Standard will still be using the “IPN”
method. In these transactions, payments are pushed to the merchant instead of pulled
(like with credit cards). Once the customer completes the checkout and finalizes the
order, a copy of the completed order is displayed. A link is then provided that takes the
customer to PayPal to complete payment. Your order is then sent to your UltraCart
account and will reside in Accounts Receivable, waiting for you to confirm that you
received the PayPal payment. If the customer does not (for whatever reason) complete
the payment at PayPal, the order will remain in accounts receivable. We call this a
“dangling order" because no payment was received. Unless you can contact the customer
and get them to make the payment, you would have to “reject” the order in accounts
260
receivable. Until then, it will remain in AR. There is no cure for this situation and it’s
existence might well be a good justification to upgrade your PayPal account to a Website
Payments Pro!

Merchants Operating Multiple UltraCart Accounts

The same PayPal business account should not be associated with multiple UltraCart
accounts. Merchants that are operating several UltraCart stores should sign up for a
different PayPal account for each.

261
ITEMS
Chapter

6. Item Management 6
Introduction

Merchants must configure each product sold as an ITEM in the UltraCart System.
UltraCart provides a flexible way to organization and categorize items to make managing
large stores very efficient.

To create, view and manage your store items, navigate to the Item Management screen.

Main Menu  Item Management

The Item Management screen is divided into two sections; Item Configuration and Tools.

Figure 218 - Item Management screen

Item Configuration
The Item Configuration section has 7 elements; Digital Library, Items, Mix and Match
Groups, Perishable Classes, Pricing Tiers, Store Wide Item Options and Upsell After.

Digital Library
Digital Library and Digital Content are covered in Chapter 7- Digital Delivery (page
386).

262
Items
Click on the “Items” link to manage your Store Items, Kits and Folders in UltraCart’s
Item List Screen. The Item List screen allows you to view and navigate through your
stores folder hierarchy and to create and edit store items within. The Items Screen is
basically in 3 different sections; Folder, Kits, and Items.

Figure 219 - Items Screen

Folders
Folders are the primary organizational mechanism that merchants have at their disposal.
In this section we will discuss the creating new folders, creating new subfolders, and
editing, deleting or moving folders.

When you first begin, there is one folder already created named Filing Cabinet. You
cannot make any changes to this folder. This is where all your store items will appear
until you create other folders.

If your store has few items, then folder creation might not be necessary. Your store items
will probably list satisfactorily under the one heading (folder) “Filing Cabinet” which is
already created for you.

If your store has numerous items, UltraCart supports the creation of any number of
folders and sub-folders to provide a very flexible hierarchy. It is very common for
merchants to create some high-level product category folders and then more specific sub-

263
category folders. Another common scheme is to create folders for each of the
manufacturers that a merchant sells.

New Folder
To create a folder, click on the "new" button to the right of the Folders Heading. The
following screen will appear.

Figure 220 - New Folder Screen

Enter the Description (name) of the folder. Click on the "Submit" button to save. The
newly created folder will now be listed under the Filing Cabinet. In our example we
named our new folder "Accessories".

Figure 221 - New Folder created

Access a Folder
Notice that the newly created folder (name) is a clickable link. By clicking on the link
you will view the sub folders within (if any exist).

Create Sub Folders

Click on the folder you want to create the sub folder in. In our example above we would
click on the Accessories Folder (link). From there the procedure is the same as before.
Click on the "new" button (next to the Folders Heading). Then enter the Description and
click on the "Submit" button.

You can nest sub folders as deep as you want but nesting beyond 2 or 3 levels can make
things a bit more complex. The deeper your folders go the further you have to drill down
to list the store items in them.

264
The following figure illustrates a three level folder hierarchy; Filing Cabinet/
Accessories/Tiny Accessories. Since the Filing Cabinet already existed, we only had to
create an Accessories Folder and then the Tiny Accessories within.

Figure 222 - Folder Hierarchy

Notice in the previous figure that the "Accessories" folder has been selected (bold) and
we thereby see the nested folder named "Tiny Accessories". Also note that there are 3
store items listed near the bottom of the screen that also reside in the Accessories Folder.

You can create as many folders as you like at any level and each will have their own Edit,
Delete and Move buttons (as seen above). Navigate up and down the hierarchy levels by
clicking on the folder name (link).
Editing Folders
To edit the name of a folder, simply click the “Edit” link to the right of the folder name.
The Folder Editor Screen will appear. Change the name and click the “Submit” button.

Deleting Folders
To delete a folder, simply click the "Delete" link to the right of the folder. A warning
dialog will appear to allow you to confirm the delete operation.

265
Make certain the warning dialog shows Folder Name you intend to delete. Click the
"OK" button to delete the folder or the "Cancel" button to abort the cancellation.

 Deleting a folder causes all sub-folders and store items to be deleted as well. Use
extreme caution when deleting entire folders.

Moving Folders
A folder is movable from one parent (level) to another. To begin, navigate within the
folder hierarchy to reveal the folder in question along with the edit, delete and move
button. This basically means click on the folder at the level just above the folder you
want to move. In the following scenario, we have created two additional folders, Control
Parts and Structural Parts which also reside in the Accessories folder. We will now
demonstrate how to “move” the Tiny Accessories folder into the Control Parts folder.

Figure 223 - Selecting a Folder to Move

Click on the “Move” link to the right of the Tiny Accessories folder. The Folder Move
screen will appear.

Figure 224 – Folder Move Screen

You will see “Moving: (folder name)” at the top of the screen. Make certain this is the
folder you want to move. In this example we are moving the Tiny Accessories Folder. A
266
radio button indicates the Parent the Tiny Accessories folder presently resides in:
Accessories in this case. Click the radio button to the left of the folder you want Tiny
Accessories to be “moved to” (in this example we will move it to the Control Parts
Folder). Then click on the “Submit” button.

Upon return to the Item List screen at the Accessories Folder level (where we began, you
will no longer see the Tiny Accessories folder.

You would then navigate to the Control Parts Folder to confirm the move was made.

Remember that all store items and sub-folders within a folder will be moved along with
it. This makes reorganizing complex hierarchies of folders quick and efficient.

Items List
Your store items will be listed under the Items heading. Remember, the items shown
here will depend upon which folder level you are at. Until items are created you will see
"No items have been created in this folder….".

267
Figure 225 - Items Section screen

The Items header (row) can have two different appearances depending on whether or not
you have store items at that folder level as follows:

1) no store items exist at folder level (2 buttons and a Quick Jump feature)

2) store items exist at folder level (7 buttons and a Quick Jump feature)

New Item
Click the "new" button to add a new store item. You will be taken to the Item Editor
screen where you can enter all the attributes of your new item. At a minimum, you
should fill in an Item ID, Description, Cost and Weight. All of the Item fields and Screen
Tabs (options) are explained in the Item Editor Section, page 280, later in this chapter.
You may want to skip to the Item Editor section to create your first item if you didn’t
create one or more items when completing the sign up wizard.

Item Listing
Store Items will be listed alphabetically under 6 columns (highlighted in red box in the
following figure). They are; Item ID, Description, Cost, Buy Link, Dynamic Price and
Inventory History. You should have a few items already listed here that you created
during the Sign-up process.

The Item ID, Description and Cost are entered by you when the item is created (explained
later in the Item Editor section, page 280). The Links, and Inventory History are links
that, when clicked, will take you to a new screen with the appropriate information. These
will be explained later in this chapter.

268
Figure 226 - Items Screen (with items)

Moving Items
At times you may have the need to move your items from one folder to another. You can
move multiple items at a time. First, navigate to the folder your items reside in. In the
items list, click the check box to the left of each item you wish to move.

Once you have selected the item(s) you want to move, click the "Move" button. The
“Item Move” screen will appear.

269
Figure 227 - Item Move screen

All your folders will be listed in this screen. Click the radio button to the left of the
folder you want to MOVE your item(s) to (Control Parts folder in the above example).
Then click on the “Submit” button. You will be returned to the Item List.

Deleting Items
To delete one or more items from your store, navigate to the folder the items reside in.
Click the checkbox to the left of each item desired and then click the "Delete" button.
You will be presented with the following confirmation dialog.

Make certain the warning dialog says "Item(s)" not "Folder". Click the "OK" button to
delete the item(s) or the Cancel button to abort the process.

 Deleting an item does not affect orders already placed.

Copying Items
It's sometimes easier to copy (duplicate) an Item rather than create a new one. After
copying, you can change the attributes of the item in the Item Editor.

First navigate to the folder your item to be copied resides in. Click the checkbox to the
left of the item.

270
Once you've selected the item, click the "copy" button. The following screen will appear.

Figure 228 - Item Copy screen

Since you cannot have two store items with the same Item ID, you will be asked to enter
the new Item ID into the box. The screen shows the original Item ID to the left. If you
want to create more than one copy, separate the new Item IDs with a comma (Figure 228
- Item Copy screen). Click on the "copy" button when finished. Your newly created
(copied) items will now be displayed.

It's suggested that you immediately go to the Item Editor and make the necessary changes
to each item. Click on the Item ID (link) to be taken to the Item Editor for that specific
item.
Item Search
If your store has numerous items, it can sometimes be difficult to locate them, especially
if you've nested them into folders. The item search feature turns that chore into a simple
task. It will search all folders at all levels regardless of what level you are presently at.

271
To start the search, click on the “search” button in the Items heading. This will bring up
the following Item Search screen.

Figure 229 - Item Search screen

You can search for items by Description, Item# (ID). Along with this criteria, you can
specific a price with “less than" or "more than” parameters. You can specify how you
want your items sorted; normal, by description, by item# or by price. Lastly, you can
specify if the items are Inactive (yes or no). Once you have entered your search criteria,
click on the “Start Search” button. If you want to clear the form to enter new search
criteria, click on the “Clear Form” button.

Your search results will appear in a browser window. You can then print the listing or
return to the Item Search screen by clicking on the browser’s back button.
Quick Jump
The Quick Jump is a great shortcut to take a store item to the Item Editor if you know the
exact Item ID. This finder will search your entire store item data base regardless of
which folder you have navigated to.

Enter the Item ID into the Quick Jump Field. Then click the "go" button. If the item is
successfully located, it will appear in the Item Editor Screen.

272
Add Store Wide Option
This feature will allow you to apply pre configured Item Options to any Items that reside
in the folder (level) that you are presently in. Store Wide Item Options are discussed
later in this chapter.

Editing Items
All changes to a store item are done in the Item Editor. This is the same editor that you
utilized when creating new items. There are several different ways to view an items
detail in the Item Editor:

1. click on an Item ID link from the Item List screen.

2. click on an Item ID link from the Search results screen.

3. enter an Item ID in the Quick Jump field on the Items screen

Note: The Item Editor is covered on page 280 of this chapter.

Item Links and forms

Certain links are associated with your store items and are automatically created when you
create your items. This section provides those links in the form of the Buy Button, Buy
Form, Dynamic Pricing and Other (view cart and search link). Merchants can copy and
paste the links provided into the appropriate places on their web site.

UltraCart will create the HTML snippet (link) for each store item you create. The buy
links are accessible from the Item List.

Main Menu  Item Management  Items

First locate the item list that contains the item desired. To obtain a buy link snippet click
on the "[View]" link to the right of the Cost column in the row your item is on.

273
The following screen will appear listing the Buy Link, Buy Form, Dynamic Pricing, and
Other Links.

Figure 230 - Item Links and Forms screen

Buy Link
When customers browse your web site (store) and find an item to purchase, they
generally click on a button that will place the item into a shopping cart for checkout.
Some buy button examples are shown below.

A "Buy Link" is the HTML code (snippet) that is inserted onto your web page along with
the button graphic. This HTML snippet contains the code that insures the appropriate
item and its attributes are placed into the shopping cart (when clicked on).

Elements of a Buy Link

Below is an example snippet of html code for a buy link.

<A HREF="http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-bin/UCEditor?MERCHANTID=DEMO&ADD=DOGBONE">Buy Now</A>

274
There are two key variables within any buy link, shown in bold above.

The first variable is the merchant ID. In this example, the merchant ID is "DEMO.”
Replace the merchant ID with your merchant ID (chosen during signup).

The second variable is the item ID. Each store item has a unique item ID associated with
it. The item ID is included in the link's target. In the example, replace DOGBONE with
your products item ID.

Buy Link HTML snippet

You or your web designer can copy all the text within the red box and paste it into your
web page. With just a little editing it can be turned into the appropriate and complete
HTML code.

Buy Form
As an alternative to the above buy link, you can opt to embed a form into your website
which allows customers to directly enter the desired quantity, as well as select any
configured item options. This form can be further customized to match your site's look &
feel. A thorough working knowledge of html is necessary. Most merchants have a web
designer/editor on hand to accomplish this kind of task.

Figure 231 - Item Buy Form

Highlight, copy the form from the above box and paste it into your web page.

275
Embedding a Dynamic Price Link
Dynamic pricing allows you to embed the price of an item onto your static website so that
changes to prices in the item editor will be immediately reflected on your site without
requiring you to make a HTML edit.

Prior to embedding, you need to configure your Dynamic Price (font style, size and
colors). See Dynamic Price in Chapter 3 – Shopping Cart Look and Feel Configuration
(page 123).

Embedding a Dynamic Price link is also a simple process and similar to the procedure for
the Buy Link.

Figure 232 - Item Price Image screen

Image Tag
Copy the Image Tag from the first box into your web page where you want the
Dynamic Price to appear.

Image Source
To view the Dynamic Price (sample) in your browser, copy the Image Source code
and paste it into a browser address window and press the enter key on your keyboard
to view the Dynamic Price in your browser.

JavaScript
We recommend that you utilize the JavaScript version so it allows for complete
styling of the text.

Other Links
This section present has two special links; View Cart Link and Search Link.

View Cart Link

Often times customers will leave the cart to return to your website for additional
shopping. Placing this link on your web pages provides navigation that will take
customers back to their cart.

276
 Search Link
This is a valuable link that takes the customer to an UltraCart search box page.
Customers can enter search criteria to search your Item list. A successful search will
bring the item(s) into view with buy now buttons so the customer can put them into
the car.

Inventory History Link

This feature applies only to those merchants that have the Track Inventory enabled at
each item level (see page 311). It basically provides an accountability method to show
when, how much, and who adjusted the inventory level of a particular store item.

Adjustments to any item's inventory will be logged along with the date and time of the
occurrence, adjustment amount, total (inventory count) and Reason (by whom). This
activity can be viewed by merchants at the Item Level.

Navigate within the Item Editor to locate the item you want to view. Click on the
"[view]" link under the Inventory History column in the row of the item desired
(bordered in red box above). The Inventory History screen will appear.

Each activity will be listed in separate rows. In the example above there are 2 entries:
1. On May 03, 2007 user "Bwings" adjusted the inventory by +25 leaving the total
inventory count to 25 (inventory must have been at zero prior to that action).
2. On May 08, 2007, user "Bwings" adjusted the inventory by +5 taking the total
inventory count to 30.

277
Merchants Using Frames
UltraCart will work effectively with web sites that use frames, but there are some
additional configuration requirements to ensure a consistent customer experience.

When the customer clicks the buy link on the merchant's web site their shopping cart
displays inside the frame. In order for the secure checkout to take place without showing
the customer a warning message, the system must stop using frames. This presents a
problem because UltraCart by default returns them to the page that they clicked the buy
link on once they've completed the order. This happens to be the contents of the frame
instead of the parent URL of the frame.

There are two additional parameters to the buy link that determine where the UltraCart
will take the user to:

 OVERRIDECONTINUESHOPPINGURL - determines where the user will be

taken to when they click the continue shopping button after viewing their
shopping cart.
 OVERRIDECATALOGURL - determines where the user goes after they view
their invoice at the end of the checkout process.

Below is an example of a buy link that uses the override parameters (there should be no
line break after the merchant ID in the actual html code):

<A HREF="http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-bin/UCEditor?MERCHANTID=DEMO
&OVERRIDECATALOGURL=http://www.mystore.com/widgets/&ADD=BONE">Buy</A>

Place the OVERRIDECATALOGURL and OVERRIDECATALOG parameters in the

middle of the link so that only the end of the URL changes for each item.

Add Store Wide Option

This feature allows you to apply an existing Store Wide Item Option to all or some of the
items in a particular folder. If you haven't created any Store Wide Item Options see Store
Wide Item Options on page 348.

Figure 233 – Store Wide Option

To apply a Store Wide Item Option to an Item or Items, navigate within the Item List to
the folder that contains the applicable items. Once you have the items listed, click on the
"add store wide option" button. This will take you to the Store Wide Option screen.

278
Figure 234 - Store Wide Options screen

The above screen will display all the Store Wide Options you have previously created. If
none are listed, then you need to create them before using this option (see page 348).

Click on the name [link] of the Store Wide Option you want to apply. The store items
that reside in the folder you were presently in will be listed on the next screen (shown
below).

Figure 235 - Multiple Item Add Option screen

Place a check mark in the box to the left of the items you want to add this Store Wide
Item Option to. If you want it applied to all of the items in the folder, click the "Select
All" button. You can de-select them by clicking the "Unselect All" button. Click the
"Submit" button when you are finished selecting your Items.

You will be returned to the Item list screen. If you want to verify the action, click on the
Item ID [link] of any item you assigned the option to. At the Item Editor screen, click on
the "Options" tab. You will see the option listed on that screen.

279
Item Editor
In the Item Editor you can create and/or edit all attributes of your store items. There are
two ways to enter into the Item Editor from the Item List screen: 1) click on the New
Item link to create a new item or 2) click on any Item ID which will open the Item Editor
with all the information about that item for editing.

There are 12 tabs available in the Item Editor. They are; Item, Multimedia, Options,
Digital Delivery, Discounts/Pricing Tiers, Related Items, Amazon, Froogle, Auto Order,
Shipping, Catalog and Other. You can configure all the different settings that apply to
each item via these tabs.

Item Tab
In this section you enter all the particular information that describes the item and
establishes handling characteristics. Each item field is described below.

Figure 236 – Item Editor Screen

Item ID –The Item ID must be unique between all the items for sale in a store.
Often this matches to product codes or SKUs in a merchant's inventory.

Description –The description is the text that will appear in the user's shopping cart
and on their order receipt. The description can be up to 500 characters long and

280
span several lines of text. If you are using Froogle, this field should be restricted
to the product. Additional information should be placed in the Extended
Description field.

Extended Description – The Extended Description is sent to Froogle (for those

that subscribe) to better describe the item and is also used in the dynamic catalog.

Manufacturer Name – Enter the item’s manufacturer name.

Manufacturer SKU – Stock Keeping Unit (SKU) is a number associated with a

product for inventory purposes. Enter your SKU number in this field.

Internal Memo – Enter Information for your own usage and benefit. It is only
shown on this item edit screen. Use this field to hold internal information such as
a supplier part number, etc.

URL to View Product – UltraCart uses the URL field to allow the user to search
for a product and then click on it to review the product information page on the
merchant's web site. This field is not required unless the merchant is going to
take advantage of the UltraCart search engine or the related items section.

 Since related items can greatly increase average order size, it is

highly recommended that merchants enter the correct value in the
URL to View Product field.

Image URL – Use the "Image URL" field to indicate where the image file resides
on your server. UltraCart will use this image to create and store a thumbnail
image file at UltraCart. It will be displayed on the view cart page during checkout,
in the Dynamic catalog, and the results of the search form.

The image thumbnails will be 80 pixels in length and 80 pixels wide. The original
file must be 1 megapixel or less. A white border will appear if the thumbnail is
smaller than 80 by 80 pixels. Supported file types are gif, jpg or jpeg, bmp, and
png. Note: UltraCart polls the image URLs for updates approximately once a
month. To expedite the update at UltraCart, change the file name.

Barcode – The barcode field is used by the UltraShip product. Enter the barcode
value for the physical item that is associated with this UltraCart item.
Alternatively, you can use the UltraShip application to populate your item
barcodes quickly and easily. Please refer to the UltraShip documentation for more
information.

UNSPSC – is the acronym for the United Nations Standard Products and Services
Code. UNSPSC is a coding system to classify both products and services for use
throughout the global eCommerce marketplace.

Cost - The cost of the product in dollars and cents (00.00).

281
 Weight - The weight of the product represented in pounds. Enter this as a decimal
value. Remember that 16 oz. is equivalent to 1 lb. For instance a product that
weighs 1 lb. 8 oz. would be entered at "1.5" If an item does not have a weight
assigned to it then it is treated as a service (such as a technical support contract for
a computer) that needs no shipping. For those merchant's that are not using
weight basic shipping cost calculation, a weight of "1" should be specified for all
items that need shipping. If an item is a digital delivery item, enter “0” for the
product weight.
 In the menu to the right of the weight field, select LB (pounds) or KG
(kilograms).

Dimensions (L x W x H) – Enter the Length, Width, and Height of your item in the
boxes provided.
 In the menu to the right, select IN (inches) or CM (Centimeters).

Minimum Quantity – The minimum quantity field specifies the minimum number
of this item that MUST be purchased. For example, a merchant selling dog bones
might charge $0.25 per bone, but require a minimum purchase of 10 bones.

Maximum Quantity – The maximum quantity field specifies the maximum number
of this item that CAN be purchased. For example, a merchant selling dog bones
might charge $0.25 per bone, but require a maximum purchase of 20 bones.

Multiple of Quantity –This allows you to force the item to be purchased in

quantities of "x". For Example, if you entered "5", the customer would have to
purchase the item in quantities of 5, 10, 15 and so on. UltraCart will not allow the
customer to checkout with quantities other than "x" and will inform the customer
of the minimum quantities required.

MSRP – The price the manufacturer recommends that the retailer sell it for. This
feature is for catalog users only. If properly configured on Catalog Template, it
will display the MSRP.

MAP – The Minimum Advertised Price. This feature is for catalog users only. If
properly configured on your Catalog Template, it will display the MAP.

Taxable –This field is defaulted to be checked. When checked, taxes will be

added to the subtotal based on the Sales Tax Configuration (see page 76). Some
merchants might offer items or services for sale that don't require tax to be
collected on them.

Inactive – If an item is inactive, it will not be visible in searches and customers

cannot add it to their shopping cart. This is a great way to temporarily disable an
out of stock item. Check this box ONLY if you want the item to become inactive.

282
 Gift Certificate –Check this item if it is to be a Gift Certificate. If checked and
when purchased, UltraCart generates a gift certificate for the amount of the item.
See “Gift Certificate” in Chapter 9 for details on configuring Gift Certificates.
 Enter the expiration date (if exists) in the field to the right of Gift
Certificate.

Special Product Type – The special product type effects the calculation of the
USPS (United States Postal Service) shipping costs. USPS offers special
discounts to these special products. In the menu provided, select one of three (3)
special product types; Book or Software, Music or Editorial.

Mix and Match Group – Select the Mix and Match Group that you want to
associate with this item from the “drop-down” menu. This is only populated
when you have created a Mix and Match Group (see page 338).

QuickBooks™ Code – This field is only shown on this screen when you have
turned on the UltraBooks feature. This is done at the Configuration 
UltraBooks screen. More information about configuring and using UltraBooks is
discussed on page 504.

COGS – The direct costs attributable to the production of the goods sold by a
company.

No Realtime Charge – Checking this box will tell UltraCart that when this item is
in a cart, to NOT charge the credit card. It will move the order, when completed,
to your Accounts Receivable for handling. Keep in mind that this action will
occur even if there are other items in the cart that don't have this option checked.

Multimedia Tab (dynamic catalog users only)

This section will allow merchants to upload multimedia files associated with store items
inside of UltraCart. The multimedia files are primarily used for dynamic catalogs, item
logos on the view cart page, and multimedia galleries on static HTML pages. Only JPEG
and GIF files can be used with Zoomify galleries at this time. A real asset here is that you
can upload and associate more than one image to a store item.

Note: UltraCart premium service fees apply for the storage and bandwidth consumed by these files.
The multimedia section is part of the digital delivery premium service.

The multimedia screen is divided into 3 sections; Tools, Upload Multimedia and Import
Multimedia.

283
Figure 237 - Multimedia Tab screen

Tools – Multimedia Gallery Script Generator

The tools section will list all Multimedia that you have successfully uploaded. The link
"Multimedia Gallery Script Generator" is simply a toggle for "on" (show fields) and "off"
(hide fields).

Figure 238 - Script Generator

Upload Multimedia
To upload a graphic, movie, or PDF file click the
browse button. A file open dialog will appear in
your browser. Locate the file on your computer
and then click OK. The filename will appear in
the Filename field (box). Click the Upload

284
multimedia button. Tip: UltraCart supports the uploading of a zip file containing multiple graphic files.
Import Multimedia

To import graphics from URLS, enter the

URLs one per line in the box below.
UltraCart will retrieve the files from the
remote URLs and store them in your
multimedia gallery. You can also convert
your PDF to an image by entering the image
sizes in the appropriate fields. Click the
"Import multimedia" button when ready.

Multimedia Upload Failure - Corrupt File Error

Graphic artist and print shop managers understand the differences between RGB and
CMYK color schemes. Simply put, RGB is the normal color scheme used in computer
graphics while CMYK is the standard for printing color images. If you attempt to upload
CMYK graphics or images to UltraCart, you will receive a "corrupt file" error. Although
this is fairly uncommon it does occasionally occur. If you receive this error, you'll need to
convert your image to RGB format using a graphics program such as Photo Shop prior to
uploading.

Once uploaded, the file(s) will be listed on the Multimedia screen as shown below. It
might take considerable time for the "preview" (thumbnail) to appear in the list.

View Multimedia File

Click on the "View" button to see
details and a preview of the image
itself.

The first box displays the URL

snippet, the actual path to the image.
The second box displays the HTML
image tag that will point to where that
image resides.

The 3rd box will be the JavaScript for

the Zoomify script.

285
Lastly will be a preview of the image.

Edit Multimedia File

In the edit mode, you can change
the Description of the file or
upload a different image.
Click on the "Edit" button.

To change the description,

highlight the existing text in the
description box and enter the new
description text. Click the "Save"
button when finished.

To replace the existing image file, click on the "Browse" button and navigate to find the
replacement file on your system. Click on the "OK" or "Open" button. You will be
returned to the Item Multimedia screen. Click on the "Save" button.
Delete Multimedia File
Click on the "Delete" button to remove an image file from the list. Make certain you
click on the button that is in the same row as the image you want to delete! A dialog box
will appear to confirm deletion.

Click on the "OK" button to confirm deletion otherwise, click the "Cancel" button. You
will be returned to the Multimedia screen and your Image File will no longer be listed.

Options Tab
Item Options allow customers to select criteria for an item when that item has several
variations (options). For instance, a merchant might offer a t-shirt that comes in three
different sizes. “T-Shirt Size” would be the item option in this example. You are
theoretically defining different store items (by size, color, etc.) under one Item ID (SKU).

Although the Item Options feature is easy to set up and reduces the number of actual
store items, merchants with many items should give some serious thought before
considering this feature. Having the same SKU (Item ID) may cause difficulty in the
following areas:
 The inventory system will not track the Item Options.
 Fulfillment centers have a difficult time with "pick and pack" without separate
SKUs.
 Importing orders into accounting systems can also be difficult
286
The following illustrates where the Item (drop down value) Option will appear on the
checkout screen.

Add Option
Navigate to the Item Editor screen, click on the “Options” tab. The following screen will
display a “No options are defined…” message until options are added. To add your first
option, click on the “Add Option” button.

Figure 239 - Option Tab

At the Add Option screen you set a name for the option. In our example the merchant
would specify "T-Shirt Size" in the "Create a New Option for just this item" field. Then
click on the “Continue” button. The field “Add Store Wide Option(s)” will be discussed
later in this chapter.

Figure 240 - Add Option screen

287
After clicking the "continue" button, the Option Editor Screen will appear. This screen is
divided into five sections; Description, Check-Out Settings, Type, Cost and Drop
Down/Radio Button Values. The last section, Drop down/Radio button list of values
(shown in example below), will only appear if Drop Down or Radio Button list TYPE is
selected.

Figure 241 - Option Editor Screen

Description (fill-in)

 Name – the name of the option. For instance "T-shirt size". This will be
automatically entered from your entry in the previous Add Option Screen. It can be
changed at this screen if desired.

 Label - The label is what appears in the customer's shopping cart, on the order
invoice, and on the packing slip. This is often a shorter version of the Name such as
"Size"

Checkout Settings (check box)

288
 Customer required to provide or select a value – If you check this box, an “error”
message will appear during checkout if and when the customer fails to provide or
select a value. Customers cannot proceed with the checkout until they have selected
or provided a value for the option.

Ignore Option when order is placed if default is selected - Some merchants define
numerous values for many of their options. This can cause considerable clutter on
the printed documentation (i.e., order, packing slip, etc.). Selecting this option will
prevent printing of the option value if the “default” option is selected at checkout.

Type (radio button)

This section has 3 choices that determine how the option appears on the checkout. Click
on the radio button to the left of the choice desired.

Single line of free-form text - If this setting is specified the option will appear at
checkout as a single line input field where the customer can specify free form text.

Multiple lines of free-form text - If this setting is specified the option will appear at
checkout as a multiple line input field where the customer can specify multiple lines
of free form text.

Drop Down List of Values - If this setting is specified the option will appear at
checkout as a drop down list. Merchants will specify values for the list immediate
below this section (only appears when option is selected).

Radio Button List of Values – If this setting is specified the option will appear at
checkout as a user selectable list. Customer will be able to select only one (1) of the
values in the list. Merchants will specify values for the list immediate below this
section (only appears when option is selected).

File attachment –This setting is used when it’s necessary for the customer to upload
a file to the order. An example would be where a customer must upload a graphic
(logo) that is printed onto the item purchased (onto a ball cap for instance).

The option will appear as a blank text field along with a “browse” button that when
clicked, will allow the customer to navigate within their system to locate the “upload”
file. There will be an “upload” link for the file the customer sent on the final order
record in your UltraCart account.

Hidden – Use this setting when you want to have a special option that is NOT shown
on the checkout. This is most often used when a merchant builds a special form on
their web site that passes information to UltraCart. A merchant can create an Option
(hidden) to pass a unique ID (for example) to help identify the order. Given that
scenario, the merchant does not want to have the option visible in the cart.

289
Drop Down Value List
Once you have selected the Drop Down list of Values TYPE the Drop Down/Radio
Button Values section will appear at the bottom of the Option Editor screen.

To add your values, click on the “ADD” button which will take you to the Add Drop
Down Values screen.

Figure 242 - Add Drop Down Values screen

Here the merchant should specify all the different values for the option and the effect
they have on the cost and weight of the item. For instance, an x-large shirt might cost
$1.00 more or weigh slightly more. You would also indicate if the weight was in pounds
(LB), ounces (OZ) or Kilogram (KG).

Once you’ve entered your values (up to 10), click on the “Save” button and you will be
returned to the Order Editor screen. If you have more than ten values to enter, click on
the “ADD” button. Values that you’ve added will appear on the Option Editor Screen and
the look of this section will have changed.

290
Figure 243 - Completed Drop Down Values

The new columns and buttons that now appear are explained below.

 Additional Cost and Additional Weight – the amounts that you set (if any) when
creating the values will appear in these columns.
 Additional Dimension – this field will show "none". Click the Edit button to be
taken to the editor screen where you can enter the additional dimension values.

 Order - This column will show the present order of this list. You can re-arrange the
order of your list by changing the numbers in this column. Once you have change the
order numbers, click on the “Reorder” button in the Section Header. Your values will
then shift to the order you configured.

 Default - This column will be blank until you select one of your Values as the
default. Click on the “Make Default” button at the end of the row that you want to set
as the default. The word “Yes” will appear in the Default column for that Value. In
the example above, we have configured the Medium Value as the default. If you
decide you want no default value, click on the “No Default” button in the Section
Header. If you do set one of the values as the default, it will automatically appear in
the options field when the customer adds the item to their shopping cart. The
customer can change the option during checkout using the drop down menu. To
change the default, click the "Make Default" button for the appropriate value.

 Edit Button - Clicking on a “Edit” button will take you to the Value Editor where
you can change attributes for that particular value.

 Remove Button – Clicking on the “Remove” button will remove that Value from the
list. This is a permanent action without a warning dialog.

291
 Make Default Button – explained above under "Default".

Radio Button Value List

Once you have selected the Radio Button List of Values the Drop Down/Radio Button
Values section will appear at the bottom of the Option Editor screen.

To add your values, click on the “ADD” button which will take you to the Add Radio
Button Values screen. This procedure will be somewhat different than the drop down
list.

Figure 244 - Add Radio Button Values screen

Here the merchant should specify all the different values for the option and the effect
they have on the cost and weight of the item. For instance, an x-large shirt might cost
$1.00 more or weigh slightly more.

Radio Button Value list also allows you to upload images assigned to each value. These
images will be displayed in the cart along with each value. Click on the Browse button

292
and navigate within your system to the location of your image. Repeat this process for
each image you want to attach to each value.

Once you’ve entered your values (up to 10), click on the “Save” button and you will be
returned to the Option Editor screen where your newly created Value list will be shown.

Associating Digital Content

You can also associate digital content with the Radio Button Value List (only). For
instance you might offer an option for digital delivery for an audio CD. This would give
the customer the option of purchasing the physical CD (which requires shipping costs) or
digital delivery download (no shipping). Two Radio Button Values would be set as CD
and Digital Download. If the customer selects the Digital Download value for the option
then it would associate a series of MP3 files with the item and reduce the weight to zero
(so UltraCart will not calculate shipping costs).

After creating the Item Blue Music CD, we create the Item Option called Delivery
Method with two values; Digital Download and Ship CD. They would appear as follows
in the Option Editor.

Figure 245 - Delivery Method options

293
To associate Digital Content click on the "Edit" button for the Radio Button Value
desired. In this case it would be the Digital Download Value.

Figure 246 - Radio Button Value Edit screen

As you can see above, we subtracted the $3.50 of the cost and subtracted the entire
weight so shipping will not be a factor. This editor automatically shows all files that
have been uploaded in the Digital Library (see page 262). We associated them to this
option by selecting and moving them to the right side (click on the green arrow).

Options Listing
Once you have successfully created options, they will be listed under the options tab.

There are three buttons above the listings; Add Option, Reorder and Edit QuickBooks™
Codes.

294
 Add Options – Click the "Add Option" button to add a new option for this Item.

Reorder – this simply rearranges the order the options are listed during checkout.
Change the numbers to the order you want them to appear in the "Order" column.
Click the "reorder" button when finished. The list will be rearranged into the order
you have specified.

Edit QuickBooks™ Codes – Using options can make it convenient for a customer
to select variations for an item but causes some issues when it comes to accounting
since each item has its own accounting code. For instance, you might offer a Blue T-
shirt that comes in small, medium, large, and x-large. The QuickBooks™ code for
the Item might be BLUESHIRT. However, the codes might have been configured in
QuickBooks™ for all the variations as; BLUESHIRT-S, BLUESHIRT-M,
BLUESHIRT-L, and BLUESHIRT-XL. This screen allows you to assign the
QuickBooks™ code to each unique item option. Enter the code desired and click
the "Save" button. Repeat these steps for each Option.

Remove Item Option

Click the "Remove" button to delete an option. Warning! There will be no confirmation
dialog presented.
Edit Item Option
Click the "Edit" button to be returned to the Option Editor screen. There you can make
changes. Click the "Save" button when finished.

295
Digital Delivery Tab
Before you can utilize this feature, you will need to upload your digital file(s) using the
Digital Library. This procedure as-well-as the Digital Delivery function is covered in
Chapter 7, page 386.

Discounts/Pricing Tiers Tab

There are two parts to this section whereby merchants can establish 1) volume Discount
Pricing (per item) for any and all customers and, 2) Pricing Tiers for special types of
customers (i.e., wholesale).

Discounts
This pricing structure affords merchants an opportunity to establish discounts (volume)
for individual items. The costs are set at varying ranges based on the number of items
purchased. Discounts established here will be available for any and all customers.

Figure 247 – Discounts screen

When the discounts screen appears enter your quantity ranges along with cost per unit. In
the above example, 1 to 5 items are priced at $115.00 each, 6 to 10 items are $105.00
each and 20 items or more are priced at $100.00 each. If you have need for more than
five rows, click the “Add More” button. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Pricing Tiers
This section allows merchants to configure pricing tiers for Wholesale customers,
Dealers, Distributors, etc. These differ from the volume discounts we discussed early in
that 1) you can restrict them for certain customers (profiles) and 2) there are several
special settings you can configure such as: Tax Exempt, Allow Purchase Order, Allow
COD, Free Shipping and many more.

Pricing Tiers are created at Item Management  Pricing Tiers (see page 345 for details).
Only then will they appear on this screen.

296
Figure 248 - Pricing Tiers

First you set your single item costs in the “Cost” Field. Use this only if you want a cost
below retail but yet higher than the first tier.

Then, in the Volume Discounts columns, you set your quantity ranges and cost per unit.
This is pretty much the same as discounts. Initially there are five rows available. If you
have need for more than five, click on the “Add More” button.

Volume Limits
You can also set Limits for each Pricing Tier. As shown above, the Wholesale Pricing
Tier limits Individual Order to a maximum of 50 items on one order and, limits the
customer to a cumulative of 150 items.

297
Click on the “Save” button when finished setting your Volume Discounts. Don't forget to
enable (authorize) your customers for your established Pricing Tiers at Order
Management  Customer Profile Management (see page 237).

Related Items Tab

This section gives the merchant the opportunity to create a list of items that will be listed
on the “view shopping cart” page. This is an excellent sales method as it puts “related”
items in front of the customer at checkout.

Figure 249 - Related Items screen

Enter the Item ID of the item you want to relate. Then press the ‘Enter’ key on your
keyboard. If the correct Item ID is entered, you will see your Item Description
automatically appear to the right. Continue entering all the items you wish to relate.
Initially there are five boxes provided. If more are needed, click on the “Add more”
button and five more will appear. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Froogle Tab
Prior to using this feature, you must “enable” Froogle services. If you haven’t done so
you will see the following screen.

298
Figure 250 - Froogle Tab (prior to enabling)

Clicking on the “Froogle Settings” link will take you to the Configuration  Froogle
Settings screen. There you can apply to enable Froogle Services if you haven’t already
done so.

Once you have successfully enabled your Froogle Services, return to the Item
Editor/Froogle Tab. The following screen will then be available for you to complete.

Figure 251 - Froogle Tab (after enabling)

299
Enter a Category for this store item.

A category structure is required to be in Froogle. If you do not provide a specific

category structure then your item management folder structure will automatically be
used. Items must have a category in order to be accepted by Froogle. Please use your
websites actual structure whenever possible.

Separate category levels with ‘>’ (shift period on most keyboards)

Not Acceptable:

* All other separating characters, e.g., a colon (:) or a dash (-)

* Trailing > (e.g., Home & Garden > Kitchen > Appliances >)

For example:

* Good: Home & Garden > Kitchen > Appliances

* Bad: Home & Garden, Kitchen, Appliances

Enter the image URL

The image URL for the product is required. Use your full-sized product images; do not
use thumbnail images. Froogle will not accept products that do not have images because
it does not make for a good Froogle experience.

Not Acceptable:

* Relative URLs (you must include the entire link)

For example:

* Good: http://www.imaginarystore.com/images/1006.jpg
* Bad: /images/1006.jpg
* Bad: www.imaginarystore.com/images/1006.jpg

Omit from Feed

Clicking this check box simply allows you to temporarily omit the feed to Froogle for
this item.

Product Type

Clicking on “Book” will expand the category for the following choices:
ISBN: enter the books ISBN (International Standard Book Numbering)
Format: A drop down menu with the choices:
paperback, hardback, audiobook or ebook.

300
 Author: enter the author’s name
Publisher: enter the publishers name

Clicking of “Music” will expand the category for the following choices:
Artist: enter the artist’s name
Format: A drop down menu with the choices:
cd, mp3,tape or vinyl
Release date: enter the date the music was released
Clicking of “Video” will expand the category for the following choices:
Format: A drop down menu with the choices:
dvd or vhs
Director: enter the director’s name
Release date: Enter the date of release
Starting: enter the main stars of the video
Rating: A drop down menu with the choices:
G, PG, PG13, R, NR

Figure 252 - Product type choices (fully expanded)

Auto Order Tab

The Auto Order feature is typically used for consumables but not necessarily restricted to
those. There are two different types of auto orders; Customer Selectable (schedule) and
Automatic.

301
The Customer Selectable auto order will re-order the same item purchased in the original
order.

The more popular Automatic auto order is much more flexible, giving you the ability to
offer one or more different items for the recurring order. A good example of an
Automatic Order would be where you offer a customer a "Free Trial" of a product which,
when purchased, enrolls them into an automatic and periodic purchase of the full blown
product at normal or discounted prices. The beauty of this feature is that you, the
merchant can configure the auto and recurring orders in various ways. Some of the
configurations are:

o Automatic schedule (pre-determined by merchant)

o One per customer
o No easy cancel
o Repeating schedule (weekly, monthly, etc.)
o Repeat Count (recurring duration)
o Delay Days (starting date from original order)

The Item Editor  Auto Order [tab] is where you will configure the item to become an
Auto Order, meaning, when this item is purchased, it will, based upon your settings,
automatically create subsequent (auto) orders. Note: To edit an Auto Order see Chapter 4
- Order Management (page 204).

As mentioned earlier, merchants can configure two different types of Auto Orders;
Customer Selectable and Automatic. You can configure only ONE type per store item.

Figure 253 - Auto Order screen

Customer Selectable Auto Order

A Customer Selectable Auto Order is a fairly basic version that automatically re-orders
the same item purchased during the original order. It will give the customer the
opportunity to select the “schedule” (frequency) they want the order to re-occur. The
choice is made during checkout.

Click on the radio button to the left of the Customer Selectable field. This field will then
expand to show the Customer Selectable Options.

302
Figure 254 - Customer Selectable Auto Order screen

Next, set the frequency (schedule) of Auto Order. Click in the check box to the left of the
interval(s) that you want to appear in a drop-down menu. The options you select here
will appear as a choice for the customer’s selection during the checkout process. They
will be shown on a special “Auto Order” screen late in the checkout process. The
customer will only be able to select one of the options. Click on the “Save” button when
finished.

The following is a sample “Auto Order” screen that the customer will see during
checkout. Notice how the drop down menu appears for the customer’s selection (in
red box). Hence, they are given the ability to determine the schedule for their auto
order. Note: this screen DOES NOT appear for the “Automatic” type of auto order
(explained later).

303
Figure 255 - Auto Order Checkout Screen

Automatic Auto Order

The Automatic Auto Order differs significantly from the Customer Selectable type.
Based upon the configuration (by the merchant), the customer will be automatically
enrolled in an auto order program that you define. The enrollment can be for the same
original item purchased or for a different store item.
1) The customer will not be given any opportunity to select a schedule during the
checkout because it is pre-determined by the merchant.
2) All of the pertinent details that the merchant wants to convey to the customer
about this type of Auto Order must be accomplished on their store web site.

An example of a common usage is where a merchant will offer customers a “trial item”
that, when purchased, will automatically enroll them in a predefined auto order program.
The trail item is generally at a reduced price and can even be a different item.

Navigate to:
Main Menu  Item Management  Items (tab)

You will typically have two store items created in you store. One will be the "trial",
special priced item and the 2nd will be the item you will enroll them in. A good way to
think of them is that the 1st Item is the Auto Order Item and the 2nd Item is the Recurring
Order Item. In most cases it's the same item or maybe a smaller portion of the same item
but the trial item is offered for free, discounted, free shipping, etc., while the recurring
order items are usually regular price.

304
If the items you want to be Auto Order do not exist, follow the instruction for creating a
new store item in Chapter 6. It's a good idea to print your item list or at least write down
the Item ID's concerned so you will have easy reference to them when you configure the
Auto Order portion. Keep in mind that only the Initial Item will have and Auto Order
configuration. The recurring Item(s) will not.

At the Item List screen, click on the Item ID (link) for the item you wish to configure as
an Auto Order (usually your "trial" item). At the Item Editor screen, click on the “Auto
Order” tab. Then click on the radio button to the left of the “Automatic” field.
Additional fields will then appear that require completion.

Figure 256 - Automatic Auto Order Screen

Options

One Per Customer: Check this box to keep a customer from purchasing more than
one. This, in theory, is to help prevent abuse.

No Easy Cancel: An Auto Order notification (see below) is normally sent to the
customer upon successful ordering. If this box is checked, the
order notification will not be sent. The customer will have to
contact you by other means to cancel their auto order.

Upgrade/Downgrade Item Ids:

Enter the Item Id's that will be used to build a customer service
friendly drop down list used in the auto order editor page (206).

305
Steps
There are two different kinds of steps; Item Step and Delay Step.

Item Step
Here you will tell UltraCart which Store Item will be involved in the recurring order
process. This may be the same or a different item. You must configure at least one Item
Step. Some merchants will configure more than one item in their auto order program and
will therefore create additional Item Steps.

To create your first Item Step click on the "New Item Step" button. A new set of fields
will appear that require completion. You will see the statistics of the first (original) order
listed under the Sample Order Schedule.

Item Step fields:

Step Item ID: Enter the ID of the store item that you want to be ordered automatically.
This can be the original item or it can be a different item.

Schedule: Select, via the drop-down list, how often you want the
order to reoccur. The customer will not be offered a
choice on the reoccurrence frequency like they are in
the customer selectable auto order.

Repeat Count: This feature allows the merchant to indicate how long
you want the recurring order to occur. For example, if the merchant
advertises a “free trial” (the first order) along with a 6 month enrollment,
you would enter a 6 in the box. Leave this field blank for indefinite.

Click on the "save" button when finished with the configuration.

After you configure the details of your Item Step, it will list all of the repeat counts
providing an excellent preview of how the Auto (recurring) Order will work. In the
following example we have configured a single Item Step for the Item ID "Upholstery
Renew" on a Monthly schedule to repeat 5 times. If your auto order deals with only one
item and you have no need for any delays on the recurring order(s), then this example
will probably be all you need.

306
Figure 257 - Item Step auto order

Adding Delays or Item steps:

UltraCart has added considerable flexibility for customizing your recurring order
schedule. You can add additional items to your schedule by using the "add Item before
or after" buttons. Additionally, you can add delays to alter the start of a scheduled item
via the "add delay before or after" buttons.

Delay Step
This feature allows you to set a delay before or after an Item step. An example of usage
might be where a merchant wants to send out a one week trial of a supplement (original
order) and then follow up with a monthly recurring order. To facilitate this you would
add a delay of 7 days before the item.

Click the "add delay before" button. A new step will appear above your original step and
the steps will be renumbered 1 then 2. Your new step will have only one field to
complete. Indicate how many days you want to delay the beginning of the Automatic
(recurring) Order. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

The following screen shot demonstrates the "add delay before" feature using the same
scenario as before. Notice that the Sample Order Schedule now shows step 2 (in red box)
beginning 7 days (delay) after the original order. Step 3 begins 30 days after step 2 - the
monthly recurring schedule.

Figure 258 - Auto order with delay step

Add Item Step

307
This is about the same as when you began when you added the initial Item Step. The
difference here is that you are adding an additional item to the existing schedule.

In the following scenario the customer has subscribed by purchasing a one week trial of
our Upholstery ReNew product (original order) with a monthly recurring order for 5
months. 15 days after the last order (we inserted another delay step) they automatically
begin a 5 month recurring order of the Upholstery Protect product. In the sample below,
step #7 depicts the beginning of the 2nd item step after only a 15 day delay.

Figure 259 - Auto Order with 2 item and delay steps

Deleting steps
To remove steps from the process simply click the red "delete" button to the right of the
row. You will receive a confirmation dialog box to confirm your action.

Auto Order Confirmation Email

An Auto Order confirmation email will be sent to the customer upon completion of their
order. Note: No confirmation email will be sent if you have checked “no easy cancel”
during the configuration.

308
When the customer clicks on the cancellation link (from within the email), it will
automatically set the auto order into the “inactive” mode. The auto order status will have
the word “No” under the “Active” column.

Converting a regular Order to Auto Order

There isn't really any simply way to change an order from a standard one to an Auto
Order. However, there is a workaround. Basically you will place another order for the
individual with "test" Credit Card information so the customer doesn't get charged a 2nd
time. Once completed, you enter their real credit card information so the subsequent auto
(recurring) orders will charge appropriately.

To begin, have a copy of the original order handy so you can re-enter information on the
new order. Make sure you have all the credit card information.

1. Set your Payments Configuration into test mode:

Log in to your account and navigate to:
Main Menu  Configuration  Payments  Test [tab].
Click on the "new" button at that screen. Click on the Credit Card radio button and enter
any valid credit card number. Click on the SAVE button.

Note: Notify your fulfillment company (if exists) to NOT ship the incoming order (give
them the details of the order).

2. Complete the purchase:

Purchase the Auto Order item with the same customer information as the original. When
prompted, enter the credit card that you configured at the Payment Test screen. Finalize
the order and write down the order ID or print the order. Since you configured a test
Credit Card number, the payment process will be skipped.

3. Remove the Test Processing configuration:

As soon as you have finished the order, remove the TEST Payment configuration you
configured in Step #1. Failure to do this will cause any subsequent orders to be
processed without the Credit Card being charged.

4. Locate the order and set a valid Credit Card:

In order for the customer to be charge for subsequent Auto Orders, you'll need to enter
the customer's valid credit card information. To do so navigate to:
MainMenu  Order Management  Review Orders [link]:
At the search screen, enter the Order ID and click the "Search" button. When the order
appears, click on its order ID link. The order will appear on the screen with a new set of
menus at the top. Click on the "Edit Customer Info" link. At the next screen you will be
at the "Billing" tab. Replace the TEST card information with the customer's real Credit
Card information. It's also a good idea to enter some notes in the "Merchant Notes" field
indicating what took place. Consider adding notes to the original order also.

Click on the SAVE button at the bottom of the screen to complete the process.

309
Shipping Tab
The Shipping tab in the Item Editor is divided into 9 sections. For this discussion we
have split the screen into two parts so the screen shots will fit on one page.

Shipping Tab - Part 1

The first part will discuss the first 3 sections; Shipping Options, Customs Information and
Inventory Control and Distribution.

Figure 260 - Shipping Tab screen (part 1)

Shipping Options
 Free Shipping - click the check box if you want to offer free shipping for this item.
 No Shipping Discount - If you have previously selected “Qualifies for Free Shipping”
for a particular shipment method (configuration  shipping  methods) and you
want to override that feature for a particular store item, then check this box.
 Pre-order - Check this box to set an item as a “pre-order”. When these items are
purchased (leaving accounts receivable) they will appear in the Pre-Order section of
Order Management and await release.
 ETA (MM/DD/YYYY) – If the item is on pre-order, enter the estimated date it will
arrive.

310
 Ship Separately – Select this box anytime you want an item to be shipped separately
in it’s own package (not with any other items).
 Hazardous Material – Select this box if this item is Hazardous Material. You can
then apply special Handling Charges (Markup) at Configuration  Shipping 
Shipping Method  Handling Charge.
 Maximum Calendar Days in Transient – UltraCart now has the ability to specify the
"maximum number of days in transit" an item can tolerate before perishing. This
functionality will allow you to accurately display the appropriate shipping method
based upon the "time in transit". This feature is presently most effective with FedEx
and DHL shipping methods. Those customers that are too distant will not be offered
those shipping methods and will be able to select an air shipping method.

To use this feature you will need to configure the Shipping Method (FedEx or DHL)
for "Real-time calculation". Navigate to MainMenu  Configuration  Shipping 
Methods [tab].
 Perishable Class – Something liable to perish, decay, or spoil rapidly (fresh fish for
example) requires great care in handling. This setting allows the merchant to set an
item as perishable. Perishable Classes will only appear in this drop-down menu after
you have configured them at Item Management  Perishable Classes.
Customs Information
This section is provided mostly for merchants that use Endicia Dazzle and that deal with
shipping that requires Customs Information. If you enter the info for your items in these
fields, it will be included in your download to Endicia from the shipping department.

There are only three fields to complete. Click the "Save" button at the bottom of the
screen.
Inventory Control and Distribution
You can track inventory of each item to prevent customers from purchasing items that are
out of stock and to better handle your inventory levels. To enable inventory tracking
click the check box to the right of the Track Inventory prompt. Upon doing so, several
new fields will appear for inventory settings and statistics (explained later).

311
Figure 261 - Inventory Control & Distribution screen

Back Order
Click the check box to the right of "Allow Back Order" prompt if you want to allow the
customer to still place an order when the inventory level has dropped to zero. There will
be no notice to the customer regarding the back order. Only use this setting when you are
temporarily out of stock and will replenish in a very short amount of time.

Handles Product
This indicates the Fulfillment provider that will handle the shipment and is populated
from when you first set up your store. The check box is already checked for the default
fulfillment. If you have more than one fulfillment center, you need to check the box to
indicate which fulfillment company will have “this” product. If you check more than
one, UltraCart will ship from the fulfillment center in close proximity to the customers
shipping address.

Stock Picking Location

There are many merchants that do their own pick, pack and shipment of products. Most
will usually establish a shelving identification system by labeling their rows, selves and
even partitions with some kind of identification system. UltraCart calls this the "Stock
Picking Location".

Once the system is in place, the merchant enters the identifier into the Stock Picking
Location field for each store item. This information will be included when printing
packing slips or pick lists from the Shipping Department. UltraCart will also Alpha Sort
either of these forms by this field.

Inventory fields
As mentioned earlier, 3 fields will appear only when you have checked the "track
inventory" box and must be manually maintained in order for the Statistics to be accurate.

312
 Quantity in Stock
Enter your physical inventory into the text box under each of your fulfillment
center's column. UltraCart will perform calculations as orders are placed and the
results will appear under the Statistics Column. When your physical inventory
changes (increases or decreases) you need to manually update it here.

Desired Quantity in Stock

This is provided as a reminder as to what the desired quantity is.

Reorder at Quantity
This setting is so the merchant knows (probably from past history) what the
minimum inventory level is before re-order for each item.

Statistics
These fields are dynamic and will reflect live statistics. It will show actual Quantity in
Stock, numbers that are presently Allocated to Placed Orders as-well-as those Allocated
to Shopping Carts. Lastly, calculations are performed to provide the number of items
"Available to Allocate".

Shipping Tab - Part Two

Part two of the shipping screen consists of; Shipping Method Specific Options, Shipping
Destination Restrictions, Ship on Day of Week Restrictions and Package Requirements.

313
Shipping Method Specific Options
This screen will present all your shipping methods that you configured at the
Configuration Shipping Methods [tab] section.

You can define restrictions on shipping methods for a particular item - above and beyond
what is already configured at Configuration  Shipping. For instance, perishable
products might only be shippable via air methods.

Figure 262 - Shipping Method Specific Options

Shipping and Mark up Fees

You can also mark an item as "free shipping" for a specific shipping method even when
that shipping method is not marked as "qualifies for free shipping". Additionally, you
can set the following markups; Flat Fee, Per Item Fee, First Item, Each Additional Item
and Percentage. Click the "Save" button at the bottom of the screen when finished.

Compatible Packages
Clicking on the "compatible packages" button to the right of any shipping method will
list any problems associated with that item or packages for that shipping method. This
report can identify things like; Problem Countries, problematic package sizes, etc.
Shipping Destination Markups
Destination markups are useful for including additional costs associated with shipping
this item to a particular country/state into the shipping cost.

To define a destination markup click the add button. The following screen will appear.

314
Complete the fields as required and click the "Save" button. You will be returned to the
shipping screen where your newly created destination markup(s) will be listed.

Click the Edit button to make changes to your markup. Click the Delete button to
remove the markup. You will receive the familiar confirmation screen to confirm
deletion. Click the "Add" button to create more destination markups for this item.

Shipping Destination Restrictions

This section allows merchants to set the shipping of an item to "can not" be shipped to a
certain destination(s) or to "can only" ship to a certain destination(s).

If no restrictions are set for this item, you will see the typical “There are no restrictions
where this product can be shipped…” message. Click the “Add” button to add a
restriction. The following screen will appear.

315
Figure 263 - Add Destination Restriction

If you want to restrict this item from being shipped to a certain location, then select the
first radio button for "This item can not ship to the sate/country below." You can add as
many restrictions of this type as need be. If you want to make this item shippable to only
one destination, select the 2nd radio button, "This item can only ship to the state/country
below". Note: if you create a "can only ship to" restriction, any "can not ship to"
restrictions are ignored and unnecessary.

Next, select the Country desired in the drop-down menu. If you want to restrict shipping
to the entire country, leave the 2nd field, state, blank. Click on the “Save” button. If you
desire to further restrict shipping to a particular state or states within that Country, list
each state abbreviation on a separate line in the box provided (each state will be shown
on a separate line in the master list). Click the “Save” button when finished. You will be
returned to the original screen where your destination restrictions will be shown.

Each restriction will have a “remove” button. Caution; this action will not be proceeded
with a warning and is not un-doable.

Repeat these steps to add subsequent Country/Sate restrictions.

316
Ship on Day of Week Restrictions
This section makes it possible to restrict shipment of this item on certain days of the
week.

Click in the check boxes for the days that you DO NOT want shipment to occur on. Then
click the "Save" button on the bottom of the screen.

Package Requirements

This section allows you to designate which packages you want to restrict this item to be
packed into. This will be critical for shipping estimates since most carriers calculate
shipping cost by Dimensional Weight. You must have configured your packages at
Configuration  Shipping  Packages, before they will be listed here (see page 106).

Click in the box to the left of the package(s) you want to allow this item to be shipped in.
Click the "Save" button at the bottom when finished.

317
Catalog Tab
The Catalog tab facilitates four catalog configurations; Attributes, Variations, Exploded
Diagrams and Search Engine Optimizations.

Figure 264 - Catalog tab screen

Attributes
This section is provided for merchants that use the Catalog feature. Here, you can enter
attribute for each of your items that will appear on your Catalog page. Until you have
created attributes, you'll see the familiar "no attributes have been defined…" notice.

Click the "New Attribute" button to create an attribute. The following screen will appear.

Variations
This is an incredibly powerful tool for catalog users that have Items with variations. It
basically allows you to define selectable options for your items that have different flavors
(colors, sizes, etc.). Although you could utilize Item Options to fill this need, you
wouldn't get the inventory control and reporting that Variations will fulfill.

318
A good example would be clothing that requires 3 different variations. Our table below
shows a merchants offering for pants available in different sizes, and colors. Therefore,
the variations will be Waist, Length and Color.

Create Parent and Child Items

To begin you must create a parent item in Item Management. In our example above, the
parent item would be Pants (Item ID). All the variations for pants will also be created as
separate store items (children). In doing so and with the appropriate catalog template, we
make it possible to automatically display the items along with drop down choices for
each of the variations.

Another benefit to creating the individual items (SKUs) is that you will be able to
maintain accurate inventory and reporting. As you can see below, we have created the
parent item and all the child items for the above inventory for Fancy Pants Store
(fictitious).

Figure 265 - Item List (pants variations)

Add Variations

319
Variations are defined in the PARENT ITEM only. Click on the Item ID of the Parent
Item. In this example it would be Item ID "Pants". At the Item Editor screen, click on
the Catalog tab. The first section at this screen is Variations.

In our example we need to create 3 variations; Color, Length, and Waist. To add (create)
our first variation, enter the name in the box provided and click on the "add variation"
button. Repeat this step for all variations. Note: give some real thought ahead of time of
your variation names. There is no edit button for changing the name. The only way to
change a variation name is to delete it and create a new one. If you delete the variation
after your complete all values, you will lose all the data for that variation.

Once created, the variation will appear along with it's own "delete" button below it.
There will also be an "add item" field and button. We'll use these in the next step. Repeat
this step for all the variations for this item.

In our example (below) we created 3 variations; Color, Length, and Waist. Notice again
that the variations now appear in 3 separate columns along with Item Id and Description
columns.

Add Items

Next you add the applicable child items. Enter the Item ID into the text box to the left of
the "add item" button and then click the "add item" button. It must be entered exactly as
it appears in the item list. If not, nothing will appear. When correct, the Item will appear
in the list and boxes will appear under each variation for the variation values. Repeat
adding each item until the entire list is populated with your child items.

320
It's not necessary to save each entry. Enter the next Item ID in the Add Item Field and
click the Add item. Note: UltraCart auto-sorts the list by Item ID.

Variation values
Enter the variation values for the item in each of the columns (Color, Length and Waist in
our example). Continue these steps until all attributes have been added. The following
shows our completed attribute values on the parent item Pants.

321
Delete Variations
Use caution here as clicking the "delete" button at the bottom of a variation column will
delete the variation and all its values. There is no "confirm delete" dialog.

Delete Items
To remove an Item from the listing, click the "delete" button to the right of the row the
item is in. Caution, there is no "confirm delete" dialog. Click the "delete" button to the
right of the Item you want to remove. This does not delete the item from your store. It
only removes it from the Variations screen. There is no "confirm delete" dialog.

Exploded Diagrams
This utility is very useful for merchants that sell individual parts of a larger, complete
item. Examples might be hobbies and crafts (RC cars, boats, airplanes, etc.), home
appliances, computer equipment and basically anything with individual parts and pieces.
Note: This feature presently works only with Mozilla Firefox.

The Exploded Diagrams utility gives catalog users the ability to upload an exploded view
diagram to UltraCart and create "hotspots" on any portion of the diagram (usually over a
part). Once the diagram is configured and published to the web site, customers will be
able to "mouse over" any hot spot (part) and readily see exploded details. In addition to
viewing details like Item ID, Descriptions, Cost, etc., they will be able to click on a
button to add the item to the shopping cart. This makes for a great "customer experience"
by showing the actual item and its parts rather than having to scroll through a listing of
parts by name or number. Like they say, "a picture is worth a thousand words" and this
picture will be inter-active! The following is an example of an exploded view of our
electrical motor along with the popup that appears from a hotspot.

Figure 266 - Exploded Diagram with Popup

322
Creating Items (parts)
Before you work with the Exploded Diagrams editor, you'll need to create a Parent Item;
the object that the parts belong to and a store item for each and every part that you plan to
illustrate in the exploded view and eventually sell. This is done in the same manner you
create any other store item (see page 268 – New Items). Some merchants may want to put
the parent item along with all the part items into their own folder (see page 264 – New
Folders).

Exploded Diagram
Once you've created your Items, you'll need to upload your exploded image into the
Multimedia area [tab] for the PARENT item. In our example it would be the Direct
Drive Motor. To do so navigate to Item Management  Item and click on your parent
item. At the Item Editor screen, click on the "Multimedia" tab. The following screen
will appear.

Figure 267 - Multimedia screen

The Multimedia screen will list your uploaded graphics (if any). Click on the "Browse"
button and navigate within your system to locate the graphic file you want to upload.
Once located, it will be shown in the "Filename" field. You can enter a brief description
into the Description Field if desired to help you identify it. Click the "Upload graphic(s)"
button to complete the upload. If successful, your image will be listed, showing the
Filename, a preview (may be delayed), Description (if you created one), Size,
Dimensions and Date of upload.

323
Figure 268 - Multimedia screen (populated)

Each listed image will also be followed by 3 buttons; view, edit and delete.

Delete the Image

Click the "delete" button to remove the image. A dialog box will appear for
confirmation.

View the image

Click on the "view" button to see a large view of your image and also to obtain the URL
and HTML snippets for the image.

324
Edit the upload
You can upload a replacement image and/or change the description. To do so, click on
the "edit" button. The following screen will appear:

To upload a replacement graphic, click the "Browse" button and navigate to locate the
new image. Once you've located it the file name will appear in the "Replace file" field.
You can also change the description at this screen. Enter your changes in the Description
field and click the "Save" button. You will be returned to the Multimedia screen showing
your changes.

Creating Exploded Diagram

325
Now that the items and exploded view have been configured, we need to create the
Exploded View Diagram and Hot Spots.

Navigate to Configuration  Items. Click on the parent Item ID. At the Item Editor,
click on the Catalog tab.

To begin creating your exploded diagram, click on the "new" button. The following
screen will appear.

Figure 269 - Exploded Diagram Editor

Enter a code that helps you identify this Diagram. Then enter a brief description. A list
of images that you've stored in Multimedia will be presented in the drop-down field.
Click the down arrow and select the Exploded View Image you uploaded previously.
Once you've selected the image, the Hotspot Editor will appear with your image.

326
Figure 270 - Hotspot Editor

Hotspot
A Hotspot (in UltraCart) is an area that the merchant can
define over a "part" in the exploded diagram view that, when
the customer moves their mouse over that spot, a small
window will appear showing; the Item ID, Descriptions,
Cost, In Stock (yes/no), a text field to enter the quantity and
an "add to cart" button.

Create a Hotspot
You'll use your mouse pointer to draw a square box
around the spot you want to be the Hotspot. Don't
worry, if you're not happy with the results, you can
delete it and draw again. Since our sample diagram has
each part already numbered, we will use the numbers as
the hot spots. In some cases you may use the actual part
as the hot spot.

Using the mouse pointer, draw a square around the

number or item you want to be the hotspot. Place the mouse pointer at and above the
upper left corner of the item. Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse to
and just below the lower right corner. You should see a blue box being drawn enclosing
the object as you drag the mouse. Release the mouse button when you have enclosed the
object in a box. If you are not happy with your progress, click the "delete" button below
the Hotspot Properties field. You can then re-draw the box. If you click off into white

327
space before you associate the Hotspot properties, the box will turn red simply to remind
you that it's needs to be associated.

Hotspot Properties

After you've drawn your Hotspot, select the Item ID that you created earlier for this part
in the drop-down menu under the Hotspot
Properties heading (Item ID: field). The
text box to the right of the Item Id Field is
for those merchants that have many store
items. They may find it easier to simply
enter (type) the Item ID. It must be an
exact match however.

Continue the sequence of; drawing your

hotspot box and associating the Item ID,
for each Item (part) that you want to
become Hotspots. Notice that the Hotspot
box will change colors as follows; blue
after drawn, red if no properties are
assigned and orange when properties have
been assigned.

The following is our Motor Diagram after all the Hotspots have been configured.

Figure 271 - Hotspots configured

328
Edit a Hotspot
While in the Hotspot Editor, you can change any Hotspot properties. Click on the
Hotspot and its properties will appear in the Hotspot properties field. Change its
properties as desired. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Delete a Hotspot
Click on a Hotspot to select it, and then click on the "delete" button to delete it. Caution!
You will not be prompted with a confirmation dialog.

Working with the Diagram

Once you have completely configured your diagram and saved your work, your diagram
will be listed on the Item Editor  Catalog [tab] screen. In addition to a "new" button,
you will see 3 buttons for each Exploded Diagram; edit, link and delete.

Figure 272 - Exploded Diagrams listing

Edit a Diagram
Click on the "edit" button and you'll be taken back to the Exploded Diagram Editor.
There you can edit or delete Hotspots and their properties.

Delete a Diagram
Click on the Delete button to delete the diagram. You will be prompted with a "delete
confirmation" dialog window.

Diagram Link
Clicking the "link" button will take you to the Exploded Diagram Link screen.

329
Copy the JavaScript (link) displayed on this screen and, using your html editor, paste it
onto the web page you've prepared for displaying your Exploded Diagram.

Using the Exploded View

Once you've created your web page and pasted your Exploded Diagram (JavaScript),
you'll post the page to your Web Site. The following illustrates our Electric Motor
exploded view showing the "mouse over" on Hotspot (#6), the Foot Mounting Bolt.

Figure 273 - Exploded Diagram with Pop-up

330
A customer can set the quantity in the box provided and then click the "Add to Cart"
button. Since experience shows that customers browsing exploded views purchase more
than one part, UltraCart sends a message to the screen acknowledging that it has indeed
been added to the cart. This negates the customer having to move back-and-forth from
the cart to the page.

When they are finished browsing and adding items (parts) to the cart, they can then click
on the "View Cart" button which merchants must place somewhere on the Exploded
View web page.

331
Other tab (Item Editor)
There are 4 sections here that can be used for special item configurations. They are:
Payment Method Restrictions, Reporting, Tax Exemptions, and Terms. Click on the
Other tab at the Item Editor and the following screen will appear.

Figure 274 - Other Tab (item editor) screen

Payment Method Restrictions

Each of the payment methods that you have configured at Configuration > Payments
screen will be listed here. You can set restriction for any or all of the payment methods.
Although these restrictions will apply to this particular item, this setting will be in effect
for the entire purchase. This means that all other items placed into the cart along with
this item will also be under these restrictions.

332
To apply a restriction, simply click the radio button in the column and row that you want
to apply. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Reporting
UltraCart's Reporting (Main Menu) provides many reports for Merchants. One of them,
"Pick Report" needs to have this "Pickable Quantities" configuration in order to function
properly.

Pickable Quantities
Fulfillment centers generally charge a fee whenever they "pick" an item from one of their
storage shelves. Some items may be available only in single (1) units whereas some
might be available in both single and multi-pack quantities (6, 8, 12, etc.). Since
UltraCart's Reports section provides a "Pick Report" (a comparison on items ordered
versus what their fulfillment fee structure is), merchants need to define their "pickable
quantities".

Figure 275 – Reporting tab

Enter the Pickable Quantities (number or numbers) in the text box. A single item is
understood to be a pick but merchants need to spell out any other quantities (packs) that
may exist for their items. For example, you may have Ink Pens that can be "picked" as
single units and in packs of 6, 12 and 24. Therefore, since 1 is understood, you would set
your pickable quantities as 6 and 12 and 24. Separate the pick quantities with a comma
(i.e., 6, 12, 24).
Tax Exemptions
If you want to make this particular item exempt from sales tax in certain jurisdictions,
you can configure the exemptions at this screen. Again, keep in mind that if this item is
put into the cart along with other items, they will all be tax exempt if the rules apply.

Figure 276 - Tax Exemptions (item) section

333
Select the Country from the drop down menu. Then enter the State, County, City and
Postal Code as applicable. Click the "Save" button at the bottom of the screen when
finished.

Click the "Delete" button to remove an exemption already entered. Warning! There will
be no confirmation dialog window. If you click the "delete" button, that row will
disappear.

Click the "Add More" button if you need additional lines to add more exemptions for this
item.

The following are the steps for duplicating the information for another item in your store.

1. copy the Item Id of the item you just configured

2. navigate to the item you want to configure tax exemptions
3. click on the Other tab and locate the Tax Exemptions section
4. paste the Item ID into the text box for "Copy exemptions from item" field
5. click the "go" button. The previous item's exemption information will appear.
6. click the "Save" button when finished.

Repeat these steps for all other items needing the same or similar tax exemptions.

Terms
At this screen you can specify checkout terms that will be included with the main store
terms and conditions at checkout. Enter your terms in the box provided. Click the
"Save" button when finished.

Figure 277 - Terms (Item) screen

334
Item Kitting
Some merchants sell several store items bundled together at special prices. Kitting
provides a mechanism for merchants to create what we call a Kit with a unique Item ID
that contains 2 or more existing store items. Talk about benefits (shipping/SKU's).

A Kit can be created at any folder level and allows you to include items from any folder.
But, it will only be visible from the folder level it was originally created in. Some
merchants create kits at the Main Filing Cabinet level only. The Kit section can be found
at Main Menu  Item Management  Items [tab], between the Folders and Items
Section (bordered in red in the sample below).

Figure 278 - Kitting section

New Kit
To create a new Kit, click on the "new" button. The Kit Editor screen will appear.

335
Figure 279 - Kit [tab]

Although this editor is much like the Item Editor screen, you will notice that there are
fewer tabs and fields. The tabs available are: Kit, Components, Discounts, Pricing Tiers,
Related Items, Auto Order, Shipping, Reporting and Catalog. Components and Shipping
are the only new tabs and will be explained below.

There are basically 16 fields describing the Kit. You must give your kit a unique Item ID.
The other 15 fields require the same type of information as when you create a regular
Store Item. For an explanation of these fields, see page 280 (Item Editor). Enter your
information and click the "Save" button to save your new Kit configuration.

Kit Components (tab)

This is where you identify which original Store Items you want included in your kit.
Enter the Item ID (must be an exact match of actual store item). Since some merchants
offer more than one of a particular item, you will need to enter the Quantity for this item.
Press the "enter" key on your keyboard and UltraCart will look for your item. If a match
is found, the Item Description will automatically appear.

Continue entering your items. If you have more than four items in your kit, click on the
"Add more" button and more fields will appear. Click on the "Save" button when
finished.

336
Figure 280 - Kit Components [tab]

Kit Shipping (tab)

There is only one option under this tab; Free Shipping.

If you want to offer free shipping for the entire kit, place a check in the box (click) to the
right of the "Free Shipping" prompt to. Then click the "Save" button.

337
Mix and Match Groups (discounts)
As mentioned earlier in this manual, a merchant can set up discounts and pricing tiers for
wholesale purchases. However, those discounts apply only to individual store items and
not to a mixture of items. A customer that buys 3 of one item and 4 of another item may
not qualify for wholesale discount of say 5 or more. Hence, we have a reason for Mix
and Match Group (discounts).

Mix and Match Group is a valuable option for merchants that want to allow volume
discounts for customers placing orders for a mixture (group) of store items. Using Mix
and Match Groups, merchants can set up store items (wines for example) that can be
purchased as a “group” and qualify for volume discounts.

Creating a Mix and Match Group

To create a new Mix and Match Group, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Mix and Match Groups [Link]

If no groups have been established, you will see the following screen:

Figure 281 - Mix and Match Groups List Screen

Click on the “New” button to create your group. The following screen will appear.

338
Figure 282 - Create Mix and Match Group Screen
There are basically three parts to creating a Mix and Match Group. They are: 1) Name of
the group, 2) what your discount is based upon and 3) the actual discount level(s). Click
on the “Save” button after you enter your information.

In the example above we established a three tiered discount group based upon the
Quantity purchased with a Fixed Discount per Unit.

Name: We’ve called this example “Volume Discounts”. Most merchants create a name
that closely resembles what the group discount does. I.E., “Buy 2 or more; get $5.00
off”, “Purchase 5 or more; get 10% discount”.

Discount based upon: You can set the discount based upon the Quantity (number of items
purchased) or the Subtotal (of all items in the cart). In the above example we offer a
discount based upon the quantity.

Discount break points: In our example we’ve created 3 levels at quantities 5, 10, and 20
or more. If a customer purchases between 5 and 9 items, they will receive $1.00 off per
item. If they purchase between 10 and 19 items, they will receive $1.50 off per item and
if they purchase 20 or more items, they will receive $2.00 off per item.

Mix & Match Optional Rules (2)

There are two rules that can be applied when creating your Mix and Match Group.

Ignore default discount if pricing tier member (otherwise best discount

available applies).

UltraCart will typically look at all discounts you have set up and apply the best
discount to the order. Check the box to the left of this statement if you do not

339
 want your Pricing Tier (wholesale) qualifiers to receive the default Mix and
Match discount.

Discount only applies up to quantity break points.

Applying this setting will not allow discounts to be applied until the quantity
purchased lands on exactly the quantity threshold that you set. In the example
above, the break points are 5, 10 and 20. If a customer purchases 5 qualifying
items, they will receive $1.00 off per item for a total discount of $5.00. If they
purchase 6 items, they will still receive only a total of $5.00 off. When they
purchase 10 items, they will then get $1.50 off per item for a total of $15.00
off.

When finished creating your Mix and Match Group, click the "Save" button at the bottom
of the screen. Your newly created group will appear on the following screen.

Figure 283 - Mix and Match Groups listing

Edit a Mix and Match Group

Your newly created Mix and Match Group(s) will appear on the Mix and Match Group
screen. Click on the “Edit” button to the right of the group name to modify any of the
settings of a particular group. Click on the “Delete” button to remove the Mix and Match
Group.

Applying Mix and Match Group to Store Items

Mix and Match Group discounts will have no affect on purchases until you configure the
store items you want it to apply to. In most cases merchants apply Mix and Match Group
discounts to only a few store items. To apply the mix and match group to a store item,
navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Items

When the Item List screen appears, click on the Item ID desired. At the Item Editor
screen (Item Tab), locate and click on the Mix and Match Group Field (lower right). A

340
drop down menu will appear with your Mix and Match Group(s) listed. Select the Mix
and Match group you want to apply to this item. Then click on the “Save” button in the
lower left of the screen. Repeat this process for each and every store item that you want
to apply Mix and Match Group(s) to.

Figure 284 - Applying Mix and Match Group(s)

Mix and Match Groups for Pricing Tier Members

Since some merchants have Pricing Tiers established for customers (wholesale for
example), it might be desirable to apply your Mix and Match Group discounts for these
as well. Additionally, you can establish different minimums and discounts for these
Pricing Tiers. If you have Pricing Tiers established they will appear as a configurable
table when you create or edit a Mix and Match Group. Simply enter your discount levels.

341
Figure 285 - Mix and Match for Pricing Tiers

Discounts at Checkout
The discounts will appear in the checkout screen when the merchant adds a quantity of
items that meets the minimum requirement. In the example below, we have purchased 3
of the Soap and 2 of the Book items for our demo store, both of which have a mix and

342
match group discount configured. The combination of these two items meets the quantity
minimum of 5 so we receive a discount of $1.00 per item. The discount does not apply to
the Item “TSHIRT” since the Mix and Match group was not “applied” to that item.

Figure 286 - Shopping Cart with Discounted Items

Perishable Classes
Something liable to perish, decay, or spoil rapidly (fresh fish for example) requires great
care in handling. So some merchants will be packing special coolants along with the
perishable item. When considering shipping estimates, it's very important to identify all
factors that might affect the weight of the package. Given that, UltraCart has created this
section allowing merchants to configure any number of perishable classes.

Creating perishable classes here will become selectable from a drop-down list in the Item
Editor for specific items.

Configuring Perishable Classes

If no perishable classes have been created, you will see the familiar "no perishable classes
have been created"… message.

To create a Perishable Class, click on the "New" button. The following screen will
appear with 5 fields to complete.

343
Name: Enter a name that will be easily recognizable when it appears in the drop-down
list in the Item Editor.

Coolant Name: Enter the name of the coolant used (i.e., gel refrigerants, dry ice, etc.)

When configuring the coolant weight, you can configure Coolant by Package or Coolant
by Weight. Merchants will typically only configure one method.

Coolant Per Package: Enter the weight of the coolant per package into the text box.
Then select whichever is applicable; LB for pounds, OZ for ounces, or KG for Kilograms
from the drop down list.

Coolant by Weight: Enter the amount (weight) of coolant per amount of Item weight.

Click the "Save" button when finished. You will be returned to the Perishable Class
screen where your new entry will be shown.

Click the "edit" button to make changes. Click the "delete" button to remove the
Perishable Class.
344
Selecting Perishable Class

You can select the perishable class desired at:

Main Menu  Item Management  Items  click on Item ID  Shipping [tab]

You'll find the Perishable Class field under the 1st section; Shipping Options.

Select your perishable class from the drop down list. Click the "Save" button at the
bottom of the screen when finished. Complete the same procedure for all items that have
the use of perishable classes.

Pricing Tiers
In this section a merchant can create pricing tiers for volume (discount) pricing.
Populating the actual volume prices will be done in the Item Editor since volume pricing
must be set for store items individually.

345
Figure 287 - Pricing Tiers screen
If no tiers have been created, the “No pricing tiers have been created....” message will be
displayed. Click on the “New” button to create a new pricing tier. The following screen
will appear.

Figure 288 - New Pricing Tier screen

Pricing Tier Fields

346
Name: Enter the name of your pricing tier to differentiate between other pricing tiers.

Tax Exempt: Click the box to the left to NOT charge and pre-configured tax charges.

No Real-time Charge: Click the box to place the order into accounts receivable awaiting
your approval to process payment.

Allow Purchase Order: Click the box to ALLOW the use of Purchase Orders.

Allow COD: Click the box to ALLOW the use of Cash on Delivery (COD) order.

Auto Approve COD: Click the box to accept the COD order without your approval in
accounts receivable.

Free Shipping: Click the box to NOT charge shipping fees. Enter an amount in the next
field to charge a minimum shipping amount.

Minimum Subtotal: This Pricing Tier will not be valid unless the minimum amount
entered in this box is met.

Minimum Item Count: This Pricing Tier will not be valid unless the purchase is for the
minimum number of items entered into this box.

Exempt from Handling Charges: Check this box to NOT impose any pre-defined
Handling Charges.

No Free Shipping: Some merchants have Free Shipping configured. Check this box if
you want override (void) the Free shipping settings.

Allow 3rd party billing of shipping: presently for Merchants that use Interact Fulfillment
ONLY.

Default shipping method: Your pre-configured shipping methods will appear in this
drop-down list. Select the one that you want (if any) to be the default for this Pricing
Tier.

Click the "Save" button when you have finished with the configuration. Your newly
created pricing tier will now be shown along with “Edit” and “Delete” buttons.

347
Figure 289 - Pricing Tiers screen (with Wholesale item)

Delete Pricing Tier

To delete the item, click on the “Delete” button. This is an irreversible action. The item
will be deleted without any warning dialog.

Pricing Tier Editor

To change parameters of your pricing tier, click on the “Edit” Button. Enter your
changes at the editing screen that appears. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Store Wide Item Options

Often merchants have an option (such as t-shirt size) that applies to a large set of their
inventory. To keep from having to define the same option repeatedly for each item,
UltraCart supports the concept of store wide item options. Merchants define the option
and associate it with multiple items. Editing the option will affect all the items that have
been given the option.

Creating
To create a new storewide option, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Store Wide Item Options

At the Item Management screen, click the "Store Wide Item Options" link. You'll be
taken to the Store Wide Item Options screen.

348
To create your first Store Wide Item Option, click on the "New Option" link. You'll then
be taken to the same Option Editor screen that is explained in the Item Options section.

Figure 290 - Option Editor screen

The settings for storewide options are identical to item specific options. For instructions
on how to complete this screen, see Item Management  Options Tab on page 286.

Once you've created a Store Wide Item Option, click on the "Save" button. You will be
returned to the Store Wide Item Options screen where you newly created option(s) will
appear.

349
Associating With Items
After creating a storewide item option it can then be associated with multiple items.
Clicking the "***" link to the right of the option's name in the "Add to Multiple Items"
column will bring up a list of all the store items the merchant has configured.

Figure 291 - Multiple Add Option screen

350
Click the checkboxes to the left of the Item ID desired. Buttons are provided at the top of
the screen to "select all" or "deselect all". Then click the "Submit" button when finished
selecting your items to associate the option with each of the items. You will be returned
to the previous screen.

Deleting
To delete a storewide option, click the checkbox to the right of the option in the delete
column and then click submit. Deleting a store wide option will remove it from all the
associated items.

351
Upsell After

Upsell refers to when you encourage a customer to buy a little something extra during the
closing of the deal (checkout). For example; a shoe salesperson might suggest that when
you buy a pair of shoes that you also use some weather protectant spray. These "Upsells"
are usually small purchases that the buyer doesn’t have to put a lot of thought into and are
presented in a timely fashion; right when they have their wallets (credit card) in hand. It's
much different and more effective than simply displaying "related" or "suggested" item(s)
at the bottom of the view cart.

The upsell offer appears with your configured "Upsell" item(s) displayed. It will also
include your custom message promoting the additional item(s). Since the customer has
already entered their payment and shipping information, this additional purchase is a
simple "click" of a YES or NO button.

Imagine being able to increase your revenue by 10% simply through Upsells during the
checkout. This could be the difference between a break even e-commerce business or a
highly profitable one. In today’s competitive advertising arena for e-commerce related
sites you can not afford to leave the revenue on the table that can come from Upsells.

The following is a sample of what an upsell screen might look like with inserted graphics
and text.

Figure 292 - Upsell After Screen example

352
What type of items should I Upsell?

Qualifiers for Upsell could be anything that is either related to the item being purchased,
a service that might appeal to the customer, or a product that would appeal to the target
demographic of the customer that is purchasing. Let’s say that you sell a Body Building
Supplement Drink Mix. You might want to Upsell your Quick Energy Protein Bars.
This is a complementary product that may not have otherwise been seen by the customer.

Priority Processing

Another great example of an Upsell product is priority processing. For a few extra
dollars you guarantee (for a fee) that you will process the customer’s order as fast as
possible. This may be your goal all the time, but why not make a few extra dollars for
the action of priority processing of someone’s order. Let’s say you have 200 orders a
day, and 10% of them choose priority processing for $2.00. That would amount to
$1200.00 a month in additional revenue.

How does the Upsell system work?

After the customer clicks the finalize order button the system checks to see if any Upsell
offers are triggered by the items that they are purchasing. If the customer meets the
criteria then the Upsell pages will be displayed, one after another, in priority order, until
all the Upsells are shown. A timer is set on the customer’s shopping cart to make sure
their shopping cart turns into a completed order even if the customer closes the browser
during the Upsell pages. This allows the merchant to run the customer through a gauntlet
of typically one to seven pages of products. Each Upsell page will feature a single
product. The customer will be asked to click yes or no as to whether they want to add the
item to their cart. If the customer clicks "yes", the item is added. UltraCart will
recalculate totals (tax, shipping, etc) and the payment will then be processed.

Upsell After Configuration

To begin navigate to: Main Menu  Item Management  Upsell After.
There are two sections to UltraCart's Upsell section; Offers and Paths.

Figure 293 – Upsell After Offers screen

353
Upsell Offer

To add a new Upsell Offer, click on the "new" button to the right of the Offers title. You
will be taken to the Upsell After Offer Editor screen.

354
 Figure 294 - Upsell After Offer Editor

The following are field descriptions for the upsell after offer editor:

 Offer Name – Helps identify the offer.

 Upsell Item ID – The item that you are trying to get the customer to purchase
 Downsell Item ID – This is the Item offered if they say NO to the upsell offer.
It's recommended that this be a free or heavily discounted item w/free shipping.
 Trigger Item IDs – When one of the items listed here are placed into the shopping
cart, the Upsell Item (above) will be triggered for Upsell. If this is left blank then
the Upsell will be presented regardless of what was originally purchased.
 Suppression Item IDs – the items that will suppress the Upsell from being
presented. If the customer has already placed the item that you’re Upselling into
the cart, it doesn’t make sense to offer it again (especially at a special price).
 Trigger Shipping Methods – Only show this offer if the customer selects this
shipping method.
 Suppress Shipping Methods – Don't show this offer if they select this shipping
method.
 Customer can choose from multiple items – Allows them to choose from 1 or
more items.
 Replace trigger item – check this box if you want the trigger item to be replaced
by the Upsell item. This should only be checked if there is one trigger item ID.
Maintain options – Options on the Trigger Item carrier over to the Upsell
Item.
 Removable on Confirmation – Show confirmation screen at the end of the
checkout process whereby the customer can remove the upsell item.
 Allow multiple quantity – If this is checked then UltraCart will be display a
quantity box where they can change the quantity. Otherwise the customer will
only receive one of the upsold items.
Option Limit – Set the Maximum quantity of the Allow multiple quantity
(above).
 Offer ends – the date at which the offer is no longer valid. You can use this field
to suspend an Upsell Offer by entering a 'past' date.
 Priority – the order in which you want the Upsell to appear, 1 being the first or
highest priority. If two different Upsells are given the same priority number, then
the one that costs more will be shown first.
 Before/After HTML – This is the html that will be displayed around the yes/no
buttons (and optional quantity field). This must be specified in order to give the
customer an idea of what they are being sold. It's wise to display a graphic of the
item and at least a paragraph of text describing the deal. The graphic referenced
here must be uploaded to the Graphics Library in the Screen Branding section of
UltraCart.

355
Upsell Offer Graphic Link
Before your graphic can be displayed in the offer screen, it must be uploaded to the
Graphics Library. For more information, see the Screen Branding/Graphics Library
section of the UltraCart Reference Manual. The following is a sample html image source
tag that you would use to display a graphic that resides in UltraCart's Graphics Library:

<IMG SRC="/cgi-bin/UCGraphic?MERCHANTID=DEMO&FILENAME=FleaSoap.gif">

Preview an Upsell Offer

Once you have created and saved your offer, click the "preview" button to see what it will
look like. This is an especially useful tool. Once you've previewed, click the back arrow
on your browser to go back to the Upsell After Offers screen.

Figure 295 - Upsell After screen (with offer)

Edit an Upsell Offer

You can make changes to your offer at any time. Click the "edit" button and you'll be
taken to the "Upsell After Offer Editor" screen. Make any changes desired. Click the
save button at the bottom of the screen when finished.

Delete an Upsell Offer

To delete an offer, simply click on the "delete" button. Caution! There will be no
Yes/No prompt after you click on the button and no recovery option.

Upsell Paths
This is an optional marketing tool for merchants with multiple Upsell Offers. Upsell
Paths gives merchants the opportunity to experiment with their upsell offers to evaluate
and determine which Upsell offer is having the best results (sales). In establishing the
Paths, merchants can set different Traffic Percentages (customers viewing the offer) and
set the Priority (order) the steps will be viewed. A merchant may create only one Path
and experiment solely with it by enabling or disabling Offers and/or changing their
viewing priority. Others may create several different Paths.

Traffic Percentage
A good analogy might be to consider the paths as roads. When you set the Traffic
Percentage for a Path, you are defining how many customers will travel down that road.
So you might define 3 different paths that are set at 50%, 25% and 25%.
356
Steps
When you define the steps you are telling UltraCart what Upsell Offers you want
participating and the priority (order) you want the upsell offers displayed (irregardless of
the defined traffic percentage).

New Path
If no upsell paths exist, you will see the familiar "No Upsell paths exist…." message.

Figure 296 - Upsell Offer & Paths screen

On our previous screen, we show that we have created 3 different offers for our Aviation
Store. To create an Upsell Path for these offers, click the "new" button. The following
screen will appear.

Figure 297 - Upsell Path Editor screen

357
You will complete three (3) fields when creating a Path:

Code: Enter a short Code Name for your Path

Name: Enter a longer name to make it easy for you to identify the offer.

Traffic Percentage: As mentioned earlier, you define the priority your upsell offers
are displayed when they are created. When configuring the Upsell Paths, you will
simply identify what percentage of customers will see this Path. If you have only one
path, then this obviously will be 100%. In our example we set this path at 50%.

Configure Steps
Your Upsell Offers will be listed. Here you can determine which ones you want enabled
(turned on) when this Path is used. In our example we have previously created 3 offers
which are shown in the previous screen shot. You can have any number of them enabled.

Next you set the priority in which you want these Paths shown. In our example we set
them in order of 1, 2, and 3. Click the save button when finished. The following screen
will appear with our newly configured Path displayed.

Figure 298 - Upsell Path configured

You would repeat these steps to create other paths for this upsell offer. Merchant can
then monitor their sales and evaluate which Path produces the best results (sales).

Edit a Path
Each path created will have its own Edit button. When clicked, you will be returned to
the editing screen (same view as when you created the path) where you can change any of
the configuration. Typical, this is where you might experiment by changing the Priority
or Enabling/Disabling of the steps.

Delete Path
Each path created will also have its own Delete button. When clicked, the path will be
deleted. Caution! There will be no confirmation dialog presented.

358
Tools
The Tools section has 9 elements; Amazon Seller Central Import, Amazon Seller Central
Manual Upload, Barcode Generator, Batch Item Export, Batch Item Import, Batch Item
Updates, Inventory Adjustment, Inventory Transfer and Price Update

Amazon Seller Central Import

This feature is for those merchants using Amazon Seller Central to sell their items.
Those users will have a special Excel spreadsheet provided by Amazon that UltraCart can
read to import their store items into the system. To begin the import process, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Amazon Seller Central Import [link]

When you click the "Amazon Seller Central Import" link, you will be taken to the
following import screen.

Figure 299 - Amazon Seller Central Import screen

Click on the "Browse" button and navigate within your system to find your Seller Central
Excel Template file. Note: you will import the XLS file, not a TAB or COMMA
delimited file (csv).

Once located, most systems require you to click the "open" button. This will put the file
name and path into the "File" field of our import screen. Once you are satisfied you have
located the correct file, click the "Continue" button. You will then be presented with a

359
small dialog window showing the import progress. You should eventually see an "Items
Imported Successful screen".

Amazon Seller Central Manual Upload

This feature is for those merchants using Amazon Seller Central to sell their items and
that have already uploaded their spreadsheet inventory. This section allows those
merchants to force an immediate upload to Amazon of changed item data instead of
having to wait for the normal hourly upload job. Merchants that already have Amazon
Seller Central configured will see the following upload screen.

Figure 300 - Amazon Seller Central Manual Upload screen

If you want UltraCart to automatically upload all items that were changed since the last
automated upload simply leave the Item ID blank and click the "Upload" button.

Enter the item IDs in the text box provided that you would like to upload. Place each item
on a separate line. You can specify a range of items by entering two item IDs on the same
line separated by a hyphen. For example: 5000-5150 would upload all the items between
those two item IDs.

Barcode Generator
This is a valuable facility for merchants that need Barcodes printed on labels. Presently,
the only label format that is supported is Avery 5150/8160 or it's compatible. To create
and print barcode labels, navigate to:

360
 Main Menu  Item Management  Barcode Generator [link]

Figure 301 - Barcode Generator screen

Complete the following fields to set up your barcode printing:

Label Layout - Avery 5160/8160 is the only label format.

Starting Position – If you want to begin printing at a certain

point (usually in the case of a partially used sheet) indicate
which label to begin at in this field. Count labels left to right
starting in the upper left corner. For example, to print labels
in the shaded area of the sample on the right, you would enter
"17" as a starting point.

There are four pieces to the Barcode:

Barcode – enter your barcode data (typically the UPC or EAN number).
Qty – enter how many labels you want printed of this particular barcode.
Alt. Text – whatever you enter here will be printed along with the code.
The default will be what you entered in the Barcode field if this is left blank.

361
Type – From the drop-down menu, select the type of linear barcode you want to use.
The default is Code 128.

Make certain your "page scaling" in the PDF print dialog box is
set to NONE. Click the "Generate" button when ready to print.
Your browser software should display a preview a new window.
Select "Print" from the File menu to print. Don't forget to load the
labels in your printer.

Batch Item Export

The batch item export utility allows you to quickly generate an Excel Spreadsheet or
CSV file of all or some of your store item information (fields). This can come in real
handy for a quick and simple way to update (change) a lot of information for your
existing store items. You EXPORT the item information, open it into a spreadsheet, edit
and save the new data on your system (CSV format) and then IMPORT the information
back into UltraCart using the Batch Item Import utility.

To begin the export process you will first select the data to be exported. Navigate to:
Main Menu  Item Management  Batch Item Export [link]

There are 3 basic steps; Select the data (Folder(s)) you want exported, indicate if you
want Child Folders included and select the Export Format.

Figure 302 - Batch Item Export screen

362
Selecting Export Data
The Batch Item Export screen will display a listing of your folders in a scrollable
window. If you've never created folders then only one folder, "Filing Cabinet", will
appear in the selection window. It is selected by default.

If you have multiple folders, select the folders that contain the items you want exported.
You can select multiple folders by holding down your keyboard 'Ctrl' key while clicking.

Exporting Child Folders

If you want all subfolders downloaded along with the parent folders that you select, click
on the check box to the right of the "Export Child Folders" prompt.
Example: Figure 302 shows the "Accessories" folder selected. Since the Export Child
Folders box is checked, the subfolder "Tiny Accessories" will be exported as well.

Selecting Export Format

The last step is to select the Export Format. Click the radio button to the left of either
Excel Spreadsheet format or Comma Separated Values (CSV). If the Excel Format will
not import into your version of Excel, then use the CSV format.

Click on the "download" button to download the data. Most system will display a dialog
box similar to the one shown below. You usually will have the option to Open or Save
the file to your system.

Once you open the file into your spreadsheet, you can edit and save it to your system.

363
Batch Item Import
This function provides the capability to batch import data files (items) into UltraCart. It
is for merchants that can create or obtain a data file consisting of their store items (all,
new, or updates).

Field Order (mapping)

The order of the data fields in your file is not critical since the import wizard provides
field mapping to match your field order with UltraCart. Placing the field headings in the
first record (row) of your file will make it easier to map the fields when you reach that
stage in the wizard. Although helpful, this is optional. The wizard will prompt you to
indicate if the field headings exist or not.

Creating your import file

In order for UltraCart to be able to distinguish between fields, your file must eventually
be converted to a comma delimited file (CSV). The conversion basically puts commas
between fields as separators. Most data handling programs, (i.e., Excel, Access,
FileMaker Pro, etc.), have methods for converting or exporting files to CSV format. In
Excel you can simply “save as” and set the type (as shown below) to CSV.

Importing your file

Once you have your CSV file properly saved on your system, navigate UltraCart to the
Batch Item Import.

Main Menu  Item Management  Batch Item Import

Step 1: File Import

At the Item Import screen, click on the “Browse” button to navigate within your system
to locate your CSV file.

Figure 303 - Item Import screen

364
At you browse window, navigate to locate your file. Once you’ve located your import
file, click on the “Open” button on your navigation screen.

Figure 304 - Windows Browse dialog

You will be returned with the filename and path entered in the File Import box. Click on
the “Continue” button.

Figure 305 - Item Import screen (file located)

 If the file you selected for import is incompatible (non csv), you will receive a
message to contact UltraCart Customer Support for assistance.

365
 Click your browser’s back arrow button to return to the Item Import screen to try
again.
Step 2: Map Fields
Once your compatible CSV file has been located and selected, you will be brought to the
Map Fields screen. In order for UltraCart to successfully import your items you need to
align (match) YOUR field order with UltraCart’s field order. This is called “field
mapping” and is a critical process in the import process.

Figure 306 - Map Fields screen

Up to 10 of your imported records will be displayed. They are arranged in columns in the
field order they held at import. Above each field (column) is a drop-down menu that
contains a list of UltraCart’s Item Fields. The fields are listed alphabetically. Select each
Item Field to align (match) your item fields one at a time. If you do not select a match
for a field, that particular field’s data will not be imported. Note: you may need to scroll
to the right to reach all fields (columns).

Some exported files contain heading information (field name of each column) in the first
record (as shown above). If present, it’s easier to identify and align your columns with
UltraCart. However, if the headings are imported along with the rest of the file, the
headings will become an “item” in your store. To prevent the headings from being
imported, click the box immediately above the list of columns. If you fail to click the
box prior to import, you can always delete the headings (item) in the item editor at a later
time.
Import Field Order
UltraCart Mapping scheme can be a little confusing to the novice. The diagram on page
368 shows all the fields as they will appear in the drop down menu during the import
mapping process. They are generally listed alphabetically. We recommend you study
this diagram and compare it to your spreadsheet prior to attempting your import.
Note: the actual import screen will not be in color.

366
Special Category Fields
Some fields are listed under special categories (in Blue) with the applicable fields
indented below each category title. The average, small store probably will not use these
fields since they typically involve Dynamic Catalogs, Multiple Distribution Centers, and
Wholesalers. These special categories fields are:

Category Field(s)
Attributes Name 1 thru 15 and Value 1 thru 15
Catalog Path, Title, Description, Image URL, Group Template and
Item Template
Froogle Book Author, Book Format, Book ISBN, Book Publisher,
Category, Music Artist, Music Format, Music Release Date,
Omit From Feed, Product Type, Video Director, Video
Format, Video Rating, Video Release Date and Video Starring
Handles Item Distribution Centers
Inventory Level Distribution Centers
Stock Picking Location Distribution Centers
Variations Name (1-10), Parent Item ID (1-10) and Value (1-10)
Volume Discounts Quantity (1-10) and Cost Per Unit (1-10)
Pricing Tiers Volume Discount Quantity (1-10) and Volume Discount Cost
Per Unit (1-10)

Standard Fields
The special category fields (blue) and standard fields (red) are shown on the following
chart. When you perform the field mapping function, the fields will be displayed in this
order in the scrolling window. Typing the first letter of a word while the drop down
window is visible will take you to the field that begins with the letter you entered. Re-
typing the same letter will take you to next field beginning with that letter, and so on.
Remember that indented fields are for the special category above them.

367
Figure 307 - Import Fields Chart

368
Step 3: Import Source Name (Optional)
Some merchants import files from multiple sources. If so, it's important to name the
source. In doing so, you can take advantage of the options available in Step 4. If you fail
to identify the source then one import file will overwrite the other which may or may not
be desirable. Step 4 gives you control over that functionality.

Figure 308 - Import Source Name screen

If you are importing a source that you have imported and named before, select it from the
drop-down menu. If you are import a new source, identify it by entering the new name in
the "New Import Source Name" Field.

Step 4: Options
Some merchants use the batch importing process as a method to update existing store
items and other tasks. The following 6 (optional) functions can be preformed during the
import process:

1. Delete items in UltraCart that do not exist in this imported file.

2. Mark up prices
3. Only update existing items
4. Only import non-existent items
5. Mark new items for cleanup
6. Replace catalog assignments

369
Figure 309 - Import Options screen

Delete items in UltraCart that do not exist in this imported file.

Some of your store items may not exist in the file to be imported. Checking this box
will present a list of these items so you can choose the ones you want deleted.

370
Figure 310 - Delete Items list

Mark up prices
If you would like the opportunity to mark up the prices specified in this import file by
a percentage or flat amount during the import process then check this box. You'll be
shown a list of all the different folder categories after clicking on the “Continue”
button. Entering values here will affect all items within that folder.

Figure 311 - Markup screen

Specify the percentage and flat fee markups for each folder. Enter percentages as
10.0%. If you specify a markup at a folder that is only one level deep, then it will
appear to all subfolders unless a markup is specified for the subfolder as well.

Only update existing items

Often merchants use the import feature as a means to update all their items. If you
don’t want to import any new items, check this box. Only items that already exist will
be updated.

Only Import non-existent items

If you only want to import new items that do not exist in your database check this
box. This means any record in your import file that contains an Item ID that doesn't

371
 exist in your UltraCart file, will be import. Those matching Item ID's will not be
imported.

Mark new items for cleanup

Selecting this option will tag the imported records for easy identification by our
Clean-up Utility (Item Management  Tools). See page 382 for details.
Replace catalog assignments
By default UltraCart will only add new catalog assignments. It will not purge any
existing catalog path assignments. Check the box below if you want the assignments
to be replaced with your new import.

Batch Item Updates

This is a very useful tool for merchants desiring to perform updates (changes) to several
items at one time. It gives you the opportunity to "find" items matching certain criteria
and then making changes to only those items. For example, you could "find" all store
items that are priced at $20.00 and update all of them to $25.00 in one procedure.

Once the items are located via our search feature, you simply enter the updated data and
all the "found" items will automatically be changed. This can be a real time saver.

To utilize this feature, click on the “Batch Item Updates” link.

Figure 312 - Batch Item Update screen

Searching for items to update

The first screen that appears provides a method for you to search for your item(s). You
can perform a search in the following fields: price range, weight range, item description,
item ID, item active status and/or item category. You can search by a single or several of
the search fields.

372
Clicking in the box to the left of an item will expand that field to allow you to enter your
search criteria. The following explains each search field.

Price Range

Enter your price range. In the example above, all store items that have a price between
$10.00 and $20.00 will appear for update.

Weight Range

Enter your weight range. In the example above, all store items that have a weight
between 10 and 12 will appear for update.

Item Description

Enter your item description in the box provided. In addition, you must select either
Exact Match Search (returns only items that have that exact Item Description) or Partial
Match Search (returns any items that contain your entry in the Item Description).

Item ID

Enter your item ID in the box provided. You must also select either “Exact Match
Search” or “Partial Match Search” in the drop down menu.

Item Active Status

Select either the Item is “Active” or “Inactive” in the drop down menu. This will return
items that you have set as Active or Inactive.

Item Category

In the Item Category search you must make two selections. First select either “items in
category” or Items in or beneath category”. Then select which folder you want to search
in. In our example above, there are only 2 folders in the Root Folder.

Search Results
Once you have entered all your search criteria, click on the “Continue” button to perform
the search.

373
If you do not enter any search criteria, all of your store items will appear in the results
screen. This is probably not the results you desire so be certain to accurately enter your
search criteria.

Your search results will appear in the Batch Item Update screen. In the example below,
we wanted to find our store items with a weight of 2.00 lbs. Our search criteria were
entered in the “Weight Range” field as between “2 and 2”.

Figure 313 - Batch Item Update screen

In our example only 2 items were found (as expected). Using the Batch Item Update
process would typically be used for updating far more items.

At this point you need to click on the check box to the left of the items you want to
update.

Selecting Update Fields

We now have 4 fields we can update in the search results screen; price, weight, package
dimensions and status.

Price - checking this box will expand to include “Set item prices to” field. If you want to
change (increase or decrease) the price, enter the new amount in this box.

Weight - checking this box will expand to include “Set item weights to” field and a drop-
down menu to indicate “LB” or “KG”. If you want to change (increase or decrease) the
weight, enter the new amount in this box. Also select LB (pounds) or KG (kilograms).

374
Dimensions - checking this box will expand to include “Set item dimensions to” fields. If
you want to change (increase or decrease) the dimensions, enter the length, width and
height in the 3 boxes respectively. Also select IN (inches) or CM (centimeters).

Item Active Status – checking this box will expand to include the Active or Inactive
drop-down menu. Use this field to change items to Active or Inactive. Remember, if an
item is inactive, it is not be visible in searches and customers cannot add it to their
shopping cart. This is a great way to temporarily disable an out of stock item. Check this
box ONLY if you want the item to become inactive.

Completing the Update

You can make updates to any one or all four items. Remember, all updates entered will
apply to all the items you have checked to be updated!

Once you have selected and entered your update information, click on the “Save
Changes” button. You will be given a confirmation screen stating that “Your items have
been updated.”

Inventory Adjustment
The Inventory Adjustment tool can import and process a .csv (comma separated value)
file to increase/decrease inventory levels for your distribution center. This feature would
be used mostly when merchants receive an inventory report that updates numerous items.
In most cases you can obtain these reports in the required .csv format. Note: the numbers
you import will be added to the existing inventory level.

Your import file requires only two columns; Item ID and Inventory Level (in that order).
The file should not contain column headings. Positive numbers will increase inventory
and negative numbers will decrease inventory.

To begin the import process, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Inventory Adjustment

When you click on the Inventory Adjustment link, the following screen will appear.

375
Figure 314 - Inventory Adjustment Import screen

There are 3 fields of concern on this screen as follows:

Distribution Center: Select the distribution center that handles the items you are
adjusting in the drop down list to the right of the Distribution Center prompt. Most
merchants only have one distribution center.

File: Click the "Browse" button and navigate within your system to locate the
appropriate .csv file. Once located, you will return to this screen and your filename and
path will appear in the File Field box.

Wait Days: This field is for merchant using DART as their fulfillment center only.
When a number is entered here, it will cause uploaded DART inventory files to be
ignored for "x" days (x being the number you enter into the Wait Days Field box).

Click the "Process" button when finished.

Inventory Transfer
Inventory Transfer utility is provided for merchants that have multiple distribution
centers. It provides a method to adjust the inventory level (quantity) from one
distribution center to another with the ability to update and track the actual transfer
(shipment) record. This feature is especially useful for merchants selling on Amazon.
UltraCart provides Amazon with hourly inventory updates so this utility gives lead times
so pre-orders can build up.

To create an Inventory Transfer navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Inventory Transfer

If no transfers have been created, the familiar message telling you so will appear on the
Inventory Transfers screen.

376
Figure 315 - Inventory Transfer screen

Click on the "new" button to create a new inventory transfer. These can be deleted later,
once they've proved their usefulness. The first step will be to identify the "from/to"
distribution centers involved in the transfer. In our sample we are transferring "From"
SHIP 1 and "To" SHP 2 distribution centers involved.

There are two fields to complete here. In the first field, select the distribution center you
are transferring from. In the second field, select the distribution center you are
transferring to. Click the "Next" button when finished. Your from/to configuration will
appear immediately below the Description field on the next screen.

Setting the Transfer Quantity

The following screen will list all your store items along with the inventories held at each
distribution center. Before setting the quantities for transfer, you need to enter a name of
this transfer

377
Figure 316 - Transfer Quantity screen

Enter a name that identifies this transfer into the "Description" field. Use any name you
feel will help you identify it later.

Next, enter the quantity of inventory you want to move for each item involved in this
transfer into the box under the Transfer Quantity column. Click on the "Save" button
when finished. Your completed Inventory Transfer will now be listed on the Inventory
Transfer screen.

Figure 317 - Inventory Transfer configured

378
Edit an existing Inventory Transfer

You can make changes and adjustments to your original transfer configuration. Click on
the "edit" button to the right of the transfer you want to adjust. You will be taken to the
Transfer Quantity screen where you can enter your changes. Click on the "Save" button
when finished.

Inventory Shipped

Once you've initiated the actual (physical) inventory shipment, you'll need to update your
Inventory Transfer record. Make sure you've made all the necessary adjustments and/or
changes at this point in the process because you cannot adjust the transfer quantity once
you've entered the "ship" information.

When you are ready to update the shipment information, click on the "ship" button from
the Inventory Transfer screen. The Inventory Transfer Ship screen will appear listing the
items you previously configured for transfer.

Figure 318 - Inventory Transfer Ship screen

You will log your shipment information here when the shipment begins. This action will
remove the specified Transfer Quantity from your Item Inventory level for the "From"
distribution center and place that inventory into the "in transit" status. Since it is "in
transit", it is not available to be shipped for a sale.

379
 Exception for Amazon Seller Central users. Since UltraCart sends
constant inventory updates to Amazon, the Estimated Arrival Date of your
Inventory Transfer (if less than 30 days) is factored in. Your items
marked as "in transit" will therefore be shown at Amazon as "available for
shipment on (date)" rather than "out-of-stock".

Enter the Carrier name, Tracking Number (if any), Ship Date (today's date is entered as
the default) and the Estimated Arrival Date. Click the "Ship" button when finished. You
will be returned to the Inventory Transfers screen showing your completed ship
information.

Figure 319 - Inventory Transfers (shipment updated)

View/Edit a Transfer

As mentioned earlier, you cannot adjust the transfer quantities at this point. If you want
to review the ship information and inventory quantities or need to change or adjust the
shipment information, click on the "View" button to the right of the transfer concerned.
The Inventory Transfer View screen will appear. Make your changes as necessary and
click the "Save button when finished". Click the "Return to inventory transfers link" to
return without saving changes.

Shipment Arrived

Click on the "arrived" button to the right of the Inventory Transfer concerned. You will
be taken to the Inventory Transfer Arrived screen.

380
Figure 320 - Inventory Transfer Arrived screen

In additional to all the basic information, this screen will show the "Actual Arrival Date"
field. The estimate arrival date will be shown as the default. Enter the actual arrival date
(if different) and click the "Arrived" button when finished.

Your listing on the Inventory Transfers screen will now be updated showing the actual
Arrival Date. Your inventory levels for the individual items concerned will now be
updated to reflect the inventory transfers.

Figure 321 - Inventory Transfers screen (with arrival date)

381
Delete an existing Inventory Transfer
In most cases you will delete a transfer record once the shipment arrives at its new
location and/or when this Inventory Transfer record has served its purpose. Click the
"delete" button to the right of the transfer concerned. CAUTION! You will not receive a
warning dialog for this action. Once deleted, it will not be recoverable.

Item Cleanup Utility

The Item Cleanup Utility will bring a defined group of records (store items) in view, one-
at-a-time, for editing/updating. This is a very useful tool in that it allows you to isolate
certain records for editing so you don't have to scroll through your entire list of store
items.

To begin the Cleanup Utility, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Item Cleanup Utility

Defining the view (items)

At the Item Cleanup Utility screen you will find 2 questions that need answering in order
to bring certain records in view for editing. They are: 1) Work on: (where do the records
reside) and 2) Select the task to complete: (all items or those without image URLS's).

Figure 322 - Item Cleanup Utility screen

Field No. 1 – Work on

Here you decide which categories (folders) you want to work within. There are two
fields (drop-down menus) that you will make selections from; Select Category and Select
Folder.
1. Select Category

382
 In this field you inform the system which Items you want to work on:
 Items in category: This will bring up only the store items that reside in the
folder you select in the next field.

 Items in or beneath category: This will bring up store items that reside in the
folder you select in the next field AND items in any folder residing below.
 Items marked for cleanup: This will bring up only the store items that you
previously Marked for Cleanup in the importing [options] process (see page
372).

2. Select Folder

In this field you will select which folder you want to work with. In the above
example, you would be presented with all store items that reside in the
Accessories AND the Tiny Accessories folders.

Field #2 - Select the task to complete

This setting allows you to either "review all items" or "review items without image
URLs" (have yet had their image URLs identified).

Click on the Radio button for either "review all items" (all store item that reside in the
folders identified will appear for editing) or "review items without image URLs" (only
store items that do not have an image URL identified will appear for editing).

Click on the "Next" button when finished.

383
Item Cleanup Utility Editor
Records (store items) will be displayed, one-at-a-time, for editing. The Path (folder
hierarchy) is shown immediately below the screen title along with the Item ID. It also
shows the record count inside the brackets.

Figure 323 - Item Cleanup Utility screen

Once you have made your changes on this screen (record), click the "Next" button. The
next record (store item) will appear for edits. Continue this process until you have made
all the changes to all the records in this batch. The following message (screen) will be
displayed upon completion.

Click the "Return to item management menu" link.

384
Price Update Tool
This is an excellent utility for easy updating of your store item prices. The Price Update
Tool displays your items in a spreadsheet fashion listing the price you have configured
for retail as-well-as any Pricing Tiers (wholesale, etc). Note: This utility will display up
to 2,000 records (items) only.

To use the Price Update Tool, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Price Update

When you click on the Price Update link, UltraCart will list all your items alphabetically.
In the example below, store items are show along with the existing Retail and one
configured pricing tier - Wholesale. The folder hierarchy is not displayed.

Figure 324 - Price Update Tool screen

Using the mouse, select the amount in the box you wish to change. Delete it and enter
your new price. Continue the same process for all the prices you wish to change
(update). Click the "Save" button at the bottom when finished.

This tool is also an easy method for setting Pricing Tier amounts. Once you've created
your pricing tier, you can use the Price Update Tool to easily set the Pricing Tier
Amounts for any or all of your items.

385
DIGITAL DELIVERY
Chapter

7. Digital Delivery
Introduction
7
This chapter is for merchants that would like to sell digital
merchandise such as MP3 files, PDF files, or software.

Digital Library

The first component of the digital delivery system is the digital library. The digital
library allows merchants to upload and manage all of the digital content to be made
available to their customers. The digital library allows digital content to be associated
with multiple products that are for sale. For example, a track to a CD may be available
on both a normal album and a greatest hits collection. By using a digital library,
merchants are able to upload the file once, link it to more than one item and thereby
conserve space and reduce cost.

To access the digital library, navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Digital Library

The Digital Library screen offers several functions and is divided into three sections;
Library List, Upload Section and Upload File Collection. Until you upload digital files,
the Library List area will be blank. Therefore the Upload Section will be discussed first.

386
Figure 325 - Digital Library (upload a new file)

Upload files

To upload a file into the library click the “Browse” button. Then navigate within your
local system to locate the file. Enter a description in the field just below the file name.
Click on the “Upload” button. The file will then appear in your list at the Digital Library
screen. Keep in mind that the upload of the file will take time depending upon the size of
the file and the upload speed of your internet connection. Also keep in mind that many
broadband connections (such as DSL or cable modems) have about 1/10 the upload speed
as compared to download. Patience is very important when uploading large files.

Figure 326 - Upload Digital Content

Upload a new file collection

If you have numerous files, you can upload a single ZIP file containing all of the items.
This prevents you from having to select and upload each file individually. You will first
need to compress (zip) your files into one collection file. Then click on the “Browse”
button (under Upload A New File Collection (ZIP)) and locate your file on the local
system. Once found, click on the “Upload” button.

387
Figure 327 - Uploading a ZIP file

After uploading a ZIP file, UltraCart will show you each file in the archive and give you
an opportunity to specify a description for each of the items.

Enter a description for each item, and press the “Submit” button to add the content to
your digital library.

Figure 328 - Upload Archive Confirmation Screen

Digital Library List

Once you have uploaded your digital content (files), they will be listed here (by
filename). The list will also show the Description that you assigned during upload and
the file Size.

There are basically four actions you can perform on your listed file(s) at this screen;
Download, Edit, Delete and set PDF Properties.

Download
This feature can be used for those that want to download and view or check the file they
have previously uploaded. Click on the Filename of the file you want to download.
Options at that point will depend largely on which browser you are using. Typically you
will be presented with a dialog box allowing you to either open or save the file.

388
Figure 329 - Digital Library screen

Edit Button
Click the “Edit” link to the right of any item to bring up the Edit Digital Item screen.

Figure 330 - Edit Digital Item screen

Replace File
To replace an existing file with a new one, click on the “Browse” button to navigate and
find the file within your system. If the file path is know you can type it in the box
provided. The replacement file name will then appear adjacent to the “File” heading.
Change Description
If you need to change the description title, simply type the new title in the box provided.
Click on the “Submit” button when finished.
389
Delete Link
Click the “Delete” Link to the right of any item to remove it from the list. Caution: this is
an undoable action and no warning dialog box will appear.

PDF Properties Button

If the file is a .PDF format the “PDF Properties” Link will be present. Clicking on this
link will bring up the PDF properties screen.

Figure 331 - PDF Properties screen

At this screen you can opt to allow the customer certain functionality with your .pdf file.
Click in the check box to the right of the function you want to allow. Click on the “Save
Changes” button when finished. The following is a short description of each function.

 Tag PDF with Order Information - Embed the customer's name, email, and order
ID in the header and footer margins of the document (all pages).
 Allow Printing - allows the user to print the document from Acrobat at their site.
 Allow Modification of Contents - allows the user to modify the document using
Adobe Software.
 Allow Copy & Paste - Allows the user to copy & paste portions of the document into
other applications like Microsoft Word.
 Allow Modification of Annotations – Allows the end user to annotate (comments)
the document using Adobe tools.
 Allow Form Fill-In - Some PDF documents have forms embedded in them.
Enabling these functions allows users to fill out the embedded forms using Adobe
software.

390
 Allow Screen Readers - Some vision impaired users have screen reading software
that reads the document aloud (through computer speakers).
 Allow Degraded Printing - Allows printing of the document at draft quality.
 Allow Assembly - Allows the end user to integrate content from the purchased PDF
file into other PDF documents.

Item Association (to digital content)

After successfully uploading your digital content, you then must associate that content to
your digital store Items (assuming you have created your store items already). To
accomplish the association navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Items

Click on the Item (ID) you wish to associate the digital content with. This will bring up
the Item Editor screen for that Item. Then click on the “Digital Delivery” tab.

Figure 332 - Digital Delivery screen

This Digital Delivery screen is divided into two sections; Files and Activation Codes.

Files
The Files section provides the ability to associate digital files with the current item.

391
The list box on the left contains all available files in your Digital Library. The box on the
right will contain all files that you will or have associated with this store item. To move
an item from the left box to the right, select the item in the left box and click on the arrow
pointing to the right box. To remove an item from the right box, select the item to be
removed and click on the arrow pointing to the left box. When you have completed your
changes, press the “Save” button to return to the item selection page.

Activation Codes

Some merchants will want to assign Activation Codes to certain digital content (usually
software). You are given three options; None, Assign from list or Retrieve real-time.

Figure 333 - Activation Codes

Make your selection by clicking on one of the three radio buttons to the left of the
options.

None
Make this selection if NO activation codes are needed. No other action is necessary.

Assign from list

Once you select this choice, the section will expand to allow you to configure your
list.

392
First enter a description that you want to appear on the receipt. Then enter your codes,
one per line (hit ‘enter’ at the end of each line). Lastly, enter the “Low Warning
Threshold”.

Retrieve real time

Check this selection if you want the customer to obtain the activation code from a
designated URL. Enter the URL in the box provided. Also enter the “Shared
Secret”

Digital Purchases

Digital purchases work slightly different than regular purchases. The first difference is
that credit card payment is required because it is the only real-time method of payment
that guarantees funds to the merchant.

The second difference that happens during checkout is the real-time authorization of the
customer’s card. The customer’s credit card is charged during checkout and an error is
shown to the customer if the card is declined. If the card authorization is successful then
the customer is given immediate access to download their content. Since the payment
has been authorized during the checkout process, the order will go directly to the
completed order section provided there is no physical content that needs to be shipped. If
there are other items in the order that require shipping then the order will go into the
shipping department.

The digital orders flow completely through the system without the intervention of the
merchant. This makes digital orders highly profitable to the merchant and highly
gratifying to the customer.

Types of Digital Content

There are many types of digital content that can be sold online. This section is intended
to give merchants ideas for products they may not have otherwise thought of.

Music Files (WAV, MP3, WMA, OGG, etc.)

Video Files (AVI, MPG, ASF, WMV, etc.)
Publications (PDF, DOC, XLS, etc)
Images (JPG, GIF, TIFF, etc.)

We encourage merchants to be creative and think of accessories in their industries that

can be offered digitally to their customers.

393
UPS WORLDSHIP INTEGRATION
Chapter

8. UPS WorldShip Integration 8

Introduction

For merchants that ship via UPS, UPS WorldShip software is the core component of their
shipping operation. This software does all of the work necessary to prepare a shipment
for UPS (including packing slip printing and tracking number assignment). This chapter
covers configuring UPS WorldShip software to accept an UltraCart import.

Preparing to Export from UltraCart

The export for UPS WorldShip is slightly different from a typical export because of the
way the UPS WorldShip software import works. First create a directory on the computer
called “c:\upsimport” from the command line or Windows Explorer.

Next log into UltraCart and go to the Shipping Department.

Main Menu  Order Management  Departments  Shipping

Set the view via the change view menu to “combined” and click the “change view”
button. All orders will be listed together and a “Select All” box will appear at the top of
the list. Click the “Select All” checkbox. Finally click the “Export UPS WorldShip”
button. The web browser will prompt to save a file called “import.csv”. Make sure the
file is saved to “c:\upsimport” as “import.csv”. UltraCart will only export orders that are
being shipped via UPS even though all the orders are selected. Follow the directions
below to configure the import map and actually import the file into the UPS WorldShip
software. After you have completed this configuration, you need only perform the final
step to import subsequent export files.

Configuring an Import Map

The UPS WorldShip software is very selective about the settings used to perform an
import. A lot of screen shots are used in this section of the manual to make sure that the
setup of an import map goes as smooth as possible. First, start the UPS WorldShip
software and select the Connection Assistant from the UPS OnLine Connect menu.

394
Figure 334 - Opening the Connection Assistant
Select “Create a new map for Import” and then click the Next button.

Figure 335 - Creating a new map

Select the “Shipment” import data type from the list of available and click Next.

395
Figure 336 - Selecting the Import Type

On the next screen, select the “By File” Data Source and then click the “Browse” button
shown in the figure below.

Figure 337 - Selecting Data Source Type

Browse to the directory that the import files will be saved in. For this example, the
directory is c:\upsimport. Change the “Files of type” option to “Text Files (*.txt; *.csv)”.
Click on the import.csv (saved from an UltraCart UPS WorldShip Export) and then click
the “Open” button.

396
Figure 338 - Browsing for import file
Enter “UltraCartImport” in the Data Source Name (DSN) field. Select “Microsoft Text
Driver (*.txt; *.csv)” from the list of ODBC drivers and click Next as shown in the figure
below.

Figure 339 - Naming the Data Source and Selecting ODBC Driver

Next, select “New Map”, name your map “UltraCartImport”, and click the Next button as
shown below.

397
Figure 340 - Naming the Import Map

The next screen provides instructions for the remainder of the mapping configuration.
Click the “Finish” button to procedure to the next part of the configuration.

Figure 341 - Instructions on preparing the Import Map

The next window that will appear on your screen is the ODBC Text Setup dialog. Just
click the “OK” button.

398
Figure 342 - ODBC Text Setup
The next screen is where all the mapping between the text file and the UPS import format
occurs. The first step is to designate “import.csv” as the “Primary Table”. Simply click
the “Primary Table” button as shown below.

Figure 343 - Specifying the Primary Table

Next, select “Ship To” from the drop down box under WorldShip Fields as shown in the
figure below.

399
Figure 344 - Selecting Ship To from the WorldShip Fields

The next step is to connect fields on the left handle column to fields on the right hand
column. Click on the field name on the left hand side and matching entry on the right
hand side then click the “Connect” button. A little red chain link will appear beside each
column name and an entry will be added to the “What You Have Mapped So Far”. After
mapping most of the Ship To fields the screen should look like the figure below.

Figure 345 - Mapping Ship To Fields

There are two other sections that must be mapped between the import file and UPS.
Click on the “Package” from the WorldShip Fields drop down as shown in the figure
below.

400
Figure 346 - Selecting Package Mapping

Map the “PackageType” and “Weight” columns as shown in the figure below.

Figure 347 - Mapping Package Fields

Finally, select “Shipping Information” from the drop down list and map “ServiceType”
and “BillingOption” as shown in the figure below.

401
Figure 348 - Mapping Shipment Information
The final step in completely the map is defining the key for the import table. Since each
Order’s ID is unique in UltraCart, this serves as the CustomerID field and the key for the
table. To define the key, select “CustomerID” from the left hand list and click the
“Define Key” button shown in the figure below. After defining the key, click the OK
button to finalize the map.

Figure 349 - Defining Key

Importing an UltraCart Shipping Export File

402
Now that an import map has been defined, an actual import can take place. From the
“UPS Online Connect” menu, select “Batch Import” as shown in the figure below.

Figure 350 - Starting Batch Import

Select the “UltraCartImport” map from the list provided and click the Next button as
shown below.

Figure 351 - Selecting the Import Map

UPS will examine the import file to determine how many records it contains and then
display a preview dialog like the one in the figure below. Click Next to actually perform
the import.

403
Figure 352 - Import Preview
After the import has completed, a summary dialog will appear like the one in the figure
below. Click Save to finish the import.

Figure 353 - Import Summary

After importing shipments, there will be entries in the “Imported Shipments” section as
shown in the figure below.

Figure 354 - Imported Shipments

404
To process the shipments, click on the “Imported Shipments” entry in the list. Next,
select “Mark Shipments” from the “Activities” menu or click F4. Finally choose
“Process Imported Shipments Manually” from the “Activities” menu as shown in the
figure below.

Figure 355 - Processing Imported Shipments Manually.

Configuring an Export Map

The next step in integrating UltraCart with UPS WorldShip is to configure an export map
so that tracking information and quickly be exported from UPS WorldShip and imported
into UltraCart. First, start the UPS WorldShip software and select the Connection
Assistant from the UPS OnLine Connect menu.

405
Figure 356 - Opening the Connection Assistant
Select “Create a new map for Export” and then click the Next button.

Figure 357 - Creating a new map

Next, choose “Shipment” as the Export Data Type and click the next button.

406
Figure 358 - Choosing the Export Data Type
On the third step, select “By File”, enter “c:\upsimport\export.csv” in the Currently
Selected File field, enter “UltraCartExport” in the DSN field, select “Microsoft Text
Driver” in the ODBC Drivers list, and click the Next button.

Figure 359 - Configuring Data Source

On the next screen, select New Map, enter “UltraCartExport” in the New Map Name
field, and click the Next button.

407
Figure 360 - Naming Export Map

On the next screen, simply click the “Finish” button. This will cause an “ODBC Text
Setup” dialog to appear like the one in the figure below. Simply click the OK button on
this dialog.

Figure 361 - Configuring ODBC Text Setup

The next step is to configure the columns that UPS will export into the text file. First
click on the “Package” tab, click the “Tracking Number” field in the left hand list, and
then click the “Add” button. At this point your screen should look like the figure below.

408
Figure 362 - Adding first column to export
After adding the tracking number, the next step is to add information about the ship to
address. Click on the “Ship To” tab and then click the “Add All Columns” button. At
this point your screen should look like the figure below.

Figure 363 - Adding Ship To Columns to Export

The final step in the configuration of the export file contents is to select “Overwrite
existing file” and “Include header row”. The header row is very important because it
allows UltraCart to determine the meaning of each column in the export file. After
selecting the two options, click the OK button.

409
Figure 364 - Export Header Option

At this point, the export map is complete. The next section details exporting information
using the newly created map.

Importing a UPS WorldShip Export File

Now that an export map has been defined, an actual export can take place from UPS
WorldShip. From the UPS OnLine Connect menu, select “Batch Export”

410
Figure 365 - Starting a Batch Export

Select the appropriate data range to export data from. Don’t worry if too much data is
exported from UPS because UltraCart will only match it to the orders that are currently in
the shipping department.

Figure 366 - Choose Export Map and Data Range

411
The next screen will just be a confirmation of the number of records that will be
exported. Click the Next button to continue with the export. After the export is
performed a confirmation dialog like the one shown below will appear. The export file
c:\upsimport\export.csv has been created at this point.

Figure 367 - Successful Export

Now, log into UltraCart and navigate to the shipping department.

Main Menu  Order Processing  Shipping Department

Click on the “Import UPS WorldShip” button located at the top of the screen. The next
screen will allow you to browse to the export file on your local hard drive and upload it.
Click the browse button, locate the file “c:\upsimport\export.csv” and then click the
upload button. The final screen in the import process will display the matches between
each UPS WorldShip export record and orders in the UltraCart Shipping Department.
Verify that each match is correct. If there is a mismatch, check the “Incorrect Match”
box and process that order manually. If the customer should not be notified of the
shipment then check the “Skip Customer Notification” box. Once the Submit button is
pressed, all the orders that were matched correctly will be marked as shipped and
customer notifications will be sent.

412
E-MAIL MARKETING
Chapter

9. Marketing 9
Introduction

UltraCart includes a powerful marketing system designed to allow merchants to easily

and quickly create a variety of marketing campaigns to target your customer base. Using
the marketing system, a merchant can deliver customer newsletters, create custom
coupons, send new product announcements, post sale (e-mail) follow-up messages, and
more.

The UltraCart Email Marketing engine allows merchants to easily create complex
targeted email campaigns to their customers. The basic steps are:
1. Create your Coupons
2. Create your email list(s).
3. Create a signup (html) page for individuals to automatically subscribe and
unsubscribe from a specified email list (if desired).
4. Create your campaign (build email content and format) and send (activate) to one
or more of the lists your have created.
Once a campaign has been activated, you can monitor its status and statistical data via
Coupon Usage and Email Campaign reports (Main Menu  Reporting).

To begin, log in to UltraCart and navigate to the Marketing department.

Main Menu  Marketing

The Marketing screen is divided into 2 sections; Marketing and 3rd Party Marketing.

Figure 368 - Marketing Menu

413
Marketing
Although the Marketing screen shows the six sections listed alphabetically, this manual
will cover them in the following order: Coupons, Email Lists, Campaigns, Gift
Certificates, Return Email and Exit Pop.

Coupons
Coupons allow merchants to offer discounts on various items or costs related to an order.
Once you have created your coupon, merchants can display the coupon code on their web
site (usually near the Buy Now button) that invites the customer to enter the code during
the purchase process (at checkout). You can also generate Campaigns within UltraCart
(covered later) which will generate random coupon codes so they can be used only by a
single Email recipient (once).

A summary of available coupon types appears in the table below:

Coupon Description – “Allows a merchant to:”

Amount off subtotal
Amt off subtotal & free shipping
w/certain size purchase
Amt off subtotal w/purchase of
item block
Amount off subtotal with
purchase of items
Percentage off subtotal
Percentage off subtotal (limited)
Percentage off subtotal and free
shipping method
Percentage off subtotal with a
certain size purchase
Amount off shipping method
Percent off shipping method
Free shipping method
Free shipping method with
subtotal
Amount off item(s) (with
optional limit on quantity)
Tiered amt off an item (with
optional limit on quantity)
Tiered percent off subtotal
Tiered dollar off subtotal
Percent off item(s) (with optional
limit on quantity)
Percent off item(s) with purchase
of item(s) (with optional limit on
quantity)
Percent off item(s) with purchase
of certain number of item(s)
(with optional limit on quantity)
Free item with purchase of
another item (with optional limit
on quantity)
discount a specific amount off the cart’s subtotal.
a specific amount off the cart’s subtotal and free shipping (specified
method) with certain size purchase.
a specific amount off the cart’s subtotal for each block (qty) of a
certain item.
a specific amount off the cart’s subtotal for purchase of specified qty of
specified items.
discount a specific percentage off the cart’s subtotal.
discount a specific percentage off first (specified amount) of subtotal
discount a specific percentage off the cart’s subtotal and offer free
shipping for a specified shipping method.
discount a specific percentage off the cart’s subtotal with a purchase of
a minimum dollar amount.
discount a specific amount off a specific shipping method.
discount a specific percentage off a specific shipping method.
offer free (specified) shipping method.
offer free (specified) shipping method with minimum subtotal.
offer specific amount off specified items, with an optional limit on
purchase quantity.
offer tiered discount off specified item and quantity, with an optional
limit on purchase quantity.
offer tiered percent off subtotal towards an optional specified set of
items. Otherwise, all items qualify for the discount.
offer tiered amount off subtotal towards an optional specified set of
items. Otherwise, all items qualify for the discount.
offer specific percentage off particular item(s), with an optional limit
on purchase quantity.
offer specific percentage off when specific item(s) are purchased, with
an optional limit on purchase quantity.
offer specific percentage off when specified number of specific item(s)
are purchased, with an optional limit on purchase quantity.
offer specified free item(s) when specific item(s) are purchased, with
an optional limit on purchase quantity.

414
Free item with purchase of
subtotal (with optional limit on
quantity)
[Qty] free of item with every
[Qty] purchase of another item
(with optional limit on free
quantity)
[Qty] free of item with every
[Qty] purchase of another mix
and match group item (with
optional limit on free quantity)
No Discount
Table 1 - Coupon Types
offer specified free item(s) with minimum purchase subtotal with an
optional limit on purchase quantity.
offer a specified quantity of a specified item free, with a purchase of a
specified quantity of a specified item, with an optional limit on
purchase quantity.
offer a specified quantity of a specified item free, with a purchase of a
specified quantity of a specified mix and match group, with an optional
limit on purchase quantity.
only prints coupon description on order

To access the Coupon creation screen, navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Coupons

Figure 369 - Coupon Management Screen

If you have no coupons created, you will see the “No coupons are defined…” message.
If you have coupons already defined, they will be listed here.

Creating new coupons

To create a new coupon, click on the “New Coupon” button. You will then be presented
with the coupon type selection screen. Please refer to the previous Table for a brief
description of the various coupon types.

415
Figure 370 - Coupon selection list

Select the desired coupon type by clicking on the radio button to the left of the item and
then click the “Next” button to begin the coupon creation process. Each coupon shares
some common fields, which are described below.

Figure 371 - Sample Coupon Creation Screen

416
The following chart described the first five fields that you need to complete to create any
coupon.

Code This will be the “name” of the coupon, and in the case of generic
coupons, will be what the customer enters to apply the coupon to their
cart.
Description A brief description of the coupon (for merchant use).
Expiration If you want the coupon to expire on a certain date, enter it here.
Otherwise, you may leave this field blank.
Useable by Three options selectable by radio button (choose one).
Anyone (If you are planning to include the coupon in an e-mail
marketing campaign, you should not check this box.)
People that receive unique code from email campaign (The e-mail
marketing engine will generate a unique version of the coupon (code)
for each email recipient for a one-time usage.
Each person only once (based upon ship to address)
Valid with Two options selectable by radio button (choose one).
other coupons
Yes No (defaults to no)

Each coupon type also includes custom fields applicable to only that coupon, as described
at the beginning of the Marketing section.

Click on the “Save” button when finished creating your coupon. You will be returned to
the Coupons screen where the newly created and any existing coupons will be listed.

Figure 372 – Coupons screen (populated)

The coupons screen will list the coupon code, description, expiration date (if any) and
details of each coupon. Five buttons will be presented with each coupon; Edit, Copy,
One Time Code(s), Usage Report and Delete.

417
Editing an existing coupon

To edit an existing coupon, click on the "edit" button to the right of the coupon you want
to change. You will be taken to the Coupon editing screen. Any of the coupon fields can
be edited. However, if you change the Coupon CODE field, all previously issued
coupons under the original coupon code will no longer be valid. Click on the “Save”
button after making your changes.

Copy an existing coupon

To duplicate (copy) a coupon, check the box next to the coupon’s code and click on the
“Copy” button. When the duplicate appears in the list, you can then make changes as
desired.

One Time Codes

This feature is ideal for those merchants that want to disseminate coupon codes via their
own devices; newsletter, merchandise show, their own email campaign, etc. When
utilized, this routine will create a specified number (up to 1000) of unique, one-time
usage codes for distribution to customers. Once you click the
"one time code(s)" button, an additional Qty field will appear.
Enter the number of codes you need and click the "go" button.

Your coupon list will appear on the next screen in a scrollable window. Using your
mouse pointer, drag and select (highlight) the list. Then copy and paste the list into a
separate document and save. You will not be able to access this list from the UC
Marketing section later so be sure to save it on your system for later reference.

Figure 373 - One Time Coupon List screen

Note: The original coupon code that you used when creating the coupon will also
provide the discount in addition to the One Time Coupon codes created by UltraCart.

Usage Report
This is an excellent way to obtain data about the customer usage of any particular
coupon. Click on the "usage report" button to the right of the coupon desired. The
following screen will appear:

418
Figure 374 - Coupon Usage Report

Deleting an existing coupon

To delete a coupon, click the red "delete" button to the right of the coupon you want to
remove. Caution! There will be no warning dialog presented. This action is permanent.

 If you delete a coupon code that was used in an e-mail marketing campaign, all of
the custom coupon codes created that reference this coupon will no longer
function.

419
Email Lists
Before creating an email marketing campaign, you need to create an email list. UltraCart
supports 3 types of e-mail lists; Rules Based, Manual Entry and Imported. They are
described as follows:

Rules UltraCart creates an email list from your existing customer files (orders)
Based based on a set of rules (pre-determined by the merchant).
Manual Merchant manual types or “copy & pastes” an existing list of email
Entry addresses. Manual Entry lists can accept web based signups as
described in the Signup Wizard section.
Imported Import a Comma-Delimited File (.csv) into UltraCart. Imported lists
can accept web based signups as described in the Signup Wizard
section.

Rules Based List

The Rules Based List is derived from your UltraCart customer file (orders). This list
becomes active when you assign it to an email campaign. UltraCart will search through
your customers and build the list based on the “rules” that you define. It basically
“filters” your customer data base so you can send email campaigns to targeted
individuals. The Rules Based list automatically updates whenever you run an email
campaign so your new customers, as well as past customers, will be included (if they
meet the rule criteria).

Rules Descriptions
UltraCart supports a variety of rule types, which are briefly described below.

Choice Specifies that the list should only include customers...

Customers that have not who have not purchased the specified item(s).
purchased item(s)
Customers that have purchased who have purchased the specified item(s) in a specified
item(s) (optional) qty.
Customers that have not who have not made any purchase in the time specified.
purchased within a certain time
period
Customers that have purchased who have made any purchase within the specified time
within a certain time period period.
Customers that have purchased who have made a purchase whose order total was
more than a certain amount higher than the amount specified.
Customers that have purchased who have made a purchase whose order total was lower
less than a certain amount than the amount specified.
Customers located in a certain located within the specified geographic area
geographic area (Country/State).
Customers not located in a not located within the specified geographic area
certain geographic area (Country/State)..

420
Customers located within a
certain distance of...
Customers without access to
pricing tier(s).
Customers who have not
received marketing e-mail
within a certain time period.
located within a certain distance (miles) of specific
Postal Code(s).
who do not have access to a specified pricing tier(s).
who have not received marketing e-mail within a
specified number of days.

You can combine rules to create sophisticated e-mail campaigns. For example, by
combining the “Customers that have purchased within a certain time period” with the
“Customers that have purchased more than a certain amount”, you can create a custom e-
mail campaign that provides an incentive to your best customers to make another
purchase.

Note: In order for a customer to be included in a rules-based list, the customer must
match ALL specified rules.

Manual Entry List

The Manual Entry List is a basic list of email addresses without any rules. This list is
constructed by manually entering the email addresses either by typing or “copy and
paste” from another document. You can also edit this list at any time.

Each email address must be listed on a separate line. Some merchants create their list in
a word processing or spreadsheet file on their system. That makes for easy searching,
editing, etc.

Imported Email List

Imported e-mail lists allow you to upload an existing, comma delimited file (.csv). This
email list differs from the Manual Entry list in that it allows 2 new fields to each record in
addition to the email address field. They are; First Name and Last Name (or full name).
Although the “name” fields are not visible when you later view your list, they will
become part of the record and can be “merged” into the body of your email text
(explained later).

Creating a New Email List

You can locate the Email Lists screen by navigating to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Email Lists

If you have no email lists created, you will be greeted with the familiar “No lists are
defined…” screen. You will also see an “Opt Out E-Mail Address” search field which
will be explained later in this chapter.

421
Figure 375 – Email Lists Screen

To create a new Email list, click on the “New List” button. In the next screen you will
then be asked to specify a list type. Click on the radio button to the left of the list type
and click on the “Next” button.

Figure 376 - List type selection screen

Create Rules Based List

To create a new rules-based list, click the radio button to the left of “Rules based”. Then
click on the “Next” button. The following screen will appear.

422
Figure 377 - Rules Based List Creation Screen

Each Email List must have a name. Enter a name for this list in the box to the right of
“Name”. You will need to locate this list (to edit or delete) later so make this something
meaningful to you.

The next step is to define a Rule (or Rules). If you target an email campaign to a Rules
Based List without any rules defined, all existing customers will be part of the email list.

To define a rule, click on the “New Rule” button. The New Rule screen will appear.

Figure 378 – New Rule Screen

The first four rule types have similar choices. Make certain you have selected the correct
one. Click on the radio button to the left of the rule you wish to apply. You can only pick

423
one rule at a time but can add more rules later (via edit). Click on the “Next” button when
finished. The Rule Edit screen will appear.

Figure 379 - Rule Edit Screen

The sample above is an Item Based rule that applies to "Customers that have purchased"
a particular item. In the following we will discuss the different types of rules.

Item Based Rule

There are two possible rules; “items purchased” or “items NOT purchased”.
In the box provided enter the Item ID of the item to be checked by this rule. If you wish
to enter multiple Item IDs, simply place each Item ID on a new line. Make certain you
enter the exact Item ID.

Additionally you can select the comparison operator and a quantity to be tested.
Click the “Submit” button when you have finished.

Temporal Based Rule

Shown in the figure below is the screen for temporal-based rule creation. There are two
possible rules; have not purchased or have purchased with a specified time period.

Figure 380 - Temporal-based rule screen

424
In this screen, simply enter the number of days to which the rule should apply. Once you
have entered the desired value, click on the “Submit” button to save the changes to the
rule.

Order Amount Based Rule

The following depicts the screen for order amount-based rule creation. There are two
possible rules; “purchased MORE THAN” or “purchased LESS THAN”.

Figure 381 - Order amount-based rule screen

In this screen, enter the desired amount to trigger the rule. Please note that this rule
checks against order total, inclusive of all shipping & tax. After you have entered the
desired amount, press the “Submit” button to save the changes to the rule.

Geographic Based Rule

Shown below is the screen for geographic-based rule creation. There are two possible
rules; “”located in” or “NOT located in”.

Figure 382 - Geographic-based rule screen

425
To specify a matching region, select the country from the drop-down, and optionally
enter a state code. You may specify as many locations as you wish, and customers who
are located in any of the specified locations will match the rule. If you need more entry
spaces, click on the Add More button. When you have completed entering the desired
locale information, click on the Submit button to save the changes to the rule.

Note: the following 3 rules have only a single description.

Mileage Based Rule

The following is the screen for the mileage-based rule creation.

Figure 383 - Mileage Based Rule

Enter the distance in miles and the Postal Code in the fields provided. If more than five
postal codes are needed, five additional will be added each time you click the “Add
More” button.

Only the customer located “within” the mileage specified to the Postal Code(s) you enter
will be added to your mailing list. Click the “Save” button when finished.

Pricing Tier Based Rule

This is only applicable for merchants that have created pricing tiers. It allows you to
target your email campaign to non-pricing tier customers. The following depicts the
screen for pricing tier-based rule creation.

426
Figure 384 - Pricing Tier Based Rule

Your established pricing tiers will be listed on this screen. Select the pricing tier(s) you
want to trigger this rule. Once you’ve selected a pricing tier from this list, any customer
(profile) that you approved (qualified) for this pricing tier WILL NOT be on this mailing
list. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Marketing Email Based Rule

The following screen is for marketing email-based rule creation.

Figure 385 - Marketing E-Mail Based Rule

Enter the number of days in the box provided. Customer that HAVE NOT received
marketing e-mails within the number of days you entered WILL be on this email list.

Creating Additional Rules

Once you have successfully created your first rule for the Rule Based Email List, it will
be listed on the Rules Based Email List screen. You can create more than one rule for
your Rule Based List but each rule must be created separately.

To create an additional rule, click on the “New Rule” button. Follow the same
instructions for creating your first rule. Click the “Save” button when finished. Repeat
this process until all rules have been created. They will be listed on the Rules Based
Email List screen.

The following screen shows the Rules Base List with two (2) rules applied.

427
Figure 386 - Rules Based screen (with 2 rules)

Edit a Rule
You cannot change the “type” of an existing rule. To do so, you must delete the rule and
create a new, different type, rule.

To edit a rule description, click on the “Edit” button to the right of the Rule you wish to
change. You will be taken to the Rule Edit screen. Click on the “Save” button when
finished with your changes.

Delete a Rule
Click on the “Delete” button to the right of the rule you wish to delete. Caution! This
delete is NOT undoable. You will not be prompted with a confirmation dialog! Only
click the “Delete” button if you are certain you want to delete the rule.

Create Manual Entry List

To create a new Manual-entry list, navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Email Lists

The following screen shows the Email Lists screen. This example shows our Item Based
Rule List we’ve already created.

428
Figure 387 - Email List Screen

At the Email List screen, click on the “New List” button to create a new list. The
following screen will be shown where you will select the type of list.

Figure 388 - New Email List screen

To create a Manual Entry List, click the radio button to the left of “Manual entry”. Then
click on the “Next” button. The following screen will appear.

429
Figure 389 - Manual List creation

First, enter the name of the new list in the “List Name” field. Next, manually type or
“copy & paste” the desired e-mail addresses into the text box. Enter only the Email
Address. Any additional text following an email address will be removed along with all
subsequent entries. Be sure to place each address on a new line. When you have
completed entering all of the desired e-mail addresses, press the “Submit” button.

Once you have submitted your list, it will be listed on the Email Lists Screen.

Figure 390 - Email Listing with Manual List

430
Create an Imported E-mail list

The Create Import Email List is considerably different than the other Email creation
routines. This list allows you to include (in your import) two additional fields.

To create an Imported E-mail list navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Email Lists

The following screen will appear. Notice that we now have two previously created Email
Lists; a Manual list and a Rule Based list.

Figure 391 - Email Lists Screen

To create a new list, click on the “New List” button. The following screen will appear.

Figure 392 – New Import Email List screen

431
To create an Import Email List, click on the radio button next to “Imported”. Then click
on the “Next” button. The Import screen will appear.

Figure 393 – Import Upload screen

The import function will only import a .csv (comma separated values) file. In order to
prevent abuse of the e-mail marketing system, each imported list has a system imposed
limit. This limit is displayed on the import CSV file screen. If you would like to increase
your limit, contact customer support at support@ultracart.com.

To transfer a CSV file for import, click on the “Browse” button to the right of the File
field. You will then be shown a system file dialog box. Navigate to the desired CSV file
that resides on your system, select the file, and click “OK”. The filename will then be
shown in the File field box.

If you want to “overwrite” an existing import file, place a check in the box to the left of
the word “Overwrite”. If you want to add (append) the new list to the original, leave the
box unchecked.

Click on the “Upload” button to continue. Please note that this may take a few minutes,
depending on the speed of your internet connection and the size of the file.

When the file has been transferred, you will be taken to the “Identify Columns” screen.
Here you will match the columns of your file with the columns in UltraCart (field
matching).

432
Figure 394 - Column Identification Screen

On the column identification screen, you will first need to specify a list name in the
Email List Name field. Next, you will need to tell UltraCart which columns match up to
the desired import information. In the above example, the first name is in column 1, the
last name in column 2, and the e-mail address in column 3. Select the appropriate
column identifiers and click the “Submit” button to save the imported addresses.

Figure 395 - Completed Column Identification Screen

433
Managing Email List
To manage your existing Email List(s), navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Email Lists

At the Email Lists screen, your email lists will be sorted alphabetically by name. The
following functions can be performed via the click on any of four different buttons that
appear to the right of the List Name. They are Edit, Signup Wizard, View/Export and
Delete. The Signup Wizard and View/Export are not available functions for Rule Based
Lists.

Figure 396 – Completed Email Lists

Delete Email List

Click on the “Delete” button to the far right of the list you want to delete. You will be
prompted with a “are you sure you want to delete this list?” dialog box. Click the “OK”
button to proceed with the deletion. Click the “Cancel” button to return to the List
Screen without deleting the list.

Edit Email List

Given that there are three different types of Email lists, the editing method will differ for
each as explained below.

434
Edit Imported Email List
You cannot make changes to the information contained in this type list directly through
this interface. You can, however, import an updated list and have the new list
“overwrite” (replace) or “append” (add to) the existing list.

When your click on the “Edit” button to the right of any “imported” type list, you will
be returned to the “Import Email List” screen. Click on the “Browse…” button to
navigate and locate your new file. Click on the check box if you want to “overwrite”
(erase) the existing file with the new one. If you leave the check box blank, the new file
will “append” (be added) to the existing one. Click on the “Upload” button when
finished.

The “Identify Columns” screen will appear. Select the appropriate column names from
the drop down lists. If the first row of your file consists of the column names, click on
the check box “First line is column headers”. This will insure that the column names will
not be included in the file. Click on the “Submit” button.

Edit Manual Email List

The manual email list can indeed be manually edited. You can change the name of the
list and/or edit the email addresses.

Click on the “Edit” button to the right of the Manual Email list you want to edit. The
“Manual Edit” screen will appear. You can add or delete addresses as desired. Typical
word processing functions are enabled such as; selecting (highlighting) text with mouse
clicks or drags, copy and paste, etc. Click on the “Submit” button at the bottom of the
screen to save your edits.

Edit Rule Based List

Click on the “Edit” button to the right of the Rules Based Email list you want to edit.
You will be taken to the Rules Based Email List screen.

You can change the name of the list simply by deleting the text in the name box and
retyping. Adding new rules, editing existing rules or deleting rules is explained in the
section “Rules Based Email List” earlier in this chapter.

View/Export Email List

This feature is available for the Imported and Manual Lists types only. Click on the
“View/Export” button to the right of the list you wish to view. The view/Export List
window will appear with your email list displayed.

435
Figure 397 - View/Export List screen

Click on the “Click here to export this list in .CSV format” link. A dialog box should
appear allowing you to save the .csv file to your system. This window will differ from
PC to PC depending on the operating system you are using. Most Windows XP system
will look something like the following.

In the above scenario you can chose to open the file with a particular application or “save
to disk”. Most merchants chose to save to disk.

436
Signup Wizard

The signup wizard allows you to create a custom HTML fragment that, when placed on
your internet pages, will allow shoppers/customers to automatically Subscribe and
Unsubscribe from the list specified.

 Only imported and manual list types support the Signup wizard. If you do not
have any existing customers for the list, create an empty manual list.

To begin the Signup Wizard, click on the “Signup Wizard” button to the right of the E-
Mail list desired.

The first step in creating the Signup HTML fragment is to specify the URL of the page
the user will be sent to after they subscribe or unsubscribe from the list.

Figure 398 - Subscribe / Unsubscribe URL screen

Please be sure to include the full internet address of the page location as relative locations
sometimes work incorrectly in redirects. For example, if your website is located at
http://www.sample.com/, enter http://www.sample.com/subscribe.html instead of
/subscribe.html and http://www.sample.com/unsubsribe.html. When you have
entered the desired URL entries, click on the “Next” button.

437
Figure 399 - Signup Wizard HTML

You will now be taken to the final screen of the Signup Wizard. In the text box is the
HTML fragment needed to place the signup form on your page. Merchants using an
HTML editor should be able to simply copy & paste the text into the source view of the
editor. Once you have posted the new page with this new HTML fragment, your
customers will be able to subscribe & unsubscribe from the specified list.

The generated HTML includes such design elements as style sheets, and introductory
copy. You may remove and customize these elements as you wish, as long as you leave
the necessary form fields in place.

Opt Out E-Mail Address

The Opt Out E-Mail Address feature allows you to enter a known email address to
unsubscribe a user from an email list.

438
Figure 400 – Opt Out Email Address field

Enter the exact email address into the box below “Opt Out E-Mail Address”. Then click
on the “Opt Out” button.

Note: All email addresses that are created in all of your lists will be permanently maintained in an UltraCart
file even if you delete a list from your Email Lists screen. They are maintained because customers may use
the Signup Wizard to “unsubscribe” from a list at a later date.

439
Campaigns

An e-mail campaign allows you to send a message to one or more email list you have
created. You may optionally include previously created coupons in the email. Once a
campaign has been created and activated, you can monitor its status, view information
regarding opens and clicks, as well as view other statistical data regarding the campaign.

Main Menu  Marketing  Campaigns

At the first screen you will be greeted with UltraCart's Marketing Agreement. Before
you create an Email Campaign you must read and agree (accept) the terms and
conditions. The terms and agreement section is a scrollable window. Scroll down to
view the entire agreement. Click the "I Accept" button if you agree.

Once you've accepted the agreement, you'll be taken to the Campaign screen where you'll
see the familiar "No campaigns are defined" message.

Figure 401 - Campaigns Screen

440
Creating a new campaign

To create a new campaign, click on the New Campaign button. You will then be taken
to the first screen of the campaign wizard.

Figure 402 - Campaign Wizard Step 1

First, you should enter a name for the campaign in the Campaign Name field. Next,
select the lists you want to target with this campaign by clicking on the list name in the
left box (Available Lists), then pressing the green arrow to move it to the right box
(Targeted Lists). You may select as many lists to target as you wish, though you must
select at least one list to target. The system will automatically remove any duplicate
addresses that appear in multiple lists.

When you have selected the lists you wish to target, press the Continue button. You will
then be shown step 2 of the campaign wizard.

441
Figure 403 - Campaign Wizard Step 2

Step 2 allows you to specify the e-mail format. UltraCart supports 3 distinct types of e-
mail message formats, described below

Text Only A text only e-mail is the most universal e-mail format. In this
format, your message is sent without graphics, colors, or HTML
styles.
HTML Only An HTML only e-mail allows you to compose e-mail messages
with rich content, including images, colors, and fonts. Some older
e-mail programs do not support HTML mail, and may not properly
render this format
Combined Format Combined format e-mail allows you to send both a text version and
an HTML version of your message in a single e-mail. E-Mail
programs that support HTML mail will show the HTML version,
while e-mail programs that do not support HTML mail will display
the text version. This is the most accessible format, but requires that
you create both an HTML and a plain text version of your message
Table 2 - E-Mail Message Formats

Click on the radio button next to the message format you wish to send, and press the
Continue button. You will then be taken to step 3 of the campaign wizard.

The 3rd step (screen) will be customized to the type of e-mail message you have selected.

442
Figure 404 - Campaign Wizard Step 3 - Text Only

The above Figure shows step 3 for text only messages. First, you will need to enter a
subject for your e-mail message. It is recommended that you keep your subject 72
characters or less. Next, enter the desired body text for your e-mail message. Enter the
message just as you would in a word processor, only pressing Enter at the end of each
paragraph. It is recommended that you include each internet link on its own line, as some
e-mail clients will not properly process links that are surrounded by text. When you are
satisfied with your message, press the Continue button to proceed to step 4.

Figure 405 - Campaign Wizard Step 3 - HTML Only

Above shows step 3 for HTML only messages. First, you will need to enter a subject for
your e-mail message. It is recommended that you keep your subject 72 characters or less.
Next, you will need to enter the full URL of the page you wish to send as your e-mail
message. Be sure to include the “http://” part of the address as well.

443
  E-Mail clients will often refuse to show e-mail messages that contain plug-ins or
JavaScript. Therefore, UltraCart will remove these elements from your message
automatically.

Figure 406 - Campaign Wizard Step 3 - Combined Format

The figure above shows step 3 for combined format messages. Please refer to the
previous sections for instructions on how to properly complete this form. When you have
completed the form, press Continue to proceed to Step 4.

Step 4 allows you to preview your message content, and if you have included a coupon in
your messages, allows you to select them as well. The step 4 screen will be customized
to reflect the e-mail message type. The following Figure shows a sample step 4 page for
a combined format e-mail message.

444
Figure 407 - Campaign Wizard Step 4 Sample

As you see, UltraCart replaces each instance of [COUPON] with a drop-down list of the
coupons you have configured. Select the desired coupon in each drop-down, and press
Continue to proceed. If you would like to make any changes, press the Back button on
your browser, make the necessary corrections, and press Continue. If your e-mail
messages do not include a coupon, simply press Continue after you have completed
previewing your message.

 If a coupon is created with the Generic flag unchecked, UltraCart will create a
unique coupon code for each e-mail that corresponds to the code selected. This
prevents coupon abuse by creating one-time-use versions of each coupon selected.

If you wish to further personalize the e-mails you send, you may include the recipient’s
name by entering [NAME] in the text or HTML where you would like their name to
appear. It is only recommended you utilize the Name field on rules based lists or
imported lists, as you may not have every proper name in other lists types.

445
The following figure shows the screen for step 5. In this step, you can enter up to 5 e-
mail addresses you wish to receive copies of the campaign message as a test. This allows
you to see what the message will look like in an e-mail client, as well as verify that all
links work, etc.

Figure 408 - Campaign Wizard Step 5

To enter multiple e-mail addresses, simply separate each address with a space. Be sure to
specify the full e-mail address in “user@domain.com” format. When you have entered
all of the desired recipient e-mail addresses, press Continue to send the test messages
and complete the creation of your new campaign. If you do not wish to send test
messages, simply leave the field blank and press Continue.

Figure 409 - Campaign Wizard Complete Screen

Once your test messages have been sent, you will be shown the wizard completion
screen. Your campaign has now been created but is in the "suspended" state. Please visit
the campaign manager, check the settings of your campaign, and press the Resume
button to start your campaign. Campaigns may take as long as 1 hour to process before
being sent.

Figure 410 - Campaign Manager with sample campaign

The wizard creates each campaign with a set of default settings. To view and modify
those settings, click on the Settings button next to the campaign you wish to view.

446
Figure 411 - Campaign Settings Screen
The campaign settings screen allows you to modify a variety of properties relating to the
campaign. These properties are described in the table below.

Start Date If this field is populated, the specified campaign will not begin
running until the date specified. If you want the campaign to start
immediately, leave this field blank.
Stop Date If this field is populated, the specified campaign will end on the date
specified. If you want the campaign to run continuously, leave this
field blank.
Messages per run This field allows you to specify the maximum number of messages to
send each time the campaign is run. This allows you to better
manage your throughput for special offers that may increase staff
workloads. If you do not want to specify a limit, leave this field
blank.
Messages per This field allows you to specify the maximum number of messages to
campaign be sent for this campaign. This allows you to better budget your
marketing expenses by insuring that you will not exceed a preset
number of e-mail messages.
Run Frequency This field allows you to specify how often the campaign will run. By
default, each campaign will only run one time.
Reset if customer By default, a customer will only receive one message per campaign.
purchases Checking this field allows you to specify that a customer is eligible to
receive another e-mail from this campaign in the event that they make
a purchase.
Table 3 - Campaign Settings

When you have completed your adjustments to your campaign settings, click on the
"Submit" button to save your changes.

Campaign Report

The campaign report screen allows you to view the statistics of a particular campaign. To
view the report for a campaign, press the Report button next to the campaign name you
wish to view.

447
Figure 412 - Detailed Campaign Activity Report
The Detailed Campaign Activity Report allows you to view a variety of statistics
regarding your campaign.

 Only HTML or combination format messages will report message opens. If you
create a text only message, message opens will only be registered when links are
clicked on by recipients. This may result in deceptively low message open
counts.

Deleting a campaign

To delete a campaign, press the Delete button next to the name of the campaign you wish
you delete.

448
Gift Certificates

UltraCart’s Gift Certificate function provides merchants with two methods of creating
and selling gift certificates. The 1st and most typical method is to create a Gift Certificate
store item to sell on your Web Site. Many shoppers will use this feature for gift giving
and is an excellent method to increase sales.

The 2nd method is to simply create a Gift Certificate "on the fly" from within the
Marketing Menu to give to individuals in person. This will be used mostly at trade
shows, exhibits, Expos, etc.

Regardless of the method for creating your gift certificate(s), it's important to know that
you are basically creating random codes that customers will enter during checkout. There
is no physical certificate created. If you want to issue a physical Gift Card showing the
certificate code to be used during checkout, it's up to the merchant to create it.

Creating a store item Gift Certificate

The first step is to create a store item called “Gift Certificate”. You can use any name for
this item but Gift Certificate seems most appropriate. Navigate to:

Main Menu  Item Management  Items

Click on the “New Item” link at the top of the screen. This will bring up the familiar
Item Editor. Enter the Item ID (in this case we use Gift Certificate). Some merchants
may offer more than one certificate. Insure that the Item ID is unique for each certificate.

There are typically only 6 fields of major concern when creating your Gift Certificate
Item. They are: Item ID, Description, Cost, Weight, Minimum Quantity, Gift Certificate,
and Expiration. See Chapter 6, page 262, for more information on the Item Editor and
creating items. The following is a sample Gift Certificate as it appears in the Item Editor.

Figure 413 - Certificate Item Creation

449
The most important of these fields is the Cost field. This is where you determine and set
the value of the Gift Certificate. For example, if you are selling a Gift Certificate on your
store for $50.00, you simply enter 50.00 into the cost field for the Gift Certificate store
item. The Weight field is only necessary where a merchant wants to send an actual Gift
Certificate upon purchase. Specifying at least .25 lb. will cause the “shipping address” to
be a required field at checkout which will insure that you obtain an address to deliver the
certificate to.

Gift Certificate Value Options

You can also configure your Gift Certificate to allow the customer to select the amount
(value) of the Gift Certificate at Checkout. You can configure this option to be a free
form text where the customer can enter the amount or a Drop down listing of the amounts
you want to specify. To configure Item Options, See Chapter 6 - Item Management, for
more information on Item Editor and creating items.

Creating an on demand Gift Certificate

Often times merchants present their goods at trade shows, exhibits, etc. This is an ideal
place to provide customers with gift certificates. Hence, UltraCart provides a method to
create "on demand" gift certificates. To begin, navigate to the Gift Certificate screen:

Main Menu  Marketing  Gift Certificates

At this screen you basically will be creating a Gift Certificate code to give to the
customer to use when they purchase your product. Some Merchants create pre-printed
cards to write the code on before presenting them to the prospective customer.

Any existing give certificate, either store item or on demand, will be listed on this screen.
If there are no gifts certificates, you will be presented with the familiar "no gift
certificates exist" notice. To create a gift certificate, click the "New" button. The New
Gift Certificate screen will appear.

There are only 3 fields to complete to create an On Demand Certificate; Amount,

Quantity, and Expiration date.

Certificate Amount
Enter the full amount for the value you want the certificate to be (format = 00.00).
450
Quantity
Here you enter the number of Gift Certificate
(codes) you want generated at this amount.

Certificate Expiration
Some merchants want to limit the period the
customer can use the certificate (code). If so,
enter the date you want it to expire in the text
box.

Click the "Create" button when finished. The

following screen will appear.

Figure 414 - New Gift Certificate (codes)

The New Gift Certificate screen shows the randomly generated codes in the exact
quantity you specified. Although you can view and manage the certificates later within
UltraCart, you should consider copying this list into a separate document so you can
easily keep track of those you have issued to customers.

Gift Certificates Code

Once a customer purchases a Gift Certificate from your store, a record of such will be
created in UltraCart with a randomly generated code attached. This code will be
displayed in the receipt that is sent to the customer. Whenever the customer makes
future purchases from your store, they can enter this code at checkout to have the amount
applied and deducted. If the certificate doesn’t cover the full cost of their purchase(s),
the balance due” will be displayed. The customer would then finalize their transaction as
normal.

451
Managing Gift Certificates
Once the Gift Certificate is activated (purchased) you can manage it from your UltraCart
store. Navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Gift Certificates [link]

The Gift Certificate screen will list the following data for each of your certificates: Code,
Amount, Remaining (amount) and Expiration (date).

Figure 415 -Gift Certificate Management Screen

The Code field is the auto-generated code that was assigned when the certificate is
purchased (store item method) or created (on demand method). The Amount field
indicates the value of the Certificate. The Remaining field indicates the balance available
(in the case where the customer purchased an item valued less than the value of the
certificate). The Expiration field is the date that you initially set for the certificate to
expire.

Certificate Deletion
To delete a certificate, click on the “delete” button to the right of the listing. Caution!
You will not be prompted with an “are you sure” question. This action is not undoable.

Certificate Editing
To make changes to the certificate, click on the “edit” button to the right of the listing.
The Edit Gift Certificate screen will appear.

452
Figure 416 - Edit Gift Certificate screen

The only items you can change in an existing certificate are the Expiration Date, and
Email (address of purchaser). Click the “Save” button to save your edits.

You can temporarily “suspend” a Gift Certificate by removing the check in the box to the
right of the “Activated” field. To re-activate, place the check mark back into the box.
Click the “Save” button to save your edits.

You can also delete a Gift Certificate (not advisable) by placing a check in the box to the
right of the “Deleted” field. Caution! This feature is not “undoable” and you will not see
a warning dialog box.

Certificate Ledger
This section of the Certificate Editing Screen gives you a “line-by-line” accounting
recorded as each transaction is made. In our example below, you’ll see the three entries,
the certificate purchase, a customer’s store purchase and a New Ledger Entry. Note that
the ledger keeps a running balance of the certificates value.
Certificate Ledger Entry
A Merchant can make an entry to the ledger at anytime using this feature. This gives you
the opportunity to update the ledger with a single credit or debit entry. Enter a short
description for the entry in the Description field. Enter the amount in the amount field.
Make certain that you enter a negative number for a debit. Click the “New Ledger Entry”
button when finished. In the example above we have made a New Ledger Entry which
appears as the 3rd entry in the Ledger.

Return Email
UltraCart's return email feature allows you to configure UltraCart to automatically send a
very personalized email to the customer if they abandon their shopping cart. UltraCart
will also generate a unique link in the email that will take the customer back to the

453
shopping cart with all of their items pre-populated. A discount coupon that you have
already created will automatically be applied. Viola, you saved a sale!

Most merchants offer the customer 10% off their order (via the coupon) if they return and
purchase. The system is smart enough to not send an existing customer a coupon. This
will help you close the sale on new customers.

There are three steps to configuring the return email option:

1. Setup your return email address
2. Configure a coupon
3. Configure your return email message

Return Email Address

You will certainly want the email to be personalized and appear to be coming from your
address rather than from ultracart.com. Hence, this feature should only be used by
merchants that have an email server capable of sending authenticated SMTP traffic.

To configure your Return Email Address navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration  Email Addresses [link]  Abandon Return Email

At the Email Addresses screen, scroll to the bottom to locate Abandon Return Email.

Figure 417 - Abandon Return Email screen

In most cases you'll want to contact your email server administrator to obtain the criteria
needed to complete this section. Enter the following information into the appropriate
fields. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Server: The IP Address or host name of your mail server (mail.hostname.com)

Alternate Port: The standard port is 25. If you need an alternate port, indicated it here
(i.e., 465). This field is optional.

454
 Username: Your username as indicated on your mail server
Password: Your password used on your mail server
Email: Your email address
Friendly Name: This is the name (typically yours) that you may have established to
show when you send mail in stead of your email address.

Return Email Coupon

To provide the customer an incentive to return to the cart and make the purchase, you'll
want to make them an offer they can't refuse. In this step you'll create a coupon that
when configured during the Return Email step, will automatically be injected into the
cart. When the customer returns to the cart, they'll be pleased to see your gracious offer.

To configure your coupon navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Coupons [link]

If you already have a coupon configure that fits the need, feel free to use it. If not, click
the "new" button to create one. Make a note of the Coupon Code (name) as you'll need it
in the next step. For more information on creating coupons, see page 414.

Return Email Message

Now that you have all the ducks in a row, this is where the configuration of the Return
Email feature takes place. Navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Return Email [link]

You'll be taken to the Return Email

configuration screen where you'll
complete six fields; coupon name
(code), subject, message body, send
email after, abandon after, and
proactive email collection.

Figure 418 - Return Email configuration

screen

455
 Coupon: From the drop-down menu, select the coupon code you previously
created for this application.
Subject: Enter the text you want to appear as the Subject line in the Email.
Message: The Message field allows you to enter the text that you want your
customers to see when reading the email. This is your opportunity to
really convince them to return and complete the purchase. You can
find a sample email on the Tool Tip following the "message" prompt
field.
Note: There are three tags used in the email to insert critical
information. You can place them anywhere in the body of the
message but you must insure that they are the proper syntax.
They are:
[name] – Customer name as entered on original order
[link] – the critical hyperlink generated by UltraCart to take the
customer back to the appropriate shopping cart with coupon applied.
The Return Email function will not work without this link!
[code] – shows the customer the coupon code

Send email after: This is the amount of time the system will wait before sending your
return email to the customer. Simply enter the number of Hours you
want the system to wait before sending out your message.

Abandon after: The amount of time the system will hold a customer's information and
items. The items ordered will be in an "allocated to order" state for the
duration of this timer. While the order is being held, the inventory for
that item is also put aside, holding the item(s) for the customer.
Merchants with tight inventory controls and limited supply of products
should use caution with this setting. A long duration for Abandon
After can cause some "out of stock" issues because those items, while
in the allocated state, will reduce your available to allocate count.
New customers will receive the dreaded "out-of-stock" message and
cannot purchase those items when inventory levels fall to zero. The
word of caution is; if you have small inventory levels, set a reasonably
low duration for the Abandon After field.
Proactive Email
Collection: Select this check box if you want the email address of customers that
abandoned their checkout to be added to your opt in email list. You
can locate the "Opt In" list by running the Order Email report at Main
Menu  Reporting.

Be advised that this is a grey area in terms of email abuse since the
customer did not specifically "opt in" to such a list. Therefore all such
emails must be sent from your own SMTP email server.

Click the "Save" button when finished. You can also disable the Return Email feature by
clicking the "Turn feature off" button. Doing so will remove all data previously entered.

456
Exit Pop

Exit pop allows you to give the customer that attempts to leave the cart an incentive to
complete their purchase.

If the customer attempts to close the browser, a standard browser popup will appear. A
custom text message that you create offering the customer a discount (coupon) will
appear like the one show below.

If the customer acknowledges by clicking the "cancel" button, a custom graphic (that you
create and upload) will be displayed and an announcement that the coupon has
automatically been added to their cart.

457
A different exit pop can be configured for each of your screen branding themes. There is
no code to install into your checkout branding. UltraCart will automatically handle the
injection of the exit pop into the checkout process. We've also included an easy preview
button to allow you to see what the exit pop will look like without having to interact with
your checkout or clear cookies, etc.

There are 3 steps in configuring your Exit Pop feature:

1. Create and upload your discount graphic via the screen branding graphics library
tab. See page 130 for instructions on uploading graphics.
2. Create the coupon you will be offering if not already created. See page 414 for
instructions on how to create coupons.
3. Complete the details on the Exit Pop configuration screen.

To configure your Exit Pop navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  Exit Pop [link]

There are only 4 fields to configure; Graphic, Coupon, Text and On View Cart.

Figure 419 - Exit Pop configuration

Coupon Graphic: Provided that you have already created and uploaded your coupon
graphic as mentioned earlier, you can select it via the drop-down
menu to the right of the Graphic prompt.

Coupon: Provided you have already created your Exit Pop Coupon, you can
select it via the drop-down menu to the right of the Coupon
prompt.

458
Text: Sample text has already been entered in the text box. You can edit
as you see fit. Remember that for the customer to return to the
cart, they'll need to click the "cancel" button presented. So, your
text message must have a statement to that effect. You'll also need
to enter the amount of your discount that the coupon will apply.

On View Cart: By default, the Exit Pop feature is programmed to appear only if a
customer closes the browser at screens beyond the "view cart"
screen. If you want the Exit Pop to appear upon closing of the
View Cart screen, then place a check in this box.

Click the "Save" button at the bottom of the screen when you are finished.

Preview Exit Pop: To test and preview your configuration, return to the Exit Pop
screen and click the "preview" button to on the right.

459
3rd Party Marketing
UltraCart has added support for several popular, 3rd party email marketing programs
(auto responders). They each have different functionality so if you are not already using
one of these services, consider browsing their web sites to help make your decision of
which one to use.

To configure your 3rd party email marketing program, navigate to:

Main Menu  Marketing  3rd Party Marketing [section]

Click on the program you have chosen to use.

Figure 420 - Marketing screen

API Integrations
The configuration screen for the first 4 marketing firms is straight forward and easy to
complete. Some require a login and a password while others require only an API Key.
You'll need to sign up with the company you chose to obtain this vital information.
You'll then enter that information at the configuration screen in order for UltraCart to
communicate with your particular marketing program.

Constant Contact, GetResponse, Campaign Monitor, iContact and SilverPop are

integrated through UltraCart via API calls. Constant Contact and iContact require a
Login & Password. Campaign Monitor and Get Response require API Keys. SilverPop
requires Login & Password and user selectable server (assigned by SilverPop).

1. Once you have signed up with the marketing company, complete your configuration
screen (examples configuration screens for Constant Contact and SilverPop are
shown below).

460
Figure 421 - Sample email marketing configuration

2. Enter your Login & Password or API Key (whichever is required)

-SilverPop users skip to #5-
3. During the signup with your marketing company you will have created your mailing
list(s). Enter the list names where indicated. (not applicable for SilverPop).
4. Provides html snippet for those users that want to have the customers added to their
mailing list via the "buy link". If you use this option, any entry in #3 will be ignored.
Note: this option is for experienced users.
5. (SilverPop users only). Select your assigned server from the drop-down list.

Figure 422 - SilverPop configuration screen

Click the "Save" button when finished with your configuration.

461
External Auto Responders (AWeber)
This section is provided for merchants that want to integrate their UltraCart customer
base with AWeber. UltraCart collects the information and sends it via email to AWeber
who in turn, parses the information to be stored in the merchants Auto Responder file.

This configuration can also be used for developing your own database listing of
customers or for importing into non-integrated emailing programs.

Configuring UltraCart for AWeber

At the Marketing menu, click on the External Auto Responders link. The following
screen will appear.

If you have no auto responders defined, the familiar "no records are defined" screen will
appear. Click on the "new" button to configure a new auto responder. The External Auto
Responder configuration screen will appear.

Figure 423 - External Auto Responder

462
There are 6 fields to complete: Description, To Email, Subject, Body, Trigger Items and
Suppress Items.

Note: It's assumed that you have already created a list in AWeber and know the list name.

Description
Enter a short description that makes it easy for you to identify later (example: "AWeber
list").

To Email
Enter the email address which should be in the format <list name>@aweber.com where
<list name> is replaced by whatever your actual list name is.

Subject (optional)
This may be useful to help segregate customer lists for those merchants with multiple
stores.

Trigger Items (optional)

Some merchants may want emails sent only when specific items are purchased. Enter
each item on a separate line.

Suppression Items (optional)

When an Item ID is entered here, any purchase with that Item included will not be sent
(emailed).

Click the "Save" button when finished.

Configuration at AWeber
The following are instructions for setting up your AWeber account to integrate
seamlessly with your UltraCart account.

1. Login to AWeber
2. From the Main Dashboard select your list from the Change List drop down and
click go.
3. Click List Settings
4. Click Email Parser
5. Click Create Parser Ruleset
6. For description enter "Shopping Cart: UltraCart"
7. For trigger rule enter: "From:[^\n]+uc\.order\@ultracart\.com" and select Match
On "Header"
8. For Rule 1 enter "[^\n]*Email:[\t ]+(.+?)[\t\n ]" select Match On "Body" and Store
In "Email"
9. For Rule 2 enter "[^\n]*First Name:[\t ]+(.+?)[\t\n ]" select Match On "Body" and
Store In "Name"
10. For Rule 3 enter "[^\n]*Last Name:[\t ]+(.+?)[\t\n ]" select Match On "Body" and
Store In "Last Name"

463
 11. Click Save

When an order is placed in your UltraCart, it is sent to AWeber. AWeber parses the file
with the rules you set (above). The data now becomes part of your AWeber records.

464
AUCTIONS
Chapter

10. Auctions 10
Introduction

Many online merchants utilize third party marketplaces such as eBay or Yahoo! Auctions
to sell surplus or remanufactured merchandise. UltraCart allows you to accept payments
through the UltraCart shopping engine, allowing you to integrate these auctions with your
existing back office infrastructure.

Payment Wizard

To begin the auction payment process, navigate to the Payment Wizard as follows:

Main Menu  Auctions Payment Wizard

There are four steps in the Auction Payment Wizard; 1) Configure Auction, 2) Verify
Auction Information, 3) Quantity, Item, Weight & Item ID and 4) Copy and Past Unique
Item ID.

Figure 424 - Auction Payment Wizard

Step 1 – Configure Auction

On the first screen you will need to select the site which the auction is hosted in the drop
down menu (Ebay or Yahoo). Next enter the auction number. If you have more than one

465
auction item, enter each auction number on a separate line in the “Auction Number(s)”
field. When you press the “Continue” button, UltraCart will retrieve the auction
information and display it on the next screen.

Step 2 – Verify Auction Information

Please confirm that the auction number(s) you have entered is/are correct. If the
information shown is correct, click on the link to continue to the next step. If the
information is incorrect, press the “click here” link or the back button on your browser to
return to the previous screen. Make sure you have entered the correct auction number
and selected the correct auction site.

Figure 425 - Auction Verification Screen

Step 3 – Quantity, Weight and Item ID

Enter the quantity of items won (being purchased) into the “Quantity” field. By using the
UltraCart Payment Wizard, you can utilize your existing shipping rules in third-party
auctions. To do so, simply enter the item weight in the “weight” field. Alternatively, you
can specify a fixed shipping cost in the “Fixed Shipping Cost” field at the bottom.

If you would like to specify the Item ID (from your store) of the product being sold, you
can do so in the Item ID Field. This is especially useful for those merchants using
UltraBooks. If you do not specify an Item ID, it will show up in the cart with the Item ID
of the AUCTION.

466
Figure 426 - Weight & Item ID Screen

When you have completed the item specifications, press the “Continue” button.
UltraCart will then create a unique link for your auction.

To allow your customer to utilize the UltraCart checkout process, simply send them the
link shown on the confirmation screen.

Figure 427 - Unique URL Display Screen

When the auction winner clicks on the link provided, they are taken directly to the first
step in the checkout process.

467
Figure 428 - Completed Auction Order

468
CATALOG
Chapter

11. Catalog 11
Introduction
UltraCart’s Catalog feature allows merchants to manage their store items in a dynamic
catalog simplifying the task of displaying your store items on your web site. It provides a
user friendly interface for establishing Catalog Templates, Catalog Groups and assigning
store items to those groups. The catalog feature is especially beneficial to stores with
large inventories.

A thorough knowledge of HTML programming is a must when creating each template

contents. This skill is essential for successful display of your catalog items.

The basic steps in creating a catalog are as follows:

1. Define your host - establishes the web address where your catalog will reside.
2. Create templates - html page layouts for your groups and items (two or three
templates will usually suffice).
3. Create Groups - provides organization for your catalog items into like groups for
display.
4. Assign store items - easy to use interface provides a method of viewing your
existing store items and selecting those to be included in your catalog.

To begin the configuration of your Catalog, navigate to:

Main Menu Catalog

Create New Catalog Host

When you first arrive at the Host Name Selection screen you may find that UltraCart has
created a default catalog entitled “secure.ultracart.com”. If this host name does appear
you will need to change it to your domain name. Editing the host name is covered later.
If no default host name appears, then you will need to create a new one. A separate host
name needs to be created for each store that you want to build a dynamic catalog for.

469
Figure 429 - Host Name Selection screen

Click on the “Create New Catalog Host” link. The following screen will appear.

Figure 430 - New Catalog Host screen

At the New Catalog Host screen, enter the Host Name. Example: Avkits.com,
SlickPhones.com, etc. Then enter the Host Description. A few words that helps describe
your catalog name would suffice. Click on the “Save New Host” button to save your
edits and return to the Host Name Selection screen. Repeat this process for each and
every Host you need to create.

Editing a Host Name

Editing is available for changing the host name and host description. Click on the “Edit”
button to the right of the host name. Enter the new name and/or host description in the
box provided. Click on the “Save” button when finished.

Deleting a Host Name

Deleting a host name is not a user option. If you have the need to delete a host name,
contact UltraCart support.

470
Host Name Selection
Before you can manage your groups and assign store items, you need to identify the
Catalog Host you wish to work with. Even if you have only one Host, you will need to
select it. Click on the “Choose This Host” button to the right of the host desired.

Catalog Administration
Once you’ve chosen your host, the Catalog Administration screen will be displayed.
Here you can manage catalog templates and groups, assign store items to groups and
download activity logs.

Figure 431 - Catalog Administration Menu

Manage Catalog Templates

Catalog Templates will eventually hold your actual html code that will display all your
catalog items. In most cases you will create only two templates; one for your groups
(which you will create later) and another for items. We will discuss the creation of the
actual web content (template contents) later.

At the main Catalog Administration screen, click on the “Manage Catalog Templates”
link.

On your first arrival to this screen, you will see the familiar “No templates have been
defined” notice. Once you’ve created your templates they will be listed here.

Figure 432 - Template Administration screen

471
To create your first template, click on the “Add New Template” button. The New
Catalog Template screen will appear.

Figure 433 - New Catalog Template

Template Name
Enter the Template Name in the box provided. We suggest that you include the word
“Groups” in the name (example; Avkits Groups).

Template Contents
The Template Contents field is where you will enter the html code to display your store
items. Most will create this code in their favorite HTML editor and simply copy and
paste into this field.

Click on the “Save New Template” button when finished. Your newly created template
will now be listed on the Template Administration screen.

To create your second template click on the “Add New Template” button again. Repeat
the steps above only this time include the word “Items” in the name. Click on the “Save
New Template” button when finished.

In our example below, we created templates named “Avkits Groups” and “Avkits Items”.

472
Figure 434 - Add New Template (with samples)

Edit Template
If you need to change the Template Name, click on the “Edit Template” button to the
right of the Template. You will be taken to the same screen that you first created your
template in. Highlight the Name and change as desired. Click on the “Save Changes”
button when finished. You will also use this feature to edit your template contents (html)
later.

Delete Template
Click on the “Delete Template” button to the right of the Template Name to delete the
template. CAUTION! There will be no warning dialog and this action is not reversible.

You cannot delete a template if catalog groups have been created. You will receive the
following notice if you attempt to do so.

Manage Catalog Groups

You will create groups to organize and display your catalog store items. Some planning is
in order prior to creating your groups. It might a good idea to create an organization
chart showing the hierarchy of your groups and the store items assigned to each group.
Determining your groups in advance will greatly assist in the creation process.

A sample organization chart of the hierarchy for a small (pretend) store follows.

473
Figure 435 - Sample organization chart

Catalog (Root) Group

At the main Catalog Administration menu, click on the Manage Catalog Groups link.

The first group you create will be the Root Group and will be a little different than
subsequent groups. All subsequent groups will be children of this root group.

As with creating Templates, you will be greeted with a “no catalog groups found…”
statement until you create your first group.

Figure 436 - Group Administration screen

Click on the “Add New Group” button to create your first group. The following screen
will appear.

474
Figure 437 - Add Catalog Group screen

The Catalog Group screen has two tabs; Group and Attributes.

Group Title
Enter the Group Title. Again, it might be best to name this the same as your Host Name.

Group Description
Enter a description of your group in the Group Description field.

Group Template
A drop-down menu is provided to the right of the Group Template field. This will list the
Templates that you previously created. You will want to select the “Group” template that
you created earlier.

Item Template
Basically the same action as in the group template except here you will want to select the
“Item” template.

Catalog Attributes
Click the Attributes tab to enter the Group Attributes. You will be greeted with the
familiar “No attributes have been defined….” statement until you’ve created your first
attribute.

475
Figure 438 - Catalog Group Attributes

New Attribute
The attribute field is basically a holder for information you may want to have displayed
on the template for a particular group. Without this feature you would need to create
many separate templates.

To create an attribute, click on the “New Attribute” button. The following screen will
appear.

Figure 439 - Add Attributes screen

476
Enter the name of the attribute in the box provided. Then enter your data in the Value
field. Click the “Save” button when finished. Your newly created attribute(s) will appear
on the Attributes list.

Figure 440 - Group Attributes (with example)

You will also have an “Edit” and “Delete” button available. Click the “Edit” button to
return to the previous screen to make changes. The Attribute will be deleted immediate
upon clicking the “Delete” button. There will be no Warning Dialog window presented.
This is an irreversible action.

Click the “Return to groups list” link to return to the Catalog Administration screen.
Your newly created group will be listed there.

Figure 441 - Catalog Group editing screen

You will now see “Edit this Group” and “Delete This Group” links. Clicking the edit
link will return you to the Catalog Group screen where you can make changes to the
group or attributes fields. Click the “Delete This Group” link to remove the group. Upon
doing so, you will be presented with the following warning dialog window.

477
Clicking the “OK” button will delete the group and all child groups assigned to it. This
action is irreversible. Click the “Cancel” button to return to the previous screen without
deleting the group.

Catalog (child) Group

All subsequent groups created will be children of your first (root) group. Click the “Add
New Group” button. The add group screen will appear with a different look.

Figure 442 - Catalog (child) Group screen

Again we have two tabs at this screen; Group and Attributes.

Group Title (child)

As with your first group, here you enter the title of this group.

478
URL Code
Identify the URL (uniform resource locator) where this group resides.

Image URL
Identify the URL (uniform resource locator) where the image of this group resides.

Group Description
Enter the short description of this group.

Parent Group
Select the Parent Group this child belongs to in the drop-down menu. Given that this
example is the first child of our Root Group then Avkits.com would be the only selection
available.

Group Template
We have created only two templates in this scenario; Avkits Groups and Avkits Items.
Here we would select Avkits Groups from the drop-down menu.

Item Template
The drop-down menu here will have the same two options as above. Since we are
selecting our Items Template it would be Avkits Items.

Attribute Tab
As the same as before, you can assign attributes to any group. Click on the attribute tab
and then click the “new Attribute” button. Enter the Name and Value in the boxes
provided. Click on the “Save” button when finished to return to the Group
Administration screen.

The following is an example Group Administration screen after we have entered all the
groups as seen on the above organization chart.

479
Figure 443 - Group Administration screen (with groups)

Item Assignment
Once your templates and groups have been created, you are ready to assign your items to
those groups. This is done at the Item Assignment menu. Navigate to the Catalog main
menu and click on “Item Assignment” link.

This link will begin loading UltraCart’s Catalog Item Management program. The first
window you will see is the Merchant Login.

Figure 444 - Item Assignment Login screen)

Enter your Merchant ID, Login, and Password. Click on the “Login” button when
finished. The Catalog Item Management screen will then appear (in its own, separate
window).

480
Figure 445 - Item Assignment Interface

There are four panes to this window; Catalog Groups (left), Item Folders (right), Items
Assigned to Catalog Group (top/center) and Items in Folder (bottom/center). The two
middle panes will be empty (except for column headings) on your first visit to this screen.
When an item is selected in any of the panes it will become blue highlighted.

Catalog Groups pane

The Catalog Groups pane (left) will display a listing of your groups. Groups are
represented by small document icons. Parent groups are represented by a yellow folder
and can be opened or closed by a double click.

Item Folders pane

This pane will display your actual store item hierarchy. Parent directories are
represented by a yellow folder. Children of parent directories are represented by a small
document icon. A single click on any item in this pane will cause the store items within
that folder to be displayed in the “Items in Folder” pane (center/bottom).

481
Items Assigned to Catalog Group
This pane will display all the items you assign to the catalog group you’ve selected in the
left column (Catalog Groups).

Items in Folder pane

This pane will display all the items assigned to the group you’ve selected in the right
column (Item Folders).

Assignment steps
The following is a step-by-step order for assigning store items to a Catalog Group.

1. In the left pane, click on the Catalog Group you wish to assign items to.
2. In the right pane, click on the Item Folder that contains the items you want to
assign (store items will then appear in the bottom/center pane).
3. In the bottom/center pane, click on the item you want to assign.
4. Click on the “Assign” button in the middle of the screen. Your item is now
assigned and will appear in the upper/center pane.
5. Click on the next item to be assigned and again click on the “Assign” button.
Continue assigning items until finished. You can change (select) to a different
Item Folder (right pane) and continue assigning items to the same Catalog
Group.

When finished assigning items, select “Exit” from the File Menu at the top of the screen.
The following screen shows 3 items assigned to our Airframe Catalog Group from the
Structural Parts folder.

482
Figure 446 - Item Assignment Interface (populated)

Removing Items from a Catalog Group

You can remove items from a Catalog Group just as easily as assigning. The follow is a
step-by-step order for removing a store items from a Catalog Group.

1. In the left pane, click on the Catalog Group you wish to remove items from.
2. In the upper/center pane, click on the item you want to remove.
3. Click on the “Remove” button in the middle of the screen. Your item will no
longer appear in the upper/center pane.
4. Click on the next item to be removed and again click on the “Remove” button.
Continue removing items until finished.

Show Unassigned Items

Assigning new items to a group can be a difficult task for stores with numerous items. In
order to make this as painless as possible, there is a method to list only the unassigned
store items in the “Items in Folder” pane.

To do so, select “Show Unassigned Items Only” from the View menu at the top of the
screen. Then select the folder desired from Item Folders (right pane). Now only the un-

483
assigned items will appear in the “Items in folder” pane (center/bottom). This should
make it much easier to find new items to add to your group.

Download Logs
This routine generates a log file of your catalog traffic in zip format. Navigate to the
Catalog Administration screen and click on the “Download Logs” link.

Each individual log file contains 7 days of traffic. The weekly files are listed at the
Download Catalog Logs screen and are purged periodically. Merchants that use this
feature should periodically download the files to their system.

Figure 447 - Catalog Log File

Click on the check box to the left of the file(s) you wish to download. Then click on the
“Download Zip” button. You should be presented with a dialog window that allows you
to save the file to your system.

The file, once downloaded and unzipped, can be viewed in most word processors. It will
list all requests to the server for that given period. The merchants can then explore and
analyze the data.

484
Log file Analyzers
There are commercial and open source programs (log file analyzers) available that will
generate web server statistics from your log files. Three examples are: Analog
(www.analog.cx), Webalizer (www.mrunix.net/webalizer/) and Webtrends
(www.webtrends.com).

485
CUSTOMER SUPPORT CHAT
Chapter

12. Customer Support Chat 12

Introduction

One of UltraCart’s most powerful tools is the Customer Support Chat service. This set of
utilities allows you to engage your website visitors through interactive chat and dynamic
surveys.

The chat system is written using Java™ technology, allowing it to run on virtually any
computer or internet browser. This enables you to use the support chat service from any
computer with internet access.

Configuring Support Chat

Account Activation

The first step in using Customer Support Chat is to configure your initial settings. To do
this, you will need to activate your support chat account by navigating to the following
URL:

Main Menu  Operator Chat  Activate your Support account

Figure 448 - Customer Support Chat Activation

486
Check the box shown to indicate that you accept the license terms for the Support Chat
system, and press the Activate button to continue.

Figure 449 - Activation Completion Screen

The activation process creates your support account, and creates users for each of your
UltraCart users. After you have activated, you will want to create at least one support
queue.

Support Queues

UltraCart allows you to create multiple support queues for use throughout your
organization. This allows you to segment your customers based on a variety of criteria.
Additionally, you can specify permissions on a per-queue basis for all of your support
representatives.

To create your initial support queue, either click the link shown, or navigate to the
following URL:

Main Menu  Operator Chat  Manage Queues  Add New Queue

Figure 450 - Add New Support Queue Screen

On this screen, you can specify a name for the Queue, a shortcut code for the Queue, and
the default permission set for the new queue.

487
The queue name is what will appear in the administration console and the end-user chat
applet. The shortcut code is what will appear in the chat links you create. If you are
planning to utilize only one queue, we recommend that you name the queue Customer
Support, and set the shortcut code to HELP.

Finally, you can specify a default permission set. You can change this at any time from
the manage queues screen.

When you have completed the form, click on the Save button to create the queue. You
will then be shown the confirmation screen.

Figure 451 - Queue Creation Confirmation Screen

Once you have created your new queue, you will need to set a look & feel for the queue.
Visit the look & feel management screen by clicking on the link shown, or by clicking on
the “Change Look & Feel” button to the right of the desired queue name.

Figure 452 - Change Look & Feel

Queue Look & Feel

You can customize how the chat button will appear on your site by using the Queue Look
& Feel utility. This allows you to completely integrate the chat buttons with your
existing site pages.

488
Figure 453 - Queue Look & Feel screen (Images Only)

Customer support chat allows for two look & feel modes. “Images Only” is the default
mode. In this mode, UltraCart will only display an image when a support operator is
available in the queue specified. If a support operator is not available, nothing will be
displayed on the page.

The second mode is “Images & HTML.” In this mode, you can specify HTML content to
be placed around the image when an operator is available, as well as HTML to be
displayed when there are no available operators.

Figure 454 - Queue Look & Feel screen (Images & HTML)

You can choose either of the pre-made operator available images, or you can choose to
use any image located in your image library.

489
Once you have completed your look & feel customization, press the Save Changes
button. You will then be taken back to the Manage Queues screen.

Now that you have created a queue, you will need to create the HTML code needed to
enable the chat functionality.

Navigate to the main support menu:

Main Menu  Operator Chat

From the main support menu, click on the Create Support HTML link. This will take you
to the Chat Support HTML creation page. From this page, you can create the necessary
HTML code for each of your queues.

Figure 455 - Create Chat Support HTML Wizard

The drop-down on the right side of your screen contains each of your queues. To view
the HTML code for a particular queue, select it from the dropdown. The text inside the
box HTML Code will be updated to reflect this. You will then need to place that HTML
code

You can place this code on any number of pages on your website. If there are agents
logged into the support system, your chosen graphic will be displayed, and will link to
the chat system. If there are no agents logged into the support system, the graphic is not
displayed.

 If you want to be able to track visitors, but not place support buttons on each
screen, simply create a queue with no permitted agents. The graphic will never be
displayed, but the server will follow the progress of customers loading the pages
containing that queue HTML. This is especially useful for the survey & pushed
chat functionality.

AutoMessages

AutoMessages are templates that allow you to save time in your chat sessions by creating
automatic responses. For example, you can create an AutoMessage that greets your

490
customer. You can access the AutoMessages screen by navigating to the following
address:

Main Menu  Operator Chat  Manage AutoMessages

Figure 456 - Manage AutoMessages Screen

To create a new AutoMessage, click the button labeled “Add New AutoMessage.” You
will then be shown the new AutoMessage screen.

Figure 457 - New AutoMessage Screen

Enter a name for the AutoMessage. This is what will be shown in the dropdown menu in
the Administration console. Next, enter the actual message content.

 You can type [AGENT_NAME] in the AutoMessage contents, and the

administrator client will automatically replace it with the name of the logged in
user.

Press the Save New AutoMessage button to save your changes. The next time an agent
logs into the Support System, they will see the new AutoMessage in their AutoMessage
drop-down list.

Users

Each agent who will participate in the customer support application must have an
account. By default, UltraCart will create support chat users for each of the users in your

491
UltraCart account when you activate support chat. You will need to create an UltraCart
user account for all of your support agents.

To view the user configuration screen, navigate to the following URL:

Main Menu  Operator Chat  Manage Users

Figure 458 - User Management Screen

User Permissions

You can specify the queues each support representative has access to by using the Edit
Permissions function. To set a user’s permissions, click on the Edit Permissions button to
the right of the user name.

Figure 459 - Edit User Permissions

You will then be taken to the user permission screen. On this screen, you will see two
lists. On the left is the list of queues available, and on the right are the queues the
selected agent has permissions to access. If you want to remove permissions for a
particular queue, select it in the Permitted Queues box, and press the arrow to move it to
the Available Queues list. To enable permissions for a particular queue, select the
desired queue in the Available Queues list, and press the arrow to move it to the
Permitted Queues list. When you have completed your changes, press the Save Changes
button to continue.

492
View Transcripts

UltraCart keeps a complete log of every conversation processed by the support chat
system. Agents can view the chat history of a particular customer directly from the
support admin console.

Additionally, you can view all transcripts for a particular support agent from the user
management screen.

To view an agent’s transcripts, click on the View Transcripts button next to their name.
This will take you to a screen showing a summary of all chat sessions handled by the
agent.

Figure 460 - Agent Transcript Summary Screen

On the summary screen, you will see a session ID, the Date & Time the session began,
the customer’s name, and the length of the support session. To view the transcript of a
particular session, click on the session id number.

Figure 461 - Session Transcript Screen

Surveys

One of the most powerful tools included with the customer support chat system is the
survey system. Using surveys allows you to better serve your customers by finding out
their needs, as well as improving customer support by allowing your customers to be part
of the shopping experience.

To begin using surveys, navigate to the following URL:

Main Menu  Operator Chat  Manage Surveys

493
The first step is to create a new Survey. Click on the Add New Survey button to go to the
new survey screen.

Figure 462 - New Survey Screen

First, you will need to enter a name for the survey. This is what will be shown in the
administration console. The customer will not see this value.

Next, you need to enter a greeting for the survey. The greeting will appear above the
survey shown to the user.

After the user has completed the survey, they are shown the message you specified as the
survey closing. This is a good place to offer discounts, etc.

After you have completed the general survey information, you can begin creating
questions for the survey. Each survey can have up to 10 questions.
Begin by choosing a question type. The survey tool supports four different question
types: Radio Buttons, Text Field, Check Boxes, and Essay (Text area). Shown below are
examples of each question type.

494
Figure 463 - Sample Survey

When you have chosen a question type, additional fields will appear. These fields allow
you to specify the question text, and if applicable, the permitted choices.

Figure 464 - Question Configuration

If the question type is either Radio Buttons or Checkboxes, you will be shown a field
labeled Options. In this field, you should enter each desired choice, separated with a
comma. For example, if you have three color choices, you would enter red, green, blue.
Radio button questions allow the customer to choose from one of the options shown, and
check box questions allow the customer to choose any number of the options shown.

When you have completed your question configuration, press the Create Survey button to
save your changes. This will save your changes, and return you to the main Survey
menu.

495
Figure 465 - Current Surveys List

View Reports

UltraCart automatically creates detailed reports for each of your surveys. To view the
report, click on the View Reports button to the right of the desired survey name.

Figure 466 - Sample Survey Report

You can download a PDF version of the report by clicking on the Download as PDF file
button next to the report title.

AutoSurvey Settings

UltraCart allows you to automatically display a survey on various pages throughout your
website. These AutoSurveys help you get a random sampling of your website visitors.
UltraCart also takes precautions to help insure the integrity of the results, such as not
allowing a single visitor to take a particular AutoSurvey more than once, and by using
unique Internet addresses for each AutoSurvey.

To enable AutoSurvey for a particular survey, click on the AutoSurvey Settings button to
the right of the desired survey.

496
Figure 467 - AutoSurvey Settings

To enable an AutoSurvey for a particular page, you will need to enter the full URL of the
page on which you wish the AutoSurvey to appear. Since the surveys are served from a
secure server, you can include AutoSurveys on secure pages.

After you have entered the page URL, you will need to specify a frequency percentage.
This defines how often the survey will be presented to your visitor base. For example, if
you enter 25%, one out of every four page loads will trigger the survey. Again, UltraCart
will not show a single user an AutoSurvey twice, regardless of which URL triggers the
AutoSurvey.

 In order for AutoSurveys to work on a particular page, the page must include the
support queue HTML. If you do not want to offer support on that particular page,
we recommend that you create a support queue with no permitted agents, and use
that queue on the appropriate pages

Using the Chat Administration Console

Launching the Chat Administration Console

The Chat Administration console uses Java Web Start technology to enable you to run the
application from any internet-accessible computer, regardless of location or computer
type.

To launch the administration console, click on the Launch Agent Console link.

497
Figure 468 - Launching the Agent Console

If your computer has the Java Web Start software installed, the Agent Console will
launch immediately. If not, your browser will automatically download & install the latest
version of the software.

If you are unable to complete the installation process from your browser, you can
download the Java Web Start software and manually install it from the following URL:

http://www.java.com/en/download/index.jsp

Once you have installed the Java software, re-load your browser, and click on the Launch
Agent Console link. This will then launch the Agent Console. If you are still unable to
install the Java software, please contact UltraCart Support.

The first time you launch the Agent Console, Java Web Start will download the necessary
Agent Console files. Depending on the speed of your Internet connection, this may take
up to 2 minutes. After the files have been downloaded and installed, subsequent launches
will be much quicker.

Figure 469 - Agent Console Launch

When you first launch the Admin Console, you will be prompted to allow the Support
application to run on your local machine. Press the Start button to continue launching the
Admin Console. This message will only appear once.

498
Figure 470 - Application Security Window

Logging into the Agent Console

Each support representative has a unique user name & password in the Support Chat
system. To begin, enter your merchant id (shown here as Agency ID), user name, and
password into the login screen.

Figure 471 - Login Screen

The agent console will then connect to the UltraCart support server to validate the login
information, and retrieve the necessary information to start the application. This may
take several seconds.

After you have successfully logged in, the main console will be displayed.

Navigating the Agent Console

The main console window consists of two distinct areas. The top part of the interface is
the overview section. This allows you to quickly view the status of the visitors currently
browsing your website, as well as those waiting to participate in a chat session. It
consists of three tabs: All Customers, Enqueued Customers, and Queues. You can
change the active tab by clicking on the text.

499
Figure 472 - Main Agent Console

All Customers This tab shows a list of all customers currently browsing your
website.
Enqueued Customers This tab shows a list of all customers currently waiting in a chat
queue. If available, it also shows additional information such as
customer name & e-mail address, and hold time.
Queues This tab shows a list of all queues the agent is permitted to
access. For each queue, you can view the number of customers
waiting, and the hold time of the customer who has been in
queue for the longest amount of time.

In addition to the primary sections of the agent console, there is a button bar located at
the top of the window. This button bar consists of two sections: Current Status, and
Notify Sounds.

Figure 473 - Agent Console Button Bar

Current Status

The current status section allows you to specify your status to the Support system. A
summary of the available status options appears below.

Unavailable The Unavailable status means that you are not available for any
additional chat sessions. If all agents in a queue are in Unavailable
status, the chat image will not be shown. For example, if you need to

500
 clear a queue at the end of the day, you should set your status to
Unavailable.
Available The Available status means that you are ready to accept new chat
requests. While in the available state, new chat requests will be
automatically opened by your administration console (up to two active
chat sessions)
Busy The Busy status means that you are ready to accept new chat requests,
but do not want your console to automatically accept chat requests. This
is useful if you need to complete some follow up work related to a chat
session. While in the Busy status, customers will continue to be able to
enqueue in the queues permitted the agent.

If you are in any status mode other than Available, the button will blink red to remind
you of this.

Notification Sounds

The admin console can play a sound when a new user enters the queue, and when a new
chat session begins. You can toggle these notification sounds by pressing the
corresponding button on the button bar. By default, the enqueue notification is disabled,
and the new chat notification is enabled.

Overview Section

All Customers Tab

The All Customers tab allows you to view a list of all customers currently browsing your
site. This information is retrieved from the support html tags that are included on your
pages, so it is recommended that you include this tag on all pages you wish to track in the
admin console.

Figure 474 - All Customers Tab

For each visitor being tracked by the support system, you are shown a variety of
information. This includes their unique ID, name (if available), the last page the loaded,
how long their current visit has lasted, and the length of time they have spent on the
current page.

501
You can view additional options for a particular customer by right clicking on the row
containing the desired customer. This presents you with three options:

Show Customer Properties
Push Survey
Push Chat Request
This menu item retrieves all known properties for the
selected customer. These properties will be displayed in
the session section of the admin console.
This menu item allows you to push a survey request to a
particular website visitor. On the next page with the
support HTML tag they load, their browser will pop up the
specified survey.
This menu item allows you to push a chat request to the
selected website visitor. On the next page with the support
HTML tag they load, their browser will pop up a chat
session.

Enqueued Customers Tab

The Enqueued Customers Tab shows you all of the customers currently waiting to chat
with a support representative. This view shows the basic customer information, as well
as the amount of time they have been waiting in queue.

Figure 475 - Enqueued Customers

You can begin a chat session with an enqueued customer by both double clicking on the
customer’s name, or by right clicking on the customer name and selecting Begin Chat.

Queues Tab

The Queues Tab shows you the status of all of the queues to which you are logged in.
Additionally, it shows the number of customers currently waiting in the queue, and the
maximum length of time a customer has been holding.

Figure 476 - Queues Tab

502
Details Section

When you perform an action in the summary section, the results of that action will appear
in the details section.

Figure 477 - Customer Info Tab

The details section contains two primary tabs: Customer Info, and Chat. Each of these
primary tabs contains one or more secondary tabs, located at the bottom of the window.

503
ULTRABOOKS
Chapter

13. UltraBooks 13
Introduction

Many online merchants use Intuit’s industry leading QuickBooks™ accounting software
to maintain their company books. UltraCart has enhanced support for Merchants using
QuickBooks™ with the addition of our QuickBooks™ integration tool called
UltraBooks.

UltraBooks allows UltraCart merchants to import data directly to QuickBooks™

software. There’s no need to deal with file formats and data conversion as UltraBooks
does it all for you. Once configuration steps are complete, merchants simply run
UltraBooks and it handles all the communication and importing between UltraCart and
QuickBooks™.

Background

UltraBooks is an installed Microsoft Windows application that connects up to the central

UltraCart system and downloads orders into Intuit’s QuickBooks™ version 2004-2009
(Pro, Premium or better versions). The software is not compatible with Mac, Online,
International, or Simple Start versions of QuickBooks™.

For each order that is completed in UltraCart (i.e. marked as shipped), UltraBooks will
download the order as a "sales receipt" or "invoice" (depending on the payment method)
and import into your QuickBooks™ company file.

What type of data will UltraBooks import?

UltraBooks will create customer profiles for your customers automatically if they do not
already exist. After creating the customer profile UltraBooks will create a sales receipt
or, in the case of purchase orders, an invoice for each completed order. Those using
QuickBooks™ Merchant Services (QBMS) will also have credit card transaction
information imported.

Importance of things matching up

Later we are going to cover how things match up between UltraCart and QuickBooks™.
It is very important that you properly configure both systems so that things will match up.

504
There is no “auto-magical” way for things to link up between the systems so pay very
close attention to the values in both systems.

Downloading and Installing the Required Software

To begin the configuration process of UltraBooks navigate to:

Main Menu Configuration Back Office  UltraBooks

Figure 478 - Back Office Section / UltraBooks Link

To use UltraBooks you must have the following:

 Microsoft Windows 2000 2.0, XP, or Vista
 .Net Framework 2.0
 UltraBooks

Getting Started with UltraBooks

In order to use UltraBooks you must first download and install all the required
components onto the same PC that QuickBooks™ is installed:

 .Net Framework
o The .NET Framework version 2.0 redistributable package includes
everything you need to run applications developed using the .NET
Framework.

505
 o The download exe file (dotnetfx.exe) is approximately 23698 KB as of
this writing and may take considerable time to download.
o From the main UltraBooks screen, click on the link “.net Framework”. and
download the file to your system. Once the file has been downloaded,
double click the dotnetfx.exe icon which will usually take only a minute or
two to install. This software will perform its work in the background
when you run UltraBooks.
 QuickBooks™ SDK QBFC 6.0
o This file resides on UltraCart’s server and will download from there.
Double click on the link “QuickBooks™ SDK QBFC 6.0”. The file
should download and install automatically.
 UltraBooks v2.0
o This file also resides on Ultracart’s server and needs to be downloaded to
your system. Click on the link “UltraBooks v2.0”. Once you have
downloaded the file you will need to “extract” it using your favorite utility
(WinZip, WinRAR archiver, etc). In order to make it easier to locate the
files after extracting, it’s suggested that you place the downloaded,
compressed file into its own folder. Once that’s done, double click on the
Setup.Exe file to execute the extracting and installation of UltraBooks
v2.0.

Configuration Mode
Once all downloads and installs are complete it’s time to configure your UltraCart
account for UltraBooks. In UltraCart, navigate to:

Main Menu  Configuration Back Office (section)  UltraBooks

506
Enter the configuration mode by clicking the “Configuration Mode” button on the
bottom of the main UltraBooks page.

Figure 479 - UltraBooks Download and Configuration Mode

Accounting Codes

Pressing the “Configuration Mode” button will enable your merchant account for
QuickBooks™ configuration. You will be taken to the “Unconfigured QuickBooks™
Codes” screen where you will be directed to begin entering the appropriate accounting
codes for each item listed as unconfigured. Assigning accounting codes allows
UltraBooks to match up and properly categorize data in UltraCart to data in
QuickBooks™.

Each time you return to the main UltraBooks configuration page, you will be presented
with the list of pending items until all have been configured.

507
Figure 480 - Non-configured QuickBooks™ Codes

Some of the general areas that you must enter the QuickBooks™ accounting codes for
are Payment Methods, Tax Rates, Shipping Methods, Coupons, Gift Charge / Wrap
Papers, etc.

Payment Methods
In UltraCart navigate to: Configuration
 Checkout (section)  Payments.
For each of the payment methods you
have enabled in UltraCart you will need
to specify what the corresponding code
is in QuickBooks™.

Run QuickBooks™ and from the drop

down menus click on Customers 
Enter Sales Receipts or from the Home
window click on the "Create Sales
Receipts" button.

.
Deposit to Account
Also located on the UltraCart Configuration  Payments screen is a field called
QuickBooks™ deposit to account. This is the account you want the funds to be deposited
into in QuickBooks™ when the sales receipts are added. By default, if this field is left
blank the funds go into the un-deposited Funds account. The following are sections of
the payments screen depicting the location of those codes.

508
To specify a different account click on the Chart of Accounts in
QuickBooks™ and enter the name of the account you want to deposit
funds into. Please note this is the NAME of the account and not the
number!

Surcharge QuickBooks™ Code

The Surcharge QuickBooks™ code depicted above for Credit Cards and COD are to
allow merchants to charge for those special services payment options. These codes come
from the Item List in QuickBooks™. You'll probably need to create new Items in the
QuickBooks™ Item List for these surcharges. The Item List can be found under the

509
"Lists" menu or by clicking on the "Items & Services" icon on the Home screen. You’ll
see a row of menus at the bottom of the Item List window. Click on the Item drop down
and select "new" to create a new item. Remember to enter the "name" you assign the
item into the Surcharge QuickBooks™ Code field.

Sales Tax
Each of your unique tax jurisdictions inside of UltraCart must have a corresponding entry
in the QuickBooks™ system. To make this part of the configuration easier, UltraBooks
can automatically add the missing tax jurisdiction to your QuickBooks™ file during the
import process if it exists in UltraCart. So it is very important to configure the
QuickBooks™ Codes inside of UltraCart for each tax jurisdiction.

Configuring Tax Codes in UltraCart

Click on Configuration  Sales Tax. Start drilling down into your States, then Counties,
then Cities going as deep as you have configured tax . At each level configure the
QuickBooks™ tax code. During the import process, UltraBooks will present you with an
import dialog if a sales tax item isn’t configured in QuickBooks™ and needs to be.

The typical naming convention for the code is “<state abbreviation> Sales Tax” at the
state level, then “<state abbreviation> <county> Sales Tax” at the county level, and
finally “<state abbreviation> <county> <city> Sales Tax” at the city level. An Example
for a state sales tax code would be: "CASalesTax". For more information on configuring
your sales tax within UltraCart, see page 76.

Figure 481 - Sales Tax QuickBooks™ Code

Setting up Sales Tax in QuickBooks™

This section only discusses where to set up your Tax Items and Codes in QuickBooks™.
You may want to learn more about sales tax concepts. QuickBooks™ will help you
understand how QuickBooks™ uses sales tax items, rates, and codes to track the sales tax
you collect from your customers and pay to your tax agency. The QuickBooks™ help

510
section has a tutorial about tracking and paying sales tax that should be very helpful to
the novice.

Turn on Sales Tax

. First you need to make sure you have turned on Sales Tax if you haven't done so
already.
 Go to the Edit menu and click Preferences
 In the Preferences window, click Sales Tax in the list on the left.
 Click the Company Preferences tab.
 For the question "Do You Charge Sales Tax?" select “Yes”.
There are several other settings that you will need to make decisions on. You may need
to get expert advice for your company tax settings

Sales Tax Codes

Depending on your state and local sales tax requirements, the preset taxable (TAX) and
non-taxable (NON) sales tax codes you see may be the only ones you'll need. If your tax
agency requires you to specify additional sales tax codes to track taxable and non-taxable
sales, such as for non-taxable out of state sales, refer to QuickBooks™ Help for more
information on how to set up additional sales tax codes and for some examples of
commonly-used non-taxable sales tax codes.

To add a sales tax code

1. Go to the Lists menu and click Sales Tax Code List.
2. Click Sales Tax Code at the bottom of the list and then click New.

3. In the New Sales Tax Code window, enter a sales tax code you want to use and a
description for it.

4. Choose whether the code is Taxable or Non-Taxable.

5. Click OK.
Sales tax items, rates, and tax agencies
QuickBooks™ uses sales tax items to calculate and add sales tax charges when you make
a taxable sale. When you set up a sales tax item, you assign it a sales tax rate and
associate it with the tax agency to which you pay the sales tax.

1. Still in the Sales Tax Preferences window, click the "Most common sales tax"
drop-down list and choose <Add New>.

The New Item window opens with Sales Tax Item already selected in the Type
drop-down list.

2. Enter a sales tax name.

511
 Use the name that you assigned for this location in UltraCart. This name appears
as one of the choices in the Tax field on your sales forms.

3. Enter a description for the way this sales tax item will appear as a line item on
your sales forms.

The description prints on your sales forms after the final line item. You can't edit
it on the forms themselves. Users frequently use the name of the sales tax item as
the description.

4. Enter the sales tax rate.

The percentage you enter is the rate you set up in UltraCart. For example, your
sales tax rate for XYZ County might be 8.25% (or 8 and 1/4 cents per dollar
purchased). This rate also appears on your sales forms.

5. In the Tax Agency drop-down list, select <Add New>.

This will open the New Vendor window where you'll set up the tax agency (a
vendor) to which you pay this sales tax.

6. In the Vendor Name field, enter the name of your tax agency. For example, in
California, sales tax is paid to the Board of Equalization. You can enter the other
information now, such as the address and opening balance, or you can do it later.

7. Click OK to close the New Vendor window.

8. Click OK to close the New Item window.

9. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each sales tax item you need to set up for your
business.
Selling to Non-taxed customers
If your out-of-state sales aren't taxed, set up a single sales tax item with a 0% rate. You
also need to set up sales tax codes to track your non-taxable out-of-state sales. This is
required even if you were not going to have any out-of-state sales at all.

512
Shipping Methods

Each of your shipping methods needs to have a QuickBooks™ code associated with it.
Click on Configuration  Shipping  Methods (tab). Then for each of the methods
click on Edit  Other (tab). In the QuickBooks™ code field enter the corresponding
item name in QuickBooks™.

Figure 482 - Shipping Method QuickBooks™ Code

QuickBooks™ Item for Shipping

Most merchants typically set up a single Item in QuickBooks™ that represents their
shipping costs such as “Shipping and Handling”. Click on Lists  Items List inside of
QuickBooks™ to view your item list. Add an item for Shipping and Handling if it does
not already exist.

513
Coupons

Each of your "active" coupons (Main Menu  Marketing  Coupons) must also have a
QuickBooks™ code associated with it. Edit each of your coupons and enter the
corresponding QuickBooks™ code in the field.

Figure 483 - Coupon QuickBooks™ Code

Typically merchants have a single Item called “Discount” in their QuickBooks™ file that
they associate with all of their UltraCart coupons. Click on Lists  Item List in
QuickBooks™ to review your discount items.

Creating a QuickBooks™ Discount Item

Note: Once you create a discount item, you cannot change it to another type.
1. Go to the Lists menu and click Item List.
2. Click Item at the bottom of the list and then click New.

3. In the New Item window, click the Type drop-down list and choose Discount.
4. Enter an item name, such as Discount.
5. Enter the description that you want QuickBooks™ to put on your sales forms
when you apply the discount.
6. Enter the discount amount or percentage:

514
 If the discount is a percentage, enter the number of the discount followed by the
% symbol. For example, 5% tells QuickBooks™ to multiply the previous line by
.05. In the case of downloaded UltraCart sales, you will want to leave the
Amount field blank.
7. Enter the account that you use to track discounts you give to customers. You can
use either an expense account or an income account. When an income account
tracks discounts on sales, the account is often called a "contra-income" account.
8. Click the Tax Code drop-down list and choose a tax code for this item.
If you select a taxable code, the discount you specify on taxable sales is applied
before the sales tax is calculated. If you select a non-taxable code, the discount is
applied after the tax is calculated.
9. Click OK or click "Next" to create another item.

Going Live with UltraBooks

After configuring all of the required Accounting Codes, the following screen will appear.
Please read the disclaimer statement.

Figure 484 - UltraBooks "go live" screen

Click the box to the left of “I accept this agreement” and then click the “Go Live” button.
The following confirmation screen will appear.

Figure 485 - UltraBooks "go live' confirmation screen

515
After you have entered live mode, all new orders placed on the system will be eligible for
export to QuickBooks™. Any existing orders placed on the system before entering live
mode will not be eligible for export to QuickBooks™. If you are interested in importing
all your historical order data, please contact support@ultracart.com.

Reminder: All the required software must be installed, on the same PC as your QuickBooks™
installation, in order for UltraBooks to work properly.

UltraCart Item ID’s versus QuickBooks™ Item Names

It's absolutely necessary to set up UltraBooks Items for each of your UltraCart Items.
One of the following scenarios will apply:

 Your Items already exist in QuickBooks™ but not in UltraCart.

Action: Create your UltraCart Items using the exact same name you used for your
QuickBooks™ Items.
 Your Items already exist in UltraCart but not in QuickBooks™.
Action: Create your QuickBooks™ Items using the exact same name you used for
your Item ID's.
 Your Items do not exist in either program.
Action: Create both using the exact same name.
 Your Items exist in both UltraCart and QuickBooks™ but with different names.
Action: You'll need to enter the exact QuickBooks™ Item name into the
QuickBooks™ Code field at the Item Editor level in UltraCart.

Figure 486 –QuickBooks™ code field on Item Editor screen

QuickBooks™ Item Type – Inventory Part

516
If you plan to manage inventory via QuickBooks™, you must set the "Item Type" as
"Inventory Part" (QuickBooks™ definition: "use for goods you purchase, track as
inventory, and resell"). When you create a "New Item" in QuickBooks™, simply set the
Item Type as "Inventory Part".

Figure 487 - Inventory Part Item Type

A note about how UltraCart stores data

Once an order is placed all the data is packaged up and stored separately from your
configuration information. So if you configure a shipping method and use it on an order
before configuring the QuickBooks™ code then you will receive an error message during
import about something not being configured that you can not work around without the
assistance of UltraCart Support. Always configure the QuickBooks™ code for
everything before using it.

Using sequential order IDs

If you are currently using date/time based order Ids you should switch to numerically
sequential order IDs. The date/time format is too long for QuickBooks™ to store and
makes matching up orders between the systems difficult. Click on Configuration 
Order ID Scheme to verify your order ID configuration. We typically recommend that
merchants start at 10000 and a width of 8 on their order ID scheme.

If you decide to stick to using the date/time based order ID then UltraBooks will allow
QuickBooks™ to assign the next sales receipt number automatically and will place the
UltraCart order number in the memo.

Running UltraBooks

Running UltraBooks is simple. Make sure you have your QuickBooks™ company file
open in the background and then launch UltraBooks from your Start menu.

517
Click on Start  Program Files  UltraBooks  UltraBooks.

The application will prompt you for your UltraCart merchant login information. The first
time you run UltraBooks you will receive a series of confirmation dialogs confirming that
you would like UltraBooks to be able to access your QuickBooks™ company file. You
will need to answer all of these dialogs in the affirmative. If you are using a multi-user
QuickBooks™ environment then this application confirmation process must be
completed by an Administrative level user.

Figure 488 - UltraBooks Login Screen

Enter your Merchant ID, Login and Password.

Each and every time you run UltraBooks, a window will appear with two large buttons;
Import Orders, or Settings. We'll first talk about Settings.

Settings
Every merchant should, prior to conducting their first import of orders, click the Settings
button and configure their specific options as needed.

Upon clicking the Setting button you will be presented with the UltraBooks Options
Screen. There are four areas of concern: Proxy Server, Customer Import, QuickBooks™
(version) and Order Import.

518
Proxy Server
Use a proxy server
This is only used by merchants behind a firewall that requires a proxy server to
get to the internet. By clicking this box you can then specify:
Server Address _
Port _
Customer Import
Uppercase all name information
All customer names will be converted to upper case during import.
Import by company name instead of last name, first name when possible.
Whenever a company name is present, the record will be imported by such.
Import individual customer sales under customer record
If this box is checked, all retail orders import as the same customer. You must
configure the customer first.
QuickBooks™
Canadian Version
Click this box only if you use the Canadian version of QuickBooks™.
Order Import
Import all orders as invoices
Normally, Credit Card orders are imported as Sales Receipts and Purchase Orders
are imported as invoices. Check this box to have ALL orders imported as
Invoices.
Mark all items as non-taxable if no tax is charged.
In most cases, this is good to have checked.
Mark Invoices as to be printed.

519
 When you select Print Forms/Invoices in QuickBooks™, all invoices will appear
in a list for batch printing if you check this box. You can still de-select certain
ones prior to printing.
Import credit card information (Requires QuickBooks™ 2006 or 2005 (R5 and later)).
Few merchants will consider this option for obvious security reasons.
Import QBMS Transaction Information
This feature is for merchants that have the QuickBooks™ Merchant Services
payment gateway configured. It will import the transaction information for orders
that were processed via QBMS.
Import Terms
Some merchants have terms spelled out in the checkout that will become part of
the order. This options will insure those terms are imported to become part of the
QuickBooks™ sales record.
Import Sales Rep
The Sales Rep name is configured on the Customer Profile. A check in this box
will import the Sales Rep name with the order.
Import Class
The Class is configured on the Customer Profile. A check in this box will import
the Class with the order.
Import Referral Code into Memo
This is a special field. It will not apply to 99% of merchants.
Let QuickBooks™ assign the invoice/sales receipt
This would be used if you are making direct entry into QuickBooks™ as-well-as
importing. This will help avoid collisions.
Ignore kit component items
This is only used by merchants that have kits in their Item Configuration.
 Sales Receipt/Invoice Number Prefix _
If you want to precede your Sales Receipt of Invoice with a special Prefix, enter it
into the box provided.
 Default Invoice Terms _
QuickBooks™ invoice form allows merchants to set various payment terms.
Here you can define the Default term when the Invoice is created during import.

Import Orders

Clicking the "Import Orders" button will begin the download process. You must have the
appropriate QuickBooks™ file open prior to importing. When the download and
importing of order files has completed successfully, you will see the following screen.

520
Figure 489 - Importing progress screen

You may receive an error during import. These errors are usually contributable to
mismatched QuickBooks™ codes in either your UltraCart or QuickBooks™ accounts. If
you are unable to determine the cause or remedy, contact UltraCart support.

Order State (status)

UltraBooks will only export orders that are in the "completed" state (have been marked as
shipped). Once exported via UltraBooks, they will be tagged as "Exported to
QuickBooks™".

If, for some reason, you want to re-export an order, you'll need to reset its export status.
To do so, log in to your account and navigate to: Main Menu  Order Management 
Review Orders. In the search screen, enter the order ID or whatever search criteria
necessary to locate the order. Once you have located the order:
 click on the order ID to bring the record into the order editor.
 click on the "Edit Customer Information" link.
 click on the "other" tab.
 locate the "Exported to QuickBooks™" field.
 remove the check mark by clicking on it.
 click the Save button at the bottom of the screen.

That particular order is reset to be exported to QuickBooks™ the next time your run
UltraBooks.

Importing Historical Data

After you have done your initial configuration you can import historical orders (orders
placed before UltraBooks configuration) by contacting UltraCart support and asking for a
range of orders to be flagged for export into QuickBooks™.

Manually Entry into QuickBooks™

521
If you’re going to enter sales receipts or invoices manually into QuickBooks™ in
addition to having UltraBooks import information, make certain that you do not use a
number that will conflict with UltraCart orders. For instance manual sales
receipts/invoices may be done in the 1000-9999 range while UltraCart orders would be in
the 10000+ range. UltraBooks assumes that if the invoice/sales receipt with the same
number exists then it needs to be deleted and replaced by the new one in the event that
the merchant is re-downloading order information. It has no way of distinguishing
something that is hand entered from something that is downloaded and dealing with it in
any other way.

522
Disable UltraBooks Integration

If you should decide to disable UltraBooks integration, navigate to;

Main Menu  Configuration UltraBooks

Pressing the “Disable” button will prevent future downloading of orders. There will be
no warning dialog for this action. However, the codes you have entered will remain
intact. You can again configure UltraBooks without having to re-enter the codes (except
for any additions that you may have made in Coupons, Gift Charge / Wrap Papers,
Payment Methods, Shipping Methods or Tax Rates.

Figure 490 - UltraBooks Configuration screen

Summary

By using UltraBooks to integrate UltraCart with QuickBooks™, you can make certain
that your sales data is correctly entered into QuickBooks™ in the fastest, most efficient
manner; allowing you to stay focused on selling instead of spending your precious time
on redundant data entry.

523
AFFILIATE MANAGEMENT
Chapter

14. Affiliate Management

14
Introduction
A typical definition of Affiliate as it relates to the Internet might be: a web site that drives
traffic to another web site in exchange for a percent of sales from users driven to the site.

We are pleased to introduce UltraCart's our affiliate management system while

continuing the tradition of high quality, powerful, and easy-to-use software.

For those unfamiliar with Affiliate programs, here's how they work. You recruit affiliates
to participate in your program. They market your product for you, and you agree to pay
them a commission on the products sold.

Affiliate marketing is one of the most powerful, and least expensive, ways to promote
your product or service. With the affiliate doing their own marketing, you'll likely see an
increase in both the number of sales received, as well as awareness of your brand.

Our system was not designed in a vacuum. We've worked with some of the net's largest
affiliate managers, as well as some of the largest affiliates, to create a system designed
from the ground up with your needs in mind.

We're excited about the possibilities this system will offer. Affiliate marketing works and
we're pleased to bring you a cutting edge solution.

Terms & Conditions

To begin establishing your Affiliate Program, navigate to:

Main Menu  Affiliate Management

Upon your first visit to the Affiliate Management section of UltraCart, you will be
presented with our Welcome Screen. Here you can learn about our affiliate system and
read the terms & conditions of the program. There are no additional fees to use
UltraCart's Affiliate Management program.

After reading the welcome and terms page, click on the “I Accept” button if you agree to
our Terms & Conditions. You must agree to continue using the affiliate program. If you
do not agree, click on the “I Do Not Accept” button.

524
Affiliate Program Preview
Once you have accepted the terms and agreement, you'll need to configure your affiliate
program within UltraCart. Here is a quick preview of our program.
Configure your program
To begin, you'll assign your program a name and description. You'll create an
Agreement that your affiliate will have to accept when they signup for your
program. A welcome letter (that you create) will be automatically sent to
advise that their application is pending approval.
Configure your Creatives
A creative is something that the merchant is going to use to help market
his/her products. This can be a text link, a graphic, a banner ad, etc. that will
eventually be used on your affiliate’s web site. These creatives provide some
control over how your affiliate promotes your products on their sites. The
Creatives you build will be displayed to the affiliate when they log on and
create their links.
Establish Commissions
You will have full control to determine what you'll pay your affiliates either in
percentage or dollar amounts. You can determine if you want to use Global
and/or Individual Item commissions. Many merchants use both.
Links
Once your program has been created, UltraCart will create important links
(html snippets) that you will use to build an affiliate Signup and Login page
on your website.
 Signup – takes prospective affiliate through the sign up process (open
program).
 Login – allows existing affiliates to access their affiliate dashboard &
reports (at UltraCart).
 Invisible Link Script - Since some shoppers will avoid clicking on a
link if they detect that it is an "affiliate link", the merchant can use
what's called an Invisible Link. It has the look of a regular link but the
customer can not tell it's an affiliate link by simple mouse-over.
 Priority Code Script – allows you to apply credit to an affiliates
account for sales that did not come through the tracking system (phone
orders for example).
Manage Affiliates & Types
There is an easy to use interface that merchants can use to make manual
ledger entries, edit the affiliate information, and disable an Affiliate. You can
also easily log in as an Affiliate so you can see and manage from the same
dashboard they do.
Reports
You will be able to view data for individual affiliates and/or the program as a
whole. You will be able to generate reports to view All Affiliates, View Click
Summary and View Sales Summary. You can export Affiliate information
into a .csv file. The reporting section also provides an interface for you, the
affiliate manager, to process payments and further manage your affiliate
accounts.

525
Open or Closed Program
Those merchants that create a web site to openly signup individuals to become affiliates
have an “Open Affiliate Program”. UltraCart will create a HTML snippet that you will
place on your web site that will link visitors to the sign up form. Affiliates that complete
the sign up process will be listed under “Your Current Tasks” section on the Affiliate
Administration screen. You will have the opportunity to “approve” these signups
(explained later).

Those merchants that would rather actively recruit their affiliates and manually add them
to their program will have what’s called a “Closed Affiliate Program”.

There is nothing within the program (setting wise) that differentiates between the two
methods. UltraCart provides an excellent interface for adding, editing or disabling
affiliates regardless of which method you utilize. Occasionally some merchants that
utilize the Open Affiliate Program method will manually sign-up affiliates. They
therefore are utilizing both methods.

Affiliate Management
The Affiliate Management screen consists of 8 menu tabs; Overview, Settings, Creatives,
Commissions, Links, Affiliates, Affiliate Types and Reports.

Figure 491 - Affiliate Management screen

Overview
The Overview Tab will list all Your Current Tasks. The two different tasks that may
appear here are: 1) to approve a new affiliate signup or 2) approve invisible links created
by affiliates (text or image links are automatically approved).

Figure 492 - Current Tasks screen

526
Approve Pending Affiliates
Remember that only individuals that have signed up for your affiliate program via your
Signup Page will need to be approved (Open Affiliate Program). If you have pending
affiliates, a link stating the number of pending affiliates to approve will appear.

To review and process (approve or deny) the affiliate application, click on the "pending
affiliate to approve" link. New signups will then be listed with pertinent information.

Figure 493 - Approve Affiliate screen

Click on the radio button to the left of either the Approve, Deny or Do Nothing field for
each and every affiliate listed that you want to process. Then click on the "Process
Approvals" button.

Once approved, your welcome letter (explained later) will be sent to each affiliate. Each
approved affiliate will then be listed under the Affiliates (tab).

Approve Invisible Link

Although there are 3 different kinds of links an Affiliate can create, only the Invisible
Links will appear on the Overview Screen for approval.

To review and process the invisible link, click on the "invisible link to approve" link.
You will be taken to the Invisible Link Review screen.

527
Figure 494 - Invisible Link Review

To either approve or reject the link, click on the "review" button. The following screen
will appear.

To approve the Invisible Link click on the "Approve" button. To reject it, click on the
"Reject" button. Caution! There will be no warning dialog box when you click "Reject".

You will be returned to the Invisible Link Review screen showing the next link to be
reviewed or, if none remain, it will display "There are no links to approve."

528
Settings
At the Settings screen you will define your affiliate program. Six fields need completion;
Name of Program, Program Description, Agreement, Welcome Letter, Number of
Downline Tiers, and Affiliate Cookie Lifetime.

Figure 495 - Settings Tab

Program Name
Enter the name you want your affiliate program called. Some merchants will use their
Store name. Example: Demo Store Affiliate Program.

Program Description
You must enter a brief description of your affiliate program.

529
Agreement
The text you enter here will be presented to the affiliate during the signup process. To
complete the signup process, the prospective affiliate will have to agree to the terms of
your agreement.

Welcome Letter
A sample welcome letter is already created as a template. Edit this letter to fit the needs
of your program. This letter will be sent to your affiliates via Email once the affiliate has
been approved by you. Important! Be sure to enter your store name in place of what
appears in the template. If you design a custom log in page, you will need to change the
link in this welcome letter (highlighted above) to point to it.

Number of Downline Tiers

Make certain you have a good understanding of the economics of this feature. It
basically allows you to establish “multi-level” tiers of affiliates.

For example, a single Downline Tier would allow your affiliate named John to be able to
recruit another affiliate (say Bill) to promote and sell your product. Keep in mind that
both John and Bill would receive commissions. Few merchants utilize the downline
feature. We recommend you enter “0” (zero) since this feature can have substantial
economic consequences.

Affiliate Cookie Lifetime (Days)

If someone clicks an affiliate link, a cookie is recorded on their system. The “Cookie
Lifetime” will determine how long (in days) that cookie will remain in effect. Let’s say
you have entered 30 into this field. If the customer makes a purchase within 30 days of
the original “click” on the link, the affiliate will get credit (commission) for the sale. It’s
important to insure that your affiliates understand the cookie lifetime.

Enter the number of days that you want to allow the life of the cookie to be. The number
you chose will depend on your business model. We have seen numbers as low as 15 and
as high as 90. Typically, we see a 30 day cookie lifetime. Enter 999 to set the cookie to
never expire.

Allow Google AdWords Tracking

This feature provides a mechanism for affiliates to track success via their ad campaigns.
If you check this box your affiliates can provide their Google AdWords ID (during
signup), and the proper conversion code will be included with the receipt. Additionally,
this conversion code will reflect the commission amount, not the sale amount, so that the
affiliate can more accurately calculate the ROI of their AdWords campaigns.

Allow Yahoo Search Tracking

Same as above, but for Yahoo’s advertising system.

530
Pay Commissions on Auto Orders
If you have Auto Orders configured for some of your items and if you want your
affiliates to receive commissions on the recurring (auto) orders, check this box.

Once you are satisfied with your Affiliate Program settings, click on the “Save Program”
button. Your information will be saved and you will be returned to the Affiliate
Administration screen. You can return to edit this information anytime later.

531
Creatives
A creative is something that the merchant is going to allow the affiliate to use to help
market the merchants products. This can be a text link, a graphic, a banner ad, etc., that
will eventually become a part of the affiliate's links used on their site(s). Since the
affiliates will create their links via your affiliate program, this gives you some control
over what kind of links they display. You will need to establish your creatives before
your affiliates can create their links.

Click on the "Creatives" tab to go to the creatives screen.

New Creative
Click the “New” button to configure a Creative. The following screen will appear.

Figure 496 - Edit Creative screen

Although there will be three (3) fields to complete you will only see two (2) when first
arriving at this screen; Creative Name and Creative Type. A third field will appear
depending upon which Creative Type you select from the drop down choice of field #2.

532
Figure 497 - Creative Type showing 3rd field

Field #1. Creative Name: Enter a name for this creative in the box provided. This allows
you to identify your various creatives.

Field #2. Creative Type: Select the Creative Type from the three (3) options available in
the drop-down list; Invisible Link, Text Link or Image File.

Filed #3. If Field #2 = "Invisible Link" then field #3 will prompt for a Destination URL.

Enter the URL you want to appear as the link.

If Field #2 = "Text Link" then field #3 will require a “Link Copy (text)”.

Enter the words you want to appear as the Text Link.

If Field #3 = "Image File" then field #3 will require the Creative Media File.

533
 You will need to Browse (navigate) within YOUR system to locate the file to
be uploaded (Image, banner, etc.).

Click the “Save Changes” button at the bottom of the screen when finished. You will
then be returned to the Creatives Screen where your Creatives will be listed.

Edit Creative
Click the “Edit Creative” button to make changes to your creative. Click the “Save
Changes” button when finished with your edits on the Edit Creative screen.

Delete Creative
Click the “Delete Creative” button to delete the creative. You will be prompted with a
confirmation window.

Click the "OK" button to delete the creative. Click the "Cancel" button to abort.

Sorting Creatives
If you've created several Creatives, you can sort them alphabetically. Click the "Creative
Name" column heading to sort the listing by Creative Name. Click the "Creative Type"
column heading to sort by Creative Type.

534
Commissions
This is where you set the amount of commission you want to pay your affiliates for their
credited sales. There are two configurations; Global Commissions and Individual Item
Commissions. Merchant with few store items will typical set and only use the Global
commissions. Others may not only set Global Commissions but also still set Individual
Item Commission(s). Global commissions can only be set by percentage whereas
Individual Item Commissions can be either percentage or dollar amounts.

Figure 498 - Commission screen

Global Commissions
To activate this feature, click on the check box to the right of the "Enable Global
Commission" field. The field will then expand to show the Affiliate Commission
Percentage field. Enter the percentage amount and click the "Save" button.

Figure 499 - Global Commission

The Global Commission percentage you set will apply to all items in your store. This
feature is especially useful for merchants that have numerous store items. Any Individual

535
Item Commissions configured (explained later) will override the Global Commission
percentage for that particular item.

Individual Item Commissions

Commissions established here will be configurable per store item and will override any
Global Commission already in place for that particular item.

Another benefit to using Individual Item Commissions is that if an individual item has a
commission, then the affiliate will be given the choice to choose the item’s URL as a
landing page for an affiliate link.

Figure 500 - Individual Commission screen

Add Individual Item Commission

Click on the "Add" button to the right of the Individual Item Commission heading. The
following screen will appear for completion of three fields.

Figure 501 - Individual Item Commission

Field #1. Item – Your store items will appear in the drop down list. Select the item
desired.

Field #2. Commission Type – Click on the radio button to the left of either Fixed
Amount or Percentage.

536
Field #3. Affiliate Commission
If field #2 = Fixed Amount, then enter a dollar amount (format = 00.00).
If field #2 = Percentage then enter a percent (format = 0.0)

If you have established Downline Tiers, a field will appear to allow you to set the
commission amount(s) for them as well.

Click the "Add Item" button when finished. You will be returned to the Commissions
screen where all your commissions will be listed.

Figure 502 – Individual Item Commission configured

Edit Individual Item Commission

Click the "Edit" button to make changes to an Individual Item Commission setting. You
will be taken to the Commission Item screen where you can change any of the three
fields. Click the "Save" button when finished.

Delete Individual Item Commission

Click the "Delete" button to make changes to an Individual Item Commission settings.
You will not be prompted with a warning.

537
Links
Once you have established your Affiliate Program, UltraCart will automatically create
four (4) html links for your (merchant) use. When you access the Links tab, the
appropriate links will be displayed for your store. Your merchant ID will appear in place
of the word DEMO in the sample links screen below.

Figure 503 - Merchant Links screen

Signup Link
If you chose to use an “Open” affiliate program you will undoubtedly build a web page to
promote your program and provide a means for prospective affiliates to signup. The
Signup Link will be the html snippet you should insert at your "signup" or "join" graphic
(or text) on your webpage.

Affiliate Signup-Form
Once the Signup Link is added to your website and a prospective affiliate clicks on the
link, they will be taken to the Signup Form.

538
Figure 504 - Affiliate Sign-up Form

The prospective affiliate will need to complete this form. The data will be collected and
held pending your approval. You, the merchant, will then have a "pending affiliate to
approve" notice in Your Current Tasks view (see page 527).

539
Login Link
You will need to utilize the “Login” Link for your affiliates to login from your web site.

Copy and paste the HTML to where you want the login form to appear on your website.
This will enable affiliates to seamlessly “log in” to the affiliate program on UltraCart.

When your affiliate clicks on the HTML link, they will be taken to UltraCart and
presented with the Affiliate Login screen.

Figure 505 - Affiliate Login screen

Once the affiliate enters the correct information, they will be taken to their Affiliate
Dashboard. The Affiliate Dashboard is covered on page 547.

Invisible Link
An Invisible Link (as we call it) is not really "invisible". Since some merchants fear that
shoppers will avoid clicking on a link if they detect that it is an "affiliate link", many will
use what's called an Invisible Link. It has the look of a regular link but the customer can
not tell it's an affiliate link by simple mouse-over. When a potential customer clicks on
an invisible link, the embedded link script will detect the source of the inbound traffic.

Note: When using the Invisible link, the MERCHANT must put the Invisible Link Script
on all the html pages they will have traffic directed to. Most will place the link just
before the </body> tag.

540
Priority Code Script
If a customer has clicked on an affiliate link from your affiliate's web site but decided to
make the purchase via telephone, there is no mechanism to give the affiliate credit for the
sale. But, if you utilize the Back End Order Entry system (see page 233) to enter the
order, there is a field provided to enter the affiliate's priority code. They will then be
given credit for the sale.

541
Affiliates
Click on the Affiliates Tab to view the Affiliates screen. If you have no "Active"
affiliates, it will display "Nothing found to display". If you have "Active" affiliates listed
that you want to manage (edit, disable, etc), see page 544, Manage Existing Affiliates.

Figure 506 - Affiliate Tab screen

New Affiliate
To manually add a new affiliate, click the "New" button. The following screen will
appear (form split into two parts to save space).

Figure 507 - New Affiliate screen

542
Login
Fill in the boxes to the right of the Field Names. The first 13 fields (up to “Payment
Information”) are self explanatory. The remaining fields; Custom Affiliate Type,
Affiliate Commission Adjustment, Allow affiliate to utilize custom HTML and E-Mail
Preferences, are explained below.

Check Payable to
Enter the name you will make the checks out to.

SSN / Tax ID
Enter either the affiliate's Social Security Number or their Tax ID. Most merchants will
need this information for reporting incomes paid to affiliates.

Affiliate Commission Adjustment

This feature allows the merchant to vary the commission paid to an affiliate. You set the
initial commission to either global or by individual store item. Here you can “adjust” the
commission already established in your program. Let’s say you had set your global
commission at 10%. However, you want this particular affiliate to receive 15%. This
will be a 50% increase. So, you would enter 50% in this field. Use extreme caution
when using this feature. Make certain you understand how this percentage impacts the
original commission settings. Note: you can also use negative amounts if you want to
reduce an affiliate’s commission.

Website Name
Enter the Affiliates Web Site Name.

Website URL
Enter the Affiliates Web Site URL (address). Example: http://www.mysalessite.com

Marketing Strategy
UltraCart provides a very large text box to allow you to enter your marketing strategy.

Marketing Channels
Place a checkmark in the boxes for the Marketing Channels that are applicable for this
affiliate.
Pay per click
Pay per acquisition
Web sit
Search engine optimization
Ad network / Banner Network
Adware / Browser Plug-in
Blog
Other

Click on the “Save Affiliate” button when finished. These fields can be edited at any
time via the “edit affiliate” feature (explained later).

543
Manage Existing Affiliates
All affiliates will be displayed on this screen. There will be no distinction between those
Open or Closed signups.

Note: Affiliates that you have previously "Disabled" are not visible on this screen. They
are not deleted from the system but are only viewable from the "Reports" menu.

Figure 508 - Affiliates [tab]

Once created (or approved through the signup process), each affiliate will be assigned a
random Affiliate ID and listed on the Affiliates screen. You can re-arrange (sort) this list
by Affiliate ID, Last Name, First Name, or E-Mail Address. Simply click on the heading
link (blue) for the category you wish to sort by.

There are 5 functions you can perform from this screen as follows: View Reports, Enter a
Manual Ledger Entry, Edit Affiliate information, Login and edit Affiliate’s dashboard
and Disable Affiliate. Each will be discussed below.

View Reports
Three different reports can be generated from this screen; Completed Transactions, Click
History, or Impression Entries. You can specify a particular Date Range for any of the
reports. To begin the reporting feature, click on the “View Reports” button to the right of
the Affiliate in your listing.

Figure 509 - View Affiliate Reports screen

544
Affiliate Report Configuration
There are two steps in preparing the report; setting the date range and identifying the
report type.

Step 1 - Date Range

You must choose one of the two different methods for determining the date range for
your report.
 Preset date range – Click on the first radio button under the Date Range field
and make your date range selection from the drop-down list
 User defined date range – Click on the 2nd radio button under the Date Range
field and enter your “from – to” date range using the drop-down lists for the
month, day and year.
Step 2 – Report Type
Click on the drop-down list to the right of the Report Type field to select your report
type. Your choices are Completed Transactions, Click History and Impression Entries.

Click on the “change” button to invoke the search criteria. The report data will appear on
the same screen directly below the report settings..

Manual Ledger Entry

Click on the “Manual Ledger Entry” button and you will be taken to the Manual Ledger
Transaction screen. Use this feature when your want to give an affiliate credit for a
customers purchase that didn’t come through via an affiliate’s link (email, phone, etc.).

545
Figure 510 - Manual Ledger Transaction screen

Enter the transaction amount and any memo you want to associate with this entry. You
can also use this feature to back out a transaction in the case of a refund. Simply enter a
negative amount into the “transaction Amount” field.

The Associated UltraCart Order ID field will show, in the drop down list, all the un-
finalized (recorded as paid) transactions associated with this affiliate. If you were
backing out a transaction in the case of a refund, you would select the Order ID for this
ledger transaction. This would attach the negative amount to the affiliate’s original
transaction (order).

Finally you will set the transaction state from the drop-down list to Approved, Paid,
Pending, or Rejected.

Click on the “Save Ledger Entry” button when finished. The date you enter will appear
on a confirmation screen.

Click the "Return to Main Program Page" when finished.

Edit Affiliate
Click on the “Edit Affiliate” button to make changes to the affiliate’s information. You
will be taken to the Affiliate (edit) Screen.

546
Figure 511 - Affiliate Editor screen

Click the "Save Affiliate" button when finished with your changes.

Login as Affiliate

This is a great tool to allow a merchant to easily view an Affiliate's dashboard. This will
take you to the exact same screen that your affiliate will see when they log in. Since you
want your affiliates to be as successful as possible, you the merchant will need to have a
good understanding of how this section works so you can explain things to the novice
affiliate.

Click on the "Login as Affiliate" button. This will take you directly to their dashboard
(no password needed).

The dashboard displays five topics; Reports at a Glance, Commissions, Affiliate Tools,
Affiliate Recruiting Link and a Simple Affiliate Link.

547
Figure 512 - Affiliate Dashboard

Reports at a Glance
Here you can view the affiliate's statistics for a certain period. You can filter the report
by one of the following two criteria:
 pre-defined periods from the drop down list

 Date Range; simply select, via the drop downs, the from/to dates.

Click the radio buttons to the left of the search method desired and make your selections
via the drop downs. When finished, click the "Change" button to view the results.

Commissions
This section simply shows the commissions the merchant has configured for this affiliate.

548
Affiliate Tools
Your Affiliate has three tools to help them manage their affiliate program; Manage Links,
Update Your Information, and View Reports. These 3 options are displayed directly
under the Affiliate Tools heading. The fourth item in the list is a "Log Out" button.

Manage Links
This is where your affiliates can create, view, edit and delete the links they will use on
their web site to promote your products.

At the manage links screen, the affiliate will be able to select from the Creatives you
already configured. When you click on the Manage Links link, the following screen will
appear.

As usual, if no links have been created, you will see the typical invitation to create one.
Click on the "new link" button to be taken to the Edit Link screen.

Figure 513 - Edit Link screen

549
There are basically four (4) items that need to be completed here; Name, Link type, Link
Pointer and PPC Conversion Code for Receipt Page.

Link Name
Enter the name you want to use to identify this Link. Your naming scheme will help you
organize and manage your links.

Link Type
There are three options here; Image, text or Invisible. The user will click the radio button
to the left of the Link desired. When the selection is made, additional fields will appear
below the Link Type section for further choices.

Image Link
If Image Link type is selected, a new section will appear displaying all Images
that you have uploaded when you configured your Image Creatives. The user
must click the radio button to the left of the image desired. In the following
example, only one image appears for choice.

Text Link
If Text Link type is selected, a new section will appear displaying the Text
Creatives you configured previously. The user must click the radio button to the
left of the Text desired. In the following example, two text choices are offered.

Invisible Link

If the Invisible Link type is selected, a new section will appear displaying an
empty text box. The user will enter the URL they will be referring traffic from.

550
Link URL
Affiliates are given the option to select where they want to take the user when
they click the link. The affiliate can make their choice from this drop down list.
There will be at least two options here (a third option will appear if the merchant
has configured "Per Item Commissions").

Option 1: The Merchants Home Page. UltraCart will us the URL that the
merchant configured at Main Menu  Configuration Merchants Profile
 Store URL.

Option 2: "Custom Landing Page". If selected, a text box will appear to

the right. If the affiliate has a special web page created to promote your
product, they will enter the URL here.

Option 3: Store Item. If the merchant configured any "Per Item

Commissions" in the affiliate program, then the Item Description of the
items that are designated as such will appear as choices in this drop down
window.

Pay Per Click (PPC) Conversion Codes

These fields are only visible if the merchant has enabled this feature at the
Affiliate Management settings screen. If the affiliate would like PPC conversion
codes to render on the receipt they can specify their account ID at these fields.

551
Once all the information has been completed, click the "Save" button at the bottom of the
screen.

The next screen will show the html snippet for the newly created affiliate link. An
optional link will also be shown that can be used if the affiliate wants to use their
alternative content.

Figure 514 - Affiliate Link snippet

Click the "Return to manage links" link to see a listing of your affiliate links.

There are 3 buttons to the right of each Affiliate Link listed. Click the "edit" button to
make changes. Click the "view" button to see the actual link (copy and past as needed).
Click the "delete" button to remove the link. Caution, no warning dialog will appear.

Update Your Information

When this link is clicked, the affiliate will be taken to a screen listing their account
information for editing.

552
Figure 515 - Affiliate Information (editing)

The two account ID fields at the bottom of the screen will only be available if the
Affiliate clicks the checkbox under Receipt Settings on their initial signup form.

When finished making changes, click the "Save Changes" button at the bottom.

Affiliate Recruiting Link

Clicking this link will take the Affiliate to the signup screen.

Simple Link
This is a default link created by UltraCart that the affiliate can utilize immediately after
signup (approval). This is especially helpful for the novice to allow them to quickly get
started without having to "create" links through this system.

Disable Affiliate
Disabling an Affiliate will make the affiliate inactive so it will no longer appear on the
Affiliates Screen list. It will remain in the system and be viewable from the Reports Tab.

To disable an affiliate, click on the “Disable Affiliate” button. In the dialog box that
appears, click on the "OK" button to disable. Click on the "Cancel" button to abandon
this action.

553
More about Invisible Links

Catalog Affiliate Linking

The UltraCart dynamic catalog automates a number of affiliate link tracking
issues. First, there is no need to include the invisible link script on your catalog
template(s) as the catalog automatically looks for incoming invisible links and, if
found, will cookie the customer’s browser appropriately.

The second way of direct linking to your catalog site involves passing the affiliate
ID number as a parameter to your web page. Let’s say that your site is
http://www.avkits.com and you have an affiliate with the ID of 1234. The
affiliate can place a link on their site to http://www.avkits.com?AFFID=1234 and
they will receive credit for the click through.

This method of linking provides all the SEO (Search Engine Optimization)
benefit of invisible linking without the invisible linking approval process. The
only downside to this method of linking is that some customers may notice the
parameter on the link and be wise to the fact the website is an affiliate of your
website. The ideal method of linking still remains "invisible linking".

Buy Link Affiliate Linking

If an affiliate wants to take a buy link from your website and place it on their
server they can obtain credit for the click through by appending the affiliate ID
parameter to the buy link. If your normal buy link is:
http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-bin/UCEditor?merchantId=AKITS&ADD=KIT1,
the affiliate simply appends their affiliate ID to the link:
http://secure.ultracart.com/cgi-
bin/UCEditor?merchantId=AKITS&ADD=KIT1&AFFID=1234

This technique is used when the affiliate is directing traffic straight into the
checkout. It can be an effective way of increasing conversions if the affiliate's
site is doing a good enough job of marketing your product(s).

Non-Catalog Affiliate Linking

If you embed the invisible link tracking script on your website, then it will also
allow for the AFFID (affiliate ID) parameter to be specified as parameter on the
URL. So if your site, http://www.myavkits.com, is not using the UltraCart
catalog system, but you’ve placed the invisible link tracking script on your page,
then the affiliate can directly link to your site by appending the affiliate ID as a
parameter: http://www.myavkits.com?AFFID=1234.

554
Affiliate Types
You can use your affiliate program to track your “search engine optimization” or “pay
per click advertising”. You can create these “special” affiliate "types" and monitor
success through the reporting feature of the affiliate program.

Figure 516 - Affiliate Types management screen

New Affiliate Type

Click on the “New” button to create an Affiliate Type. The following screen will appear.

Figure 517 - Create New Affiliate Type screen

Enter the name you want to assign to this affiliate type in the box provide. Click on the
“Save Affiliate Type” button when finished. Your newly created affiliate type will be
listed on the Affiliate Program Editor screen. Repeat the process for additional Affiliate
Types.

Figure 518 - Affiliate Type screen (with new type)

555
Edit Affiliate Type

Click on the “Edit Affiliate Type” button to the right of the Affiliate Type you want to
change. You will be taken to the edit screen.

Figure 519 - Edit Affiliate Type screen

Edit the existing name as desired. Click on the “Save Changes” button when finished.

Delete Affiliate Type

Click on the “Delete Affiliate Type” button to the right of the Affiliate Type you want to
delete. You will see the familiar confirmation dialog box.

Click the “OK” button to delete or the “Cancel” button to cancel the delete function.

556
Reports
There are five options available; View All Affiliates, View Click Summary, View Sales
Summary, Process Payments and Export all affiliate information in CSV format.

To utilize any of these reports, click on the “Reports” tab from the Affiliate Management
screen.

Figure 520 - Reports Menu screen

View All Affiliates

This report will give you a list of your affiliate statistics. It will provide the ID, Name,
E-mail address, Type (affiliate type), Unique Clicks (count), Items Sold (count), and
Total Commissions for each affiliate for a given period. It will include affiliates that you
previously disabled.

Figure 521 - View all Affiliates screen

To set the period you wish to view use the drop-down menu in the Heading. Set the
month and year to your liking and then click on the “Change” button.

Individual Affiliate Dashboard

To view the dashboard for an individual affiliate, click on the affiliate’s ID at the
Affiliate Administration screen.

557
Figure 522 - Affiliate Dashboard screen

This dashboard will show Total Earnings, Earnings Paid, Earnings Balance, Qualifying
Items Sold, Returned Items (count), number of Clicks, number of Unique Visitors and
Last Commission Payment.

To set the period you wish to view for this affiliate, select the month and year in the drop-
down menus. Click on the “Change” button.

Click on the “Return to View All Affiliates screen” link to return to the View all
Affiliates screen.

View Click Summary

At the Reports Menu, click on “View Click Summary” link. This report will show the
Date and Click Count.

Figure 523 - View Click Summary report

558
To set the period you wish to view, select the month and year in the drop-down menus.
Click on the “Change” button. Click on the “Back to Reports Menu” link when finished.

View Sales Summary

At the Reports Menu, click on “View Sales Summary” link. This report will show the
Date, Number of Sales, and Total Commission Amount.

Figure 524 - View Sales Summary report

To set the period you wish to view, select the month and year in the drop-down menus.
Click on the “Change” button.

Click on the “Back to Reports Menu” link when finished.

Process Payments
At the Reports Menu, click on the “Process Payments” link. The following screen will
appear.

Figure 525 – Process Payments screen (selection)

You may determine which pending payments you wish to process by checking the box to
the left of the following options:

559
  Date Range; indicate the “from and to dates” in the drop-down menus,
 Days since last payment; enter number of days in the box provided.
 Minimum Amount Due; enter the amount in the box provided.

Once you have set your criteria, click on the “Change” button. UltraCart will then
display your information based upon your search criteria.

If you have no pending payments for the period you set, you will receive a “No Payments
Found” message. Enter new criteria and again click on the “Change” button.

The final report will show the Affiliate Name, Payment Address, and Amount to Pay.
There will also be a box provided to enter a Check Number (if desired).
.

Figure 526 - Process Payment Screen

Click the checkbox under the Record Payment column for each payment you wish to
process. Click on the "Process Payments" button when finished. The following screen
will be displayed showing the payments processed.

Figure 527 - Payments Processed screen

560
Export all affiliate information in CSV format
This feature will export (download) a .csv file of all your affiliates which you can open
into a spreadsheet or your favorite data base software. The report will list the following
for each affiliate: First Name, Last Name, Company, Address1, Address2, City, State,
Postal Code, Phone, Fax and Email Address.

Click on the "Export all affiliate information in CSV format" link. Although systems
vary, you should be presented with a dialog box allowing you to choose to Open or Save
the file.

561
INDEX
A
Accounting Codes ..........................................507
Accounts Receivable ......................................195
Accounts Receivable Transaction Review .......67
Activation Codes ............................................392
Add A Customer Profile.................................237
Add Drop Down Values .........................290, 292
Add Store Wide Item (to folder).....................278
Address Label Formats...................................156
Administrative User............................................3
Adobe Acrobat ...................................................2
Advertising Sources .........................................29
Affiliate Commission Adjustment..................543
Affiliate Commissions....................................535
Affiliate Cookie..............................................530
Affiliate Dashboard ........................................557
Affiliate Management.....................................524
Affiliate Program Links..................................538
Affiliate Reports Menu...................................557
Affiliate Type .................................................555
Alias Mapping ..................................................32
Allowed Countries............................................34
Amazon Seller Central ...................................184
Amazon Seller Central Import................359, 360
API Certificate................................................251
API Certificate Request..................................251
APO/FPO Destinations...................................106
Auction Payment Wizard ...............................465
Auctions .........................................................465
Authorization Models.......................................64
Authorize Orders ............................................196
Authorize.Net ...................................................63
Auto Order (management)..............................204
Auto Order Cancellation.................................205
Auto Order Confirmation Email.....................308
Auto Order Editor...........................................206
Auto Order Frequency....................................208
Auto Order Processing ...................................142
Auto Order Search..........................................205
Auto Responders ............................................462
Automatic Auto Order....................................304
AVS Verification..............................................67
B
Back End Order Entry ....................................233
Back Office Configuration .............................139
Back Order .....................................................312
Backfill QuickBooks Codes ...........................236
Barcode Generator..........................................360
Batch Authorize............................................. 196
Batch Item Export.......................................... 362
Batch Item Import.......................................... 364
Batch Item Updates ....................................... 372
BizTracker ..................................................... 147
Block Orders/Postal Codes ............................ 115
Buy Link........................................................ 274
C
Campaign....................................................... 440
Campaign Report........................................... 447
Cancel Auto Order......................................... 205
Card Verification Value (CVV2)..................... 56
Catalog........................................................... 469
Catalog Administration.................................. 471
Catalog Groups .............................................. 473
Catalog Templates ......................................... 471
Charge During Checkout ................................. 66
Checkout Configuration .................................. 29
Checkout Process
wrapping paper ........................................... 47
Checkout Settings (item option) .................... 289
Cleanup Utility .............................................. 382
Cleanup Utility (items) .................................. 382
Closed Affiliate Program............................... 526
COD Payments ................................................ 54
Comma Delimited.......................................... 364
Completed Transactions (affiliate) ................ 544
Confirmation page ............................................. 5
Contact Information....................................24, 37
Cookie Lifetime (affiliate)............................. 530
Copy Items..................................................... 270
Copy Orders (shipping) ................................ 220
Corrupt File Error .......................................... 285
Coupons......................................................... 414
Create a Manual-entry list ............................. 428
Create Folders................................................ 263
Create Import Email List ............................... 431
Creative (affiliate)...................................525, 532
Credit Card Payments...................................... 55
CSV (Comma Separated Values) .................. 147
CSV Format................................................... 364
Custom Field ................................................. 150
Custom SSL................................................... 191
Customer Notification ................................... 221
Customer Profiles .....................................38, 237
Customer Selectable Auto Order ................... 302
Customer Service............................................. 41
CVV2............................................................... 56
CVV2 Verification .......................................... 67
562
D Export Map.................................................... 405
Export Orders (shipping) ............................... 226
Dangling Order...............................................260
Export Orders in AR...................................... 198
Dashboard News...............................................15
Export Store Items ......................................... 362
Data Feed to Froogle ......................................152
Export/View Email List................................. 435
Dayspring Web Hosting .................................189
Exporting (configuration) .............................. 145
Default Shipping Method ...............................109
Extended Description .................................... 281
Define a Rule..................................................423
Extensible Markup Language ........................ 147
Delete Items....................................................270
Destination Restrictions..........................100, 114 F
Digital Content Types.....................................393
Field Mapping ........................................364, 366
Digital Delivery..............................................386
Filing Cabinet ................................................ 263
Digital Download Options................................42
Font Smoothing ............................................. 126
Digital Library................................................386
Fraud Prevention System................................. 43
Digital Library List.........................................388
Free Shipping..........................................108, 310
Digital Purchases ............................................393
Froogle (item editor)...................................... 298
Disable Affiliate .............................................553
Froogle Eligibility.......................................... 152
Disable Auto Order ........................................205
Froogle Integration ........................................ 152
Disable UltraBooks ........................................523
Froogle Support Costs ................................... 153
Discounts ........................................................414
Fulfillment Provider ...................................86, 88
Distribution Centers..........................................86
Dotnetfx.exe ...................................................506 G
Downline Tier.................................................530
Download Digital Files...................................388 Gateway Authorization Models ....................... 64
Download Logs (catalog) ...............................484 Geographic-based rule................................... 425
Draft Check Printing.......................................199 Geo-Location................................................... 95
DTD XML......................................................147 Gift Certificate
Duplicate Item ................................................270 (item) ........................................................ 283
Dynamic Catalog............................................469 Gift Certificate code ...................................... 451
Dynamic Price link .........................................276 Gift Certificate creating ................................. 449
Dynamic Pricing.............................................122 Gift Certificate deletion ................................. 452
Gift Certificate editing................................... 452
E Gift Certificate ledger.................................... 453
Gift Certificate Management ......................... 452
eBay Auctions ................................................465
Gift Certificate options .................................. 450
Edit Auto Order ..............................................205
Global Commissions...................................... 536
Edit Customer (shipping) ...............................213
Global E-mail Address Search....................... 438
Edit Folder......................................................265
Go Live.......................................................... 515
Edit Items (shipping) ......................................217
Google ........................................................... 152
Edit User...........................................................28
Graphic Link.................................................. 128
Editing Email Lists .........................................434
Graphics Library............................................ 131
Electronic Check Payments ..............................59
Email Addresses .............................................144 H
Email Campaign .............................................440
Handling Charge............................................ 104
Email Marketing.............................................413
Hold Order In AR .......................................... 255
Email Marketing Programs.............................460
Hotspot .......................................................... 327
Email Notifications...........................................27
HTML snippet ............................................... 273
Embedding a Dynamic Price link...................276
Enable Auto Order..........................................205 I
Enable Customer Profiles ...............................237
Exit Pop ..........................................................457 Image Link..................................................... 550
Exploded Diagrams ........................................322 IMG Tag ........................................................ 133
Explorer..............................................................2 Img URI......................................................... 133
Export (from) Locations .................................150 Import Map.................................................... 394
Export Affiliate Info .......................................561 Import Sales Tax Clearinghouse...................... 81
Export for UPS WorldShip.............................394 Imported Email Lists ..................................... 421
Export Format.................................................147 Inactive Item.................................................. 282
Instant Payment Notification (IPN) ............... 258

563
Integration Programming................................150
Internal Memo ................................................281
Internet Explorer.............................................154
Inventory Adjustment.....................................375
Inventory Control and Distribution (items) ....310
Inventory History Link ...................................277
Inventory Tracking .........................................311
Inventory Transfer ..........................................376
Invisible Link .................................527, 540, 550
Item Association (digital content) ..................391
Item Cleanup Utility .......................................382
Item Configuration .........................................262
Item Editor..............................................273, 280
Item Folders....................................................263
Item ID ...........................................................280
Item Import.....................................................364
Item List Screen..............................................268
Item Management...........................................262
Item Options ...................................................286
Item Search.....................................................271
Item Weight....................................................282
L
Log File (catalog) ...........................................484
Log File Analyzers .........................................485
Logging in ..........................................................6
Login Form (affiliate).....................................540
M
Mail Order Management ................................230
Manual Entry List...........................................421
Manual Ledger Entry......................................545
Map Fields......................................................366
Mark Shipped .................................................224
Marketing .......................................................413
Marketing email-based rule ............................427
Maximum Weight - Shipping .........................106
Merchant Comments (shipping) .....................221
Merchant Profile...............................................18
Methods
payments......................................................53
Mileage-based rule .........................................426
Mime Types....................................................147
Minimum Order
minimum amount.........................................49
Minimum Quantity .........................................282
Mix and Match Group ....................................338
Mix and Match Group (selecting) ..................283
Money Order Payments....................................59
Moving Items .................................................269
Mozilla .......................................................2, 154
Multimedia Files.............................................283
Multiple UltraCart accounts ...........................261
N
Navigating ...........................................................i
NET Framework ............................................ 505
Netscape ............................................................ 2
New Password ................................................. 24
News................................................................ 15
Next Attempt (auto order) ............................. 207
No Easy Cancel ............................................. 305
No Shipping Discount ................................... 310
O
Old Order Handling ....................................... 155
Open Affiliate Program ................................. 526
Option Editor ................................................. 288
Options (payments) Tab .................................. 66
Order amount-based rule ............................... 425
Order Editing (AR)........................................ 201
Order ID Scheme ............................................. 50
Order Management ........................................ 194
Order Retention ............................................. 155
P
Packages ........................................................ 109
Packing Slip Formats..................................... 157
Paper Check Payments .................................... 59
Passive Branding ........................................... 138
Payments.......................................................... 52
PayPal............................................................ 245
PayPal Contact Telephone............................. 260
PayPal Payments.............................................. 53
PDF.................................................................... 2
PDF Properties (digital content) .................... 390
Permissions...................................................... 27
PPC Conversion Codes.................................. 551
Pre-Order ....................................................... 310
Pre-Orders...................................................... 209
Price Update Tool.......................................... 385
Pricing Tier Editor ......................................... 348
Pricing tier-based rule.................................... 426
Pricing Tiers ...........................................296, 345
Print Address Labels...................................... 225
Print Draft Checks ......................................... 199
Print HTML ................................................... 221
Print Packing Slip .......................................... 220
Print Packing Slips......................................... 225
Print Pick List ................................................ 226
Printable Documents...................................... 156
Process Payments (affiliates)......................... 557
Processing Orders .......................................... 195
Q
Quick Jump.................................................... 272
Quickbooks Code (item)................................ 283
QuickBooks™ ............................................... 504
R
Receipt........................................................... 161
Regional Settings............................................. 19
564
Reject Old Orders ...........................................155
Reject Order (shipping) ..................................221
Reject Orders..................................................200
Related Items..................................................298
Report Delivery ..............................................164
Return Email...................................................453
Return Policy....................................................74
Review Orders................................................242
Rules Based List.............................................420
S U
Sales Tax Clearinghouse ..................................81
Salesforce.com ...............................................165
Screen Branding .............................................128
Screen Branding Themes................................129
Search Auto Order..........................................205
Search Tool (customer) ....................................84
Selectable Sources ............................................30
Service Plan......................................................19
Ship / Delivery Date .......................................116
Ship Separately...............................................311
Shipment Cut-of Times ....................................88
Shipment Notification ....................................180
Shipping .........................................................106
Shipping Checkout Options..............................93
Shipping Cost Calculation................................99
Shipping Department......................................211
Shipping Department Tool Bar.......................221
Shipping Insurance Calc.................................102
Shipping Method Restrictions ........................314
Shipping Methods.......................................86, 97
Shipping Options (items)................................310
Shipping Packages..........................................109
Signup.............................................................2, 3
Signup Wizard (email lists) ............................437
Single Page Checkout.....................................121
Skip Customer Notification ............................221
Skip Customer Notification (batch ship) ........224
SmartBargains ................................................188
Special Product Type......................................283
State Handling Charges ..................................105
STC...................................................................81
Stock Keeping Unit ........................................281
Stock Picking Location...................................312
Store Wide Item Options ................................348
Support ................................................................i
Suppression Item ID .......................................355
T
Tags ................................................................161
Tax Rates....................................................75, 76
Taxable (store item)........................................282
Taxable Address .........................................75, 80
Temporal-based rule.......................................424
Test Transaction Gateway ............................... 65
Text Link ....................................................... 550
Theme (branding) Editor ............................... 130
Tools.............................................................. 359
Tracking Mechanism ....................................... 30
Transaction (payments) Gateways................... 62
Transaction Review ......................................... 67
Transmission Mechanism ................................ 88
Trigger Item ID.............................................. 355
UltraBooks..................................................... 504
UltraCart Dashboard........................................ 12
Unassigned Store Items (catalog) .................. 483
Update Item Prices......................................... 385
Upload Digital Files....................................... 387
Upload Graphics ............................................ 131
UPS WorldShip Integration........................... 394
Upsell After ................................................... 352
Upsell Item ID ............................................... 355
Upsell Offer ................................................... 354
URL Field...................................................... 281
User configuration ........................................... 23
Users................................................................ 21
Using Frames and Buy Link .......................... 278
V
Variations (catalog) ....................................... 318
View All Affiliates (report) ........................... 557
View by Ship Date......................................... 120
View Click Summary .................................... 557
View Reports (affiliate) ................................. 544
View Sales Summary..................................... 557
View/Export Email List................................. 435
Volume Discount Pricing .............................. 296
W
W3C Schema (XML)..................................... 147
Web Browser ..................................................... 2
Website Payments PRO................................. 249
Website Payments Standard .......................... 248
Welcome Letter (affiliate prg) ....................... 530
Widget Icons.................................................... 13
Widgets............................................................ 12
Wire Transfer................................................... 61
Wrapping Paper ............................................... 45
X
XML .............................................................. 147
Y
Yahoo! Auctions............................................ 465
565